UnidriveM702 UG Iss3 en

User Guide
Unidrive M702
Model sizes 3 to 8
Universal Variable Speed AC drive for
induction and permanent magnet
motors
Part Number: 0478-0002-03

Issue: 3
www.controltechniques.com
Original Instructions
For the purposes of compliance with the EU Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
General information
The manufacturer accepts no liability for any consequences resulting from inappropriate, negligent or incorrect installation
or adjustment of the optional operating parameters of the equipment or from mismatching the variable speed drive with the
motor.
The contents of this guide are believed to be correct at the time of printing. In the interests of a commitment to a policy of
continuous development and improvement, the manufacturer reserves the right to change the specification of the product
or its performance, or the contents of the guide, without notice.
All rights reserved. No parts of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electrical or
mechanical including photocopying, recording or by an information storage or retrieval system, without permission in writing
from the publisher.
Drive firmware version
This product is supplied with the latest firmware version. If this drive is to be connected to an existing system or machine,
all drive firmware versions should be verified to confirm the same functionality as drives of the same model already
present. This may also apply to drives returned from a Control Techniques Service Centre or Repair Centre. If there is
any doubt please contact the supplier of the product.
The firmware version of the drive can be checked by looking at Pr 11.029.
The firmware version of the Ethernet interface can be checked by looking at Pr 24.002
Environmental statement
Control Techniques is committed to minimising the environmental impacts of its manufacturing operations and of its
products throughout their life cycle. To this end, we operate an Environmental Management System (EMS) which is
certified to the International Standard ISO 14001. Further information on the EMS, our Environmental Policy and other
relevant information is available on request, or can be found at www.greendrives.com.
The electronic variable-speed drives manufactured by Control Techniques have the potential to save energy and
(through increased machine/process efficiency) reduce raw material consumption and scrap throughout their long
working lifetime. In typical applications, these positive environmental effects far outweigh the negative impacts of product
manufacture and end-of-life disposal.
Nevertheless, when the products eventually reach the end of their useful life, they must not be discarded but should
instead be recycled by a specialist recycler of electronic equipment. Recyclers will find the products easy to dismantle
into their major component parts for efficient recycling. Many parts snap together and can be separated without the use
of tools, while other parts are secured with conventional fasteners. Virtually all parts of the product are suitable for
recycling.
Product packaging is of good quality and can be re-used. Large products are packed in wooden crates, while smaller
products come in strong cardboard cartons which themselves have a high recycled fibre content. If not re-used, these
containers can be recycled. Polythene, used on the protective film and bags for wrapping product, can be recycled in the
same way. Control Techniques' packaging strategy prefers easily-recyclable materials of low environmental impact, and
regular reviews identify opportunities for improvement.
When preparing to recycle or dispose of any product or packaging, please observe local legislation and best practice.
REACH legislation
EC Regulation 1907/2006 on the Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and restriction of Chemicals (REACH) requires
the supplier of an article to inform the recipient if it contains more than a specified proportion of any substance which is
considered by the European Chemicals Agency (ECHA) to be a Substance of Very High Concern (SVHC) and is
therefore listed by them as a candidate for compulsory authorisation.
For current information on how this requirement applies in relation to specific Control Techniques products, please
approach your usual contact in the first instance. Control Techniques position statement can be viewed at:
http://www.controltechniques.com/REACH
Copyright © May 2013 Control Techniques Ltd

Issue Number: 3
Drive Firmware: 01.01.01.00 onwards
Ethernet Firmware: 01.01.02.08 onwards
For patent and intellectual property related information please go to: www.ctpatents.info
How to use this guide
This user guide provides complete information for installing and operating the drive from start to finish.
The information is in logical order, taking the reader from receiving the drive through to fine tuning the performance.
NOTE
There are specific safety warnings throughout this guide, located in the relevant sections. In addition, Chapter 1 Safety
information contains general safety information. It is essential that the warnings are observed and the information
considered when working with or designing a system using the drive.
This map of the user guide helps to find the right sections for the task you wish to complete, but for specific information,
refer to Contents on page 4:
1 Safety information
2 Product information
3 Mechanical installation
4 Electrical installation
5 Getting started
6 Basic parameters
7 Running the motor
8 Optimization
9 NV media card operation
10 Onboard PLC
11 Advanced parameters
12 Technical data
13 Diagnostics
14 UL listing information
Contents
1 Safety information .................................8 4 Electrical installation .......................... 51
1.1 Warnings, Cautions and Notes .............................8 4.1 Power connections ............................................. 51
1.2 Electrical safety - general warning ........................8 4.2 AC supply requirements ..................................... 55
1.3 System design and safety of personnel ................8 4.3 Supplying the drive with DC ............................... 56
1.4 Environmental limits ..............................................8 4.4 DC bus paralleling .............................................. 57
1.5 Access ...................................................................8 4.5 24 Vdc supply ..................................................... 57
1.6 Fire protection .......................................................8 4.6 Low voltage operation ........................................ 58
1.7 Compliance with regulations .................................8 4.7 Heatsink fan supply ............................................ 58
1.8 Motor .....................................................................8 4.8 Ratings ............................................................... 59
1.9 Mechanical brake control ......................................8 4.9 Output circuit and motor protection .................... 63
1.10 Adjusting parameters ............................................8 4.10 Braking ............................................................... 65
1.11 Electrical installation ..............................................9 4.11 Ground leakage .................................................. 68
4.12 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) ................. 68
2 Product information ............................10 4.13 Communications connections ............................ 77
2.1 Introduction .........................................................10 4.14 Control connections ........................................... 78
2.2 Model number .....................................................10 4.15 Position feedback connections ........................... 80
2.3 Ratings ................................................................11 4.16 SAFE TORQUE OFF (STO) .............................. 86
2.4 Operating modes .................................................14
2.5 Compatible position feedback devices ................15 5 Getting started .................................... 88
2.6 Drive features ......................................................16 5.1 Understanding the display .................................. 88
2.7 Nameplate description ........................................17 5.2 Keypad operation ............................................... 88
2.8 Options ................................................................17 5.3 Menu structure ................................................... 90
2.9 Items supplied with the drive ...............................19 5.4 Menu 0 ............................................................... 91
5.5 Advanced menus ............................................... 91
3 Mechanical installation .......................20 5.6 Changing the operating mode ............................ 93
3.1 Safety information ...............................................20 5.7 Saving parameters ............................................. 93
3.2 Planning the installation ......................................20 5.8 Restoring parameter defaults ............................. 93
3.3 Terminal cover removal .......................................21 5.9 Parameter access level and security ................. 93
3.4 Installing / removing option modules 5.10 Displaying parameters with non-default
and keypads ........................................................27 values only ......................................................... 94
3.5 Dimensions and mounting methods ....................30 5.11 Displaying destination parameters only ............. 94
3.6 Enclosure for standard drives .............................38 5.12 Communications ................................................ 94
3.7 Enclosure design and drive ambient
temperature .........................................................40 6 Basic parameters ................................ 96
3.8 Heatsink fan operation ........................................40 6.1 Menu 0: Basic parameters ................................. 96
3.9 Enclosing standard drive for high 6.2 Parameter descriptions .................................... 100
environmental protection .....................................40
3.10 Heatsink mounted brake resistor ........................43 7 Running the motor ............................ 102
3.11 External EMC filter ..............................................45 7.1 Quick start connections .................................... 102
3.12 Electrical terminals ..............................................47 7.2 Changing the operating mode .......................... 102
3.13 Routine maintenance ..........................................48 7.3 Quick start commissioning / start-up ................ 107
7.4 Setting up a feedback device ........................... 111
7.5 Encoder Simulation Output Set-up ................... 115
8 Optimization ...................................... 118

8.1 Motor map parameters ..................................... 118
8.2 Maximum motor rated current .......................... 127
8.3 Current limits .................................................... 127
8.4 Motor thermal protection .................................. 127
8.5 Switching frequency ......................................... 128
8.6 High speed operation ....................................... 128
4 Unidrive M702 User Guide

Issue Number: 3
9 NV Media Card Operation .................130 14 UL listing information .......................279
9.1 Introduction .......................................................130 14.1 General .............................................................279
9.2 SMARTCARD support ......................................130 14.2 Mounting ...........................................................279
9.3 Transferring data ...............................................131 14.3 Environment ......................................................279
9.4 Data block header information ..........................132 14.4 Electrical installation .........................................279
9.5 NV Media Card parameters ..............................132 14.5 UL listed accessories ........................................279
9.6 NV Media Card trips ..........................................133 14.6 Motor overload protection .................................279
14.7 Motor overspeed protection ..............................279
10 Onboard PLC .....................................134 14.8 Thermal memory retention ................................279
10.1 Onboard PLC and Machine Control Studio .......134 14.9 Electrical Ratings ..............................................279
10.2 Benefits .............................................................134
10.3 Features ............................................................134
10.4 Onboard PLC parameters .................................135
10.5 Onboard PLC trips ............................................135
11 Advanced parameters .......................136

11.1 Menu 1: Frequency / speed reference ..............146
11.2 Menu 2: Ramps .................................................150
11.3 Menu 3: Frequency slaving, speed
feedback and speed control ..............................153
11.4 Menu 4: Torque and current control ..................164
11.5 Menu 5: Motor control .......................................168
11.6 Menu 6: Sequencer and clock ..........................174
11.7 Menu 7: Temperature monitoring ......................178
11.8 Menu 8: Digital I/O ............................................180
11.9 Menu 9: Programmable logic,
motorized pot, binary sum and timers ...............184
11.10 Menu 10: Status and trips .................................190
11.11 Menu 11: General drive set-up .........................192
11.12 Menu 12: Threshold detectors, variable
selectors and brake control function .................194
11.13 Menu 13: Standard motion controller ................202
11.14 Menu 14: User PID controller ............................206
11.15 Menus 15, 16 and 17: Option module set-up ....210
11.16 Menu 18: Application menu 1 ...........................211
11.19 Menu 21: Second motor parameters ................214
11.20 Menu 22: Additional Menu 0 set-up ..................216
11.21 Menu 24: Ethernet status and monitoring .........217
12 Technical data ...................................227

12.1 Drive technical data ..........................................227
12.2 Optional external EMC filters ............................245
13 Diagnostics ........................................247
13.1 Status modes (Keypad and LED status) ...........247
13.2 Trip indications ..................................................247
13.3 Identifying a trip / trip source .............................248
13.4 Trips, Sub-trip numbers ....................................249
13.5 Internal / Hardware trips ....................................276
13.6 Alarm indications ...............................................277
13.7 Status indications ..............................................277
13.8 Displaying the trip history ..................................277
13.9 Behaviour of the drive when tripped .................278
Unidrive M702 User Guide 5

Issue Number: 3
Declaration of Conformity
Control Techniques Ltd
The Gro
Newtown
Powys
UK
SY16 3BE
This declaration applies to Unidrive M variable speed drive products,
comprising models numbers as shown below:
These products comply with the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC and
the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2004/108/EC.
Maaa-bbcddddd Valid characters:
aaa 600, 700, 701, 702
bb 03, 04, 05, 06, 07
c 2, 4, 5 or 6
00050, 00066, 00080, 00106, 00025,
00031, 00045, 00062, 00078, 00100
00137, 00150, 00172, 00185
00030, 00040, 00069, 00250, 00270, 00300
ddddd T. Alexander
00100, 00150, 00190, 00230, 00290, 00330,
00350, 00420, 00440, 00470 Vice President, Technology
00190, 00240, 00290, 00380, 00440, 00540, Newtown
00610, 00660, 00750, 00770, 00830, 01000
Date: 3rd May 2013
The AC variable speed drive products listed above have been designed
and manufactured in accordance with the following European
These electronic drive products are intended to be used with
harmonized standards: appropriate motors, controllers, electrical protection components
Adjustable speed electrical power drive and other equipment to form complete end products or systems.
EN 61800-5-1:2007 systems - safety requirements - electrical, Compliance with safety and EMC regulations depends upon
thermal and energy installing and configuring drives correctly, including using the
specified input filters. The drives must be installed only by
Adjustable speed electrical power drive professional assemblers who are familiar with requirements for
EN 61800-3:2004 systems. EMC product standard including safety and EMC. The assembler is responsible for ensuring that the
specific test methods end product or system complies with all the relevant laws in the
country where it is to be used. Refer to the User Guide. An EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic Data Sheet is also available giving detailed EMC information.
EN 61000-6-2:2005 standards. Immunity standard for industrial
environments
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic

EN 61000-6-4:2007 standards. Emission standard for industrial
environments
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), Limits,

EN 61000-3-2:2006 Limits for harmonic current emissions
(equipment input current <16 A per phase)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), Limits,

Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in
EN 61000-3-3:2008
low-voltage supply systems for equipment
with rated current <16 A
EN 61000-3-2:2006 Applicable where input current <16 A. No limits

apply for professional equipment where input power >1 kW.

Issue Number: 3
Declaration of Conformity (including 2006 Machinery Directive)
Control Techniques Ltd
The Gro
Newtown
Powys
UK
SY16 3BE
This declaration applies to Unidrive M variable speed drive product Person authorized to compile the technical file:
range, comprising models numbers composed as shown below:
C Hargis
Maaa-bbcddddd Valid characters: Chief Engineer
aaa 600, 700, 701, 702 Address as above
bb 03, 04, 05, 06, 07
c 2, 4, 5 or 6
00050, 00066, 00080, 00106, 00025,
00031, 00045, 00062, 00078, 00100
00137, 00150, 00172, 00185
00030, 00040, 00069, 00250, 00270, 00300
ddddd
00100, 00150, 00190, 00230, 00290, 00330,
00350, 00420, 00440, 00470 T. Alexander
00190, 00240, 00290, 00380, 00440, 00540, Vice President, Technology
00610, 00660, 00750, 00770, 00830, 01000 Newtown
This declaration relates to these products when used as a safety
component of a machine. Only the SAFE TORQUE OFF function
Date: 7th May 2013
may be used for a safety function of a machine. None of the other
functions of the drive may be used to carry out a safety function.
These products fulfil all the relevant provisions of Directives 2006/42/EC IMPORTANT NOTICE
(The Machinery Directive) and 2004/108/EC (The EMC Directive).. These drive products are intended to be used with appropriate
EC type-examination has been carried out by the following notified body: motors, sensors, electrical protection components and other
equipment to form complete systems. It is the responsibility of the
TÜV Rheinland Industrie Service GmbH
installer to ensure that the design of the complete machine,
Am Grauen Stein including its safety-related control system, is carried out in
D-51105 KÖln accordance with the requirements of the Machinery Directive and
any other relevant legislation. The use of a safety-related drive in
itself does not ensure the safety of the machine.
Notified Body identification number: 0035
Compliance with safety and EMC regulations depends upon
EC type-examination certificate number: 01/205/5270/12 installing and configuring inverters correctly. The inverters must be
installed only by professional assemblers who are familiar with
requirements for safety and EMC. The assembler is responsible for
The harmonized standards used are shown below: ensuring that the end product or system complies with all the
Adjustable speed electrical power drive relevant laws in the country where it is to be used. Refer to the
EN 61800-5-1:2007 systems. Safety requirements. Electrical, Installation Guide.
thermal and energy
Adjustable speed electrical power drive
EN 61800-5-2:2007
systems. Safety requirements. Functional
Safety of machinery. Safety-related parts of
EN ISO 13849-1:2008 control systems. General principles for
design
Safety of machinery. Safety-related parts of
EN ISO 13849-2:2008
control systems. Validation
Adjustable speed electrical power drive
EN 61800-3:2004 systems. EMC requirements and specific test
methods
Safety of machinery. Functional safety of
EN 62061:2005 safety related electrical, electronic and
programmable electronic control systems

Issue Number: 3
Safety Product Mechanical Electrical Getting Basic Running NV Media Card Onboard Advanced Technical UL listing
Optimization Diagnostics
information information installation installation started parameters the motor Operation PLC parameters data information
1 Safety information 1.5 Access

Drive access must be restricted to authorized personnel only. Safety
1.1 Warnings, Cautions and Notes regulations which apply at the place of use must be complied with.
1.6 Fire protection

A Warning contains information which is essential for The drive enclosure is not classified as a fire enclosure. A separate fire
avoiding a safety hazard. enclosure must be provided. For further information, refer to section
WARNING 3.2.5 Fire protection on page 20.
1.7 Compliance with regulations

A Caution contains information which is necessary for The installer is responsible for complying with all relevant regulations,
avoiding a risk of damage to the product or other equipment. such as national wiring regulations, accident prevention regulations and
CAUTION electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) regulations. Particular attention
must be given to the cross-sectional areas of conductors, the selection
NOTE of fuses or other protection, and protective ground (earth) connections.
A Note contains information which helps to ensure correct operation of This User Guide contains instruction for achieving compliance with
the product. specific EMC standards.
Within the European Union, all machinery in which this product is used
1.2 Electrical safety - general warning must comply with the following directives:
The voltages used in the drive can cause severe electrical shock and/or 2006/42/EC Safety of machinery.
burns, and could be lethal. Extreme care is necessary at all times when 2004/108/EC: Electromagnetic Compatibility.
working with or adjacent to the drive.
Specific warnings are given at the relevant places in this User Guide. 1.8 Motor
1.3 System design and safety of Ensure the motor is installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Ensure the motor shaft is not exposed.
personnel
Standard squirrel cage induction motors are designed for single speed
The drive is intended as a component for professional incorporation into operation. If it is intended to use the capability of the drive to run a motor
complete equipment or a system. If installed incorrectly, the drive may at speeds above its designed maximum, it is strongly recommended that
present a safety hazard. the manufacturer is consulted first.
The drive uses high voltages and currents, carries a high level of stored Low speeds may cause the motor to overheat because the cooling fan
electrical energy, and is used to control equipment which can cause becomes less effective. The motor should be installed with a protection
injury. thermistor. If necessary, an electric forced vent fan should be used.
Close attention is required to the electrical installation and the system The values of the motor parameters set in the drive affect the protection
design to avoid hazards either in normal operation or in the event of of the motor. The default values in the drive should not be relied upon.
equipment malfunction. System design, installation, commissioning/
It is essential that the correct value is entered in Pr 00.046 motor rated
start-up and maintenance must be carried out by personnel who have
current. This affects the thermal protection of the motor.
the necessary training and experience. They must read this safety
information and this User Guide carefully.
1.9 Mechanical brake control
The STOP and SAFE TORQUE OFF functions of the drive do not isolate
dangerous voltages from the output of the drive or from any external The brake control functions are provided to allow well co-ordinated
option unit. The supply must be disconnected by an approved electrical operation of an external brake with the drive. While both hardware and
isolation device before gaining access to the electrical connections. software are designed to high standards of quality and robustness, they
are not intended for use as safety functions, i.e. where a fault or failure
With the sole exception of the SAFE TORQUE OFF function, none would result in a risk of injury. In any application where the incorrect
of the drive functions must be used to ensure safety of personnel, operation of the brake release mechanism could result in injury,
i.e. they must not be used for safety-related functions. independent protection devices of proven integrity must also be
Careful consideration must be given to the functions of the drive which incorporated.
might result in a hazard, either through their intended behavior or
through incorrect operation due to a fault. In any application where a 1.10 Adjusting parameters
malfunction of the drive or its control system could lead to or allow
Some parameters have a profound effect on the operation of the drive.
damage, loss or injury, a risk analysis must be carried out, and where
They must not be altered without careful consideration of the impact on
necessary, further measures taken to reduce the risk - for example, an
the controlled system. Measures must be taken to prevent unwanted
over-speed protection device in case of failure of the speed control, or a
changes due to error or tampering.
fail-safe mechanical brake in case of loss of motor braking.
The SAFE TORQUE OFF function may be used in a safety-related
application. The system designer is responsible for ensuring that the
complete system is safe and designed correctly according to the
relevant safety standards.
1.4 Environmental limits

Instructions in this User Guide regarding transport, storage, installation
and use of the drive must be complied with, including the specified
environmental limits. Drives must not be subjected to excessive physical
force.

Issue Number: 3
1.11 Electrical installation

1.11.1 Electric shock risk
The voltages present in the following locations can cause severe electric
shock and may be lethal:
AC supply cables and connections
Output cables and connections
Many internal parts of the drive, and external option units
Unless otherwise indicated, control terminals are single insulated and
must not be touched.
1.11.2 Stored charge
The drive contains capacitors that remain charged to a potentially lethal
voltage after the AC supply has been disconnected. If the drive has been
energized, the AC supply must be isolated at least ten minutes before
work may continue.

Issue Number: 3
2 Product information
2.1 Introduction
Universal AC and servo drive
This product family consists of Unidrive M700, Unidrive M701 and Unidrive M702, delivering maximum machine performance.
Common features (Unidrive M700, 701 and 702)

• Universal high performance open and closed loop control for induction, servo, permanent magnet and linear motors
• Automation and motion option module for direct migration of SyPTPro / SM-Applications programs
• Onboard IEC 61131-3 programmable automation and motion control
• Flexibility with speed and position measurement, supporting multiple devices and all common interfaces
• NV Media Card for parameter copying and data storage
Optional features (Unidrive M700, 701 and 702)
• Select up to three option modules including programmable automation and motion control.
Unidrive M700
• Ethernet fieldbus communications
• Single channel SAFE TORQUE OFF (STO) input
Unidrive M701
• Provides a direct replacement / upgrade for Unidrive SP
• 485 serial communications interface
• Single channel SAFE TORQUE OFF (STO) input
Unidrive M702
• Ethernet fieldbus communications
• Dual channel SAFE TORQUE OFF (STO) input
2.2 Model number

The way in which the model numbers for the Unidrive M700 range are formed is illustrated below:
Figure 2-1 Model number
Identification Label
Derivative Electrical Specifications Reserved Documentation Customer Code Optional Build
M700 - 03 4 00078 A 1 0 1 01 A B 1 0 0
Unidrive M700 Reserved:

Product Line
700 - Ethernet
701 - 485
Conformal Coating:
702 - Ethernet, 2 x STO 0 = Standard
Frame Size: IP / NEMA Rating:

1 = IP21 / NEMA 1
Voltage Rating: Brake Transistor:

2 - 200 V (200 - 240 ± 10 %) B = Brake
4 - 400 V (380 - 480 ± 10 %)
5 - 575 V (500 - 575 ± 10 %)
6 - 690 V (500 - 690 ± 10 %)
Cooling:
A = Air
Current Rating: Customer Code:

Heavy Duty current rating x 10 00 = 50 Hz
01 = 60 Hz
Drive Format: Documentation:

A - AC in AC out 0 - Supplied separately
1 - English

Issue Number: 3
2.3 Ratings
The drive is dual rated. Available output
The setting of the motor rated current determines which rating applies - current Overload limit -
Heavy Duty
Heavy Duty or Normal Duty.
The two ratings are compatible with motors designed to IEC60034. Maximum Overload limit -
continuous Normal Duty
The graph aside illustrates the difference between Normal Duty and current (above
Heavy Duty with respect to continuous current rating and short term 50% base
overload limits. speed) -
Normal Duty
Maximum
continuous
current -
Heavy Duty
Motor rated
current set
in the drive
Heavy Duty - with high Normal Duty
overload capability
Normal Duty Heavy Duty (default)

For applications which use Self ventilated (TENV/TEFC) induction For constant torque applications or applications which require a high
motors and require a low overload capability, and full torque at low overload capability, or full torque is required at low speeds (e.g. winders,
speeds is not required (e.g. fans, pumps). hoists).
Self ventilated (TENV/TEFC) induction motors require increased The thermal protection is set to protect force ventilated induction motors
protection against overload due to the reduced cooling effect of the fan and permanent magnet servo motors by default.
at low speed. To provide the correct level of protection the I2t software NOTE N
operates at a level which is speed dependent. This is illustrated in the If the application uses a self ventilated (TENV/TEFC) induction motor
graph below. and increased thermal protection is required for speeds below 50 %
NOTE base speed, then this can be enabled by setting Low Speed Thermal
The speed at which the low speed protection takes effect can be Protection Mode (04.025) = 1.
changed by the setting of Low Speed Thermal Protection Mode
(04.025). The protection starts when the motor speed is below 15 % of
base speed when Pr 04.025 = 0 (default) and below 50 % when
Pr 04.025 = 1.
Operation of motor I2t protection
Motor I2t protection is fixed as shown below and is compatible with: Motor I2t protection defaults to be compatible with:
• Self ventilated (TENV/TEFC) induction motors • Forced ventilation induction motors
• Permanent magnet servo motors
Motor total Motor total

current (Pr 04.001) current (Pr 04.001)
as a percentage as a percentage
of motor rated I2t protection operates in this region of motor rated 2
I t protection operates in this region
current current
100% 100%
70% 70%
Max. permissible Max. permissible
continuous continuous
current current
Pr 04.025 = 0 Pr 04.025 = 0
Pr 04.025 = 1 Pr 04.025 = 1
15% 50% 100% Motor speed as a 50% 100% Motor speed as a

percentage of base speed percentage of base speed

Issue Number: 3
The continuous current ratings given are for maximum 40 °C (104 °F), 1000 m altitude and 3.0 kHz switching. Derating is required for higher switching
frequencies, ambient temperature >40 °C (104 °F) and high altitude. For further information, refer to Chapter 12 Technical data on page 227.
Table 2-1 200 V drive ratings (200 V to 240 V ±10 %)
Normal Duty Heavy Duty
Maximum Nominal Motor Maximum Open Nominal Motor
Peak RFC peak
Model continuous power power continuous loop peak power power
current current
output current at 230 V at 230 V output current current at 230 V at 230 V
A kW hp A A A A kW hp
03200050 6.6 1.1 1.5 7.2 5 7.5 10 0.75 1
03200066 8 1.5 2 8.8 6.6 9.9 13.2 1.1 1.5

Frame size 3
03200080 11 2.2 3 12.1 8 12 16 1.5 2
03200106 12.7 3 3 13.9 10.6 15.9 21.2 2.2 3
04200137 18 4 5 19.8 13.7 26.2 27.4 3 3

Frame size 4
04200185 25 5.5 7.5 27.5 18.5 27.7 37 4 5
Frame size 5 05200250 30 7.5 10 33 25 37.5 50 5.5 7.5
06200330 50 11 15 55 33 49.5 66 7.5 10

Frame size 6
06200440 58 15 20 63.8 44 66 88 11 15
07200610 75 18.5 25 82.5 61 91.5 122 15 20
Frame size 7 07200750 94 22 30 103.4 75 112.5 150 18.5 25
07200830 117 30 40 128.7 83 124.5 166 22 30
08201160 149 37 50 163.9 116 174 232 30 40

Frame size 8
08201320 180 45 60 198 132 192 264 37 50

Maximum Nominal Motor Maximum Open Nominal Motor
Peak RFC peak
Model continuous power power continuous loop peak power power
current current
output current at 400 V at 460 V output current current at 400 V at 460 V
03400025 3.4 1.1 1.5 3.7 2.5 3.7 5.0 0.75 1.0
03400031 4.5 1.5 2.0 4.9 3.1 4.6 6.2 1.1 1.5
03400045 6.2 2.2 3.0 6.8 4.5 6.7 9.0 1.5 2.0
Frame size 3
03400062 7.7 3.0 5.0 8.4 6.2 9.3 12.4 2.2 3.0
03400078 10.4 4.0 5.0 11.4 7.8 11.7 15.6 3.0 5.0
03400100 12.3 5.5 7.5 13.5 10.0 15.0 20.0 4.0 5.0
04400150 18.5 7.5 10.0 20.3 15.0 22.5 30.0 5.5 10.0
Frame size 4
04400172 24.0 11.0 15.0 26.4 17.2 25.8 34.4 7.5 10.0
05400270 30.0 15.0 20.0 33.0 27.0 40.5 54.0 11.0 20.0
Frame size 5
05400300 31.0 15.0 20.0 34.1 30.0 45.0 60.0 15.0 20.0
06400350 38.0 18.5 25.0 41.8 35.0 52.5 70.0 15.0 25.0
Frame size 6 06400420 48.0 22.0 30.0 52.8 42.0 63.0 84.0 18.5 30.0
06400470 63.0 30.0 40.0 69.3 47.0 70.5 94.0 22.0 30.0
07400660 79 37 50 86.9 66 99 132 30 50
Frame size 7 07400770 94 45 60 103.4 77 115.5 154 37 60
07401000 112 55 75 123.2 100 150 200 45 75
08401340 155 75 100 170.5 134 201 268 55 100

Frame size 8
08401570 184 90 125 202.4 157 235.5 314 75 125

Issue Number: 3

Maximum Nominal Motor Maximum Open RFC Nominal Motor
Peak
Model continuous power at power at continuous loop peak peak power at power at
current
output current 575 V 575 V output current current current 575 V 575 V
05500030 3.9 2.2 3 4.3 3 4.5 6 1.5 2
Frame size 5 05500040 6.1 4 5 6.7 4 6 8 2.2 3
05500069 10 5.5 7.5 11 6.9 10.3 13.8 4 5.0
06500100 12 7.5 10 13.2 10 15 20 5.5 7.5
06500150 17 11 15 18.7 15 22.5 30 7.5 10
06500190 22 15 20 24.2 19 28.5 38 11 15
Frame size 6
06500230 27 18.5 25 29.7 23 34.5 46 15 20
06500290 34 22 30 37.4 29 43.5 58 18.5 25
06500350 43 30 40 47.3 35 52.5 70 22 30
07500440 53 45 50 58.3 44 66 88 30 40
Frame size 7
07500550 73 55 60 80.3 55 82.5 110 37 50
08500630 86 75 75 94.6 63 94.5 126 45 60
Frame size 8
08500860 108 90 100 118.8 86 129 172 55 75

Maximum Nominal Motor Maximum Open RFC Nominal Motor
Peak
Model continuous power at power at continuous loop peak peak power at power at
current
output current 690 V 690 V output current current current 690 V 690 V
07600190 23 18.5 25 25.3 19 28.5 38 15 20
07600240 30 22 30 33 24 36 48 18.5 25
07600290 36 30 40 39.6 29 43.5 58 22 30
Frame size 7
07600380 46 37 50 50.6 38 57 76 30 40
07600440 52 45 60 57.2 44 66 88 37 50
07600540 73 55 75 80.3 54 81 108 45 60
08600630 86 75 100 94.6 63 94.5 126 55 75
Frame size 8
08600860 108 90 125 118.8 86 129 172 75 100

Issue Number: 3
2.3.1 Typical short term overload limits

The maximum percentage overload limit changes depending on the selected motor. Variations in motor rated current, motor power factor and motor
leakage inductance all result in changes in the maximum possible overload. The exact value for a specific motor can be calculated using the
equations detailed in Menu 4 in the Parameter Reference Guide.
Typical values are shown in the table below for RFC (RFC-A or RFC-S) and open loop (OL) modes:
Table 2-5 Typical overload limits
Operating mode RFC from cold RFC from 100 % Open loop from cold Open loop from 100 %
Normal Duty overload with motor rated current = drive rated current 110 % for 165 s 110 % for 9 s 110 % for 165 s 110 % for 9 s
Heavy Duty overload with motor rated current = drive rated current 200 % for 28 s 200 % for 3 s 150 % for 60 s 150 % for 8 s
Generally the drive rated current is higher than the matching motor rated current allowing a higher level of overload than the default setting.
The time allowed in the overload region is proportionally reduced at very low output frequency on some drive ratings.
NOTE
The maximum overload level which can be attained is independent of the speed.
2.4 Operating modes

The drive is designed to operate in any of the following modes:
1. Open loop mode
Open loop vector mode
Fixed V/F mode (V/Hz)
Quadratic V/F mode (V/Hz)
2. RFC - A
With position feedback sensor
3. RFC - S
2.4.1 Open loop mode
The drive applies power to the motor at frequencies varied by the user. The motor speed is a result of the output frequency of the drive and slip due
to the mechanical load. The drive can improve the speed control of the motor by applying slip compensation. The performance at low speed depends
on whether V/F mode or open loop vector mode is selected.
Open loop vector mode

The voltage applied to the motor is directly proportional to the frequency except at low speed where the drive uses motor parameters to apply the
correct voltage to keep the flux constant under varying load conditions.
Typically 100 % torque is available down to 1 Hz for a 50 Hz motor.
Fixed V/F mode
The voltage applied to the motor is directly proportional to the frequency except at low speed where a voltage boost is provided which is set by the
user. This mode can be used for multi-motor applications.
Typically 100 % torque is available down to 4 Hz for a 50 Hz motor.
Quadratic V/F mode
The voltage applied to the motor is directly proportional to the square of the frequency except at low speed where a voltage boost is provided which is
set by the user. This mode can be used for running fan or pump applications with quadratic load characteristics or for multi-motor applications. This
mode is not suitable for applications requiring a high starting torque.
2.4.2 RFC-A mode
Rotor Flux Control for Asynchronous (induction) motors (RFC-A) encompasses closed loop vector control with a position feedback device
For use with induction motors with a feedback device installed. The drive directly controls the speed of the motor using the feedback device to ensure
the rotor speed exactly as demanded. Motor flux is accurately controlled at all times to provide full torque all the way down to zero speed.
With position feedback sensor (Sensorless)
Sensorless mode provides closed loop control without the need for position feedback by using current, voltages and key motor parameters to
estimate the motor speed. It can eliminate instability traditionally associated with open loop control such as operating large motors with light loads at
low frequencies.
2.4.3 RFC- S
Rotor Flux Control for Synchronous (permanent magnet brushless) motors (RFC-S) provides closed loop control with position feedback device.
With position feedback
For use with permanent magnet brushless motors with a feedback device installed.
The drive directly controls the speed of the motor using the feedback device to ensure the rotor speed is exactly as demanded. Flux control is not
required because the motor is self excited by the permanent magnets which form part of the rotor.
Absolute position information is required from the feedback device to ensure the output voltage is accurately matched to the back EMF of the motor.
Full torque is available all the way down to zero speed.

Issue Number: 3
2.5 Compatible position feedback devices

Table 2-6 Supported feedback devices
Encoder type Pr 3.038 setting
Quadrature incremental encoders with or without marker pulse AB (0)
Quadrature incremental encoders with UVW commutation signals for absolute position for permanent magnet motors
AB Servo (3)
with or without marker pulse
Forward / reverse incremental encoders with or without marker pulse FR (2)
Forward / reverse incremental encoders with UVW commutation signals for absolute position for permanent magnet
FR Servo (5)
motors with or without marker pulse
Frequency and direction incremental encoders with or without marker pulse FD (1)
Frequency and direction incremental encoders with UVW commutation signals for absolute position for permanent
FD Servo (4)
magnet motors with or without marker pulse
Sincos incremental encoders SC (6)
Sincos incremental with commutation signals SC Servo (12)
Heidenhain sincos encoders with EnDat comms for absolute position SC EnDat (9)
Stegmann sincos encoders with Hiperface comms for absolute position SC Hiperface (7)
Sincos encoders with SSI comms for absolute position SC SSI (11)
Sincos incremental with absolute position from single sin and cosine signals SC SC (15)
SSI encoders (Gray code or binary) SSI (10)
EnDat communication only encoders EnDat (8)
BiSS communication only encoders* (not currently supported) BiSS (13)
Resolver (not currently supported) Resolver (14)
UVW commutation only encoders** (not currently supported) Commutation only (16)
* Only BiSS type C encoders are supported.
** This feedback device provides very low resolution feedback and should not be used for applications requiring a high level of performance.

Issue Number: 3
2.6 Drive features

Figure 2-2 Features of the drive
1
13 14 13 16 13 13
15
15
15
2 15 15 15
16 16 16
12 3
11 4
10
8
19
9
19
18 17 19 18 17 17 18
18 18
19
19 15 16 15 16
16 15 13
18 19 17
19
15 13
17
19
15 13
17
Key
1. Keypad connection 6. Option module slot 2 11. Communications port 16. DC bus -
2. Rating label 7. Option module slot 3 12. NV media card slot 17. Motor connections
3. Identification label 8. Relay connections 13. Braking terminal 18. AC supply connections
4. Status LED 9. Position feedback connections 14. Internal EMC filter 19. Ground connections
5. Option module slot 1 10. Control connections 15. DC bus +

Issue Number: 3
2.7 Nameplate description

See Figure 2-2 for location of rating labels.
Figure 2-3 Typical drive rating labels
Frame Heavy Duty
Model size current rating
Refer to
User Guide M702-032-00050-A
Voltage Drive format
Heavy Duty /
Normal Duty Input Customer and Key to approvals
power rating frequency date code
Input voltage
No.of phases & CE approval Europe
Typical input current for
Output Normal Duty rating C Tick approval Australia
voltage
USA &
Heavy Duty / UL / cUL approval
R
Canada
Normal Duty rating
Approvals output current
RoHS compliant Europe
Serial
number
Refer to Figure 2-1 Model number on page 10 for further information relating to the labels.
2.8 Options
Figure 2-4 Options available with the drive
1. Keypad 6. Internal braking resistor

2. Option module slot 1 7. NV media card
3. Option module slot 2 * For further information, refer to Chapter 9 NV Media Card Operation on
4. Option module slot 3
page 130.
5. CT Comms cable

Issue Number: 3
Unidrive M option modules come in two different formats, a standard option module and a large option module. All standard option modules are color-
coded in order to make identification easy, whereas the larger option module is black. All modules have an identification label on top of the module.
Standard option modules can be installed to any of the available option slots on the drive, whereas the large option modules can only be installed to
option slot 3. The following tables shows the color-code key and gives further details on their function.
Table 2-7 Option module identification (standard modules)
Option
Type Color Name Further Details
module
Drive encoder input converter
15-way D-type
N/A Provides screw terminal interface for encoder wiring and spade
converter
terminal for shield
Feedback
Single ended Single ended encoder interface
N/A encoder interface Provides an interface for single ended ABZ encoder signals,
(15V or 24V) such as those from hall effect sensors. 15 V and 24 V versions are available
485 Comms Adaptor
485 Comms adaptor provides 485 communication interface. This adaptor
N/A KI-485 Adaptor
supports 115 k Baud, node addresses between 1 to 16 and 8 1 NP M serial
mode.
Profibus option
Purple SI-PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS adapter for communications with the drive
Fieldbus
DeviceNet option
Medium Grey SI-DeviceNet
DeviceNet adapter for communications with the drive
CANopen option
Light Grey SI-CANopen
CANopen adapter for communications with the drive
Extended I/O
Increases the I/O capability by adding the following combinations:
• Digital I/O
Automation
Orange SI-I/O • Digital Inputs
(I/O expansion)
• Analog Inputs (differential or single ended)
• Analog Output
• Relays
Machine Control Studio Compatible Applications Processor

Moss Green MCi200 2nd processor for running pre-defined and/or customer created application
software.
Automation
(Applications) Machine Control Studio Compatible Applications Processor (with
Ethernet communications)
Moss Green MCi210
2nd processor for running pre-defined and/or customer created application
software with Ethernet communications.
Table 2-8 Option module identification (large modules)

Option
Type Color Name Further Details
module
SyPTPro Compatible Applications Processor (with CTNet)
SI-Applications Plus 2nd processor for running pre-defined and/or customer created application
Automation
Black software with CTNet support.
(Applications)
SyPTPro Compatible Applications Processor
SI-Register
2nd processor for running position capture functionality with CTNet support
Table 2-9 Keypad identification

Type Keypad Name Further Details
LCD keypad option
KI-Keypad
Keypad with a LCD display
Keypad
LCD keypad option
KI-Keypad RTC
Keypad with a LCD display and real time clock

Issue Number: 3
Table 2-10 Additional options

Type Option Name Further Details
SD Card Adaptor
SD Card Adaptor
Allows the drive to use an SD card for drive back-up
Back-up
SMARTCARD
SMARTCARD
www.controltechniques.com
Used for parameter back-up with the drive
2.9 Items supplied with the drive

The drive is supplied with a copy of the Getting Started Guide, a safety information booklet, and an accessory kit box including the items shown in
Table 2-11.
Table 2-11 Parts supplied with the drive
Description Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 7 Size 8
Control connectors
x1
Relay connector
x1
24 V power supply
connector
x1
Grounding bracket
x1
Surface mounting
brackets
x2 x2 x2 x2 x2 x2
Grounding clamp
x1 x1 x1
DC terminal cover
grommets
x2
Terminal nuts
M6 x 11 M8 x 12 M10 x 12
Supply and motor

connector
x1 x1 x1
Finger guard
grommets
x3 x2

Issue Number: 3
3 Mechanical installation 3.2.3 Cooling

The heat produced by the drive must be removed without its specified
This chapter describes how to use all mechanical details to install the operating temperature being exceeded. Note that a sealed enclosure
drive. The drive is intended to be installed in an enclosure. Key features gives much reduced cooling compared with a ventilated one, and may
of this chapter include: need to be larger and/or use internal air circulating fans.
• Through-hole mounting For further information, refer to section 3.6 Enclosure for standard
• High IP as standard or through-panel mounting drives on page 38.
• Enclosure sizing and layout 3.2.4 Electrical safety
• Option module installing The installation must be safe under normal and fault conditions.
• Terminal location and torque settings Electrical installation instructions are given in Chapter 4 Electrical
installation on page 51.
3.1 Safety information
3.2.5 Fire protection
Follow the instructions The drive enclosure is not classified as a fire enclosure. A separate fire
The mechanical and electrical installation instructions must enclosure must be provided.
be adhered to. Any questions or doubt should be referred to
For installation in the USA, a NEMA 12 enclosure is suitable.
the supplier of the equipment. It is the responsibility of the
WARNING owner or user to ensure that the installation of the drive and For installation outside the USA, the following (based on IEC 62109-1,
any external option unit, and the way in which they are standard for PV inverters) is recommended.
operated and maintained, comply with the requirements of Enclosure can be metal and/or polymeric, polymer must meet
the Health and Safety at Work Act in the United Kingdom or requirements which can be summarized for larger enclosures as using
applicable legislation and regulations and codes of practice in materials meeting at least UL 94 class 5VB at the point of minimum
the country in which the equipment is used. thickness.
Air filter assemblies to be at least class V-2.
Competence of the installer
The drive must be installed by professional assemblers who The location and size of the bottom shall cover the area shown in Figure
are familiar with the requirements for safety and EMC. The 3-1. Any part of the side which is within the area traced out by the 5°
assembler is responsible for ensuring that the end product or angle is also considered to be part of the bottom of the fire enclosure.
WARNING system complies with all the relevant laws in the country Figure 3-1 Fire enclosure bottom layout
where it is to be used.
Enclosure
The drive is intended to be mounted in an enclosure which
prevents access except by trained and authorized
personnel, and which prevents the ingress of contamination.
WARNING Drive
It is designed for use in an environment classified as
pollution degree 2 in accordance with IEC 60664-1. This
means that only dry, non-conducting contamination is
acceptable.
3.2 Planning the installation

The following considerations must be made when planning the installation:
3.2.1 Access o
Access must be restricted to authorized personnel only. Safety 5
regulations which apply at the place of use must be complied with.
The IP (Ingress Protection) rating of the drive is installation dependent. o
For further information, refer to section 3.9 Enclosing standard drive for 5
high environmental protection on page 40.
3.2.2 Environmental protection
The drive must be protected from:
The bottom, including the part of the side considered to be part of the
• Moisture, including dripping water or spraying water and
bottom, must be designed to prevent escape of burning material - either
condensation. An anti-condensation heater may be required, which
must be switched off when the drive is running. by having no openings or by having a baffle construction. This means
that openings for cables etc. must be sealed with materials meeting the
• Contamination with electrically conductive material
5VB requirement, or else have a baffle above. See Figure 3-2 for
• Contamination with any form of dust which may restrict the fan, or
impair airflow over various components acceptable baffle construction. This does not apply for mounting in an
• Temperature beyond the specified operating and storage ranges enclosed electrical operating area (restricted access) with concrete floor.
• Corrosive gasses Figure 3-2 Fire enclosure baffle construction
NOTE
Not less
than 2
During installation it is recommended that the vents on the drive are times ‘X’
N o t le s s
th a n 2 X
Baffle plates (may be above or
B a f f le p la t e s ( m a y b e
covered to prevent debris (e.g. wire off-cuts) from entering the drive. below bottom of enclosure)
a b o v e o r b e lo w b o t t o m
o f e n c lo s u r e )
XX
B o t t o m o f fir e
Bottom of fire enclosure

e n c lo s u r e

Issue Number: 3
3.2.6 Electromagnetic compatibility

Variable speed drives are powerful electronic circuits which can cause electromagnetic interference if not installed correctly with careful attention to
the layout of the wiring.
Some simple routine precautions can prevent disturbance to typical industrial control equipment.
If it is necessary to meet strict emission limits, or if it is known that electromagnetically sensitive equipment is located nearby, then full precautions
must be observed. In-built into the drive, is an internal EMC filter, which reduces emissions under certain conditions. If these conditions are exceeded,
then the use of an external EMC filter may be required at the drive inputs, which must be located very close to the drives. Space must be made
available for the filters and allowance made for carefully segregated wiring. Both levels of precautions are covered in section 4.12 EMC
(Electromagnetic compatibility) on page 68.
3.2.7 Hazardous areas
The drive must not be located in a classified hazardous area unless it is installed in an approved enclosure and the installation is certified.
3.3 Terminal cover removal
Isolation device
The AC and / or DC power supply must be disconnected from the drive using an approved isolation device before any cover is removed
from the drive or before any servicing work is performed.
WARNING
Stored charge
The drive contains capacitors that remain charged to a potentially lethal voltage after the AC and / or DC power supply has been
disconnected. If the drive has been energized, the power supply must be isolated at least ten minutes before work may continue.
Normally, the capacitors are discharged by an internal resistor. Under certain, unusual fault conditions, it is possible that the capacitors may
WARNING
fail to discharge, or be prevented from being discharged by a voltage applied to the output terminals. If the drive has failed in a manner that
causes the display to go blank immediately, it is possible the capacitors will not be discharged. In this case, consult Control Techniques or
their authorized distributor.

Issue Number: 3
3.3.1 Removing the terminal covers

Figure 3-3 Location and identification of terminal covers
DC / Braking DC / Braking DC / Braking DC / Braking DC / Braking

terminal cover terminal cover terminal cover terminal cover terminal cover
left right
3 4 5 6
Control
terminal cover AC / Motor
Control / AC / Control / AC / Control terminal
AC / Motor terminal cover
Motor terminal cover Motor terminal cover cover
terminal cover
AC / DC
terminal cover
AC / DC
terminal cover
Motor / Braking
terminal cover Control terminal
Motor / Braking Control terminal
cover cover
terminal cover

Issue Number: 3
Figure 3-4 Removing the size 3 terminal covers
1. Control / AC / Motor terminal cover

2. DC / Braking terminal cover
On size 3 drives, the Control / AC / Motor terminal cover must be removed before removal of the DC / Braking terminal cover. When replacing the
terminal covers, the screws should be tightened to a maximum torque of 1 N m (0.7 lb ft).
1. Control / AC / Motor terminal cover

2. DC / Braking terminal cover
On size 4 drives, the Control / AC / Motor terminal cover must be removed before removal of the DC / Braking terminal cover. When replacing the
terminal covers, the screws should be tightened to a maximum torque of 1 N m (0.7 lb ft).

Issue Number: 3
1. Control terminal cover

2. DC / Braking terminal cover right
On size 5 drives, the Control terminal cover must be removed before removal of the DC / Braking terminal cover right. When replacing the terminal
covers, the screws should be tightened to a maximum torque of 1 N m (0.7 lb ft).

Issue Number: 3
Figure 3-8 Removing the size 7 and 8 terminal covers (size 7 shown)

Issue Number: 3
3.3.2 Removing the finger-guard and DC terminal Figure 3-10 Removing the size 3 and 4 DC terminal cover break-outs
cover break-outs
Figure 3-9 Removing the finger-guard break-outs
Grasp the DC terminal cover break-outs with pliers as shown (1) and pull
down in the direction shown to remove. Continue until all required break-
outs are removed (2). Remove any flash / sharp edges once the break-
outs are removed. Use the DC terminal cover grommets supplied in the
accessory box (Table 2-11) to maintain the seal at the top of the drive.
A: All sizes
B: Size 5 only
C: Size 6 only
D: Size 7 and 8
Place finger-guard on a flat solid surface and hit relevant break-outs with
hammer as shown (1). Continue until all required break-outs are
removed (2). Remove any flash / sharp edges once the break-outs are
removed.

Issue Number: 3
3.4 Installing / removing option modules and keypads
Power down the drive before installing / removing the option module. Failure to do so may result in damage to the product.
CAUTION
Figure 3-11 Installation of a standard option module
Installing the first option module

NOTE
Option module slots must be used in the following order: slot 3, slot 2 and slot 1 (refer to Figure 2-2 Features of the drive on page 16 for slot
numbers).
• Move the option module in direction shown (1).
• Align and insert the option module tab in to the slot provided (2), this is highlighted in the detailed view (A).
• Press down on the option module until it clicks into place.
Installing the second option module
• Align and insert the option module tab in to the slot provided on the already installed option module (4), this is highlighted in the detailed view (B).
• Press down on the option module until it clicks into place. Image (5) shows two option modules fully installed.
Installing the third option module
• Repeat the above process.
The drive has the facility for all three option module slots to be used at the same time, image (6) shows the three option modules installed.

Issue Number: 3
Figure 3-12 Removal of a standard option module
• Press down on the tab (1) to release the option module from the drive housing, the tab is highlighted in the detailed view (A).
• Tilt the option module towards you as shown (2).
• Totally remove the option module in direction shown (3).
Figure 3-13 Installation and removal of a large option module
Installing a large option module

• Align and insert the option module tabs (A) into the slot provided (B).
• Press down on the option module until it clicks into place.
Removing a large option module
• Press down on the tab (2C), tilt the option module towards you and remove.
NOTE
The large option module can only be inserted into slot 3. Additional standard option modules can still be installed and used in slot 2 and slot 1.

Issue Number: 3
Figure 3-14 Installation and removal of the KI-Keypad
To install, align the keypad and press gently in the direction shown until it clicks into position.
To remove, reverse the installation instructions.
NOTE N
The keypad can be installed / removed while the drive is powered up and running a motor, providing that the drive is not operating in keypad mode.

Issue Number: 3
3.5 Dimensions and mounting methods

The drive can be either surface or through-panel mounted using the appropriate brackets. The following drawings show the dimensions of the drive
and mounting holes for each method to allow a backplate to be prepared.
The Through-panel mounting kit is not supplied with the drive and can be purchased separately, below are the relevant part numbers:
Table 3-1 Through-panel mounting kit part numbers
Size CT part number
3 3470-0053
4 3470-0056
5 3470-0067
6 3470-0055
7 3470-0079
8 3470-0083
If the drive has been used at high load levels for a period of time, the heatsink can reach temperatures in excess of 70 °C (158 °F). Human
contact with the heatsink should be prevented.
WARNING
Many of the drives in this product range weigh in excess of 15 kg (33 lb). Use appropriate safeguards when lifting these models.
A full list of drive weights can be found in section 12.1.19 Weights on page 237.
WARNING
3.5.1 Surface mounting

Figure 3-15 Surface mounting the size 3 drive
6.0 mm 73.0 mm (2.87 in) Æ 5.5 mm

200 mm (7.87 in)
83 mm (3.27 in) (0.24 in) 40.0 mm (0.22 in)
(1.58 in)
370 mm (14.57 in)
382 mm
365 mm
(15.04 in) (14.37 in)
Æ 6.5 mm
(0.26 in)
NOTE
Each mounting bracket contains 4 mounting holes, the outer holes (5.5 mm) x 2 should be used for mounting the drive to the backplate as this allows
the heatsink fan to be replaced without removing the drive from the backplate. The inner holes (6.5 mm) x 2 are used for Unidrive SP size 1 retrofit
applications. See Table 3-2 for further information.

Issue Number: 3

9 mm
(0.35 in) 106 mm (4.17 in)
53 mm 53 mm Æ 6.5 mm
124 mm (4.88 in) 8 mm (2.09 in) (2.09 in) (0.26 in) x 4 holes
(0.32 in)
365 mm (14.37 in)

391 mm (15.39 in)
375 mm
(14.76 in)
200 mm (7.87 in)
NOTE
The outer holes in the mounting bracket are to be used for surface mounting. See Table 3-2 for further information.
202 mm (7.95 in) 9 mm 8 mm

143 mm (5.63 in) (0.35 in) 106 mm (4.17 in) (0.32 in)
365 mm (14.37 in)
391 mm (15.39 in)
375 mm (14.76 in)
Æ 7.0 mm (0.28 in)
NOTE

Issue Number: 3

7.0 mm 196.0 mm
227 mm (8.94 in) (7.72 in)
(0.28 in)
6.0 mm
(0.24 in)
378 mm
391 mm 365 mm (14.88 in)
(15.39 in) 14.37 in
Æ7.0 mm
210 mm (8.27 in) (0.27 in)
NOTE
25 mm
(0.98 in)
220 mm (8.66 in)
10 mm
(0.39 in)
270 mm (10.63 in) 279 mm (11.0 in)
508 mm (20.0 in)
538 mm (21.18)
557 mm (21.93 in)
Æ 9mm (0.35 in)

Issue Number: 3

26 mm
(1.02 in)
310 mm (12.21 in) 257 mm (10.12 in)
290 mm (11.42 in)
285 mm (11.22 in)
10 mm
(0.39 in)
803 mm (31.61 in)
753 mm (29.65)
784 mm (30.87 in)

Æ9 mm (0.35 in)
(4 holes)
3.5.2 Through-panel mounting

Figure 3-21 Through-panel mounting the size 3 drive
97 mm (3.82 in)
5.20 mm (0.21 in)
73 mm (2.87 in) x 8 holes
200 mm (7.87 in)

36.5 mm 36.5 mm
(1.44 in) (1.44 in)
83 mm (3.27 in)
134 mm (5.28 in) 15 mm
(0.59 in)
129 mm (5.08 in)
168 mm (6.61 in)

26 mm (1.02 in)
389 mm (15.32 in)

359 mm (14.13 in)
400 mm 365 mm 359 mm

(15.75 in) (14.37 in) (14.13 in)
26 mm (1.02 in)
109 mm (4.29 in)
Radius 1.0 mm (0.04 in)

38 mm 38 mm
67 mm (1.50 in) (1.50 in)
(2.64 in)
76 mm (2.99 in)

Issue Number: 3
Figure 3-22 Through panel mounting the size 4 drive
106 mm (4.17 in)

124 mm (4.88 in)
(0.67 in)
17 mm
168 mm (6.61 in)

393 mm (15.47 in)
409 mm (16.10 in)
68 mm 68 mm
(2.68 in) (2.68 in)
142 mm (5.59 in)

117 mm (4.61 in)

67 mm (2.64 in) 156 mm (6.14 in)
135 mm (5.32 in)

143 mm (5.63 in) 106 mm (4.17 in)
167 mm (6.58 in)

169 mm (6.65 in)
359 mm (14.13 in)
365 mm (14.37 in)
391 mm (15.39 in)
394 mm (15.51 in)
26 mm 26 mm
(1.02 in) (1.02 in)
Æ5.0 mm (0.20 in)

(x 4 holes)
78
Æ7.0 mm (0.28 in)

136 mm (5.35 in) (x 4 holes)

Issue Number: 3

227 mm (8.94)
196 mm (7.72 in)
96 mm (3.78 in) 98 mm (3.86 in) 98 mm (3.86 in) Ø7.00mm (0.276 in)
131 mm (5.16 in)
21 mm (0.83 in)
120 mm (4.73 in)
264 mm (10.39 in)
167 mm (6.58 in)

399 mm (15.71)
356 mm (14.02 in)
365 mm (14.37 in)
412 mm (16.22 in)
26.0 mm
(1.02 in)
26.0 mm (1.02 in)

26.0 mm
(1.02 in)
Ø5.2 mm
(0.20 in)
Radius 1.0 mm
(0.04 in)
210 mm (8.27 in) 101 mm (3.98 in) 101 mm (3.98 in)
202 mm (7.95 in)
NOTE
The outer holes plus the hole located in the center of the bracket are to be used for through panel mounting.
330 mm (12.99 in)

92 mm (3.62 in) 310 mm (12.20 in)
270 mm (10.63 in)
252 mm (9.92 in)
187 mm (7.36 in)
245 mm (9.65 in) 220 mm (8.66 in)
252 mm (9.92 in)

278 mm (10.95 in)
538 mm (21.18 in)
488 mm (19.21 in)

508 mm (20.0 in)
Æ 9mm (0.35 in)

Issue Number: 3
328 mm (12.91 in)
341 mm (13.43 in) 100 mm 290 mm (11.42 in)

310 mm (12.21 in) 190 mm (7.48 in) (3.94 in) 259 mm (10.20 in) Æ9 mm (0.35 in)
285 mm (11.22 in) (4 holes)
Æ5.3 mm (0.21 in)
(6 holes)
240 mm (9.45 in)

240 mm (9.45 in)
753 mm (29.65 in)
730 mm (28.74 in)

784 mm (30.87 in)
804 mm (31.65 in)
240 mm (9.45 in)

240 mm (9.45 in)
27.1 [1.066]
161 mm (6.34 in)

(5.55 in)
141 mm
27 mm
(1.06 in)

Issue Number: 3
3.5.3 Mounting brackets

Table 3-2 Mounting brackets
Frame size Surface Qty Through-panel Qty
x2
Hole size: 5.5 mm (0.22 in)

3 x2
x2
Inner hole size: 6.5 mm (0.26 in) Inner hole size: 6.5 mm (0.26 in)
Outer hole size: 5.5 mm (0.22 in) Outer hole size: 5.5 mm (0.22 in)
x3
4 x2 Hole size: 5.2 mm (0.21 in)
x2
Hole size: 6.5 mm (0.26 in) Hole size: 6.5 mm (0.26 in)
x2
x2
x3
x2
x2
Hole size: 9 mm (0.35 in)
7 x2
x2
Hole size: 9 mm (0.35 in) Hole size: 9 mm (0.35 in)
x6
Hole size: 5.3 mm (0.21 in)
8 x2
x2
Hole size: 9 mm (0.35 in) Hole size: 9 mm (0.35 in)

Issue Number: 3
3.6 Enclosure for standard drives 3.6.2 Enclosure layout

Please observe the clearances in the diagram below taking into account
3.6.1 Recommended spacing between the drives any appropriate notes for other devices / auxiliary equipment when
Figure 3-27 Recommended spacing between the drives planning the installation.
Figure 3-28 Enclosure layout
Enclosure Locate optional braking

resistor external to Optional braking resistor and overload
cubicle (preferably near to or
on top of the cubicle).
Locate the overload protection
device as required
Locate as
Enclosure
³100mm
(4in)
AC supply
contactor and
fuses or MCB
A
Locate as
required
Ensure minimum clearances

are maintained for the drive
B B
and external EMC filter. Forced
or convection air-flow must not
be restricted by any object or
cabling
The external EMC filter can be

bookcase mounted (next to the
drive) or footprint mounted (with
the drive mounted onto the filter).
Table 3-3 Spacing required between the drives (without high IP bung) ³100 mm
(4 in)
Spacing (A) External
Drive Size controller
40°C 50°C 55°C*
3 0 mm (0.00 in) 0 mm (0.00 in) 15 mm (0.59 in)
4 0 mm (0.00 in) 30 mm (1.18 in)
Signal cables
5 0 mm (0.00 in) 30 mm (1.18 in) 30 mm (1.18 in) Plan for all signal cables
to be routed at least
6 0 mm (0.00 in) 0 mm (0.00 in) 0 mm (0.00 in) 300 mm (12 in) from the
drive and any power cable
7 30 mm (1.18 in)
8 30 mm (1.18 in)
NOTE
9 30 mm (1.18 in)
For EMC compliance:
* For de-rating data at 55°C, contact the supplier of the drive. 1. When using an external EMC filter, one filter is required for each drive.
2. Power cabling must be at least 100 mm (4 in) from the drive in all directions
Table 3-4 Spacing required between drive / enclosure and drive /
EMC filter
Drive Size Spacing (B)
3 0 mm (0.00 in)*
4
5
6
30 mm (1.18 in)
7
8
9
* 15 mm spacing is required at 55°C.

NOTE
Drive sizes 03 to 05 can be tile mounted where limited mounting space
is available. The tile mounting kit is not supplied with the drive, it can be
purchased separately.

Issue Number: 3
3.6.3 Enclosure sizing Figure 3-29 Enclosure having front, sides and top panels free to
1. Add the dissipation figures from section 12.1.2 Power dissipation on dissipate heat
page 232 for each drive that is to be installed in the enclosure.
2. If an external EMC filter is to be used with each drive, add the
dissipation figures from section 12.2.1 EMC filter ratings on
page 245 for each external EMC filter that is to be installed in the
enclosure.
3. If the braking resistor is to be mounted inside the enclosure, add the H
average power figures from for each braking resistor that is to be
installed in the enclosure.
4. Calculate the total heat dissipation (in Watts) of any other equipment
to be installed in the enclosure.
5. Add the heat dissipation figures obtained above. This gives a figure
D
in Watts for the total heat that will be dissipated inside the enclosure.
W
Calculating the size of a sealed enclosure
The enclosure transfers internally generated heat into the surrounding
Insert the following values:
air by natural convection (or external forced air flow); the greater the
Tint 40 °C
surface area of the enclosure walls, the better is the dissipation
capability. Only the surfaces of the enclosure that are unobstructed (not Text 30 °C
in contact with a wall or floor) can dissipate heat. k 5.5
P 392.4 W
Calculate the minimum required unobstructed surface area Ae for the
enclosure from: The minimum required heat conducting area is then:
392.4
P A e = ---------------------------------
A e = ----------------------------------- 5.5 ( 40 – 30 )
k ( T int – T ext )
= 7.135 m2 (77.8 ft2) (1 m2 = 10.9 ft2)
Where:
Estimate two of the enclosure dimensions - the height (H) and depth (D),
Ae Unobstructed surface area in m2 (1 m2 = 10.9 ft2) for instance. Calculate the width (W) from:
T
ext Maximum expected temperature in oC outside the A e – 2HD
W = --------------------------
enclosure H+D
Tint Maximum permissible temperature in oC inside the Inserting H = 2m and D = 0.6 m, obtain the minimum width:
enclosure 7.135 – ( 2 × 2 × 0.6 )
P Power in Watts dissipated by all heat sources in the W = -----------------------------------------------------
2 + 0.6
enclosure
k Heat transmission coefficient of the enclosure material =1.821 m (71.7 in)
in W/m2/oC If the enclosure is too large for the space available, it can be made
Example smaller only by attending to one or all of the following:
To calculate the size of an enclosure for the following: • Using a lower PWM switching frequency to reduce the dissipation in
the drives
• Two drives operating at the Normal Duty rating
• Reducing the ambient temperature outside the enclosure, and/or
• External EMC filter for each drive
applying forced-air cooling to the outside of the enclosure
• Braking resistors are to be mounted outside the enclosure
• Reducing the number of drives in the enclosure
• Maximum ambient temperature inside the enclosure: 40°C
• Removing other heat-generating equipment
• Maximum ambient temperature outside the enclosure: 30°C
For example, if the power dissipation from each drive is 187 W and the Calculating the air-flow in a ventilated enclosure
power dissipation from each external EMC filter is 9.2 W. The dimensions of the enclosure are required only for accommodating
Total dissipation: 2 x (187 + 9.2) =392.4 W the equipment. The equipment is cooled by the forced air flow.
Calculate the minimum required volume of ventilating air from:
NOTE
Power dissipation for the drives and the external EMC filters can be 3kP
V = ---------------------------
obtained from Chapter 12 Technical data on page 227 T int – T ext
The enclosure is to be made from painted 2 mm (0.079 in) sheet steel Where:
having a heat transmission coefficient of 5.5 W/m2/oC. Only the top, V Air-flow in m3 per hour (1 m3/hr = 0.59 ft3/min)
front, and two sides of the enclosure are free to dissipate heat. Text Maximum expected temperature in °C outside the
The value of 5.5 W/m2/ºC can generally be used with a sheet steel enclosure
enclosure (exact values can be obtained by the supplier of the material). Tint Maximum permissible temperature in °C inside the
If in any doubt, allow for a greater margin in the temperature rise. enclosure
P Power in Watts dissipated by all heat sources in the
enclosure
Po
k Ratio of -------
Pl
Where:
P0 is the air pressure at sea level
PI is the air pressure at the installation
Typically use a factor of 1.2 to 1.3, to allow also for pressure-drops in
dirty air-filters.

Issue Number: 3
Example 3.9 Enclosing standard drive for high

To calculate the size of an enclosure for the following: environmental protection
• Three drives operating at the Normal Duty rating
An explanation of environmental protection rating is provided in section
• External EMC filter for each drive
12.1.9 IP / UL Rating .
• Braking resistors are to be mounted outside the enclosure
• Maximum ambient temperature inside the enclosure: 40 °C The standard drive is rated to IP20 pollution degree 2 (dry, non-
• Maximum ambient temperature outside the enclosure: 30 °C conductive contamination only) (NEMA 1). However, it is possible to
configure the drive to achieve IP65 rating (NEMA 12) at the rear of the
For example, dissipation of each drive: 101 W and dissipation of each
heatsink for through-panel mounting (some current derating is required).
external EMC filter: 6.9 W (max). Refer to Table 12-2 on page 229.
Total dissipation: 3 x (101 + 6.9) = 323.7 W This allows the front of the drive, along with various switchgear, to be
Insert the following values: housed in an IP65 (NEMA 12) enclosure with the heatsink protruding
Tint 40 °C through the panel to the external environment. Thus, the majority of the
Text 30 °C heat generated by the drive is dissipated outside the enclosure
k 1.3 maintaining a reduced temperature inside the enclosure. This also relies
P 323.7 W on a good seal being made between the heatsink and the rear of the
Then: enclosure using the gaskets provided.
Figure 3-30 Example of IP65 (NEMA 12) through-panel layout
3 × 1.3 × 323.7
V = ---------------------------------------
40 – 30 IP65 (NEMA 12)
enclosure
= 126.2 m3/hr (74.5 ft3 /min) (1 m 3/ hr = 0.59 ft3/min)
3.7 Enclosure design and drive ambient

temperature
Drive derating is required for operation in high ambient temperatures
Totally enclosing or through panel mounting the drive in either a sealed
cabinet (no airflow) or in a well ventilated cabinet makes a significant
difference on drive cooling. Drive with
high IP insert
The chosen method affects the ambient temperature value (Trate) which installed
IP20
should be used for any necessary derating to ensure sufficient cooling (NEMA1)
for the whole of the drive.
The ambient temperature for the four different combinations is defined
below:
1. Totally enclosed with no air flow (<2 m/s) over the drive
Trate = Tint + 5 °C
2. Totally enclosed with air flow (>2 m/s) over the drive
Trate = Tint
3. Through panel mounted with no airflow (<2 m/s) over the drive
Trate = the greater of Text +5 °C, or Tint
Gasket
4. Through panel mounted with air flow (>2 m/s) over the drive seal
Trate = the greater of Text or Tint
Where: The main gasket should be installed as shown in Figure 3-31.
Text = Temperature outside the cabinet
On drive sizes 3, 4 and 5, in order to achieve the high IP rating at the
Tint = Temperature inside the cabinet rear of the heatsink it is necessary to seal a heatsink vent by installing
Trate = Temperature used to select current rating from tables in the high IP insert as shown in Figure 3-33, Figure 3-34 and Figure 3-35.
Chapter 12 Technical data on page 227.
3.8 Heatsink fan operation

The drive is ventilated by an internal heatsink mounted fan. The fan
housing forms a baffle plate, channelling the air through the heatsink
chamber. Thus, regardless of mounting method (surface mounting or
through-panel mounting), the installing of additional baffle plates is not
required.
Ensure the minimum clearances around the drive are maintained to
allow air to flow freely.
The heatsink fan on all sizes is a variable speed fan. The drive controls
the speed at which the fan runs based on the temperature of the
heatsink and the drive's thermal model system. The maximum speed at
which the fan operates can be limited in Pr 06.045. This could incur an
output current derating. Refer to section 3.13.2 Fan removal
procedure on page 50 for information on fan removal. The size 6
onwards is also installed with a variable speed fan to ventilate the
capacitor bank.

Issue Number: 3
Figure 3-31 Installing the gasket Figure 3-33 Installation of high IP insert for size 3
Enclosure
rear wall
Gasket
Drive
To seal the space between the drive and the backplate, use two sealing
1. To install the high IP insert, firstly place a flat head screwdriver into
brackets as shown in Figure 3-32. The sealing brackets are included in
the slot highlighted (1).
the accessories kitbox supplied with the drive.
2. Pull the hinged baffle down to expose the ventilation hole, install the
Figure 3-32 Through panel mounting high IP insert into the ventilation hole in the heatsink (2).
3. Ensure the high IP insert is securely installed by firmly pressing it
Enclosure into place (3).
rear wall
4. Close the hinged baffle as shown (1).
To remove the high IP insert, reverse the above instructions.
The guidelines in Table 3-5 should be followed.
Through panel
securing bracket
Through panel
securing bracket

Issue Number: 3
Figure 3-34 Installation of high IP insert for size 4 Figure 3-35 Installation of high IP insert for size 5
2. Pull the hinged baffle up to expose the ventilation holes, install the
high IP inserts into the ventilation holes in the heatsink (2).
3. Ensure the high IP inserts are securely installed by firmly pressing
them into place (3).
4. Close the hinged baffle as shown (1).
The guidelines in Table 3-5 should be followed.
Table 3-5 Environment considerations
2. Pull the hinged baffle up to expose the ventilation hole, install the Environment High IP insert Comments
high IP insert into the ventilation hole in the heatsink (2). Clean Not installed
3. Ensure the high IP insert is securely installed by firmly pressing it
Dry, dusty (non-conductive) Installed
into place (3). Regular cleaning
4. Close the hinged baffle as shown (1). Dry, dusty (conductive) Installed
recommended
IP65 compliance Installed
The guidelines in Table 3-5 should be followed. NOTE

A current derating must be applied to the drive if the high IP insert is
installed. Derating information is provided in section 12.1.1 Power and
current ratings (Derating for switching frequency and temperature) on
page 227.
Failure to do so may result in nuisance tripping.

Issue Number: 3
NOTE 3. Remove the brake resistor bung from the hole in the chassis, the
When designing an IP65 (NEMA 12) enclosure (Figure 3-30 Example of closed end of the bung will need to be pierced so that the cable has
IP65 (NEMA 12) through-panel layout on page 40), consideration should access to be routed through.
be made to the dissipation from the front of the drive. 4. Feed brake resistor bung onto outer insulation of brake resistor
cable. The wider end of the bung should be inserted first. The
Table 3-6 Power losses from the front of the drive when through-
Narrow end should align with end of insulation.
panel mounted
5. Install the braking resistor to the heatsink using captive screws. The
Frame size Power loss screws should be tighten to a maximum torque of 2 N m (1.5 lb ft).
3 6. Route the cables through the provided hole at the rear of the
heatsink as shown in Figure 3-36 and take the cable out from the
4
front side of the drive. Ensure the cables are routed between the fins
5
of the heatsink.
6 7. Crimp the cable ends and make appropriate connections. The brake
7 terminals must be tightened to a maximum torque of 2 N m (1.5 Ib ft).
8 8. Replace the terminal covers on the drive, tighten to a maximum
torque of 1 N m (0.7 lb ft).
3.10 Heatsink mounted brake resistor Figure 3-37 Brake resistor installation on size 4
The internal / heatsink mounted braking resistors must only

be used with the following drives.
Brake resistor 1220-2752-00 must only be used with size 3
drives. Brake resistor 1299-0003-00 must only be used with
WARNING size 4 and 5 drives.
3.10.1 Size 3, 4 and 5 internal braking resistor

Size 3, 4 and 5 have been designed with an optional space-saving
heatsink mounted resistor. The resistor can be installed within the
heatsink fins of the drive. When the heatsink resistor is used, an external
thermal protection device is not required as the resistor is designed such
that it will fail safely under any fault conditions. The in-built software
overload protection is set-up at default to protect the resistor. The
resistor is rated to IP54 (NEMA 12).
3.10.2 Internal braking resistor installation

instructions
Figure 3-36 Brake resistor installation on size 3
1. Remove the terminal covers as detailed in section 3.3.1 Removing

the terminal covers on page 22.
2. Remove the brake resistor bung from the hole in the chassis, the
closed end of the bung will need to be pierced so that the cable has
access to be routed through.
3. Feed brake resistor bung onto outer insulation of brake resistor
4. Install the braking resistor to the heatsink using captive screws as
shown in Figure 3-37. The screws should be tighten to a maximum
5. Route the cables through the provided hole at the rear of the
front side of the drive. Ensure the cables are routed between the
tabs of the heatsink, and the cables are not trapped between the
heatsink fins and the resistor.
6. Crimp the cable ends and make appropriate connections. The brake
terminals must be tightened to a maximum torque of 2 N m (1.5 Ib
1. Remove the terminal covers as detailed in section 3.3.1 Removing ft).
the terminal covers on page 22. 7. Replace the terminal covers on the drive, tighten to a maximum
2. Remove the internal EMC filter as shown in section 4.12.2 Internal torque of 1 N m (0.7 lb ft).
EMC filter on page 70.

Issue Number: 3
Figure 3-38 Brake resistor installation on size 5
1. Remove the terminal covers as detailed in section 3.3.1 Removing

the terminal covers on page 22.
2. Remove the brake resistor bung from the hole in the chassis, the
closed end of the bung will need to be pierced so that the cable has
access to be routed through.
3. Feed brake resistor bung onto outer insulation of brake resistor
4. Install the braking resistor to the heatsink using captive screws. The
screws should be tighten to a maximum torque of 2 N m (1.5 lb ft).
5. Route the cables through the provided hole at the rear of the
front side of the drive. Ensure the cables are routed between the fins
of the heatsink, and the cables are not trapped between the heatsink
fins and the resistor.
6. Crimp the cable ends and make appropriate connections. The brake
terminals must be tightened to a maximum torque of 2 N m (1.5 Ib ft).
7. Replace the terminal covers on the drive, tighten to a maximum

Issue Number: 3
3.11 External EMC filter

The external EMC filter details for each drive rating are provided in the table below.
Table 3-7 External EMC filter data
Weight
Model CT part number
kg Ib
200 V
03200050 to 03200106 4200-3230 1.9 4.20
04200137 to 04200185 4200-0272 4.0 8.80
05200250 4200-0312 5.5 12.10
06200330 to 06200440 4200-2300 6.5 14.3
07200610 to 07200830
08201160 to 08201320
400 V
03400025 to 03400100 4200-3480 2.0 4.40
04400150 to 04400172 4200-0252 4.1 9.00
05400270 to 05400300 4200-0402 5.5 12.10
06400350 to 06400470 4200-4800 6.7 14.8
07400660 to 07401000
08401340 to 08401570
575 V
05500030 to 05500069 4200-0122
06500100 to 06500350 4200-3690 7.0 15.4
07500440 to 07500550
08500630 to 08500860
690 V
07600190 to 07600540
08600630 to 08600860
The external EMC filters for size 3 can be footprint or bookcase mounted, see Figure 3-39 and Figure 3-40.
Mount the external EMC filter following the guidelines in section 4.12.5 Compliance with generic emission standards on page 74.
Figure 3-39 Footprint mounting the EMC filter Figure 3-40 Bookcase mounting the EMC filter

Issue Number: 3
Figure 3-41 External EMC filter
Y
Z
V
U1 V1 W1
PE U2 V2 W2
Netz / Line
Last / Load
L1'
W C X X L2' CS
L3'
Y
Z
D E Y Z
V: Ground stud X: Threaded holes for footprint mounting of the drive Y: Footprint mounting hole diameter
Z: Bookcase mounting slot diameter. CS: Cable size
Table 3-8 Size 3 external EMC filter dimensions
CT part
A B C D E H W V X Y Z CS
number
4200-3230 384 mm 414 mm 56 mm 41 mm 426 mm 83 mm 5.5 mm 5.5 mm 300 mm
M5 M5
4200-3480 (15.12 in) (16.30 in) (2.21 in) (1.61 in) (16.77 in) (3.27 in) (0.22 in) (0.22 in) (11.81 in)

CT part
number
4200-0272 395 mm 425 mm 100 mm 60 mm 437 mm 123 mm 300 mm
M6 M6
4200-0252 (15.55 in) (16.73 in) (3.94 in) (2.36 in) (17.21 in) (4.84 in) (11.81 in)

CT part
number
4200-0312
395 mm 425 mm 106 mm 60 mm 437 mm 143 mm 300 mm
4200-0402 M6 M6
(15.55 in) (16.73 in) (4.17 in) (2.36 in) (17.21 in) (5.63 in) (11.81 in)
4200-0122

CT part
number
4200-2300
392 mm 420 mm 180 mm 60 mm 33 mm 434 mm 210 mm 6.5 mm 6.5 mm 300 mm
4200-4800 M6 M6
(15.43 in) (16.54 in) (7.09 in) (2.36 in) (1.30 in) (17.09 in) (8.27 in) (0.26 in) (0.26 in) (11.81 in)
4200-3690

CT part
number

CT part
number

Issue Number: 3
3.12 Electrical terminals

3.12.1 Location of the power and ground terminals
Figure 3-42 Locations of the power and ground terminals
Key
1. Control terminals 4. Ground connections 7. DC bus -
2. Relay terminals 5. AC power terminals 8. DC bus +
3. Additional ground connection 6. Motor terminals 9. Brake terminal

Issue Number: 3
3.12.2 Terminal sizes and torque settings
To avoid a fire hazard and maintain validity of the UL listing, adhere to the specified tightening torques for the power and ground
terminals. Refer to the following tables.
WARNING
Table 3-14 Drive control and relay terminal data

Model Connection type Torque setting
All Plug-in terminal block 0.5 N m (0.4 lb ft)
Table 3-15 Drive power terminal data
Unidrive M AC and motor terminals DC and braking Ground terminal

frame size Recommended Maximum Recommended Maximum Recommended Maximum
Plug-in terminal block T20 Torx (M4) T20 Torx (M4) / M4 Nut (7 mm AF)
3 and 4
0.7 N m (0.5 lb ft) 0.8 N m (0.6 lb ft) 2.0 N m (1.4 Ib ft) 2.5 N m (1.8 Ib ft) 2.0 N m (1.4 Ib ft) 2.5 N m (1.8 Ib ft)
Plug-in terminal block T20 Torx (M4) / M4 Nut (7 mm AF) T20 Torx (M4) / M4 Nut (7 mm AF)
5
M6 Nut (10 mm AF) M6 Nut (10 mm AF) M6 Nut (10 mm AF)
6
6.0 N m(4.4 Ib ft) 8.0 N m(6.0 Ib ft) 6.0 N m(4.4 Ib ft) 8.0 N m(6.0 Ib ft) 6.0 N m(4.4 Ib ft) 8.0 N m(6.0 Ib ft)
7
12 N m (8.8 Ib ft) 14 N m (10.0 Ib ft) 12 N m (8.8 Ib ft) 14 N m (10.0 Ib ft) 12 N m (8.8 Ib ft) 14 N m (10.0 Ib ft)
8
Table 3-16 Plug-in terminal block maximum cable sizes 3.13 Routine maintenance
Model size Terminal block description Max cable size The drive should be installed in a cool, clean, well ventilated location.
Contact of moisture and dust with the drive should be prevented.
11 way control connectors 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG)
All Regular checks of the following should be carried out to ensure drive /
2 way relay connector 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG)
installation reliability are maximized:
3
6 way AC power connector 6 mm2 (10 AWG) Environment
4
3 way AC power connector Ensure the enclosure temperature remains at or
5
3 way motor connector 8 mm2 (8 AWG) Ambient temperature
below maximum specified
6 Ensure the drive remains dust free – check that
2 way low voltage power 2 the heatsink and drive fan are not gathering
7 1.5 mm (16 AWG) Dust
24 V supply connector dust. The lifetime of the fan is reduced in dusty
8
environments.
Ensure the drive enclosure shows no signs of
Moisture
Table 3-17 External EMC filter terminal data condensation
Enclosure
Power Ground
CT part connections connections Ensure filters are not blocked and that air is free
Enclosure door filters
number to flow
Max cable Ground
Max torque Max torque
size stud size Electrical
4200-3230 4 mm2 0.8 N m M5 3.0 N m Screw connections Ensure all screw terminals remain tight
4200-3480 (12 AWG) (0.59 lb ft) M5 (2.2 lb ft) Ensure all crimp terminals remains tight – check
4200-2300 Crimp terminals for any discoloration which could indicate
4200-4500 16 mm2 2.3 N m
M6
4.8 N m overheating
(6 AWG) (1.70 Ib ft) (2.8 lb ft) Cables Check all cables for signs of damage
4200-3690

Issue Number: 3
3.13.1 Real time clock battery replacement

Those keypads which have the real time clock feature contain a battery
to ensure the clock works when the drive is powered down. The battery
has a long life time but if the battery needs to be replaced or removed,
follow the instructions below.
Low battery voltage is indicated by low battery symbol on the keypad

display.
Figure 3-43 KI-Keypad RTC (rear view)
Figure 3-43 above illustrates the rear view of the KI-Keypad RTC.
1. To remove the battery cover insert a flat head screwdriver into the
slot as shown (1), push and turn anti-clockwise until the battery
cover is released.
2. Replace the battery (the battery type is: CR2032).
3. Reverse point 1 above to replace battery cover.
NOTE
Ensure the battery is disposed of correctly.

Issue Number: 3
3.13.2 Fan removal procedure

Figure 3-44 Removal of the size 3 and 4 heatsink fan (size 3 shown)
5 5
1. Ensure the fan cable is disconnected from the drive prior to attempting fan removal.
2. Press the two tabs (1) inwards to release the fan from the drive frame.
3. Using the central fan tab (2), withdraw the fan assembly from the drive housing.
Replace the fan by reversing the above instructions.
NOTE
If the drive is surface mounted using the outer holes on the mounting bracket, then the heatsink fan can be replaced without removing the drive from
the backplate.
Figure 3-45 Removal of the size 6 heatsink fan
A: Press the tabs (1) inwards to release the fan assembly from the underside of the drive.
B: Use the tabs (1) to withdraw the fan by pulling it away from the drive.
C: Depress and hold the locking release on the fan cable lead as shown (2).
D: With the locking release depressed (2), take hold of the fan supply cable and carefully pull to separate the connectors.

Issue Number: 3
4 Electrical installation Permanent magnet motors

Permanent magnet motors generate electrical power if they
Many cable management features have been incorporated into the are rotated, even when the supply to the drive is
product and accessories, this chapter shows how to optimize them. Key disconnected. If that happens then the drive will become
WARNING
features include: energized through its motor terminals.
If the motor load is capable of rotating the motor when the
• SAFE TORQUE OFF function
supply is disconnected, then the motor must be isolated from
• Internal EMC filter
• EMC compliance with shielding / grounding accessories the drive before gaining access to any live parts.
• Product rating, fusing and cabling information
• Brake resistor details (selection / ratings) 4.1 Power connections
Electric shock risk 4.1.1 AC and DC connections
The voltages present in the following locations can cause Figure 4-1 Size 3 power connections
severe electric shock and may be lethal:
DC / Brake connections
WARNING
• AC supply cables and connections
• DC and brake cables, and connections
• Output cables and connections
Optional
• Many internal parts of the drive, and external option units braking
resistor
Thermal
overload
Unless otherwise indicated, control terminals are single protection
device
insulated and must not be touched.
BR
Isolation device
The AC and / or DC power supply must be disconnected
from the drive using an approved isolation device before any +DC
cover is removed from the drive or before any servicing work
Internal
WARNING is performed. EMC filter
-DC
STOP function
The STOP function does not remove dangerous voltages
from the drive, the motor or any external option units.
WARNING
SAFE TORQUE OFF function

The SAFE TORQUE OFF function does not remove
dangerous voltages from the drive, the motor or any external 3
WARNING
option units.
Stored charge
The drive contains capacitors that remain charged to a
potentially lethal voltage after the AC and / or DC power
supply has been disconnected. If the drive has been
WARNING energized, the AC and / or DC power supply must be AC Connections
isolated at least ten minutes before work may continue.
Normally, the capacitors are discharged by an internal PE L1 L2 L3 U V W
resistor. Under certain, unusual fault conditions, it is possible

that the capacitors may fail to discharge, or be prevented
Optional EMC
from being discharged by a voltage applied to the output filter
terminals. If the drive has failed in a manner that causes the

Optional
display to go blank immediately, it is possible the capacitors line reactor
will not be discharged. In this case, consult Control

Techniques or their authorized distributor. Fuses
Equipment supplied by plug and socket

Special attention must be given if the drive is installed in
Motor
equipment which is connected to the AC supply by a plug
and socket. The AC supply terminals of the drive are L1 L2 L3
WARNING connected to the internal capacitors through rectifier diodes Supply Mains
Optional ground
connection
Supply
which are not intended to give safety isolation. If the plug Ground
terminals can be touched when the plug is disconnected If the heatsink mounted resistor is used, an overload protection device is
from the socket, a means of automatically isolating the plug not required. The resistor is designed to fail safely under fault conditions.
from the drive must be used (e.g. a latching relay). See Figure 4-6 for further information on ground connections.

Issue Number: 3
Figure 4-2 Size 4 power connections Figure 4-3 Size 5 power connections
DC / Brake connections DC / Brake connections
Optional
braking Thermal
Optional resistor overload
braking Thermal protection
resistor overload device
protection
device
Thermal BR
overload
BR protection Optional
device
braking
resistor
+DC
+DC
DC - DC + BR -DC
-DC
AC Connections
PE L1 L2 L3 U V W
1 2
AC Connections Motor Connections
Optional EMC
filter L1 L2 L3 PE U V W
Optional
line reactor
Optional EMC
filter
Fuses
Optional
line reactor
Motor
Fuses
L1 L2 L3
Optional ground
Supply Mains connection
Ground Supply
Motor
If the heatsink mounted resistor is used, an overload protection device is

not required. The resistor is designed to fail safely under fault conditions. L1 L2 L3
Optional ground
Mains connection
See Figure 4-6 for further information on ground connections. Supply
Supply
Ground
The upper terminal block (1) is used for AC supply connection.

The lower terminal block (2) is used for Motor connection.
If the heatsink mounted resistor is used, an overload protection device is
not required. The resistor is designed to fail safely under fault conditions.
See Figure 4-7 for further information on ground connections.

Issue Number: 3
Figure 4-4 Size 6 power connections Figure 4-5 Size 7 and 8 power connections (size 7 shown)
DC / Brake connections Input connections
Supply Mains
ground Supply
Thermal L1 L2 L3
overload
protection Optional
device
braking
resistor
Fuses
DC - DC + BR Optional
line reactor
Optional
EMC filter
L1 L2 L3
PE +DC -DC
AC Connections Motor Connections

8
L1 L2 L3 PE U V W
Optional EMC
filter
Optional
line reactor
Fuses
Output connections
U V W
Motor
L1 L2 L3 +DC BR
Optional ground
Mains Supply connection
Supply Ground
Thermal
Optional
overload
braking
protection
resistor
device
Motor
Optional ground
connection

Issue Number: 3
4.1.2 Ground connections Size 6

On a size 6, the supply and motor ground connections are made using
Electrochemical corrosion of grounding terminals the M6 studs located above the supply and motor terminals. Refer to
Ensure that grounding terminals are protected against Figure 4-8 below.
corrosion i.e. as could be caused by condensation. Figure 4-8 Size 6 ground connections
WARNING
Size 3 and 4
On sizes 3 and 4, the supply and motor ground connections are made
using the M4 studs located either side of the drive near the plug-in power
connector. Refer to Figure 4-6 for additional ground connection.
Figure 4-6 Size 3 and 4 ground connections
34
1
1 1
1. Ground connection studs.

2. Additional ground connection.
Size 5
On size 5, the supply and motor ground connections are made using the
M5 studs located near the plug-in power connector. Refer to Figure 4-7
for additional ground connection.
Figure 4-7 Size 5 ground connections
1. Ground connection studs
2
1
1. Ground connection studs.

2. Additional ground connection.

Issue Number: 3
Size 7 Table 4-1 Protective ground cable ratings

On size 7, the supply and motor ground connections are made using the
M8 studs located by the supply and motor connection terminals. Input phase
Minimum ground conductor size
conductor size
Size 8
On size 8, the supply and motor ground connections are made using the Either 10 mm2 or two conductors of the
M10 studs located by the supply and motor connection terminals. same cross-sectional area as the input
≤ 10 mm2 phase conductor (an additional ground
Figure 4-9 Size 7 and 8 ground connections
connection is provided on sizes 3, 4 and 5
1 for this purpose).
The same cross-sectional area as the input
> 10 mm2 and ≤ 16 mm2 phase conductor
> 16 mm2 and ≤ 35 mm2 16 mm2

Half of the cross-sectional area of the input
> 35 mm2 phase conductor
4.2 AC supply requirements

Voltage:
200 V drive: 200 V to 240 V ±10 %
400 V drive: 380 V to 480 V ±10 %
8
575 V drive: 500 V to 575 V ±10 %
690 V drive: 500 V to 690 V ±10 %
Number of phases: 3
Maximum supply imbalance: 2 % negative phase sequence (equivalent
to 3 % voltage imbalance between phases).
Frequency range: 45 to 66 Hz
For UL compliance only, the maximum supply symmetrical fault current
must be limited to 100 kA
4.2.1 Supply types
All drives are suitable for use on any supply type i.e TN-S, TN-C-S, TT
and IT.
1
• Supplies with voltage up to 600 V may have grounding at any
1. Ground connection studs. potential, i.e. neutral, centre or corner (“grounded delta”)
• Supplies with voltage above 600 V may not have corner grounding
The ground loop impedance must conform to the If an SI-Applications Plus or SI-Register module is installed in
requirements of local safety regulations. the drive, then the drive must not be used on a corner-
grounded or centre-grounded delta supply if the supply
The drive must be grounded by a connection capable of
voltage is above 300 V. If this is required, please contact the
WARNING carrying the prospective fault current until the protective WARNING supplier of the drive for more information.
device (fuse, etc.) disconnects the AC supply.
The ground connections must be inspected and tested at Drives are suitable for use on supplies of installation category III and
appropriate intervals. lower, according to IEC60664-1. This means they may be connected
permanently to the supply at its origin in a building, but for outdoor
installation additional over-voltage suppression (transient voltage surge
suppression) must be provided to reduce category IV to category III.
Operation with IT (ungrounded) supplies:

Special attention is required when using internal or external
EMC filters with ungrounded supplies, because in the event
of a ground (earth) fault in the motor circuit the drive may not
WARNING
trip and the filter could be over-stressed. In this case, either
the filter must not be used (removed) or additional
independent motor ground fault protection must be provided.
For instructions on removal, refer to section 4.12.2 Internal
For details of ground fault protection contact the supplier of
the drive.
A ground fault in the supply has no effect in any case. If the motor must
continue to run with a ground fault in its own circuit then an input
isolating transformer must be provided and if an EMC filter is required it
must be located in the primary circuit.
Unusual hazards can occur on ungrounded supplies with more than one
source, for example on ships. Contact the supplier of the drive for more
information.

Issue Number: 3
4.2.2 Supplies requiring line reactors 4.3 Supplying the drive with DC
Input line reactors reduce the risk of damage to the drive resulting from
All drive sizes have the option to be powered from an external DC power
poor phase balance or severe disturbances on the supply network.
supply. Refer to section 3.12 Electrical terminals on page 47 to identify
Where line reactors are to be used, reactance values of approximately 2 the location of DC supply connections.
% are recommended. Higher values may be used if necessary, but may
The DC supply connections for size 3 are located under the DC / Braking
result in a loss of drive output (reduced torque at high speed) because of
terminal cover. Figure 4-10 shows DC supply connections and cable
the voltage drop.
routing.
For all drive ratings, 2 % line reactors permit drives to be used with a
Figure 4-10 DC supply connections (size 3 shown)
supply unbalance of up to 3.5 % negative phase sequence (equivalent to
5% voltage imbalance between phases).
Severe disturbances may be caused by the following factors, for example:
• Power factor correction equipment connected close to the drive.
• Large DC drives having no or inadequate line reactors connected to
the supply.
• Across the line (DOL) started motor(s) connected to the supply such
that when any of these motors are started, the voltage dip exceeds
20 %.
Such disturbances may cause excessive peak currents to flow in the
input power circuit of the drive. This may cause nuisance tripping, or in
extreme cases, failure of the drive.
Drives of low power rating may also be susceptible to disturbance when
connected to supplies with a high rated capacity.
Line reactors are particularly recommended for use with the following
drive models when one of the above factors exists, or when the supply
capacity exceeds 175 kVA:
03200050, 03200066, 03200080, 03200106, NOTE
03400025, 03400031, 03400045, 03400062 The Internal EMC filter and plastics have been removed from the above
Model sizes 03400078 to 07600540 have an internal DC choke and Figure 4-10 to demonstrate the routing of the DC cables.
082001160 to 08600860 have internal AC line chokes so they do not
require AC line reactors except for cases of excessive phase unbalance
or extreme supply conditions.
When required, each drive must have its own reactor(s). Three individual
reactors or a single three-phase reactor should be used.
Reactor current ratings
The current rating of the line reactors should be as follows:
Continuous current rating:
Not less than the continuous input current rating of the drive
Repetitive peak current rating:
Not less than twice the continuous input current rating of the drive
4.2.3 Input inductor calculation

To calculate the inductance required (at Y%), use the following equation:
Y V 1
L = ---------- × ------- × ------------
100 3 2πfI
Where:
I = drive rated input current (A)
L = inductance (H)
f = supply frequency (Hz)
V = voltage between lines

Issue Number: 3
4.4 DC bus paralleling allows any fieldbus modules, application modules, encoders or serial
communications to continue to operate.
DC bus paralleling using standard cable / busbars is supported by all
• It can be used to commission the drive when the line power supply is
frame sizes. not available, as the display operates correctly. However, the drive
On frame sizes 3, 4, 5 and 6 terminal and enclosure design enables the will be in the Under voltage trip state unless either line power supply
DC bus of a number of drives to be connected together using pre-made or low voltage DC operation is enabled, therefore diagnostics may
busbars. The diagram below shows how the busbar links connect the not be possible. (Power down save parameters are not saved when
DC bus of several drives together. using the 24 V back-up power supply input).
The connecting of the DC bus between several drives is typically used to: • If the DC bus voltage is too low to run the main SMPS in the drive,
1. Return energy from a drive which is being overhauled by the load to then the 24 V supply can be used to supply all the low voltage power
a second motoring drive. requirements of the drive. Low Under Voltage Threshold Select
2. Allow the use of one braking resistor to dissipate regenerative (06.067) must also be enabled for this to happen.
energy from several drives.
NOTE
Figure 4-11 DC bus paralleling (size 3 shown)
On size 6 and larger, if the power 24 Vdc supply is not connected none
of the above mentioned functions can be used and “Waiting For Power
Systems” will be displayed on the keypad. The location of the power 24
Vdc can be identified from Figure 4-12.
Table 4-3 24 Vdc Supply connections
Function Sizes 3-5 Sizes 6-8
Supplement the drive’s Terminal Terminal
internal supply 1, 2 1, 2
Terminal
Back-up supply for the Terminal
1, 2
control circuit 1, 2
51, 52
The working voltage range of the control 24 V power supply is as

follows:
1 +24 Vdc
2 0V
Nominal operating voltage 24.0 Vdc
Minimum continuous operating voltage 19.2 V
Maximum continuous operating voltage 28.0 V
Minimum start up voltage 21.6 V
Maximum power supply requirement at 24 V 40 W
Recommended fuse 3 A, 50 Vdc
Minimum and maximum voltage values include ripple and noise. Ripple
and noise values must not exceed 5 %.
The working range of the 24 V power supply is as follows:
There are limitations to the combinations of drives which can be used in
this configuration. 51 0V
For application data, contact the supplier of the drive. 52 +24 Vdc
NOTE Size 6
The DC bus paralleling kit is not supplied with the drive but available to Nominal operating voltage 24.0 Vdc
order from Control Techniques. Minimum continuous operating voltage 18.6 Vdc
Table 4-2 DC bus paralleling kit part numbers Maximum continuous operating voltage 28.0 Vdc
Size CT part number Minimum startup voltage 18.4 Vdc
3 3470-0048-00 Maximum power supply requirement 40 W
4 3470-0061-00 Recommended fuse 4 A @ 50 Vdc
5 3470-0068-00 Size 7 and 8
6 3470-0063-00 Nominal operating voltage 24.0 Vdc
Minimum continuous operating voltage 19.2 Vdc
4.5 24 Vdc supply Maximum continuous operating voltage 30 Vdc
The 24 Vdc supply connected to control terminals 1 & 2 provides the Minimum startup voltage 21.6 Vdc
following functions: Maximum power supply requirement 60 W
• It can be used to supplement the drive's own internal 24 V supply Recommended fuse 3 A @ 50 Vdc
when multiple option modules are being used and the current drawn
by these module is greater than the drive can supply.
• It can be used as a back-up power supply to keep the control circuits
of the drive powered up when the line power supply is removed. This

Issue Number: 3
Figure 4-12 Location of the 24 Vdc power supply connection on size 6 Figure 4-14 Location of the 24 Vdc power supply connection on size 8
51 52
51 52
51 52
1. 24 Vdc power supply connection

Figure 4-13 Location of the 24 Vdc power supply connection on size 7 1. 24 Vdc power supply connection
4.6 Low voltage operation

With the addition of a 24 Vdc power supply to supply the control circuits,
the drive is able to operate from a low voltage DC supply with a range
from 24 Vdc to the maximum DC volts. It is possible for the drive to go
from operating on a normal line power supply voltage to operating on a
much lower supply voltage without interruption.
Going from low voltage operation to normal mains operation requires the
inrush current to be controlled. This may be provided externally. If not,
the drive supply can be interrupted to utilise the normal soft starting
method in the drive.
To fully exploit the new low voltage mode of operation, the under voltage
trip level is now user programmable. For application data, contact the
supplier of the drive.
The working voltage range of the low voltage DC power supply is as
follows:
51 52
Size 3 to 8
Minimum continuous operating voltage: 24 V
Minimum start up voltage: 23 V
Nominal continuous operating voltage: 24 V
1. 24 Vdc power supply connection Maximum over voltage trip threshold: 230 V drives: 415 V
400 V drives: 830 V
575 V drives: 990 V
690 V drives: 1190 V
4.7 Heatsink fan supply

The heatsink fan on size 3 to 8 is supplied internally by the drive.

Issue Number: 3
4.8 Ratings
The input current is affected by the supply voltage and impedance.
Typical input current
The values of typical input current are given to aid calculations for power flow and power loss.
The values of typical input current are stated for a balanced supply.
Maximum continuous input current
The values of maximum continuous input current are given to aid the selection of cables and fuses. These values are stated for the worst case
condition with the unusual combination of stiff supply with bad balance. The value stated for the maximum continuous input current would only be
seen in one of the input phases. The current in the other two phases would be significantly lower.
The values of maximum input current are stated for a supply with a 2 % negative phase-sequence imbalance and rated at the supply fault current
given in Table 4-4.
Table 4-4 Supply fault current used to calculate maximum input currents
Model Symmetrical fault level (kA)
All 100
Fuses
The AC supply to the drive must be installed with suitable protection against overload and short-circuits. Table 4-5 shows recommended
fuse ratings. Failure to observe this requirement will cause risk of fire.
WARNING
Table 4-5 AC Input current and fuse ratings (200 V)

Maximum Maximum Fuse rating
Typical
continuous overload IEC UL / USA
input
Model input input
current Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum
current current
Class Class
A A A A A A A
03200050 8.2 10.4 15.8 16 16
20
03200066 9.9 12.6 20.9 20 CC
20 25 gG
03200080 14 17 25 or J
25 25
03200106 16 20 34 25
04200137 17 20 30 25 25 25 25 CC
gG
04200185 23 28 41 32 32 30 30 or J
CC
05200250 24 31 52 40 40 gG 40 40
or J
06200330 42 48 64 60 CC
63 63 gG 70
06200440 49 56 85 70 or J
07200610 58 67 109 80 80 80 80
CC
07200750 73 84 135 100 100 gG 100 100
or J
07200830 91 105 149 125 125 125 125
08201160 123 137 213 200 200
200 200 gR HSJ
08201320 149 166 243 225 225

Issue Number: 3

Typical
continuous overload
input IEC UL / USA
Model input input
current
current current Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum
Class Class
A A A A A A A
03400025 5 5 7
03400031 6 7 9 10 10 10 10
03400045 8 9 13 CC
gG
03400062 11 21 or J
13
03400078 12 20 20 20 20 20
03400100 14 16 25
04400150 17 19 30 25 25 25 25 CC
gG
04400172 22 24 35 32 32 30 30 or J
05400270 26 29 52 CC
40 40 gG 35 35
05400300 27 30 58 or J
06400350 32 36 67 40
HSJ
06400420 41 46 80 63 63 gR 50 70
or DFJ
06400470 54 60 90 70
07400660 67 74 124 80 80
100 100 CC
07400770 80 88 145 gG 100 100
or J
07401000 96 105 188 125 125 125 125
08401340 137 155 267
250 250 gR 225 225 HSJ
08401570 164 177 303

Typical input
continuous overload input IEC UL / USA
Model current
input current current Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum
Class Class
A A A A A A A
05500030 4 4 7
10 10 CC
05500040 6 7 9 20 gG
or J
05500069 9 11 15 20 20
06500100 12 13 22 20 20
06500150 17 19 33 32 40 25 30
06500190 22 24 41 40 30 CC
gG
06500230 26 29 50 35 or J
50
06500290 33 37 63 63 40 50
06500350 41 47 76 63 50
07500440 41 45 75 50 50 50 50 CC
gG
07500550 57 62 94 80 80 80 80 or J
08500630 74 83 121 125 125 100 100
gR HSJ
08500860 92 104 165 160 160 150 150

Typical
continuous overload IEC UL / USA
input
Model input input
current Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum
current current
Class Class
A A A A A A A
07600190 18 20 32 25 25
07600240 23 26 41 32 30
50 50
07600290 28 31 49 40 35 CC
gG
07600380 36 39 65 or J
50 50
07600440 40 44 75
80 80
07600540 57 62 92 80 80
08600630 74 83 121 125 125 100 100
gR HSJ
08600860 92 104 165 160 160 150 150

Issue Number: 3
NOTE
Ensure cables used suit local wiring regulations.
The nominal cable sizes below are only a guide. The mounting and grouping of cables affects their current-carrying capacity, in some cases
smaller cables may be acceptable but in other cases a larger cable is required to avoid excessive temperature or voltage drop. Refer to
local wiring regulations for the correct size of cables.
CAUTION
Table 4-9 Cable ratings (200 V)

Cable size (IEC) Cable size (UL)
mm2 AWG
Model
Input Output Input Output
Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum
03200050
1.5 1.5 14 14
03200066
4 4 10 10
03200080
4 4 12 12
03200106
04200137 6 6 10 10
8 8 8 8
04200185 8 8 8 8
05200250 10 10 10 10 8 8 8 8
06200330 16 16 4 4
25 25 3 3
06200440 25 25 3 3
07200610 2 2
35 35
07200750 70 70 1 1/0 1 1/0
07200830 70 70 1/0 1/0
08201160 95 95 3/0 3/0
2 x 70 2 x 70 2x1 2x1
08201320 2 x 70 2 x 70 2x1 2x1

Issue Number: 3

mm2 AWG
Model
03400025 18 18
03400031 1.5 1.5 16 16
03400045
4 4 10 10
03400062 14 14
03400078 2.5 2.5
03400100 12 12
04400150 6 6 10 10
8 8 8 8
04400172 8 8 8 8
05400270
6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8
05400300
06400350 10 10 6 6
06400420 16 25 16 25 4 3 4 3
06400470 25 25 3 3
07400660 35 35 1 1
07400770 50 70 50 70 2 1/0 2 1/0
07401000 70 70 1/0 1/0
08401340 2 x 50 2 x 50 2x1 2x1
2 x 70 2 x 70 2 x 1/0 2 x 1/0
08401570 2 x 70 2 x 70 2 x 1/0 2 x 1/0

mm2 AWG
Model
05500030 0.75 0.75 16 16
05500040 1 1.5 1 1.5 14 16 14 16
05500069 1.5 1.5 14 14
06500100 2.5 2.5 14 14
06500150 4 4 10 10
06500190 6 6 10 10
25 25 3 3
06500230 8 8
10
06500290 10 6 6
06500350 16 6 6
07500440 16 16 4 4
25 25 3 3
07500550 25 25 3 3
08500630 35 35
50 50 1 1 1 1
08500860 50 50

mm2 AWG
Model
07600190 8 8
07600240 10 10 6 6
07600290 6 6
25 25 3 3
07600380 16 16 4 4
07600440 16 16 4 4
07600540 25 25 3 3
08600630 50 50 2 2
70 70 1/0 1/0
08600860 70 70 1/0 1/0

Issue Number: 3
NOTE Table 4-13 Maximum motor cable lengths (200 V drives)

PVC insulated cable should be used. 200 V Nominal AC supply voltage
NOTE Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of
Cable sizes are from IEC60364-5-52:2001 table A.52.C with correction the following switching frequencies
factor for 40°C ambient of 0.87 (from table A52.14) for cable installation Model
2 3 4 6 8 12 16
method B2 (multicore cable in conduit). kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz
Installation class (ref: IEC60364-5-52:2001) 03200050 65 m (210 ft)
B1 - Separate cables in conduit.
03200066 100 m (330 ft)
B2 - Multicore cable in conduit. 50 m 37 m
C - Multicore cable in free air. 03200080 130 m (425 ft) 75 m
100 m (245 ft) (165 ft) (120 ft)
150 m
Cable size may be reduced if a different installation method is used, or if 03200106 200 m (660 ft) (330 ft)
(490 ft)
the ambient temperature is lower.
04200137 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m 37 m
200 m (660 ft)
NOTE N 04200185 (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (120 ft)
The nominal output cable sizes assume that the motor maximum current 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m 37 m
05200250 200 m (660 ft)
matches that of the drive. Where a motor of reduced rating is used the (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (120 ft)
cable rating may be chosen to match that of the motor. To ensure that 06200330 300 m 200 m 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m
the motor and cable are protected against overload, the drive must be 06200440 (984 ft) (660 ft) (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft)
programmed with the correct motor rated current.
07200610
185 m 125 m 90 m
07200750 250 m (820 ft)
A fuse or other protection must be included in all live connections to the (607 ft) (410 ft) (295 ft)
AC supply. 07200830
08201160 185 m 125 m 90 m
Fuse types 250 m (820 ft)
The fuse voltage rating must be suitable for the drive supply voltage. 08201320 (607 ft) (410 ft) (295 ft)
Ground connections Table 4-14 Maximum motor cable lengths (400 V drives)
The drive must be connected to the system ground of the AC supply.
The ground wiring must conform to local regulations and codes of 400 V Nominal AC supply voltage
practice. Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of
the following switching frequencies
NOTE N Model
For information on ground cable sizes, refer to Table 4-1 Protective 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
ground cable ratings on page 55. kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz
03400025 65 m (210 ft)
4.8.1 Main AC supply contactor
03400031 100 m (330 ft)
The recommended AC supply contactor type for size 3 and 6 is AC1.
03400045 130 m (425 ft) 50 m 37 m
75 m
4.9 Output circuit and motor protection 03400062
150 m
100 m (245 ft) (165 ft) (120 ft)
03400078 200 m (660 ft) (330 ft)
The output circuit has fast-acting electronic short-circuit protection which (490 ft)
limits the fault current to typically no more than five times the rated 03400100
output current, and interrupts the current in approximately 20 µs. No 04400150 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m 37 m
200 m (660 ft) (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (120 ft)
additional short-circuit protection devices are required. 04400172
The drive provides overload protection for the motor and its cable. For 05400270 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m 37 m
200 m (660 ft)
this to be effective, Rated Current (00.046) must be set to suit the motor. 05400300 (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (120 ft)
06400350
300 m 200 m 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m
06400420
(984 ft) (660 ft) (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft)
Rated Current (00.046) must be set correctly to avoid a risk 06400470
of fire in the event of motor overload.
07400660
WARNING 185 m 125 m 90 m
07400770 250 m (820 ft)
(607 ft) (410 ft) (295 ft)
There is also provision for the use of a motor thermistor to prevent over- 07401000
heating of the motor, e.g. due to loss of cooling. 08401340 185 m 125 m 90 m
250 m (820 ft)
4.9.1 Cable types and lengths 08401570 (607 ft) (410 ft) (295 ft)
Since capacitance in the motor cable causes loading on the output of the
drive, ensure the cable length does not exceed the values given in Table
4-13, Table 4-14 and Table 4-15.
Use 105 °C (221 °F) (UL 60/75 °C temp rise) PVC-insulated cable with
copper conductors having a suitable voltage rating, for the following
power connections:
• AC supply to external EMC filter (when used)
• AC supply (or external EMC filter) to drive
• Drive to motor
• Drive to braking resistor

Issue Number: 3
Table 4-15 Maximum motor cable lengths (575 V drives) 4.9.3 Motor winding voltage
575 V Nominal AC supply voltage The PWM output voltage can adversely affect the inter-turn insulation in
the motor. This is because of the high rate of change of voltage, in
Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of conjunction with the impedance of the motor cable and the distributed
the following switching frequencies nature of the motor winding.
Model
2 3 4 6 8 12 16 For normal operation with AC supplies up to 500 Vac and a standard
kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz motor with a good quality insulation system, there is no need for any
05500030 special precautions. In case of doubt the motor supplier should be
05500040 consulted. Special precautions are recommended under the following
05500069 conditions, but only if the motor cable length exceeds 10 m:
06500100 • AC supply voltage exceeds 500 V
06500150 • DC supply voltage exceeds 670 V
• Operation of 400 V drive with continuous or very frequent sustained
06500190 300 m 200 m 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m
braking
06500230 (984 ft) (660 ft) (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft)
• Multiple motors connected to a single drive
06500290
For multiple motors, the precautions given in section 4.9.4 Multiple
06500350
motors on page 64 should be followed.
07500440
For the other cases listed, it is recommended that an inverter-rated
07500550
motor be used taking into account the voltage rating of the inverter. This
08500630 has a reinforced insulation system intended by the manufacturer for
08500860 repetitive fast-rising pulsed voltage operation.
Users of 575 V NEMA rated motors should note that the specification for
Table 4-16 Maximum motor cable lengths (690 V drives)
inverter-rated motors given in NEMA MG1 section 31 is sufficient for
690 V Nominal AC supply voltage motoring operation but not where the motor spends significant periods
Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of braking. In that case an insulation peak voltage rating of 2.2 kV is
the following switching frequencies recommended.
Model
2 3 4 6 8 12 16 If it is not practical to use an inverter-rated motor, an output choke
kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz (inductor) should be used. The recommended type is a simple iron-cored
component with a reactance of about 2 %. The exact value is not critical.
07600190
This operates in conjunction with the capacitance of the motor cable to
07600240 increase the rise-time of the motor terminal voltage and prevent
07600290 250 m 185 m 125 m 90 m excessive electrical stress.
07600380 (820 ft) (607 ft) (410 ft) (295 ft)
4.9.4 Multiple motors
07600440
Open-loop only
07600540 If the drive is to control more than one motor, one of the fixed V/F modes
08600630 250 m 185 m 125 m 90 m should be selected (Pr 05.014 = Fixed or Squared). Make the motor
08600860 (820 ft) (607 ft) (410 ft) (295 ft) connections as shown in Figure 4-16 and Figure 4-17. The maximum
motor cable lengths specified in section 4.9.1 Cable types and lengths
on page 63 apply to the sum of the total cable lengths from the drive to
4.9.2 High-capacitance / reduced diameter cables each motor. It is recommended that each motor is connected through a
The maximum cable length is reduced from that shown in Section protection relay since the drive cannot protect each motor individually
4.9.1 Cable types and lengths if high capacitance or reduced diameter
For connection, a sinusoidal filter or an output inductor must be
motor cables are used.
connected as shown in Figure 4-17, even when the cable lengths are
Most cables have an insulating jacket between the cores and the armor less than the maximum permissible. For details of inductor sizes, refer to
or shield; these cables have a low capacitance and are recommended. the supplier of the drive.
Cables that do not have an insulating jacket tend to have high Figure 4-16 Preferred chain connection for multiple motors
capacitance; if a cable of this type is used, the maximum cable length is
Motor protection
half that quoted in the tables, (Figure 4-15 shows how to identify the two relay
types).
Figure 4-15 Cable construction influencing the capacitance
Chain connection (preferred)
Normal capacitance High capacitance

Shield or armour Shield or armour close
separated from the cores to the cores
The maximum motor cable lengths specified in Section 4.9.1 Cable

types and lengths is shielded and contains four cores. Typical
capacitance for this type of cable is 130 pF/m (i.e. from one core to all
others and the shield connected together).

Issue Number: 3
Figure 4-17 Alternative connection for multiple motors 4.10 Braking

Motor protection
Braking occurs when the drive is decelerating the motor, or is preventing
relay the motor from gaining speed due to mechanical influences. During
braking, energy is returned to the drive from the motor.
When motor braking is applied by the drive, the maximum regenerated
power that the drive can absorb is equal to the power dissipation
(losses) of the drive.
When the regenerated power is likely to exceed these losses, the DC
connection bus voltage of the drive increases. Under default conditions, the drive
brakes the motor under PI control, which extends the deceleration time
as necessary in order to prevent the DC bus voltage from rising above a
Inductor
user defined set-point.
If the drive is expected to rapidly decelerate a load, or to hold back an
overhauling load, a braking resistor must be installed.
Table 4-17 shows the default DC voltage level at which the drive turns on
the braking transistor. However the braking resistor turn on and the turn
off voltages are programmable with Braking IGBT Lower Threshold
(06.073) and Braking IGBT Upper Threshold (06.074).
Table 4-17 Default braking transistor turn on voltage
Drive voltage rating DC bus voltage level
4.9.5 / Δ motor operation 200 V 390 V
The voltage rating for and Δ connections of the motor should always 400 V 780 V
be checked before attempting to run the motor. 575 V 930 V
The default setting of the motor rated voltage parameter is the same as 690 V 1120 V
the drive rated voltage, i.e.
NOTE N
400 V drive 400 V rated voltage
When a braking resistor is used, Pr 00.015 should be set to Fast ramp
230 V drive 230 V rated voltage
mode.
A typical 3 phase motor would be connected in for 400 V operation or
High temperatures
Δ for 230 V operation, however, variations on this are common e.g. Braking resistors can reach high temperatures. Locate
690 V Δ 400 V. braking resistors so that damage cannot result. Use cable
Incorrect connection of the windings will cause severe under or over having insulation capable of withstanding high temperatures.
WARNING
fluxing of the motor, leading to a very poor output torque or motor
saturation and overheating respectively. 4.10.1 Heatsink mounted braking resistor
4.9.6 Output contactor A resistor has been especially designed to be mounted within the
heatsink of the drive (size 3, 4 and 5). See section 3.10 Heatsink
If the cable between the drive and the motor is to be mounted brake resistor on page 43 for mounting details. The design of
interrupted by a contactor or circuit breaker, ensure that the the resistor is such that no thermal protection circuit is required, as the
drive is disabled before the contactor or circuit breaker is device will fail safely under fault conditions. On size 3, 4 and 5 the in built
opened or closed. Severe arcing may occur if this circuit is software overload protection is set-up at default for the designated
WARNING interrupted with the motor running at high current and low heatsink mounted resistor. The heatsink mounted resistor is not supplied
speed. with the drive and can be purchased separately.
A contactor is sometimes required to be installed between the drive and Table 4-18 provides the resistor data for each drive rating.
motor for safety purposes.
The recommended motor contactor is the AC3 type. NOTE N
The internal / heatsink mounted resistor is suitable for applications with a
Switching of an output contactor should only occur when the output of
low level of regen energy only. See Table 4-18.
the drive is disabled.
Opening or closing of the contactor with the drive enabled will lead to:
1. OI ac trips (which cannot be reset for 10 seconds)
2. High levels of radio frequency noise emission
3. Increased contactor wear and tear
The Drive Enable terminal (terminal 11 and terminal 13) when opened
provides a SAFE TORQUE OFF function. This can in many cases
replace output contactors.
For further information see section 4.16 SAFE TORQUE OFF (STO) on
page 86.

Issue Number: 3
Braking resistor overload protection parameter settings

Failure to observe the following information may damage the resistor.
The drive software contains an overload protection function for a braking resistor. On size 3, 4 and 5 this function is enabled at default
to protect the heatsink mounted resistor. Below are the parameter settings.
CAUTION
Size 3 Size 4 Size 5
Parameter 200 V 400 V 200 V 400 V 200 V 400 V 575 V
drive drive drive drive drive drive drive
Braking resistor rated
Pr 10.030 50 W 100 W 100 W
power
Braking resistor thermal
Pr 10.031 3.3 s 2.0 s 2.0 s
time constant
Braking resistor
Pr 10.061 75 Ω 38 Ω 38 Ω
resistance
For more information on the braking resistor software overload protection, see Pr 10.030, Pr 10.031 and Pr 10.061 full descriptions in
the Parameter Reference Guide.
If the resistor is to be used at more than half of its average power rating, the drive cooling fan must be set to full speed by setting
Pr 06.045 to 11.
Table 4-18 Heatsink mounted braking resistor data

Parameter Size 3 Size 4 Size 5
Part number 1220-2752-00 1299-0003-00
DC resistance at 25 °C 75 Ω 37.5 Ω
Peak instantaneous power over 1 ms at nominal
8 kW 16 kW
resistance
Average power over 60 s * 50 W 100 W
Ingress Protection (IP) rating IP54
Maximum altitude 2000 m
* To keep the temperature of the resistor below 70 °C (158 °F) in a 30 °C (86 °F) ambient, the average power rating is 50 W for size 3, 100 W for size
4 and 5. The above parameter settings ensure this is the case.

Issue Number: 3
4.10.2 External braking resistor Table 4-21 Braking resistor resistance and power rating (575 V)
Overload protection Minimum Instantaneous Continuous

When an external braking resistor is used, it is essential that Model resistance * power rating power rating
an overload protection device is incorporated in the braking Ω kW kW
WARNING
resistor circuit; this is described in Figure 4-18 on page 68. 05500030 2.6
When a braking resistor is to be mounted outside the enclosure, ensure 05500040 80 12.1 4.6
that it is mounted in a ventilated metal housing that will perform the 05500069 6.5
following functions: 06500100 8.7
• Prevent inadvertent contact with the resistor 06500150 12.3
• Allow adequate ventilation for the resistor 06500190 16.3
13 74
When compliance with EMC emission standards is required, external 06500230 19.9
connection requires the cable to be armored or shielded, since it is not 06500290 24.2
fully contained in a metal enclosure. See section 4.12.5 Compliance with 06500350 31.7
generic emission standards on page 74 for further details.Internal 07500440
connection does not require the cable to be armored or shielded. 07500550
Minimum resistances and power ratings for the braking 08500630
resistor at 40 °C (104 °F) 08500860
Table 4-19 Braking resistor resistance and power rating (200 V)

Table 4-22 Braking resistor resistance and power rating (690 V)*
Minimum Instantaneous Continuous
Model resistance * power rating power rating Minimum Instantaneous Continuous
Model resistance * power rating power rating
Ω kW kW
03200050 1.5 Ω kW kW
03200066 1.9 07600190
20 8.5
03200080 2.8 07600240
03200106 3.6 07600290
04200137 4.6 07600380
18 9.4
04200185 6.3 07600440
05200250 16.5 10.3 8.6 07600540
06200330 12.6 08600630
8.6 19.7
06200440 16.4 08600860
07200610 20.5 * Resistor tolerance: ±10 %
6.1 27.8
07200750 24.4
For high-inertia loads or under continuous braking, the continuous power
07200830 4.5 37.6 32.5 dissipated in the braking resistor may be as high as the power rating of
08201160 the drive. The total energy dissipated in the braking resistor is dependent
08201320 on the amount of energy to be extracted from the load.
The instantaneous power rating refers to the short-term maximum power
Table 4-20 Braking resistor resistance and power rating (400 V) dissipated during the on intervals of the pulse width modulated braking
control cycle. The braking resistor must be able to withstand this
Minimum Instantaneous Continuous dissipation for short intervals (milliseconds). Higher resistance values
Model resistance * power rating power rating require proportionately lower instantaneous power ratings.
Ω kW kW In most applications, braking occurs only occasionally. This allows the
03400025 1.5 continuous power rating of the braking resistor to be much lower than
03400031 2.0 the power rating of the drive. It is therefore essential that the
74 9.2 instantaneous power rating and energy rating of the braking resistor are
03400045 2.8
03400062 4.6 sufficient for the most extreme braking duty that is likely to be
encountered.
03400078 5.0
50 13.6 Optimization of the braking resistor requires careful consideration of the
03400100 6.6
04400150 9.0 braking duty.
34 19.9
04400172 12.6 Select a value of resistance for the braking resistor that is not less than
05400270 31.5 21.5 16.2 the specified minimum resistance. Larger resistance values may give a
05400300 18 37.5 19.6 cost saving, as well as a safety benefit in the event of a fault in the
braking system. Braking capability will then be reduced, which could
06400350 21.6
cause the drive to trip during braking if the value chosen is too large.
06400420 17 39.8 25
06400470 32.7 Thermal protection circuit for the braking resistor
07400660 41.6 The thermal protection circuit must disconnect the AC supply from the
9.0 75.2 drive if the resistor becomes overloaded due to a fault. Figure 4-18
07400770 50.6
07401000 7.0 96.6 60.1 shows a typical circuit arrangement.
08401340
08401570

Issue Number: 3
Figure 4-18 Typical protection circuit for a braking resistor Size 6:

* Proportional to the supply voltage and frequency.
Optional With internal filter removed:
EMC
filter Size 3: <1 mA
When the internal filter is installed the leakage current is

high. In this case a permanent fixed ground connection must
Main contactor be provided, or other suitable measures taken to prevent a
power supply
WARNING
safety hazard occurring if the connection is lost.
Drive
Stop 4.11.1 Use of residual current device (RCD)
There are three common types of ELCB / RCD:
Start / Thermal 1. AC - detects AC fault currents
Reset protection
device 2. A - detects AC and pulsating DC fault currents (provided the DC
+DC current reaches zero at least once every half cycle)
BR 3. B - detects AC, pulsating DC and smooth DC fault currents
• Type AC should never be used with drives.
• Type A can only be used with single phase drives
Braking resistor
• Type B must be used with three phase drives
See Figure 4-1 on page 51 and Figure 4-4 on page 53 for the location of
the +DC and braking resistor connections.
Only type B ELCB / RCD are suitable for use with 3 phase
4.10.3 Braking resistor software overload inverter drives.
protection
WARNING
The drive software contains an overload protection function for a braking
resistor. In order to enable and set-up this function, it is necessary to If an external EMC filter is used, a delay of at least 50 ms should be
enter three values into the drive: incorporated to ensure spurious trips are not seen. The leakage current
• Braking Resistor Rated Power (10.030) is likely to exceed the trip level if all of the phases are not energized
• Braking Resistor Thermal Time Constant (10.031) simultaneously.
• Braking Resistor Resistance (10.061)
This data should be obtained from the manufacturer of the braking 4.12 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility)
resistors. The requirements for EMC are divided into three levels in the following
Pr 10.039 gives an indication of braking resistor temperature based on a three sections:
simple thermal model. Zero indicates the resistor is close to ambient and Section 4.12.3, General requirements for all applications, to ensure
100 % is the maximum temperature the resistor can withstand. A ‘Brake reliable operation of the drive and minimise the risk of disturbing nearby
Resistor’ alarm is given if this parameter is above 75 % and the braking equipment. The immunity standards specified in Chapter 12 Technical
IGBT is active. A Brake R Too Hot trip will occur if Pr 10.039 reaches data on page 227 will be met, but no specific emission standards are
100 %, when Pr 10.037 is set to 0 (default value) or 1. applied. Note also the special requirements given in Surge immunity of
If Pr 10.037 is equal to 2 or 3, a Brake R Too Hot trip will not occur when control circuits - long cables and connections outside a building on
Pr 10.039 reaches 100 %, but instead the braking IGBT will be disabled page 76 for increased surge immunity of control circuits where control
until Pr 10.039 falls below 95 %. This option is intended for applications wiring is extended.
with parallel connected DC buses where there are several braking Section 4.12.4, Requirements for meeting the EMC standard for
resistors, each of which cannot withstand full DC bus voltage power drive systems, IEC61800-3 (EN 61800-3:2004).
continuously. With this type of application it is unlikely the braking energy Section 4.12.5, Requirements for meeting the generic emission
will be shared equally between the resistors because of voltage standards for the industrial environment, IEC61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-
measurement tolerances within the individual drives. Therefore with 4:2007.
Pr 10.037 set to 2 or 3, then as soon as a resistor has reached its
The recommendations of section 4.12.3 will usually be sufficient to avoid
maximum temperature the drive will disable the braking IGBT, and
causing disturbance to adjacent equipment of industrial quality. If
another resistor on another drive will take up the braking energy. Once
particularly sensitive equipment is to be used nearby, or in a non-
Pr 10.039 has fallen below 95 % the drive will allow the braking IGBT to
industrial environment, then the recommendations of section 4.12.4 or
operate again.
section 4.12.5 should be followed to give reduced radio-frequency
See the Parameter Reference Guide for more information on Pr 10.030, emission.
Pr 10.031, Pr 10.037 and Pr 10.039. In order to ensure the installation meets the various emission standards
This software overload protection should be used in addition to an described in:
external overload protection device. • The EMC data sheet available from the supplier of the drive
• The Declaration of Conformity at the front of this manual
4.11 Ground leakage • Chapter 12 Technical data on page 227
The ground leakage current depends upon whether the internal EMC The correct external EMC filter must be used and all of the guidelines in
filter is installed or not. The drive is supplied with the filter installed. section 4.12.3 General requirements for EMC on page 72 and section
Instructions for removing the internal filter are given in section 4.12.5 Compliance with generic emission standards on page 74 must be
4.12.2 Internal EMC filter on page 70. followed.
With internal filter installed:
Size 3: 28 mA* AC at 400 V 50 Hz
30 µA DC with a 600 V DC bus (10 MΩ)
Size 4: 9.5 mA* AC at 400 V 50 Hz
36 µA DC with a 600 V DC bus (10 MΩ)

Issue Number: 3
Table 4-23 Drive and EMC filter cross reference Figure 4-19 Installation of grounding clamp (size 3 and 4)

200 V
03200050 to 03200106 4200-3230
04200137 to 04200185
05200250
06200330 to 06200440 4200-2300
07200610 to 07200830
08201160 to 08201320
400 V
03400025 to 03400100 4200-3480
04400150 to 04400172
05400270 to 05400300
06400350 to 06400470 4200-4800
07400660 to 07401000
08401340 to 08401570
575 V
05500030 to 05500069
06500100 to 06500350 4200-3690
Loosen the ground connection nuts and slide the grounding clamp in the
07500440 to 07500550
direction shown. Once in place, the ground connection nuts should be
08500630 to 08500860
tightened with a maximum torque of 2 N m (1.47 lb ft).
690 V
Figure 4-20 Installation of grounding clamp (size 5)
07600190 to 07600540
08600630 to 08600860
High ground leakage current

When an EMC filter is used, a permanent fixed ground
connection must be provided which does not pass through a
connector or flexible power cord. This includes the internal
WARNING EMC filter.
NOTE N
The installer of the drive is responsible for ensuring compliance with the
EMC regulations that apply in the country in which the drive is to be
used.
4.12.1 Grounding hardware

The drive is supplied with a grounding bracket and grounding clamp to
facilitate EMC compliance. They provide a convenient method for direct
grounding of cable shields without the use of "pig-tails”. Cable shields
can be bared and clamped to the grounding bracket using metal clips or
clamps1 (not supplied) or cable ties. Note that the shield must in all
cases be continued through the clamp to the intended terminal on the
drive, in accordance with the connection details for the specific signal.
1
A suitable clamp is the Phoenix DIN rail mounted SK14 cable clamp
(for cables with a maximum outer diameter of 14 mm).
• See Figure 4-19, Figure 4-20 and Figure 4-21 for details on installing
the grounding clamp.
• See Figure 4-22 for details on installing the grounding bracket.
Loosen the ground connection nuts and slide the grounding clamp down
onto the pillars in the direction shown. Once in place, the ground
connection nuts should be tightened with a maximum torque of 2 N m
(1.47 lb ft).

Issue Number: 3
Figure 4-21 Installation of grounding clamp (size 6)

On size 3 and 4 the grounding bracket is secured using the
power ground terminal of the drive. Ensure that the supply
ground connection is secure after installing / removing the
grounding bracket. Failure to do so will result in the drive not
WARNING
being grounded.
A faston tab is located on the grounding bracket for the purpose of

connecting the drive 0 V to ground should the user require to do so.
4.12.2 Internal EMC filter

It is recommended that the internal EMC filter be kept in place unless
there is a specific reason for removing it.
If the drive is used with ungrounded (IT) supplies, the
internal EMC filter must be removed unless additional motor
ground fault protection is installed.
For instructions on removal refer to section 4.12.2 Internal
WARNING
For details of ground fault protection contact the supplier of
the drive.
If the drive is used as a motoring drive as part of a regen system, then
the internal EMC filter must be removed.
The internal EMC filter reduces radio-frequency emission into the line
power supply. Where the motor cable is short, it permits the
requirements of EN 61800-3:2004 to be met for the second environment
- see section 4.12.4 Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004 (standard for
Power Drive Systems) on page 74 and section 12.1.26 Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) on page 244. For longer motor cables the filter
continues to provide a useful reduction in emission levels, and when
used with any length of shielded motor cable up to the limit for the drive,
it is unlikely that nearby industrial equipment will be disturbed. It is
recommended that the filter be used in all applications unless the
instructions given above require it to be removed, or where the ground
leakage current of 28 mA for size 3 is unacceptable. See section
4.12.2 Internal EMC filter on page 70 for details of removing and
installing the internal EMC filter.
The grounding clamp is secured using the provided 2 x M4 x 10 mm

fasteners. The fasteners should be tightened with the maximum torque The supply must be disconnected before removing the
of 2 N m (1.47 Ib ft). internal EMC filter.
Figure 4-22 Installation of grounding bracket (all sizes - size 3 shown) WARNING
Figure 4-23 Removal of the size 3 internal EMC filter
Remove the screw and nut (1) and (2) as shown above.
Lift away from the securing points and rotate away from the drive.
Ensure the screw and nut are replaced and re-tightened with a
maximum torque of 2 N m (1.47 lb ft).
Loosen the ground connection nuts and slide the grounding bracket in
the direction shown. Once in place, the ground connection nuts should
be tightened with a maximum torque of 2 N m (1.47 lb ft).

Issue Number: 3
Figure 4-24 Removal of the size 4 internal EMC filter Figure 4-27 Removal of the size 7 and 8 internal EMC filter (size 7
shown)
To electrically disconnect the Internal EMC filter, remove the screw as

highlighted above (1).

2
1
Remove the three M5 terminal nuts (1). Lift away the cover (2) to expose
the M4 Torx internal EMC filter removal screw. Finally remove the M4
Torx internal EMC filter removal screw (3) to electrically disconnect the
internal EMC filter.


Issue Number: 3
4.12.3 General requirements for EMC

Ground (earth) connections
The grounding arrangements should be in accordance with Figure 4-28, which shows a single drive on a back-plate with or without an additional
enclosure.
Figure 4-28 shows how to configure and minimise EMC when using unshielded motor cable. However shielded cable is a better option, in which case
it should be installed as shown in section 4.12.5 Compliance with generic emission standards on page 74.
Figure 4-28 General EMC enclosure layout showing ground connections
If ground connections are
made using a separate
cable, they should run
parallel to the appropriate
power cable to minimise
emissions
Metal backplate
Optional EMC
filter
If the control circuit 0V

is to be grounded, this External
should be done at the controller
system controller only to 0V PE
avoid injecting noise
currents into the 0V circuit
3 phase AC supply ~
PE
Grounding bar
The incoming supply ground
should be connected to a
single power ground bus bar
or low impedance earth
terminal inside the cubicle. Use four core cable to
This should be used as a Metal backplate connect the motor to the drive.
common 'clean' ground for all safety bonded to The ground conductor in the
components inside the cubicle. power ground busbar motor cable must be connected
directly to the earth terminal of
the drive and motor.
It must not be connected directly
to the power earth busbar.
Optional
ground
connection

Issue Number: 3
Cable layout To ensure correct transfer of data, observe the following:

Figure 4-29 indicates the clearances which should be observed around Resolver connections:
the drive and related ‘noisy’ power cables by all sensitive control signals • Use a cable with an overall shield and twisted pairs for the resolver
/ equipment. signals
Figure 4-29 Drive cable clearances • Connect the cable shield to the drive 0V connection by the shortest
Optional braking resistor and overload possible link ("pigtail")
• It is generally preferable not to connect the cable shield to the
resolver. However in cases where there is an exceptional level of
common-mode noise voltage present on the resolver body, it may be
helpful to connect the shield there. If this is done then it becomes
essential to ensure the absolute minimum length of "pigtails" at both
shield connections, and possibly to clamp the cable shield directly to
the resolver body and to the drive grounding bracket.
• The cable should preferably not be interrupted. If interruptions are
unavoidable, ensure the absolute minimum length of "pigtail" in the
shield connections at each interruption.
Encoder connections:
• Use a cable with the correct impedance
• Use a cable with individually shielded twisted pairs
• Connect the cable shields to 0V at both the drive and the encoder,
using the shortest possible links ("pigtails")
• The cable should preferably not be interrupted. If interruptions are
unavoidable, ensure the absolute minimum length of "pigtail" in the
shield connections at each interruption. Preferably, use a connection
method which provides substantial metallic clamps for the cable
shield terminations.
Do not place sensitive
(unscreened) signal circuits The above applies where the encoder body is isolated from the motor
in a zone extending and where the encoder circuit is isolated from the encoder body. Where
300 mm (12”) all around the
Drive, motor cable, input there is no isolation between the encoder circuits and the motor body,
cable from EMC filter and and in case of doubt, the following additional requirement must be
unshielded braking resistor
cable (if used) observed. This gives the best possible noise immunity.
• The shields must be directly clamped to the encoder body (no
pigtail) and to the drive grounding bracket. This may be achieved by
clamping of the individual shields or by providing an additional
overall shield which is clamped.
NOTE N
300 mm The recommendations of the encoder manufacturer must also be
(12 in)
adhered to for the encoder connections.
NOTE N
In order to guarantee maximum noise immunity for any application
double shielded cable as shown should be used.
In some cases single shielding of each pair of differential signals cables,
or a single overall shield with individual shield on the thermistor
connections is sufficient. In these cases all the shields should be
connected to ground and 0 V at both ends.
NOTE N If the 0 V is required to be left floating a cable with individual shields and
Any signal cables which are carried inside the motor cable (i.e. motor an overall shield must be used.
thermistor, motor brake) will pick up large pulse currents via the cable Figure 4-30 and Figure 4-31 illustrate the preferred construction of cable
capacitance. The shield of these signal cables must be connected to and the method of clamping. The outer sheath of the cable should be
ground close to the motor cable, to avoid this noise current spreading stripped back enough to allow the clamp to be installed. The shield must
through the control system. not be broken or opened at this point. The clamps should be installed
Feedback device cable shielding close to the drive or feedback device, with the ground connections made
Shielding considerations are important for PWM drive installations due to to a ground plate or similar metallic ground surface.
the high voltages and currents present in the output (motor) circuit with a Figure 4-30 Feedback cable, twisted pair
very wide frequency spectrum, typically from 0 to 20 MHz. Cable overall shield
The following guidance is divided into two parts:
1. Ensuring correct transfer of data without disturbance from electrical
noise originating either within the drive or from outside.
2. Additional measures to prevent unwanted emission of radio Twisted
pair Cable
frequency noise. These are optional and only required where the cable
installation is subject to specific requirements for radio frequency
emission control.
Twisted pair shield

Issue Number: 3
Figure 4-31 Feedback cable connections Where a filter is not required, follow the guidelines given in section
Connection
4.12.3 General requirements for EMC on page 72.
at drive The second environment typically includes an industrial low-
voltage power supply network which does not supply
Shield
connection buildings used for residential purposes. Operating the drive in
to 0V this environment without an external EMC filter may cause
CAUTION interference to nearby electronic equipment whose sensitivity
Twisted
has not been appreciated. The user must take remedial
Cable pair measures if this situation arises. If the consequences of
shield shield unexpected disturbances are severe, it is recommended that
the guidelines in Section 4.12.5 Compliance with generic
emission standards be adhered to.
Refer to section 12.1.26 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) on

page 244 for further information on compliance with EMC standards and
definitions of environments.
Detailed instructions and EMC information are given in the EMC Data
Ground clamp Cable
on shield Sheet which is available from the supplier of the drive.
4.12.5 Compliance with generic emission standards
The following information applies to frame sizes 3 to 8.
Use the recommended filter and shielded motor cable. Observe the
layout rules given in Figure 4-32 and Figure 4-33. Ensure the AC supply
and ground cables are at least 100 mm from the power module and
motor cable.
Cable Twisted
shield Figure 4-32 Supply and ground cable clearance (sizes 3 to 6)
pair
shield
Shield
connection
to 0V
Connection
at motor
To ensure suppression of radio frequency emission, ≥100 mm

observe the following: (4 in)
• Use a cable with an overall shield
• Clamp the overall shield to grounded metallic surfaces at both the
encoder and the drive, as illustrated in Figure 4-31
4.12.4 Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004 (standard

for Power Drive Systems)
Meeting the requirements of this standard depends on the environment
that the drive is intended to operate in, as follows:
Operation in the first environment
Observe the guidelines given in section 4.12.5 Compliance with generic
emission standards on page 74. An external EMC filter will always be ≥100 mm
required. (4 in)
This is a product of the restricted distribution class according Do not modify

to IEC 61800-3 the filter wires
In a residential environment this product may cause radio
CAUTION
interference in which case the user may be required to take
adequate measures.
Operation in the second environment

In all cases a shielded motor cable must be used, and an EMC filter is
required for all drives with a rated input current of less than 100 A.
The drive contains an in-built filter for basic emission control. In some
cases feeding the motor cables (U, V and W) once through a ferrite ring
can maintain compliance for longer cable lengths.
For longer motor cables, an external filter is required. Where a filter is
required, follow the guidelines in Section 4.12.5 Compliance with generic
emission standards .

Issue Number: 3
Figure 4-33 Supply and ground cable clearance (size 7 onwards) Figure 4-35 Grounding the drive, motor cable shield and filter
100mm (4in)
100mm
(4in)
Ensure direct
metal contact
at drive and
filter mounting
points (any
paint must be
removed).
100mm (4in)
Motor cable shield

(unbroken) electrically
connected to and held
in place by grounding
clamp.
Ensure the AC supply and ground cables are at least 100 mm from the Connect the shield of the motor cable to the ground terminal of the motor
power module and motor cable. frame using a link that is as short as possible and not exceeding 50 mm
Figure 4-34 Sensitive signal circuit clearance (2 in) long.
A complete 360° termination of the shield to the terminal housing of the
motor is beneficial.
From an EMC consideration it is irrelevant whether the motor cable
contains an internal (safety) ground core, or if there is a separate
external ground conductor, or where grounding is through the shield
alone. An internal ground core will carry a high noise current and
therefore it must be terminated as close as possible to the shield
termination.
Figure 4-36 Grounding the motor cable shield
≥300 mm
(12 in)
Sensitive
signal
cable
Avoid placing sensitive signal circuits in a zone 300 mm (12 in) in the
area immediately surrounding the power module.Ensure good EMC
grounding.

Issue Number: 3
Unshielded wiring to the optional braking resistor(s) may be used 4.12.6 Variations in the EMC wiring
provided the wiring runs internally to the enclosure. Ensure a minimum Interruptions to the motor cable
spacing of 300 mm (12 in) from the signal wiring and the AC supply The motor cable should ideally be a single length of shielded or armored
wiring to the external EMC filter. If this condition cannot be met then the cable having no interruptions. In some situations it may be necessary to
wiring must be shielded. interrupt the cable, as in the following examples:
Figure 4-37 Shielding requirements of optional external braking • Connecting the motor cable to a terminal block in the drive enclosure
resistor • Installing a motor isolator / disconnect switch for safety when work is
Optional external done on the motor
braking resistor In these cases the following guidelines should be followed.
Optional external
Terminal block in the enclosure
braking resistor The motor cable shields should be bonded to the back-plate using
uninsulated metal cable-clamps which should be positioned as close as
possible to the terminal block. Keep the length of power conductors to a
minimum and ensure that all sensitive equipment and circuits are at
Enclosure Enclosure least 0.3 m (12 in) away from the terminal block.
Figure 4-39 Connecting the motor cable to a terminal block in the
enclosure
BR +DC BR +DC
From the Drive
OR
Back-plate
If the control wiring is to leave the enclosure, it must be shielded and the
shield(s) clamped to the drive using the grounding bracket as shown in
Enclosure
Figure 4-38. Remove the outer insulating cover of the cable to ensure
the shield(s) make direct contact with the bracket, but keep the shield(s) To the motor
intact until as close as possible to the terminals
Alternatively, wiring may be passed through a ferrite ring, part number Using a motor isolator / disconnect-switch
3225-1004. The motor cable shields should be connected by a very short conductor
Figure 4-38 Grounding of signal cable shields using the having a low inductance. The use of a flat metal coupling-bar is
grounding bracket recommended; conventional wire is not suitable.
The shields should be bonded directly to the coupling-bar using
uninsulated metal cable-clamps. Keep the length of the exposed power
conductors to a minimum and ensure that all sensitive equipment and
circuits are at least 0.3 m (12 in) away.
The coupling-bar may be grounded to a known low-impedance ground
nearby, for example a large metallic structure which is connected closely
to the drive ground.
Figure 4-40 Connecting the motor cable to an isolator /
disconnect switch
Isolator
From the To the

Drive motor
Coupling bar
(If required)
Surge immunity of control circuits - long cables and

connections outside a building
The input/output ports for the control circuits are designed for general
use within machines and small systems without any special precautions.
These circuits meet the requirements of EN 61000-6-2:2005 (1 kV
surge) provided the 0 V connection is not grounded.

Issue Number: 3
In applications where they may be exposed to high-energy voltage 4.13 Communications connections
surges, some special measures may be required to prevent malfunction
or damage. Surges may be caused by lightning or severe power faults in The Unidrive M702 drive offers Ethernet fieldbus communications. This
association with grounding arrangements which permit high transient enables the drive set-up, operation and monitoring to be carried out with
voltages between nominally grounded points. This is a particular risk a PC or controller if required.
where the circuits extend outside the protection of a building. Figure 4-43 Location of the comms connectors
As a general rule, if the circuits are to pass outside the building where
the drive is located, or if cable runs within a building exceed 30 m, some
additional precautions are advisable. One of the following techniques
should be used:
1. Galvanic isolation, i.e. do not connect the control 0 V terminal to
1 8 1 8
ground. Avoid loops in the control wiring, i.e. ensure every control
wire is accompanied by its return (0 V) wire.
2. Shielded cable with additional power ground bonding. The cable
shield may be connected to ground at both ends, but in addition the
ground conductors at both ends of the cable must be bonded
together by a power ground cable (equipotential bonding cable) with
cross-sectional area of at least 10 mm2, or 10 times the area of the
signal cable shield, or to suit the electrical safety requirements of the
plant. This ensures that fault or surge current passes mainly through
the ground cable and not in the signal cable shield. If the building or
plant has a well-designed common bonded network this precaution
is not necessary.
3. Additional over-voltage suppression - for the analog and digital
inputs and outputs, a zener diode network or a commercially
available surge suppressor may be connected in parallel with the
input circuit as shown in Figure 4-41 and Figure 4-42.
If a digital port experiences a severe surge its protective trip may operate
4.13.1 Ethernet fieldbus communications
(I/O Overload trip). For continued operation after such an event, the trip
The Ethernet option provides two RJ45 connections with an Ethernet
can be reset automatically by setting Pr 10.034 to 5.
switch for easy network creation.
Figure 4-41 Surge suppression for digital and unipolar inputs and
Standard UTP (unshielded twisted pair) or STP (shielded twisted pair)
outputs
cables are supported. It is recommended that a minimum specification
Signal from plant Signal to drive CAT5e is used in new installations. As the drive supports the ‘Auto
cross-over detection’ a cross-over cable is not required.
30V zener diode NOTE
e.g. 2xBZW50-15
The shell of the RJ45 connector is isolated from the 0 V of the drive
0V 0V control terminals but it is connected to ground.
Figure 4-42 Surge suppression for analog and bipolar inputs and
outputs
Signal from plant Signal to drive
2 x 15V zener diode

e.g. 2xBZW50-15
0V 0V
Surge suppression devices are available as rail-mounting modules, e.g.

from Phoenix Contact:
Unipolar TT-UKK5-D/24 DC
Bipolar TT-UKK5-D/24 AC
These devices are not suitable for encoder signals or fast digital data
networks because the capacitance of the diodes adversely affects the
signal. Most encoders have galvanic isolation of the signal circuit from
the motor frame, in which case no precautions are required. For data
networks, follow the specific recommendations for the particular
network.

Issue Number: 3
4.14 Control connections Figure 4-44 Default terminal functions
4.14.1 General
Table 4-24 The control connections consist of:
Control parameters Terminal
Function Qty
available number
Destination, invert, logic
Digital input 2 7, 8
select
Input / output mode select,
Digital input / output 2 destination / source, invert, 4, 5 41 42
logic select
Relay 1 Source, invert 41, 42 1 13
Drive enable (SAFE

2 11, 13
TORQUE OFF)
+24 V User output 1 Source, invert 2 0 V common
1
1, 3, 6, +24 V 2
0 V common 5
10, 12
0 V common
+24 V External input 1 Destination, invert 9 3
At zero speed
4
Key:
Indicates the parameter which is being controlled 5
Destination parameter: 0 V common
by the terminal / function 6
Indicates the parameter being output by the Run forward 7

Source parameter:
terminal Run reverse
8
Digital - indicates the mode of operation of the +24 V
9
terminal, i.e. positive / negative logic (the Drive
Mode parameter: 0 V common
Enable terminal is fixed in positive logic), open 10
collector. SAFE TORQUE OFF
Input 1* 11
All digital terminal functions (including the relay) can be programmed in 0 V common
12
SAFE TORQUE OFF
menu 8. Input 2* 13
The control circuits are isolated from the power circuits in the
drive by basic insulation (single insulation) only. The installer
41
must ensure that the external control circuits are insulated Drive OK
Relay
42 (Over voltage
from human contact by at least one layer of insulation category II)
WARNING (supplementary insulation) rated for use at the AC supply
*The SAFE TORQUE OFF / Drive enable terminal is a positive logic input
voltage.
only.
If the control circuits are to be connected to other circuits

classified as Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) (e.g. to a
personal computer), an additional isolating barrier must be
WARNING
included in order to maintain the SELV classification.
If any of the digital inputs (including the drive enable input)

are connected in parallel with an inductive load (i.e.
contactor or motor brake) then suitable suppression (i.e.
diode or varistor) should be used on the coil of the load. If no
CAUTION suppression is used then over voltage spikes can cause
damage to the digital inputs and outputs on the drive.
Ensure the logic sense is correct for the control circuit to be

used. Incorrect logic sense could cause the motor to be
started unexpectedly.
Positive logic is the default state for the drive.
CAUTION
NOTE N
Any signal cables which are carried inside the motor cable (i.e. motor
thermistor, motor brake) will pick up large pulse currents via the cable
capacitance. The shield of these signal cables must be connected to
ground close to the point of exit of the motor cable, to avoid this noise
current spreading through the control system.
NOTE N
The SAFE TORQUE OFF drive enable terminal is a positive logic input
only. It is not affected by the setting of Input Logic Polarity (08.029).

Issue Number: 3
4.14.2 Control terminal specification

1 0 V common 7 Digital Input 4
Common connection for all external
Function 8 Digital Input 5
devices
Terminal 7 default function RUN FORWARD input
Terminal 8 default function RUN REVERSE input
2 +24 V user output (selectable) Type Negative or positive logic digital inputs
Terminal 2 default function +24 V user output Logic mode controlled by... Pr 08.029
Can be switched on or off to act as a fourth Voltage range 0 V to +24 V
digital output (positive logic only) by setting Absolute maximum applied
Programmability -3 V to +30 V
the source Pr 08.028 and source invert voltage range
Pr 08.018
>2 mA @15 V from IEC 61131-2, type 1,
Nominal output current 100 mA Impedance
6.6 k Ω
100 mA Input thresholds 10 V ±0.8 V from IEC 61131-2, type 1
Maximum output current
200 mA (total including all Digital I/O)
250 µs when configured as an input with
Protection Current limit and trip destinations Pr 06.035 or Pr 06.036. 600 µs
Sample / Update period
2 ms when configured as an output (output when configured as an input with destination
Sample / update period will only change at the update rate of the Pr 06.029. 2 ms in all other cases.
source parameter if slower)
9 +24 V external input

3 0 V common To supply the control circuit
Common connection for all external Function without providing a supply to the
Function
devices power stage
Can be used as a digital input when using
Programmability
an external 24 Vdc
Sample / Update period 2 ms
4 Digital Output 1 Nominal voltage +24.0 Vdc
Minimum continuous operating
5 Digital Output 2 +19.2 Vdc
voltage
Terminal 4 default function AT ZERO SPEED output Maximum continuous operating
+30.0 Vdc
voltage
Terminal 5 default function
Minimum start-up voltage 21.6 Vdc
Type Positive logic voltage source outputs
Recommended power supply 40 W 24 Vdc nominal
Input / output mode controlled by... Pr 08.031, Pr 08.032
Recommended fuse 3 A, 50 Vdc
Operating as an input
Logic mode controlled by... Pr 08.029
Absolute maximum applied voltage 10 0 V common
-3 V to +30 V
range
>2 mA @15 V from IEC 61131-2, type 1, Common connection for all external
Impedance Function
6.6 k Ω devices
Input thresholds 10 V ±0.8 V from IEC 61131-2, type 1
Operating as an output
12 0 V common
Nominal maximum output current 100 mA (DIO1 & 2 combined)
100 mA Common connection for all external
Maximum output current Function
200 mA (total including all Digital I/O) devices
Common to all modes
Voltage range 0 V to +24 V
Sample / Update period 2 ms (output will only change at the update

rate of the source parameter
6 0 V common
Common connection for all external
Function
devices

Issue Number: 3
4.15 Position feedback connections

Refer to section 4.16 SAFE TORQUE OFF (STO) on page 86 for further
The following functions are provided via the 15-way high density D-type
information.
connector on the drive:
11 SAFE TORQUE OFF function input 1 (drive enable) • Two position feedback interfaces (P1 and P2).
• One encoder simulation output.
13 SAFE TORQUE OFF function input 2 (drive enable) • Two freeze trigger inputs (marker inputs).
Type Positive logic only digital input • One thermistor input.
Voltage range 0 V to +24 V The P1 position interface is always available but the availability of the P2
Absolute maximum applied position interface and the encoder simulation output depends on the
30 V
voltage position feedback device used on the P1 position interface, as shown in
Logic Threshold 10 V ± 5 V Table 4-27.
Low state maximum voltage for
5V
disable to SIL3 and PL e 4.15.1 Location of position feedback connector
>4 mA @15 V from IEC 61131-2, type 1, Figure 4-45 Location of the position feedback
Impedance
3.3 k Ω
Low state maximum current for
0.5 mA
disable to SIL3 and PL e
Nominal: 8 ms
Response time
Maximum: 20 ms
The SAFE TORQUE OFF function may be used in a safety-related application in
preventing the drive from generating torque in the motor to a high level of
integrity. The system designer is responsible for ensuring that the complete
system is safe and designed correctly according to the relevant safety
standards. If the SAFE TORQUE OFF function is not required, these terminals
are used for enabling the drive.
41
Relay contacts
42
Default function Drive OK indicator 5
10
1
6
240 Vac, Installation over-voltage 15 11
Contact voltage rating
category II
Drive encoder connector
2 A AC 240 V Female 15-way D-type
Contact maximum current rating 4 A DC 30 V resistive load
0.5 A DC 30 V inductive load (L/R = 40 ms)
Contact minimum recommended
12 V 100 mA
rating
Contact type Normally open
Default contact condition Closed when power applied and drive OK
Update period 4 ms
51 0V
52 +24 Vdc
Size 6
Maximum continuous operating voltage 28.0 Vdc
Minimum startup voltage 18.4 Vdc
Maximum power supply requirement 40 W
Recommended fuse 4 A @ 50 Vdc
Size 7 and 8
Maximum continuous operating voltage 30 Vdc
Minimum startup voltage 21.6 Vdc
Maximum power supply requirement 60 W
Recommended fuse 3 A @ 50 Vdc
To prevent the risk of a fire hazard in the event of a fault, a

fuse or other over-current protection must be installed in the
relay circuit.
WARNING

Issue Number: 3
4.15.2 Compatible position feedback devices Table 4-27 Availability of the P2 position feedback interface and
Table 4-25 Supported feedback devices on the P1 position the encoder simulation output
interface
Functions
Encoder type Pr 3.038 setting P1 Position P2 Position feedback Encoder
Quadrature incremental encoders with or without feedback interface interface Simulation Output
AB (0)
marker pulse AB Servo
Quadrature incremental encoders with UVW FD Servo
commutation signals for absolute position for FR Servo
AB Servo (3) None None
permanent magnet motors with or without marker SC Servo
pulse SC SC
Forward / reverse incremental encoders with or Commutation only
FR (2)
without marker pulse AB
AB, FD, FR
Forward / reverse incremental encoders with UVW FD None
EnDat, BiSS, SSI
commutation signals for absolute position for FR
FR Servo (5) SC
permanent magnet motors with or without marker
pulse Resolver None Full
SC Hiperface
Frequency and direction incremental encoders
FD (1) AB, FD, FR
with or without marker pulse
(No Z marker pulse input) None
Frequency and direction incremental encoders SC EnDat
with UVW commutation signals for absolute EnDat, BiSS, SSI
FD Servo (4) SC SSI
position for permanent magnet motors with or No Z marker pulse
None
without marker pulse output
Sincos incremental encoders SC (6) AB, FD, FR
None
Sincos incremental with commutation signals SC Servo (12) EnDat EnDat, BiSS, SSI
Heidenhain sincos encoders with EnDat comms BiSS None Full
SC EnDat (9) SSI
for absolute position No Z marker pulse
EnDat, BiSS, SSI
Stegmann sincos encoders with Hiperface comms output
SC Hiperface (7)
for absolute position The priority of the position feedback interfaces and the encoder
Sincos encoders with SSI comms for absolute simulation output on the 15-way D-type is assigned in the following order
SC SSI (11)
position from the highest priority to the lowest.
Sincos incremental with absolute position from • P1 position interface (highest)
SC SC (15)
single sin and cosine signals • Encoder simulation output
SSI encoders (Gray code or binary) SSI (10) • P2 position interface (lowest)
EnDat communication only encoders EnDat (8) For example, if an AB Servo type position feedback device is selected
BiSS communication only encoders (not currently for use on the P1 position interface, then both the encoder simulation
BiSS (13) output and the P2 position interface will not be available as this device
supported)
Resolver (not currently supported) Resolver (14) uses all connections of the 15-way D-type connector. Also, if an AB type
position feedback device is selected for use on the P1 position interface
UVW commutation only encoders* Commutation only
and Pr 03.085 is set to a valid source for the encoder simulation output,
(not currently supported) (16)
then the P2 position interface will not be available.
* This feedback device provides very low resolution feedback and should
Depending on the device type used on the P1 position interface, the
not be used for applications requiring a high level of performance
encoder simulation output may not be able support a marker pulse
Table 4-26 Supported feedback devices on the P2 position
output (e.g. SC EnDat or SC SSI device types). Pr 03.086 shows the
interface status of the encoder simulation output indicating whether the output is
disabled, no marker pulse is available or full encoder simulation is
Pr 3.138
Encoder type available.
setting
Quadrature incremental encoders with or without NOTE
AB (1)
marker pulse When using the P1 and P2 position interfaces and the encoder
Frequency and direction incremental encoders with or simulation output together, the P2 position interface uses alternative
FD (2) connections on the 15-way D-type connector. Pr 03.172 shows the
without marker pulse
status of the P2 position interface and indicates if alternative
Forward / reverse incremental encoders with or
FR (3) connections are being used for the P2 position interface.
without marker pulse
EnDat communication only encoders EnDat (4)
SSI encoders (Gray code or binary) SSI (5)
BiSS communication only encoders (not currently
BiSS (6)
supported)
Table 4-27 shows the possible combinations of position feedback device
types connected to the P1 and P2 position interfaces and the availability
of the encoder simulation output.

Issue Number: 3
4.15.3 Position feedback connection details

Table 4-28 P1 Position feedback connection details
P1 Position Connections
feedback
interface 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Pr 03.038
AB (0) A A\ B B\ Z Z\
FD (1) F F\ D D\ Z Z\
FR (2) F F\ R R\ Z Z\
AB Servo (3) A A\ B B\ Z Z\ U U\ V V\ W W\
FD Servo (4) F F\ D D\ Z Z\ U U\ V V\ W W\
FR Servo (5) F F\ R R\ Z Z\ U U\ V V\ W W\
A A\ B B\
SC (6) Z Z\
(Cos) (Cos\) (Sin) (Sin\)
SC Hiperface (7) Cos Cosref Sin Sinref DATA DATA\
EnDat (8) DATA DATA\ CLK CLK\ Freeze Freeze\

+V 0V Th
SC EnDat (9) A A\ B B\ DATA DATA\ CLK CLK\
SSI (10) DATA DATA\ CLK CLK\ Freeze Freeze\

A A\ B B\
SC SSI (11) DATA DATA\ CLK CLK\
A A\ B B\
SC Servo (12) Z Z\ U U\ V V\ W W\
BiSS (13) DATA DATA\ CLK CLK\ Freeze Freeze\
Resolver (14) Cos H Cos L Sin H Sin L Ref H Ref L

A A\ B B\
SC SC (15)
Z Z\ C*1 C\*1 D*2 D\*2 Freeze2 Freeze2\
Commutation
U U\ V V\ W W\
Only (16)
*1 - One sine wave per revolution

*2 - One cosine wave per revolution
Greyed cells are for P2 position feedback connections or simulated encoder outputs.
NOTE
Freeze and Freeze\ on terminals 5 and 6 are for Freeze input 1. Freeze2 and Freeze2\ on terminals 11 and 12 are for Freeze input 2.

Issue Number: 3
Table 4-29 P2 Position feedback and encoder simulation output connection details
P1 Position P2 Position Connections
Encoder
feedback feedback
Simulation
interface interface 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Output
Pr 03.038 Pr 03.138
AB (1) A A\ B B\ Z Z\
FD (2) F F\ D D\ Z Z\
FR (3) 1 F F\ R R\ Z Z\
Disabled*
AB (0)
FD (1) EnDat (4)
FR (2) SSI (5) DATA DATA\ CLK CLK\ Freeze2 Freeze2\
SC (6) BiSS (6)
SC Hiperface (7) AB Asim Asim\ Bsim Bsim\ Zsim Zsim\
Resolver (14)
FD Fsim Fsim\ Dsim Dsim\ Zsim Zsim\
None (0)
FR Fsim Fsim\ Rsim Rsim\ Zsim Zsim\
SSI DATAsim DATAsim\ CLKsim CLKsim\

AB (1) A A\ B B\
FD (2) F F\ D D\
FR (3) 1 F F\ R R\
Disabled*
EnDat (4)
SC EnDat (9) SSI (5) DATA DATA\ CLK CLK\
SC SSI (11) BiSS (6)
AB Asim Asim\ Bsim Bsim\
FD Fsim Fsim\ Dsim Dsim\
None (0)
FR Fsim Fsim\ Rsim Rsim\
AB (1) A A\ B B\ Z Z\
FD (2) F F\ D D\ Z Z\
FR (3) 1 F F\ R R\ Z Z\
Disabled*
EnDat (4)
EnDat (8) SSI (5) DATA DATA\ CLK CLK\ Freeze2 Freeze2\
SSI (10) BiSS (6)
BiSS (13)
AB Asim Asim\ Bsim Bsim\ Zsim Zsim\
FD Fsim Fsim\ Dsim Dsim\ Zsim Zsim\

None (0)
FR Fsim Fsim\ Rsim Rsim\ Zsim Zsim\
EnDat (8) AB DATA DATA\ Asim Asim\ Bsim Bsim\ CLK CLK\
SSI (10) EnDat (4) FD DATA DATA\ Fsim Fsim\ Dsim Dsim\ CLK CLK\
BiSS (13) SSI (5)
(with no Freeze BiSS (6) FR DATA DATA\ Fsim Fsim\ Rsim Rsim\ CLK CLK\
inputs)
SSI DATA DATA\ DATAsim DATAsim\ CLKsim CLKsim\ CLK CLK\
*1
The encoder simulation output is disabled when Pr 03.085 is set to zero.
NOTE
The termination resistors are always enabled on the P2 position interface. Wire break detection is not available when using AB, FD or FR position
feedback device types on the P2 position interface.

Issue Number: 3
4.15.4 Position feedback terminal specifications

1 A,F, Cosref, Data, Cos H 3 B, D, R Sinref, Clock, Sin H
2 A\,F\ Cosref\, Data\, Cos L 4 B\, D\, R\, Sinref\, Clock\, Sin L
AB (0), FD (1), FR (2), AB Servo (3), FD Servo(4), FR Servo (5) AB (0), FD (1), FR (2), AB Servo (3), FD Servo(4), FR Servo (5)
Type EIA 485 differential receivers Type EIA 485 differential receivers
Maximum input frequency 500 kHz Maximum input frequency 500 kHz
Line loading Line loading
Line termination components 120 Ω (switchable) Line termination components 120 Ω (switchable)
Working common mode range –7 V to +12 V Working common mode range –7 V to +12 V
SC Hiperface (7), SC EnDat (9), SC SSI (11), SC Servo (12), SC Hiperface (7), SC EnDat (9), SC SSI (11), SC Servo (12),
SC SC (15) SC SC (15)
Type Differential voltage Type Differential voltage
1.25 V peak to peak (sin with 1.25 V peak to peak (sin with
Maximum Signal level regard to sinref and cos with Maximum Signal level regard to sinref and cos with
regard to cosref) regard to cosref)
Maximum input frequency See Table 4-30 Maximum input frequency See Table 4-30
Maximum applied differential voltage and Maximum applied differential voltage and
±4 V ±4 V
common mode voltage range common mode voltage range
Resolution: The sine wave frequency can be up to 500 kHz but the resolution is Resolution: The sine wave frequency can be up to 500 kHz but the resolution is
reduced at high frequency. Table 4-30 shows the number of bits of interpolated reduced at high frequency. Table 4-30 shows the number of bits of interpolated
information at different frequencies and with different voltage levels at the drive information at different frequencies and with different voltage levels at the drive
encoder port encoder port
EnDat (8), SSI (10), BISS (13) EnDat (8), SSI (10), BISS (13)
Type EIA 485 differential receivers Type EIA 485 differential receivers
Maximum input frequency 4 MHz Maximum input frequency 4 MHz
Line loading Line loading
Line termination components 120 Ω (switchable) Line termination components 120 Ω (switchable)
Working common mode range –7 V to +12 V Working common mode range –7 V to +12 V
Resolver (14) Resolver (14)

Type 2 Vrms sinusoidal signal Type 2 Vrms sinusoidal signal
Operating Frequency 6 - 8 kHz Operating Frequency 6 – 8 kHz
Input voltage 0.6 Vrms Input voltage 0.6 Vrms
Common to All Common to All

Absolute maximum applied voltage relative to 0V -9 V to 14 V Absolute maximum applied voltage relative to 0V -9 V to 14 V

Issue Number: 3
5 Z, Data, Freeze, Ref H 7 U, C, Not used, Not used
6 Z\, Data\, Freeze\, Ref L 8 U\, C\, Not used, Not used
AB (0), FD (1), FR (2), AB Servo (3), FD Servo(4), FR Servo (5), AB Servo (3), FD Servo(4), FR Servo (5), SC Servo (12)
SC SC (15)
Type EIA 485 differential receivers
Type EIA 485 differential receivers Maximum input frequency 512 kHz
Maximum input frequency 512 kHz Line loading
Line loading
Line termination components 120 Ω (switchable)
Working common mode range –7 V to +12 V
SC SC (15)
SC Hiperface (7), SC EnDat (9), SC SSI (11), SC Servo (12) Type Differential voltage
Type EIA 485 differential receivers 1.25 V peak to peak (sin with
Maximum input frequency 4 MHz Maximum Signal level regard to sinref and cos with
regard to cosref)
Line loading
Maximum input frequency See Table 4-30
Maximum applied differential voltage and
Working common mode range –7 V to +12 V ±4 V
common mode voltage range
EnDat (8), SSI (10), BiSS (13)
Type EIA 485 differential receivers
Not used
Maximum input frequency 4 MHz
Resolver (14)
Line loading
Not used
Common to All
Absolute maximum applied voltage relative to 0V -9 V to 14 V
Resolver (14)
Type Differential voltage
9 V, D, Not used, Not used
0 – 2 Vrms depending on turns
Nominal voltage 10 V\, D\, Not used, Not used
ratio
Operating frequency 6 - 8 KHz AB Servo (3), FD Servo(4), FR Servo (5), SC Servo (12)
Line loading Type EIA 485 differential receivers
Common to All Maximum input frequency 512 kHz
Absolute maximum applied voltage relative to 0V -9 V to 14 V Line loading
SC SC (15)
Type Differential voltage
1.25 V peak to peak (sin with
Maximum Signal level regard to sinref and cos with
regard to cosref)
Maximum applied differential voltage and
±4 V

Not used
Resolver (14)
Not used
Common to All
Absolute maximum applied voltage relative to 0V -9 V to 14 V

Issue Number: 3
Table 4-30 Feedback resolution based on frequency and voltage
W, Clock, Not used, Not used level

11
Volt/Freq 1 kHz 5 kHz 50 kHz 100 kHz 200 kHz 500 kHz
12 W\, Clock\, Not used, Not used
1.2 11 11 10 10 9 8
AB Servo (3), FD Servo(4), FR Servo (5), SC Servo (12) 1.0 11 11 10 9 9 7
Type EIA 485 differential receivers 0.8 10 10 10 9 8 7
Maximum input frequency 512 kHz 0.6 10 10 9 9 8 7
Line loading 0.4 9 9 9 8 7 6

4.16 SAFE TORQUE OFF (STO)
The SAFE TORQUE OFF function provides a means for preventing the
SC EnDat (9), SC SSI (11)
drive from generating torque in the motor, with a very high level of
Type Differential voltage integrity. It is suitable for incorporation into a safety system for a
1.25 V peak to peak (sin with machine. It is also suitable for use as a conventional drive enable input.
Maximum Signal level regard to sinref and cos with The safety function is active when either one or both STO inputs are in
regard to cosref) the logic-low state as specified in the control terminal specification. The
function is defined according to EN 61800-5-2 and IEC 61800-5-2 as
follows. (In these standards a drive offering safety-related functions is
Maximum applied differential voltage and referred to as a PDS(SR)):
±4 V
‘Power, that can cause rotation (or motion in the case of a linear motor),
EnDat (8), SSI (10), BiSS (13) is not applied to the motor. The PDS(SR) will not provide energy to the
Not used
motor which can generate torque (or force in the case of a linear motor)’.
This safety function corresponds to an uncontrolled stop in accordance
Resolver (14)
with stop category 0 of IEC 60204-1.
Not used
The SAFE TORQUE OFF function makes use of the special property of
Common to All an inverter drive with an induction motor, which is that torque cannot be
Absolute maximum applied voltage relative to 0V -9 V to 14 V generated without the continuous correct active behavior of the inverter
circuit. All credible faults in the inverter power circuit cause a loss of
Common to all Feedback types torque generation.
13 Feedback device supply The SAFE TORQUE OFF function is fail-safe, so when the SAFE
TORQUE OFF input is disconnected the drive will not operate the motor,
Supply voltage 5.15 V ±2 %, 8 V ± 5 % or 15 V ± 5 % even if a combination of components within the drive has failed. Most
300 mA for 5 V and 8 V component failures are revealed by the drive failing to operate. SAFE
Maximum output current TORQUE OFF is also independent of the drive firmware. This meets the
200 mA for 15 V
requirements of the following standards, for the prevention of operation
The voltage on Terminal 13 is controlled by Pr 03.036. The default for this
of the motor.
parameter is 5 V (0) but this can be set to 8 V (1) or 15 V (2). Setting the encoder
voltage too high for the encoder could result in damage to the feedback device. Data as verified by TÜV Rheinland:
The termination resistors should be disabled if the outputs from the encoder are
According to EN ISO 13849-1:
higher than 5 V.
PL = e
Category = 4
14 0 V Common MTTFD = High
DCav = High
15 Motor thermistor input Mission Time and Proof Test Interval = 20 years
The calculated MTTFD for the complete STO function is:

Thermistor type is selected in P1 Thermistor Type (03.118).
STO1 2574 yr
STO2 2716 yr
Sincos encoder resolution
According to EN 61800-5-2:
The sine wave frequency can be up to 500 kHz but the resolution is
reduced at high frequency. Table 4-30 shows the number of bits of SIL = 3
interpolated information at different frequencies and with different PFH = 4.21 x 10-11 h-1
voltage levels at the drive encoder port. The total resolution in bits per
revolution is the ELPR plus the number of bits of interpolated The SAFE TORQUE OFF input also meets the requirements of EN 81-1
information. Although it is possible to obtain 11 bits of interpolation (clause 12.7.3 b) as part of a system for preventing unwanted operation
information, the nominal design value is 10 bits. of the motor in a lift (elevator).
SAFE TORQUE OFF can be used to eliminate electro-mechanical
contactors, including special safety contactors, which would otherwise
be required for safety applications.

Issue Number: 3
The function can be used in safety-related machines or systems which

have been designed according to IEC 62061 or IEC 61508, or other The design of safety-related control systems must only be
standards which are compatible with IEC 61508, since the analysis and done by personnel with the required training and experience.
the integrity metrics used in EN 61800-5-2 are the same. The SAFE TORQUE OFF function will only ensure the safety
Note on response time of SAFE TORQUE OFF, and use with safety of a machine if it is correctly incorporated into a complete
WARNING
controllers with self-testing outputs. safety system. The system must be subject to a risk
SAFE TORQUE OFF has been designed to have a response time of assessment to confirm that the residual risk of an unsafe
greater than 1 ms, so that it is compatible with safety controllers whose event is at an acceptable level for the application.
outputs are subject to a dynamic test with a pulse width not exceeding 1
SAFE TORQUE OFF inhibits the operation of the drive, this
ms.
includes inhibiting braking. If the drive is required to provide
Note on the use of servo motors, other permanent-magnet motors, both braking and SAFE TORQUE OFF in the same operation
reluctance motors and salient-pole induction motors. (e.g. for emergency stop) then a safety timer relay or similar
WARNING
When the drive is disabled through SAFE TORQUE OFF, a possible device must be used to ensure that the drive is disabled a
(although highly unlikely) failure mode is for two power devices in the suitable time after braking. The braking function in the drive
inverter circuit to conduct incorrectly. is provided by an electronic circuit which is not fail-safe. If
This fault cannot produce a steady rotating torque in any AC motor. It braking is a safety requirement, it must be supplemented by
produces no torque in a conventional induction motor with a cage rotor. If an independent fail-safe braking mechanism.
the rotor has permanent magnets and/or saliency, then a transient
alignment torque may occur. The motor may briefly try to rotate by up to SAFE TORQUE OFF does not provide electrical isolation.
180° electrical, for a permanent magnet motor, or 90° electrical, for a The supply to the drive must be disconnected by an approved
salient pole induction motor or reluctance motor. This possible failure isolation device before gaining access to power connections.
mode must be allowed for in the machine design. WARNING
Two-channel SAFE TORQUE OFF With SAFE TORQUE OFF there are no single faults in the drive which
Two fully independent input channels are provided for the SAFE can permit the motor to be driven. Therefore it is not necessary to have a
TORQUE OFF function. second channel to interrupt the power connection, nor a fault detection
Each input separately meets the requirements of the standards as circuit.
defined above, regardless of the state of the other input. If either or both
inputs are set at a logic low state, there are no single faults in the drive It is essential to observe the maximum permitted voltage of
which can permit the motor to be driven. 5 V for a safe low (disabled) state of SAFE TORQUE OFF.
It is not necessary to use both channels in order for the drive to meet the The connections to the drive must be arranged so that
requirements of the standards. The purpose of the two channels is to voltage drops in the 0 V wiring cannot exceed this value
WARNING
allow connection to machine safety systems where two channels are under any loading condition. It is strongly recommended that
required, and to facilitate protection against wiring faults. For example, if the SAFE TORQUE OFF circuits be provided with a
each channel is connected to a safety-related digital output of a safety- dedicated 0 V conductors which should be connected to
related controller, computer or PLC, then on detection of a fault in one terminals 10 and 12 at the drive.
output the drive can still be disabled safely through the other output. For more information regarding the SAFE TORQUE OFF input, please
Then there are no single wiring faults which can cause a loss of the see the Control Techniques Safe Torque Off Engineering Guide
safety function, i.e. inadvertent enabling of the drive. available for download from www.controltechniques.com.
In the event that the two-channel operation is not required, the two
inputs can be connected together to form a single SAFE TORQUE OFF
input. In this case it is important to note that a single short-circuit from
the SAFE TORQUE OFF input to a DC supply of approximately +24 V
would cause the drive to be enabled. This might occur through a fault in
the wiring. This can be excluded according to EN ISO 13849-2 by the
use of protected wiring. The wiring can be protected by either of the
following methods:
• By placing the wiring in a segregated cable duct or other enclosure.
or
• By providing the wiring with a grounded shield in a positive-logic
grounded control circuit. The shield is provided to avoid a hazard
from an electrical fault. It may be grounded by any convenient method;
no special EMC precautions are required.
SAFE TORQUE OFF over-ride

The drive does not provide any facility to over-ride the SAFE TORQUE
OFF function, for example for maintenance purposes. Because of the
risk of human error, the installation must not provide any facility to over-
ride the function.

Issue Number: 3
5 Getting started Table 5-2 Active action icon

Active action icon Description Priority
This chapter introduces the user interfaces, menu structure and security
levels of the drive. Alarm active
5.1 Understanding the display Keypad real-time clock battery

The keypad can only be mounted on the drive. low
5.1.1 KI-Keypad Accessing non-volatile media
The KI-Keypad display consists of two rows of text. The upper row card
shows the drive status or the menu and parameter number currently or Drive security active and locked
being viewed. The lower row of the display line shows the parameter
or unlocked
value or the specific trip type. The last two characters on the first row
may display special indications. If more than one of these indications is
active then the indications are prioritized as shown in Table 5-2. Motor map 2 active
When the drive is powered up the lower row will show the power up
parameter defined by Parameter Displayed At Power-Up (11.022). User program running
Figure 5-1 KI-Keypad
Keypad reference active
5.2 Keypad operation

5.2.1 Control buttons
The keypad consists of:
• Navigation Keys - Used to navigate the parameter structure and
change parameter values.
• Enter / Mode button - Used to toggle between parameter edit and
view mode.
• Escape / Exit button - Used to exit from parameter edit or view
mode. In parameter edit mode, if parameter values are edited and
the exit button pressed the parameter value will be restored to the
value it had on entry to edit mode.
• Start forward button - Use to provide a 'Run' command if keypad
mode is selected.
• Start reverse button - Used to control the drive if keypad mode is
selected and the reverse button is activated. If Enable Auxiliary Key
(06.013) =1, then the keypad reference is toggled between run
forward and run reverse each time the button is pressed. If Enable
Auxiliary Key (06.013) = 2, then the button functions as a run
1. Escape button reverse key.
2. Start reverse (Auxiliary button) • Stop / Reset button - Used to reset the drive. In keypad mode can be
3. Start forward used for 'Stop'.
4. Navigation keys (x4) NOTE
5. Stop / Reset (red) button
6. Enter button Low battery voltage is indicated by low battery symbol on the keypad
NOTE display. Refer to section 3.13.1 Real time clock battery replacement on
The red stop button is also used to reset the drive. page 49 for information on battery replacement.
Figure 5-2 overleaf shows an example on moving between menus and

The parameter value is correctly displayed in the lower row of the editing parameters.
keypad display, see table below.
Table 5-1 Keypad display formats
Display formats Value
IP Address 127.000.000.000
MAC Address 01ABCDEF2345
Time 12:34:56
Date 31-12-11 or 12-31-11
Version number 01.02.02.00
Character ABCD
32 bit number with decimal point 21474836.47
16 bit binary number 0100001011100101

Issue Number: 3
Figure 5-2 Display modes
Status
Mode
(Display
not
flashing) Timeout Timeout
Timeout
To enter Parameter or
Mode, press key or Press key
To return to Status Mode,
Press key
Parameter
When returning
Mode
to Parameter
(Upper row
Mode use the
display flashing)
Temporary
Parameter
Mode
To select parameter (Upper display
Press flashing)
keys to select
another parameter
to change, if
required
To return to Parameter Mode,
Press key to keep the new parameter value
Press key to ignore the new parameter value and return
the parameter to the pre-edited value
To enter Edit Mode,

press key
RO R/W
parameter parameter
Edit Mode
(Character to be edited in lower line of display flashing)
Change parameter values using keys.
NOTE
The navigation keys can only be used to move between menus if Pr 00.049 has been set to show 'All Menus'. Refer to section 5.9 Parameter access
level and security on page 93.
5.2.2 Quick access mode 5.2.3 Keypad shortcuts
The quick access mode allows direct access to any parameter without In ‘parameter mode’:
scrolling through menus and parameters.
• If the up and down keypad buttons are pressed
To enter the quick access mode, press and hold the Enter button together, then the keypad display will jump to the start of the
on the keypad while in ‘parameter mode’. parameter menu being viewed, i.e. Pr 05.005 being viewed, when
Figure 5-3 Quick access mode the above buttons pressed together will jump to Pr 05.000.
• If the left and right keypad buttons are pressed together,
then the keypad display will jump to the last viewed parameter in
Menu 0.
In ‘parameter edit mode’:
• If the up and down keypad buttons are pressed

together, then the parameter value of the parameter being edited will
be set to 0.
• If the left and right keypad buttons are pressed together, the
least significant digit (furthest right) will be selected on the keypad
display for editing.

Issue Number: 3
Figure 5-4 Mode examples 5.3 Menu structure

The drive parameter structure consists of menus and parameters.
The drive initially powers up so that only Menu 0 can be viewed. The up
and down arrow buttons are used to navigate between parameters and
once Pr 00.049 has been set to 'All Menus' the left and right buttons are
used to navigate between menus. For further information, refer to
section 5.9 Parameter access level and security on page 93
Figure 5-5 Parameter navigation
* *
* Can only be used to move between menus if all menus have

been enabled (Pr 00.049). Refer to section 5.9 Parameter
access level and security on page 93.
The menus and parameters roll over in both directions.

i.e. if the last parameter is displayed, a further press will cause the
display to rollover and show the first parameter.
1. Parameter view mode: Read write or Read only
2. Status mode: Drive OK status When changing between menus the drive remembers which parameter
If the drive is ok and the parameters are not being edited or viewed, the was last viewed in a particular menu and thus displays that parameter.
upper row of the display will show one of the following: Figure 5-6 Menu structure
• ‘Inhibit’, ‘Ready’ or ‘Run’.
3. Status mode: Trip status
When the drive is in trip condition, the upper row of the display will
indicate that the drive has tripped and the lower row of the display will
show the trip code. For further information regarding trip codes. refer to Menu 41 enu 2
Menu 0 Menu 1 M
Table 13-4 Trip indications on page 249.
....MM.000....
4. Status mode: Alarm status 41.029
00.050 01.050
During an ‘alarm’ condition the upper row of the display flashes between 41.028
00.049 01.049
41.027
the drive status (Inhibit, Ready or Run, depending on what is displayed) 41.026 00.048 01.048
41.025 00.047 01.047
and the alarm. 00.046 01.046
Option module menus (S.mm.ppp)*
Do not change parameter values without careful

Moves
consideration; incorrect values may cause damage or a between
safety hazard. parameters
WARNING
NOTE
When changing the values of parameters, make a note of the new
values in case they need to be entered again.
41.005
NOTE 41.004 00.005 01.005
00.004 01.004
For new parameter-values to apply after the line power supply to the 41.003
00.003 01.003
41.002
drive is interrupted, new values must be saved. Refer to section 41.001 00.002 01.002
00.001 01.001
5.7 Saving parameters on page 93.
Moves between Menus
* The option module menus (S.mm.ppp) are only displayed if option

modules are installed. Where S signifies the option module slot number
and the mm.ppp signifies the menu and the parameter number of the
option module's internal menus and parameter.

Issue Number: 3
5.4 Menu 0 5.5 Advanced menus

Menu 0 is used to bring together various commonly used parameters for The advanced menus consist of groups or parameters appropriate to a
specific function or feature of the drive. Menus 0 to 41 can be viewed on
basic easy set up of the drive. The parameters displayed in Menu 0 can
the KI-Keypad.
be configured in Menu 22.
Appropriate parameters are copied from the advanced menus into Menu The option module menus are displayed as S.mm.ppp. Where S
0 and thus exist in both locations. signifies the option module slot number and the mm.ppp signifies the
menu and parameter number of the option module’s internal menus and
For further information, refer to Chapter 6 Basic parameters on page 96.
parameter. Menu 4.00.xxx is the same as menu 24.xxx.
Figure 5-7 Menu 0 copying
Table 5-3 Advanced menu descriptions
Menu 2
Menu Description
Commonly used basic set-up parameters for quick / easy
0
02.021 5 programming
Menu 0
1 Frequency / Speed reference
2 Ramps
Menu 1 3 Frequency slaving, speed feedback and speed control
00.004 5
00.005 0 4 Torque and current control
00.006 150
5 Motor control
01.014 0
6 Sequencer and clock
Menu 4 7 Temperature monitoring
8 Digital I/O
Programmable logic, motorized pot, binary sum, timers and
9
04.007 150 scope
10 Status and trips
11 Drive set-up and identification, serial communications
12 Threshold detectors and variable selectors
13 Standard motion control
14 User PID controller
15 Option module slot 1 set-up menu
18 General option module application menu 1
21 Second motor parameters
22 Menu 0 set-up
23 Not allocated
24 Ethernet module (slot 4) set-up menu
25 Option module slot 1 application parameters
29 Reserved menu
30 Onboard user programming application menu
31-41 Advanced motion controller set-up parameters
Slot 1 Slot 1 option menus*
Slot 4 Ethernet menus
* Only displayed when the option modules are installed.

Issue Number: 3
5.5.1 KI-Keypad set-up menu 5.5.3 Alarm indications

To enter the keypad set-up menu press and hold the escape An alarm is an indication given on the display by alternating the alarm
button on the keypad from status mode. All the keypad parameters are string with the drive status string on the upper row and showing the
saved to the keypad non-volatile memory when exiting from the keypad alarm symbol in the last character in the upper row. Alarms strings are
set-up menu. not displayed when a parameter is being edited, but the user will still see
the alarm character on the upper row.
To exit from the keypad set-up menu press the escape or or
Table 5-6 Alarm indications
button. Below are the keypad set-up parameters. Alarm string Description
Brake resistor overload. Braking Resistor Thermal
Table 5-4 KI-Keypad set-up parameters
Brake Resistor Accumulator (10.039) in the drive has reached 75.0
Parameters Range Type % of the value at which the drive will trip.
Classic English (0) Motor Protection Accumulator (04.019) in the drive
Keypad.00 Language RW Motor Overload has reached 75.0 % of the value at which the drive
English (1),
Keypad.01 Show Units Off (0), On (1) RW will trip and the load on the drive is >100 %.
Keypad.02 Backlight Level 0 to 100 % RW Regen inductor overload. Inductor Protection
Accumulator (04.019) in the drive has reached
01.01.10 to Ind Overload
Keypad.03 Keypad Date RO 75.0 % of the value at which the drive will trip and
31.12.99
the load on the drive is >100 %.
00:00:00 to
Keypad.04 Keypad Time RO Drive over temperature. Percentage Of Drive
23:59:59
Drive Overload Thermal Trip Level (07.036) in the drive is greater
Show Raw Text Parameter than 90 %.
Keypad.05 Off (0), On (1) RW
Values
The autotune procedure has been initialized and an
00.00.00.00 to Auto Tune
Keypad.06 Software Version RO autotune in progress.
99.99.99.99
Limit switch active. Indicates that a limit switch is
Limit Switch
NOTE active and that is causing the motor to be stopped.
It is not possible to access the keypad parameters via any
communications channel.
Table 5-7 Option module and NV media card and other status
5.5.2 Display messages indications at power-up
The following tables indicate the various possible mnemonics which can
be displayed by the drive and their meaning. First row
Second row string Status
string
Table 5-5 Status indications
Booting Parameters Parameters are being loaded
Drive
Upper row
Description output Drive parameters are being loaded from a NV Media Card
string
stage
The drive is inhibited and cannot be run. Booting User Program User program being loaded
The SAFE TORQUE OFF signal is not
applied to SAFE TORQUE OFF terminals User program is being loaded from a NV Media Card to the drive
Inhibit or Pr 06.015 is set to 0. The other Disabled
Option
conditions that can prevent the drive from Booting User program being loaded
Program
enabling are shown as bits in Enable
Conditions (06.010) User program is being loaded from a NV Media Card to the option
module in slot X
The drive is ready to run. The drive enable
Ready is active, but the drive inverter is not active Disabled Data being written to NV Media
Writing To NV Card
because the final drive run is not active Card
Stop The drive is stopped / holding zero speed. Enabled Data is being written to a NV Media Card to ensure that its copy of the
drive parameters is correct because the drive is in Auto or Boot mode
Run The drive is active and running Enabled
The drive is enabled in Regen mode and is Waiting For Power System Waiting for power stage
Scan Enabled
trying to synchronize to the supply
The drive is waiting for the processor in the power stage to respond
Supply Loss Supply loss condition has been detected Enabled after power-up
The motor is being decelerated to zero
Deceleration speed / frequency because the final drive Enabled Waiting For Options Waiting for an option module
run has been deactivated.
The drive is waiting for the options modules to respond after power-up
dc injection The drive is applying dc injection braking Enabled
Positioning / position control is active Uploading
Position Enabled Options Loading parameter database
during an orientation stop From
The drive has tripped and no longer At power-up it may be necessary to update the parameter database
Trip controlling the motor. The trip code Disabled held by the drive because an option module has changed or because
appears in the lower display. an applications module has requested changes to the parameter
The Regen unit is enabled and structure. This may involve data transfer between the drive an option
Active Enabled modules. During this period ‘Uploading From Options’ is displayed
synchronized to the supply
Under The drive is in the under voltage state
Disabled
Voltage either in low voltage or high voltage mode.

Issue Number: 3
5.6 Changing the operating mode 5.8 Restoring parameter defaults

Changing the operating mode returns all parameters to their default Restoring parameter defaults by this method saves the default values in
value, including the motor parameters. User security status (00.049) and the drives memory. User security status (00.049) and User security code
User security code (00.034) are not affected by this procedure. (00.034) are not affected by this procedure.
Procedure Procedure
Use the following procedure only if a different operating mode is 1. Ensure the drive is not enabled, i.e. terminals 11 and 13 are open or
required: Pr 06.015 is Off (0)
1. Ensure the drive is not enabled, i.e. terminals 11 and 13 are open or 2. Select 'Reset 50 Hz Defs' or 'Reset 60 Hz Defs' in Pr mm.000.
Pr 06.015 is Off (0) (alternatively, enter 1233 (50 Hz settings) or 1244 (60 Hz settings) in
2. Enter either of the following values in Pr mm.000, as appropriate: Pr mm.000).
1253 (50 Hz AC supply frequency) 3. Either:
1254 (60 Hz AC supply frequency) • Press the red reset button
3. Change the setting of Pr 0.048 as follows: • Toggle the reset digital input
• Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by setting
Pr 00.048 setting Operating mode Pr 10.038 to 100
1 Open-loop
5.9 Parameter access level and security
The parameter access level determines whether the user has access to
Menu 0 only or to all the advanced menus (Menus 1 to 41) in addition to
Menu 0.
2 RFC-A The User Security determines whether the access to the user is read
only or read write.
Both the User Security and Parameter Access Level can operate
independently of each other as shown in Table 5-8.
3 RFC-S Table 5-8 Parameter access level and security
User
security User Menu 0 Advanced
The figures in the second column apply when serial communications are Access level
status security status menu status
used. (11.044)
4. Either: Open RW Not visible
• Press the red reset button 0 Menu 0
Closed RO Not visible
• Toggle the reset digital input
Open RW RW
• Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by setting 1 All Menus
Pr 10.038 to 100. Closed RO RO
Read-only Open RO Not visible
NOTE 2
Menu 0 Closed RO Not visible
Entering 1253 or 1254 in Pr mm.000 will only load defaults if the setting
of Pr 00.048 has been changed. Open RO RO
3 Read-only
Closed RO RO
5.7 Saving parameters Open Not visible Not visible
When changing a parameter in Menu 0, the new value is saved when 4 Status only
Closed Not visible Not visible
pressing the Enter button to return to parameter view mode from Open Not visible Not visible
parameter edit mode. 5 No access
Closed Not visible Not visible
If parameters have been changed in the advanced menus, then the
The default settings of the drive are Parameter Access Level Menu 0
change will not be saved automatically. A save function must be carried
and user Security Open i.e. read / write access to Menu 0 with the
out.
advanced menus not visible.
Procedure
1. Select ‘Save Parameters'* in Pr mm.000 (alternatively enter a value
of 1000* in Pr mm.000)
2. Either:
• Press the red reset button
• Toggle the reset digital input, or
• Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by setting
Pr 10.038 to 100
* If the drive is in the under voltage state (i.e. when the control terminal 9
and 10 are being supplied from a low voltage DC supply) a value of 1001
must be entered into Pr mm.000 to perform a save function.

Issue Number: 3
5.9.1 User Security Level / Access Level enabled, refer to section 5.9 Parameter access level and security on
The drive provides a number of different levels of security that can be set page 93 for further information regarding access level.
by the user via User Security Status (11.044); these are shown in the
table below.
5.11 Displaying destination parameters only
By selecting 'Destinations' in Pr mm.000 (Alternatively enter 12001 in
User Security Pr mm.000), the only parameters that will be visible to the user will be
Status Description destination parameters. This function does not require a drive reset to
(Pr 11.044) become active. In order to deactivate this function, return to Pr mm.000
All writable parameters are available to be edited and select 'No action' (alternatively enter a value of 0).
Menu 0 (0)
but only parameters in Menu 0 are visible Please note that this function can be affected by the access level
All parameters are visible and all writable enabled, refer to section 5.9 Parameter access level and security on
All menus (1) page 93 for further information regarding access level.
parameters are available to be edited
Read- only Access is limited to Menu 0 parameters only. All
Menu 0 (2) parameters are read-only 5.12 Communications
All parameters are read-only however all menus The Unidrive M702 drive offers Ethernet fieldbus communications. This
Read-only (3)
and parameters are visible enables the drive set-up, operation and monitoring to be carried out with
The keypad remains in status mode and no a PC or controller if required.
Status only (4)
parameters can be viewed or edited 5.12.1 Ethernet communications
The keypad remains in status mode and no The drive offers fieldbus communications via Ethernet, this enables the
parameters can be viewed or edited. Drive drive set-up, operation and monitoring to be carried out with a PC or
No access (5)
parameters cannot be accessed via a comms/ controller. The drive provides two RJ45 connections with an Ethernet
fieldbus interface in the drive or any option module switch for easy network creation. The Ethernet option provides support
for the following protocols:
5.9.2 Changing the User Security Level /Access • Modbus TCP
Level • EtherNet/IP
The security level is determined by the setting of Pr 00.049 or Pr 11.044. • Web pages*
The Security Level can be changed through the keypad even if the User • Email*
Security Code has been set. • Synchronization with IEEE1588
5.9.3 User Security Code *Features have not been implemented but will be available soon.
The User Security Code, when set, prevents write access to any of the In addition to two RJ45 connectors, each port provides a status LED for
parameters in any menu.
diagnostic / information purposes.
Setting User Security Code
Enter a value between 1 and 2147483647 in Pr 00.034 and press the LED status Description
button; the security code has now been set to this value. In order Off Ethernet connection not detected
to activate the security, the Security level must be set to desired level in Solid green Ethernet connection detected but no data
Pr 00.049. When the drive is reset, the security code will have been Flashing green Ethernet connection detected and data flow
activated and the drive returns to Menu 0 and the symbol is
Figure 5-8 Location of the Ethernet ports
displayed in the right hand corner of the keypad display. The value of
Pr 00.034 will return to 0 in order to hide the security code.
Unlocking User Security Code
Select a parameter that need to be edited and press the button,
the upper display will now show ‘Security Code’. Use the arrow buttons
1 8 1 8
to set the security code and press the button. With the correct
security code entered, the display will revert to the parameter selected in
edit mode.
If an incorrect security code is entered, the following message ‘Incorrect
security code’ is displayed, then the display will revert to parameter view
mode.
Disabling User Security
Unlock the previously set security code as detailed above. Set Pr 00.034
to 0 and press the button. The User Security has now been
disabled, and will not have to be unlocked each time the drive is
powered up to allow read / write access to the parameters.
5.10 Displaying parameters with non-

default values only
By selecting 'Show non-default' in Pr mm.000 (Alternatively, enter 12000 NOTE
in Pr mm.000), the only parameters that will be visible to the user will be The shell of the RJ45 connector is isolated from the 0 V of the drive
those containing a non-default value. This function does not require a control terminals but it is connected to ground.
drive reset to become active. In order to deactivate this function, return
to Pr mm.000 and select 'No action' (alternatively enter a value of 0).
Please note that this function can be affected by the access level

Issue Number: 3
Recommended cable This parameter controls and displays the IP address of the drive. If
It is recommended that a minimum specification of CAT5e is used in new DHCP Enable (4.02.005) is set to On (1) this parameter will become
installations. If the existing cabling is used this may limit the maximum read-only.
data rate depending on the cable ratings. In noisy environments the use
of STP cable will offer additional noise immunity.
Maximum network lengths 4.02.007 Subnet Mask
The main restriction imposed on the Ethernet cabling is the length of a RW IP US
single segment of the cable, for Copper - UTP/STP CAT 5 cable type, 000.000.000.000 to
maximum trunk cable length should be limited to 100 m. If distances 255.255.255.000
255.255.255.255
greater than this are required it may be possible to extend the network
with additional switches. This parameter controls and displays the Subnet Mask (4.02.007) of the
Ethernet set-up parameters drive.
The following section covers the minimum number of parameters
required to be set to establish an Ethernet communication. 4.02.008 Default Gateway
Table 5-9 Key to parameter table coding RW IP US
000.000.000.000 to
RW Read / Write ND No default value 192.168.1.254
255.255.255.255
RO Read only NC Not copied
Num Number parameter PT Protected parameter This parameter controls and displays the Default Gateway (4.02.008) of
Bit Bit parameter RA Rating dependant the drive.
Txt Text string US User save PC Tools support

The discovery protocol feature, which is supported by the Unidrive M PC
Bin Binary parameter PS Power-down save
tools, is able to discover the drives that are connected to a PC,
FI Filtered DE Destination independent of above parameter settings.
IP IP Address Mac Mac Address
Date Date parameter Time Time parameter
4.00.007
Reset
{24.007}
RW Bit US
Off (0) or On (1) Off (0)
Changes to the Ethernet set-up parameters will not take effect until a
Reset (4.00.007) has been performed.
4.00.010 Active IP Address

RO IP US
000.000.000.000 to
255.255.255.255
This parameter displays the Active IP Address. The Active IP Address

can also be viewed in Pr 00.037.
4.02.005 DHCP Enable

RW Bit US
Off (0) or On (1) On (1)
If DHCP Enable (4.02.005) is set to On (1), the IP address is acquired

from the DHCP server and written to IP Address (4.02.006).
NOTE
When using manual / static IP address configuration, ensure Subnet
Mask (4.02.007) and Default Gateway (4.02.008) should also be set
manually.
4.02.006 IP Address
RW IP US
000.000.000.000 to
192.168.001.100
255.255.255.255

Issue Number: 3
6 Basic parameters
Menu 0 is used to bring together various commonly used parameters for basic easy set up of the drive. All the parameters in Menu 0 appear in other
menus in the drive (denoted by {…}). Menus 22 can be used to configure the parameters in Menu 0.
6.1 Menu 0: Basic parameters

Range Default
Parameter Type
OL RFC-A RFC-S OL RFC-A RFC-S
00.001 Minimum Reference Clamp {01.007} ±VM_NEGATIVE_REF_CLAMP1 Hz / rpm 0.0 Hz 0.0 rpm RW Num US
50Hz default: 50Hz default:
50.0 Hz 1500.0 Hz
00.002 Maximum Reference Clamp {01.006} ±VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP Hz / rpm 3000.0 rpm RW Num US
60.0 Hz 1800.0 Hz
00.003 Acceleration Rate 1 {02.011} ±VM_ACCEL_RATE s 5.0 s 2.000 s 0.200 s RW Num US
00.004 Deceleration Rate 1 {02.021} ±VM_ACCEL_RATE s 10.0 s 2.000 s 0.200 s RW Num US
00.005 Reference Selector {01.014} Preset (3), Keypad (4), Precision (5), Keypad Ref (6) Preset (3) RW Txt US
00.006 Symmetrical Current Limit {04.007} ±VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT % 165 % 175 % RW Num RA US
Ur S (0), Ur (1), Fixed
(2),
Open-loop Control Mode {05.014} Ur Auto (3), Ur I (4), Ur I (4) RW Txt US
00.007 Square (5),
Current 1P (6)
Speed Controller Proportional Gain Kp1 {03.010} 0.0000 to 200.000 s/rad 0.0300 s/rad 0.0100 s/rad RW Num US
Low Frequency Voltage Boost {05.015} 0.0 to 25.0 % 3.0 % RW Num US
00.008
Speed Controller Integral Gain Ki1 {03.011} 0.00 to 655.35 s2/rad 0.10 s2/rad 1.00 s2/rad RW Num US
Dynamic V to F Select {05.013} Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
00.009 Speed Controller Differential Feedback
{03.012} 0.00000 to 0.65535 1/rad 0.00000 1/rad RW Num US
Gain Kd 1
Motor Rpm {05.004} ±180000 rpm 0 rpm RW Bit US
00.010
Speed Feedback {03.002} ±VM_SPEED rpm RO Num ND NC PT FI
Output Frequency {05.001} ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz RO Num ND NC PT FI
00.011
P1 Position {03.029} 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT FI
00.012 Current Magnitude {04.001} ±VM_DRIVE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR A RO Bit ND NC PT FI
00.013 Torque Producing Current {04.002} ±VM_DRIVE_CURRENT A RO Bit ND NC PT FI
00.014 Torque Mode Selector {04.011} 0 or 1 0 to 5 0 RW Num US
Fast (0), Standard (1),

00.015 Ramp Mode Select {02.004} Fast (0), Standard (1) Standard (1) RW Txt US
Std boost (2)
00.016 Ramp Enable {02.002} Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US

00.017 Current Reference Filter Time Constant {04.012} 0.0 to 25.0 ms 0.0 ms RW Num US
00.022 Bipolar Reference Enable {01.010} Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
00.023 Jog Reference {01.005} 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 to 4000.0 rpm 0.0 RW Num US
00.024 Preset Reference 1 {01.021} ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF rpm 0.0 RW Num US
00.025 Preset Reference 2 {01.022} ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF rpm 0.0 RW Num US
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_
Preset Reference 3 {01.023} 0.0 RW Num US
00.026 REF Hz
Overspeed Threshold {03.008} 0 to 50000 rpm 0.0 RW Num US
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_
Preset Reference 4 {01.024} 0.0 RW Num US
00.027 REF Hz
P1 Rotary Lines Per Revolution {03.034} 1 to 100000 1024 4096 RW Num US
00.028 Enable Auxiliary Key {06.013} 0 to 2 0 RW Num US
00.029 NV Media Card Data Previously Loaded {11.036} 0 to 999 RO Num NC PT
None (0), Read (1), Program (2),
00.030 Parameter Cloning {11.042} None (0) RW Txt NC US
Auto (3), Boot (4)
200 V (0), 400 V (1), 575 V (2),
00.031 Drive Rated Voltage {11.033} RO Txt ND NC PT
690 V (3)
00.032 Maximum Heavy Duty Rating {11.032} 0.000 to 99999.999 A RO Num ND NC PT
Disable (0), Enable (1),
Catch A Spinning Motor {06.009} Fwd Only (2), Disable (0) RW Txt US
00.033 Rev Only (3)
Motor Parameter Adaptive Control {05.016} 0 to 2 0 RW Num US
00.034 User Security Code {11.030} 0 to 231-1 0 RW Num ND NC PT US
00.037 Active IP Address {24.010} 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255 RO IP NC PT
00.038 Current Controller Kp Gain {04.013} 0 to 30000 20 150 RW Num US
00.039 Current Controller Ki Gain {04.014} 0 to 30000 40 2000 RW Num US
00.040 Auto-tune {05.012} 0 to 2 0 to 3 0 to 4 0 RW Num NC
2 kHz (0), 3 kHz (1), 4 kHz (2), 6 kHz (3), 8 kHz (4),
00.041 Maximum Switching Frequency {05.018} 3kHz (1) 6 kHz (3) RW Txt RA US
12 kHz (5), 16 kHz (6)

Issue Number: 3
Range Default
Parameter Type
00.042 Number Of Motor Poles {05.011} Automatic (0) to 480 Poles (240) Automatic (0) 6 Poles (3) RW Num US
Rated Power Factor {05.010} 0.000 to 1.000 0.850 RW Num RA US
00.043 0.0 to
Position Feedback Phase Angle {03.025} RW Num ND US
359.9 °
200V drive: 230V
50Hz default 400V drive: 400V
00.044 Rated Voltage {05.009} ±VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET 60Hz default 400V drive: 460V RW Num RA US
575V drive: 575V
690V drive: 690V
0.00 to
0 to 1500 rpm 1450 rpm
Rated Speed {05.008} 50000.00 RW Num US
180000 rpm 60Hz default: 60Hz default:
00.045 rpm
1800rpm 1750rpm
1.0 to
Motor Thermal Time Constant 1 {04.015} 89.0 s RW Num US
3000.0 s
00.046 Rated Current {05.007} ±VM_RATED_CURRENT Maximum Heavy Duty Rating (11.032) RW Num RA US
0.0 to 0.0 to 50Hz default: 50.0 Hz

00.047 Rated Frequency {05.006} RW Num US
3000.0 Hz 1667.0 Hz 60Hz default: 60.0 Hz
00.048 Drive Mode {11.031} Open-loop (1), RFC-A (2), RFC-S (3), Regen (4) Open-loop (1) RFC-A (2) RFC-S (3) RW Txt ND NC PT
Menu 0 (0), All Menus (1), Read-only Menu 0 (2),
00.049 User Security Status {11.044} Menu 0 (0) RW Txt ND PT
Read-only (3), Status Only (4), No Access (5)
00.050 Software Version {11.029} 0 to 99999999 RO Num ND NC PT
00.051 Action On Trip Detection {10.037} 0 to 31 0 RW Bin US
RW Read / Write RO Read only Num Number parameter Bit Bit parameter Txt Text string Bin Binary parameter FI Filtered
ND No default value NC Not copied PT Protected parameter RA Rating dependent US User save PS Power-down save DE Destination
IP IP address Mac Mac address Date Date parameter Time Time parameter

Issue Number: 3
Figure 6-1 Menu 0 logic diagram
Bipolar
Reference
Reference Select
Selector 00.022
Preset frequency 00.005
reference
Preset
00.024 Frequency 1
0
00.025 Preset
Frequency 2 1
Open Loop only 2
Preset Preset
00.026 3
Frequency 3
Keypad
00.027 Preset 4
Frequency 4 Precision
5
Keypad Ref
6
Keypad reference
00.028
Enable Forward /
Reverse Key
Precision reference
Key
X X Input Read-write (RW)

terminals 00.XXX parameter
X X Output 00.XXX Read-only (RO)

terminals parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings

Issue Number: 3
RUN RUN
FORWARD REVERSE AT ZERO SPEED
7 8 4
Digital output
Motor control
Maximum 00.006 Current
Frequency/ Limit
Speed Clamp
Ramp 00.014 Torque Mode
00.002 Selector
Enable OL> Catch A
Minimum 000.16 Spinning Motor
Frequency/ 00.033 RFC-A, RFC-S
SpeedClamp > Motor Full
00.001 RFC-A, Load Rated Speed
RFC-S> Autotune
00.017 Current Demand
Filter Time
RFC-A, RFC-S modes only
Constant
Motor parameters
00.042 ~ 00.047
Ramps
Number Of Poles
Power Factor
Rated Voltage
RFC-A, Rated Speed
RFC-S>Speed-loop PIDgains Rated Current
Rated Frequency
Speed-Loop SV> Motor Thermal
00.007 Proportional
Time Constant
Gain
00.003
Acceleration Speed-Loop
00.008
Rate Integral Gain
RFC-A,
OL>Motor-voltage control RFC-S
00.004
Deceleration 00.007 L1 L2 L3 Drive
Rate Voltage Mode
Speed-Loop Selector
00.015 00.010
00.009 Derivative
Gain 00.008
Ramp Mode
Selector Estimated Boost Voltage
Motor
Speed _ +
00.009
DynamicV/f
Motor Speed Select
00.010
Power stage _ +
00.041 Maximum Switching
Frequency
00.027 Drive Encoder 00.011 Output Frequency
PPR
00.026 Overspeed
Threshold RFC-A Current
RFC-S Magnitude
Torque 00.013 00.012
_
Producing U V W + BR
Current
15 way sub-D Magnetising

connector Current
Resistor
optional

Issue Number: 3
6.2 Parameter descriptions

6.2.1 Pr mm.000
Pr mm.000 is available in all menus, commonly used functions are provided as text strings in Pr mm.000 shown in Table 6-1. The functions in Table
6-1 can also be selected by entering the appropriate numeric values (as shown in Table 6-2) in Pr mm.000. For example, enter 7001 in Pr mm.000 to
erase the file in NV media card location 001.
Table 6-1 Commonly used functions in xx.000
Value Equivalent value String Action
0 0 [No Action]
1000 1 [Save parameters] Save parameters when under voltage is not active and low voltage threshold is not active
6001 2 [Load file 1] Load the drive parameters or user program file from NV media card file 001
4001 3 [Save to file 1] Transfer the drive parameters to parameter file 001
12000 8 [Show non-default] Displays parameters that are different from defaults
12001 9 [Destinations] Displays parameters that are set
1233 10 [Reset 50Hz Defs] Load parameters with standard (50 Hz) defaults
1244 11 [Reset 60Hz Defs] Load parameters with US (60 Hz) defaults
1070 12 [Reset modules] Reset all option modules
11001 13 [Read Enc. NP P1] Transfer electronic nameplate motor parameters to the drive from the P1 encoder
11051 14 [Read Enc. NP P2] Transfer electronic nameplate motor parameters to the drive from the P2 encoder

Issue Number: 3
Table 6-2 Functions in Pr mm.000
Value Action
Save parameters when Under Voltage Active (Pr 10.016) is not active and Low Under Voltage Threshold Select mode
1000
(Pr 06.067 = Off) is not active.
1001 Save parameter under all conditions
1070 Reset all option modules
1233 Load standard (50 Hz) defaults
1234 Load standard (50 Hz) defaults to all menus except option module menus (i.e 15 to 20 and 24 to 28)
1244 Load US (60 Hz) defaults
1245 Load US (60 Hz) defaults to all menus except option module menus (i.e 15 to 20 and 24 to 28)
1253 Change drive mode and load standard (50 Hz) defaults
1254 Change drive mode and load US (60 Hz) defaults
1255 Change drive mode and load standard (50 Hz) defaults except for menus 15 to 20 and 24 to 28
1256 Change drive mode and load US (60 Hz) defaults except for menus 15 to 20 and 24 to 28
1299 Reset {Stored HF} trip.
2001* Create a boot file on a non-volatile media card based on the present drive parameters including all Menu 20 parameters
4yyy* NV media card: Transfer the drive parameters to parameter file xxx
5yyy* NV media card: Transfer the onboard user program to onboard user program file xxx
NV media card: Load the drive parameters from parameter file xxx or the onboard user program from onboard user
6yyy*
program file xxx
7yyy* NV media card: Erase file xxx
8yyy* NV Media card: Compare the data in the drive with file xxx
9555* NV media card: Clear the warning suppression flag
9666* NV media card: Set the warning suppression flag
9777* NV media card: Clear the read-only flag
9888* NV media card: Set the read-only flag
9999* NV media card: Erase and format the NV media card
Transfer electronic nameplate motor object parameters from the drive to an encoder connected to the drive or an option
110S0
module.
Transfer electronic nameplate motor objects parameters from an encoder connected to the drive or option module to the
110S1
drive parameters.
110S2 As 110S0, but for performance object 1
Transfer electronic nameplate motor object parameters from the drive to an encoder connected to the drive or an option
110S6
module in the Unidrive SP format.
12000** Only display parameters that are different from their default value. This action does not require a drive reset.
Only display parameters that are used to set-up destinations (i.e. DE format bit is 1). This action does not require a drive
12001**
reset.
15xxx* Transfer the user program in an option module installed in slot 1 to a non-volatile media card file xxx
18xxx* Transfer the user program from file xxx in a non-volatile media card to an option module installed in slot 1.
21xxx* Transfer the user program in an option module installed in slot 4 to a non-volatile media card file xxx.
* See Chapter 9 NV Media Card Operation on page 130 for more information on these functions.
** These functions do not require a drive reset to become active. All other functions require a drive reset to initiate the function.
To allow easy access to some commonly used functions, refer to the table overleaf. Equivalent values and strings are also provided in the table
above.

Issue Number: 3
7 Running the motor Speed feedback

Suitable devices are:
• Incremental encoder (A, B or F, D with or without Z)
This chapter takes the new user through all the essential steps to
• Incremental encoder with forward and reverse outputs (F, R with or
running a motor for the first time, in each of the possible operating
without Z)
modes.
• SINCOS encoder (with, or without Stegmann Hiperface, EnDat or
For information on tuning the drive for the best performance, see SSI communications protocols)
Chapter 8 Optimization on page 118. • BiSS absolute encoder
• EnDat absolute encoder
• Resolver
Ensure that no damage or safety hazard could arise from the
motor starting unexpectedly. Speed and position feedback
WARNING Suitable devices are:
• Incremental encoder (A, B or F, D with or without Z) with
The values of the motor parameters affect the protection of commutation signals (U, V, W)
the motor. • Incremental encoder with forward and reverse outputs (F, R with or
The default values in the drive should not be relied upon. without Z) and commutation outputs (U, V, W)
It is essential that the correct value is entered in Pr 00.046 • SINCOS encoder (with Stegmann Hiperface, EnDat or SSI
CAUTION
Rated Current. This affects the thermal protection of the communications protocols)
motor. • BiSS absolute encoder
• EnDat absolute encoder
If the drive is started using the keypad it will run to the speed
• Resolver
defined by the keypad reference (Pr 01.017). This may not
be acceptable depending on the application. The user must
check in Pr 01.017 and ensure that the keypad reference 7.2 Changing the operating mode
CAUTION has been set to 0.
Changing the operating mode returns all parameters to their default
value, including the motor parameters. User Security Status (Pr 00.049)
If the intended maximum speed affects the safety of the and User Security Code (Pr 00.034) are not affected by this procedure).
machinery, additional independent over-speed protection
must be used.
Procedure
WARNING Use the following procedure only if a different operating mode is
required:
7.1 Quick start connections 1. Enter either of the following values in Pr mm.000, as appropriate:
1253 (50 Hz AC supply frequency)
7.1.1 Basic requirements 1254 (60 Hz AC supply frequency)
This section shows the basic connections which must be made for the
2. Change the setting of Pr 00.048 as follows:
drive to run in the required mode. For minimal parameter settings to run
in each mode please see the relevant part of section 7.3 Quick start Pr 00.048 setting Operating mode
commissioning / start-up on page 107.
Table 7-1 Minimum control connection requirements for each
1 Open-loop
control mode
Drive control method Requirements
Drive enable
Terminal mode Speed / Torque reference
2 RFC-A
Run forward / Run reverse
Keypad mode Drive enable
Drive enable
Serial communications
Serial communications link
3 RFC-S
Table 7-2 Minimum control connection requirements for each

mode of operation The figures in the second column apply when serial communications are
used.
Operating mode Requirements
3. Either:
Open loop mode Induction motor
• Press the red reset button
RFC – A mode • Toggle the reset digital input
Induction motor with speed feedback
(with speed feedback) • Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by setting
RFC – S mode (with speed and Permanent magnet motor with speed Pr 10.038 to 100 (ensure that Pr. mm.000 returns to 0).
position feedback) and position feedback

Issue Number: 3
Figure 7-1 Minimum connections to get the motor running in any operating mode (size 3 and 4)
Braking resistor
! (optional)
_
BR +
Communications
port
EnDat
1 T
Terminal AB
AB Servo
SC
Hiperface
SC EnDat
SC SSI
BiSS
SSI
Resolver
2 24V e
1
2
A
A\
Cos
Cosref
A (Cos)
A\ (Cos\)
Data
Data\
Cos H
Cos L 3 r
3
4
B
B\
Sin
Sinref
B (Sin)
B\ (Sin\)
CLK
CLK\
Sin H
Sin L 4
m
5
6
Z
Z\
Data
Data\
Data
Data\
Freeze
Freeze
Ref H
Ref L
34 5
i
7
8
U
U\
n
9
10
V
V\
6 a
11 W CLK
12
13
W\ CLK\
+V
7 RUN FWD l
14 0V
15 Thermistor Input 8 RUN REV
9
M
5 1 o
10 6 10
15 11 d
11 SAFE TORQUE
Position feedback OFF 1 e
connector 15 way D-type
L1 L2 L3 U V W 12
SAFE TORQUE
K
13 OFF 2 e
y
p
Induction Servo motor
a
motor (permanent
magnet)
d
M
o
U V W U V W Keypad
Optional item, must
d
be installed e
for keypad mode
E E
Fuses
A A
B B A A
B B
Z Z 1
U U 1 Marker pulse optional
V V 2 Thermal overload for braking resistor
W W to protect against fire risk. This must be
wired to interrupt the AC supply in the
Open loop Z Z
1
L1 L2 L3 event of a fault. This is not required if the
optional internal braking resistor is used
RFC-A RFC-S
Sensorless Sensorless
RFC-A RFC-S

Issue Number: 3
Figure 7-2 Minimum connections to get the motor running in any operating mode (size 5)
Braking resistor
! (optional)
_
+ BR
Communications
port 1
2 24V
Terminal AB SC SC EnDat
EnDat
BiSS Resolver 3
1
AB Servo
A
Hiperface
Cos
SC SSI
A (Cos)
SSI
Data Cos H 4 T
2
3
A\
B
Cosref
Sin
A\ (Cos\)
B (Sin)
Data\
CLK
Cos L
Sin H 5
e
4
5
B\
Z
Sinref
Data
B\ (Sin\)
Data
CLK\
Freeze
Sin L
Ref H r
6 Z\ Data\ Data\ Freeze Ref L 6 m
7 U
8 U\
9
10
V
V\
7 RUN FWD i
11
12
W
W\
CLK
CLK\
8 RUN REV n
13
14
+V
0V 9
a
15 Thermistor Input
10
l
11 SAFE TORQUE
5
10
1
6 OFF 1 M
15 11 12 o
Position feedback
13 SAFE TORQUE
OFF 2
d
L1 L2 L3 K e
e
y
U V W
p
a
Induction
d
Servo motor
motor (permanent
magnet) M
o
d
U V W U V W Keypad e
Optional item, must
be installed
for keypad mode
E E
Fuses
A A
B B A A
B B
Z Z 1
Open loop Z Z
1
RFC-A RFC-S
RFC-A RFC-S

Issue Number: 3
Figure 7-3 Minimum connections to get the motor running in any operating mode (size 6)
Braking resistor
! (optional) -
Size 6 only
_ + BR
Communications
port
Terminal AB
AB Servo
SC
Hiperface
SC EnDat
SC SSI
EnDat
BiSS Resolver 1 T
1 A Cos A (Cos)
SSI
Data Cos H 2 24V e
2
3
A\
B
Cosref
Sin
A\ (Cos\)
B (Sin)
Data\
CLK
Cos L
Sin H 3 r
4
5
B\
Z
Sinref
Data
B\ (Sin\)
Data
CLK\
Freeze
Sin L
Ref H
6 m
6 Z\ Data\ Data\ Freeze Ref L 4
7
8
U
U\
i
9 V 5 n
10 V\
11
12
W
W\
CLK
CLK\
6 a
13
14
+V
0V 7 RUN FWD l
15 Thermistor Input
8 RUN REV
9
M
5
10
1
6
o
10
15 11 d
11 SAFE TORQUE
Position feedback
L1 L2 L3 U V W OFF 1 e
12
SAFE TORQUE
K
13 OFF 2 e
y
p
Induction
motor
Servo motor
(permanent a
magnet) d
M
U V W U V W o
Keypad
Optional item, must
d
be installed e
E E for keypad mode
Fuses
A A
B B A A
B B
Z Z 1
Open loop Z Z
1
RFC-A RFC-S
RFC-A RFC-S

Issue Number: 3
Figure 7-4 Minimum connections to get the motor running in any operating mode (size 7 onwards)
L3 L2 L1
Fuses
L1 L2 L3
Communications
2 24V
port 3
EnDat
4 T
Terminal AB
AB Servo
SC
Hiperface
SC EnDat
SC SSI
BiSS Resolver
5
e
1 A Cos A (Cos)
SSI
Data Cos H
8 r
2
3
A\
B
Cosref
Sin
A\ (Cos\)
B (Sin)
Data\
CLK
Cos L
Sin H
6 m
4 B\ Sinref B\ (Sin\) CLK\ Sin L
5
6
Z
Z\
Data
Data\
Data
Data\
Freeze
Freeze
Ref H
Ref L
7 RUN FWD i
7
8
U
U\ 8 RUN REV n
9
10
V
V\
9
a
11 W CLK
12
13
W\ CLK\
+V 10
l
14 0V
15 Thermistor Input SAFE TORQUE
11 OFF 1 M
12 o
5 1
10 6 13 SAFE TORQUE
OFF 2
d
15 11
K e
Position feedback
U V W +DC e
connector 15 way D-type ! y
2 p
a
Induction Braking resistor
d
Servo motor
motor (optional)
(permanent
magnet) M
o
d
U V W U V W Keypad e
Optional item, must
be installed
for keypad mode
E E
A A
B B A A
B B
Z Z 1
Open loop Z Z
1
event of a fault. This is not required if the
RFC-A RFC-A
RFC-A RFC-S

Issue Number: 3
7.3 Quick start commissioning / start-up

7.3.1 Open loop
Action Detail
Ensure:
• The drive enable signal is not given (terminals 11 and 13)
Before power-up
• Run signal is not given
• Motor is connected
Verify that Open Loop mode is displayed as the drive powers up. If the mode is incorrect see section
5.6 Changing the operating mode on page 93.
Power-up the drive Ensure:
• Drive displays ‘Inhibit’
If the drive trips, see section 13 Diagnostics on page 247.
Enter:
• Motor rated frequency in Pr 00.047 (Hz) Mot X XXXXXXXXX
Enter motor • Motor rated current in Pr 00.046 (A)
No XXXXXXXXXX kg
IP55 I.cl F °C 40 s S1
nameplate details • Motor rated speed in Pr 00.045 (rpm) V
-1
Hz min kW cosφ A
230 50 1445 2.20 0.80 8.50
• Motor rated voltage in Pr 00.044 (V) - check if or connection 400
CN = 14.5Nm
4.90
I.E.C 34 1(87)
240 50 1445 2.20 0.76 8.50
415 4.90
CN = 14.4Nm
CTP- VEN 1PHASE 1=0,46A P=110W R.F 32MN
0.02
Set maximum Enter:
frequency • Maximum frequency in Pr 00.002 (Hz)
Enter:
100Hz
• Acceleration rate in Pr 00.003 (s/100 Hz)
Set acceleration /
• Deceleration rate in Pr 00.004 (s/100 Hz) (If braking resistor installed, set Pr 00.015 = Fast. Also
deceleration rates
ensure Pr 10.030 and Pr 10.031 and Pr 10.061 are set correctly, otherwise premature ‘Brake R Too
Hot’ trips may be seen).
t
0.03 0.04
Motor thermistor The motor thermistor connection is made through the drive encoder port (terminal 15). The thermistor
set-up type is selected in P1 Thermistor Type (03.118).
The drive is able to perform either a stationary or a rotating autotune. The motor must be at a standstill
before an autotune is enabled. A rotating autotune should be used whenever possible so the measured
value of power factor of the motor is used by the drive.
A rotating autotune will cause the motor to accelerate up to 2/3 base speed in the direction
selected regardless of the reference provided. Once complete the motor will coast to a
stop. The enable signal must be removed before the drive can be made to run at the
required reference.
WARNING The drive can be stopped at any time by removing the run signal or removing the drive
cos ∅
enable.
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible to uncouple the
load from the motor shaft. A stationary autotune measures the stator resistance of the motor and
Autotune the voltage offset in the drive. These are required for good performance in vector control modes. A
stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of the motor so the value on the motor
nameplate must be entered into Pr 00.043. RS
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is uncoupled. A rotating autotune first performs σLS
a stationary autotune before rotating the motor at 2/3 base speed in the direction selected. The
rotating autotune measures the power factor of the motor.
To perform an autotune:
• Set Pr 00.040 = 1 for a stationary autotune or set Pr 00.040 = 2 for a rotating autotune
• Close the Drive Enable signals (terminals 11 and 13). The drive will display ’Ready’.
• Close the run signal (terminal 7 or 8). The upper row of the display will flash ’Auto Tune’ while the
drive is performing the autotune.
• Wait for the drive to display ’Ready’ or ‘Inhibit’ and for the motor to come to a standstill.
If the drive trips, see Chapter 13 Diagnostics on page 247.
• Remove the drive enable and run signal from the drive.
Select 'Save Parameters' in Pr mm.000 (alternatively enter a value of 1000 in Pr mm.000) and press
Save parameters
the red reset button or toggle the reset digital input.
Run Drive is now ready to run

Issue Number: 3
7.3.2 RFC - A mode (with position feedback)

Induction motor with position feedback
For simplicity only an incremental quadrature encoder will be considered here. For information on setting up one of the other supported speed
feedback devices, refer to section 7.4 Setting up a feedback device on page 111.
Action Detail
Ensure:
Before power-up
• Motor and feedback device are connected
Verify that RFC-A mode is displayed as the drive powers up. If the mode is incorrect see section 5.6 Changing
the operating mode on page 93.
Power-up the
Ensure:
drive
Incremental encoder basic set-up
Enter:
• Drive encoder type in Pr 03.038 = AB (0): Quadrature encoder
• Encoder power supply in Pr. 03.036 = 5 V (0), 8 V (1) or 15 V (2).
NOTE If output voltage from the encoder is >5 V, then the termination resistors must be disabled
Pr 03.039 to 0.
Set motor
feedback Setting the encoder voltage supply too high for the encoder could result in damage to the feedback
parameters device.
CAUTION
• Drive encoder Lines Per Revolution (LPR) in Pr 03.034 (set according to encoder)
• Drive encoder termination resistor setting in Pr 03.039:
0 = A-A\, B-B\, Z-Z\ termination resistors disabled
1 = A-A\, B-B\, termination resistors enabled, Z-Z\ termination resistors disabled
2 = A-A\, B-B\, Z-Z\ termination resistors enabled
Enter:
Enter motor • Motor rated frequency in Pr 00.047 (Hz)
Mot X XXXXXXXXX
nameplate • Motor rated current in Pr 00.046 (A) IP55

V
No XXXXXXXXXX kg
I.cl F °C 40 s S1
-1
Hz min kW cosφ A
• Motor rated speed in Pr 00.045 (rpm)

230 50 1445 2.20 0.80 8.50
details 400
CN = 14.5Nm
4.90
I.E.C 34 1(87)
240 50 1445 2.20 0.76 8.50
415 4.90
• Motor rated voltage in Pr 00.044 (V) - check if or connection

CN = 14.4Nm
0.02
Set maximum Enter:
speed • Maximum speed in Pr 00.002 (rpm)
t
Enter:
1000rpm
Set acceleration / • Acceleration rate in Pr 00.003 (s/1000 rpm)
deceleration • Deceleration rate in Pr 00.004 (s/1000 rpm) (If braking resistor installed, set Pr 00.015 = Fast. Also ensure
rates Pr 10.030, Pr 10.031 and Pr 10.061 are set correctly, otherwise premature ‘Brake R Too Hot’ trips may be 0.03 0.04
t
seen).
Motor thermistor The motor thermistor connection is made through the drive encoder port (terminal 15). The thermistor type is
set-up selected in P1 Thermistor Type (03.118).
The drive is able to perform either a stationary or a rotating autotune. The motor must be at a standstill before
an autotune is enabled. A stationary autotune will give moderate performance whereas a rotating autotune will
give improved performance as it measures the actual values of the motor parameters required by the drive.
A rotating autotune will cause the motor to accelerate up to 2/3 base speed in the direction selected
regardless of the reference provided. Once complete the motor will coast to a stop. The enable signal
must be removed before the drive can be made to run at the required reference.
WARNING The drive can be stopped at any time by removing the run signal or removing the drive enable.
cos ∅
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible to uncouple the load
from the motor shaft. The stationary autotune measures the stator resistance and transient inductance of
the motor. These are used to calculate the current loop gains, and at the end of the test the values in
Autotune Pr 00.038 and Pr 00.039 are updated. A stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of the
motor so the value on the motor nameplate must be entered into Pr 00.043.
RS
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is uncoupled. A rotating autotune first performs a σLS
stationary autotune before rotating the motor at 2/3 base speed in the direction selected. The rotating LS
autotune measures the stator inductance of the motor and calculates the power factor. T saturation
Nm
To perform an autotune: break-
points
N rpm
• Close the drive enable signal (terminals 11 and 13). The drive will display ’Ready’.
• Close the run signal (terminal 7 or 8). The upper row of the display will flash ’Auto Tune’ while the drive is
performing the autotune.
• Wait for the drive to display ’Ready’ or ‘Inhibit’ and for the motor to come to a standstill
Save parameters Select 'Save Parameters' in Pr mm.000 (alternatively enter a value of 1000 in Pr mm.000) and press red
reset button or toggle the reset digital input.

Issue Number: 3
7.3.3 RFC-A mode (Sensorless control)

Induction motor with sensorless control
Action Detail
Ensure:
Before power-up
Verify that RFC-A mode is displayed as the drive powers up. If the mode is incorrect see section 5.6 Changing
the operating mode on page 93.
Power-up the
Ensure:
drive
Select RFC-A
(Sensorless
control) mode • Set Pr 03.024 = 1 or 3 to select RFC-A Sensorless mode
and disable • Set Pr 03.040 = 0000 to disable the wire break
encoder wire-
break trip
Enter:
Enter motor • Motor rated frequency in Pr 00.047 (Hz)
Mot X XXXXXXXXX
nameplate • Motor rated current in Pr 00.046 (A) IP55

No XXXXXXXXXX kg
I.cl F °C 40 s S1
V Hz min-1 kW cosφ A
details • Motor rated speed in Pr 00.045 (rpm) 230 50 1445 2.20 0.80
400
CN = 14.5Nm
8.50
4.90
I.E.C 34 1(87)
240 50 1445 2.20 0.76 8.50
• Motor rated voltage in Pr 00.044 (V) - check if or connection

415 4.90
CN = 14.4Nm
Set maximum Enter:

0.02

t
Enter:
1000rpm
Set acceleration / • Acceleration rate in Pr 00.003 (s/1000rpm)
deceleration • Deceleration rate in Pr 00.004 (s/1000rpm) (If braking resistor installed, set Pr 00.015 = Fast. Also ensure
rates Pr 10.030, Pr 10.031 and Pr 10.061 are set correctly, otherwise premature ‘Brake R Too Hot’ trips may be 0.03 0.04
t
seen).
If catch a spinning motor mode is not required then set Pr 06.009 to 0.
If catch a spinning motor mode is required then leave Pr 06.009 at the default of 1, but depending on the size
of the motor the value in Pr 05.040 may need to be adjusted.
Select or
Pr 05.040 defines a scaling function used by the algorithm that detects the speed of the motor. The default
deselect catch a
value of Pr 05.040 is 1 which is suitable for small motors (<4 kW). For larger motors the value in Pr 05.040 will
spinning motor
need to be increased. Approximate values of Pr 05.040 for different motor sizes are as follows, 2 for 11 kW, 3
mode
for 55 kW and 5 for 150 kW. If the value of Pr 05.040 is too large the motor may accelerate from standstill
when the drive is enabled. If the value of this parameter is too small the drive will detect the motor speed as
zero even if the motor is spinning.
The drive is able to perform either a stationary or a rotating autotune. The motor must be at a standstill before
an autotune is enabled. A stationary autotune will give moderate performance whereas a rotating autotune will
give improved performance as it measures the actual values of the motor parameters required by the drive.
NOTE It is highly recommended that a rotating autotune is performed (Pr 00.040 set to 2).
A rotating autotune will cause the motor to accelerate up to 2/3 base speed in the direction selected
regardless of the reference provided. Once complete the motor will coast to a stop. The enable
signal must be removed before the drive can be made to run at the required reference. cos ∅
The drive can be stopped at any time by removing the run signal or removing the drive enable.
WARNING
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible to uncouple the load
from the motor shaft. The stationary autotune measures the stator resistance and transient inductance of
RS
Autotune the motor. These are used to calculate the current loop gains, and at the end of the test the values in σLS
Pr 00.038 and Pr 00.039 are updated. A stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of the LS
motor so the value on the motor nameplate must be entered into Pr 00.043. T saturation
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is uncoupled. A rotating autotune first performs a Nm break-
points
stationary autotune before rotating the motor at 2/3 base speed in the direction selected. The rotating
N rpm
autotune measures the stator inductance of the motor and calculates the power factor.
• Close the drive enable signal (terminals 11 and 13). The drive will display ’Ready’ or ‘Inhibit’.
• Close the run signal (terminal 7 or 8). The upper row of the display will flash ’Auto Tune’ while the drive is
performing the autotune.
• Wait for the drive to display ’Ready’ or ‘Inhibit’ and for the motor to come to a standstill.
Save parameters Select 'Save Parameters' in Pr MM.000 (alternatively enter a value of 1000 in Pr MM.000) and press red
reset button or toggle the reset digital input.

Issue Number: 3
7.3.4 RFC-S mode (with position feedback)

Permanent magnet motor with position feedback
For simplicity only an incremental quadrature encoder with commutation outputs will be considered here. For information on setting up one of the
other supported speed feedback devices, refer to section 7.4 Setting up a feedback device on page 111.
Action Detail
Ensure:
Before power- • The drive enable signal is not given (terminals 11 and 13)
up • Run signal is not given
Verify that RFC-S mode is displayed as the drive powers up. If the mode is incorrect see section 5.6 Changing the
operating mode on page 93.
Power-up the
Ensure:
drive
• Drive displays ‘inhibit’
Incremental encoder basic set-up
Enter:
• Drive encoder type in Pr. 03.038 = AB Servo (3): Quadrature encoder with commutation outputs
• Encoder power supply in Pr. 03.036 = 5 V (0), 8 V (1) or 15 V (2).
NOTE
If output voltage from the encoder is >5 V, then the termination resistors must be disabled Pr 03.039 to 0.
Set motor
feedback
Setting the encoder voltage supply too high for the encoder could result in damage to the feedback device.
parameters
CAUTION
• Drive encoder Pulses Per Revolution in Pr 03.034 (set according to encoder)

• Drive encoder termination resistor setting in Pr 03.039:
0 = A-A\, B-B\, Z-Z\ termination resistors disabled
1 = A-A\, B-B\, termination resistors enabled, Z-Z\ termination resistors disabled
2 = A-A\, B-B\, Z-Z\ termination resistors enabled
Enter:
Enter motor • Motor rated current in Pr 00.046 (A)
Ensure that this equal to or less than the Heavy Duty rating of the drive otherwise ‘Motor Too Hot’ trips may
nameplate
Model No: 95UXXXXXXXXXXXX Brake: 12Nm
Volts: 380/480 24V
occur during the autotune.

Cont: 7.7Nm:4.81Arms 0.67A
Stall: 9.5Nm:5.91Arms
details
Speed: 3000rpm Poles:6 Control Techniques
Kt: 1.6Nm/Arms Dynamics Ltd
• Number of poles in Pr 00.042

Ins Class: H
ANDOVER, HANTS.
ENGLAND. SP10 5AB
Serial No: XXXXXXXXXXX
• Motor rated voltage in Pr 00.044 (V)
Set maximum Enter: 0.02

t
Set Enter:
acceleration / • Acceleration rate in Pr 00.003 (s/1000 rpm)
1000rpm
deceleration • Deceleration rate in Pr 00.004 (s/1000 rpm) (If braking resistor installed, set Pr 00.015 = Fast. Also ensure
rates Pr 10.030, Pr 10.031 and Pr 10.061 are set correctly, otherwise premature ‘Brake R Too Hot’ trips may be seen). 0.03 0.04
t
Motor
The motor thermistor connection is made through the drive encoder port (terminal 15). The thermistor type is selected
thermistor set-
in P1 Thermistor Type (03.118).
up
The drive is able to perform either a stationary or a rotating autotune. The motor must be at a standstill before an
autotune is enabled. A stationary autotune will give moderate performance whereas a rotating autotune will give
improved performance as it measures the actual values of the motor parameters required by the drive.The drive is
able to perform a stationary, rotating, mechanical load measurement or locked rotor test auotune. The motor must be
at a standstill before an autotune is enabled. It is suggested that a rotating auto tune is used for accurate
measurement for position feedback phase angle.
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible to uncouple the load from the
motor shaft. A stationary autotune is performed to locate the flux axis of the motor. The stationary autotune
measures the stator resistance, inductance in flux axis, voltage offset at zero current, maximum voltage offset,
0
inductance in torque axis with no load on the motor and current at maximum voltage offset of the motor. These
are used to calculate the current loop gains, and at the end of the test the values in Pr 00.038 and Pr 00.039 are 0
Autotune updated. If Sensorless mode is not selected then Position Feedback Phase Angle (03.025) is set-up for the
selected position feedback.
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is uncoupled. The rotating autotune will rotate the motor by
up to 2 mechanical revolutions in the direction selected, regardless of the reference provided to obtain the
position feedback phase angle. A stationary autotune is then performed to obtain stator resistance, inductance in
flux axis, voltage offset at zero current, maximum voltage offset, inductance in torque axis with no load on the
motor and current at maximum voltage offset of the motor. From the above obtained parameters the current loop
gains are calculated, and at the end of the test the values in Pr 00.038 and Pr 00.039 are updated.
The rotating autotune will rotate the motor by up to 2 mechanical revolutions in the direction selected,
regardless of the reference provided. After a short delay, the motor is further rotated through a electrical
revolution. The enable signal must be removed before the drive can be made to run at the required
WARNING
reference. The drive can be stopped at any time by removing the run signal or removing the drive enable.

Issue Number: 3
Action Detail
• Set Pr 00.040 = 1 for a stationary autotune, Pr 00.040 = 2 for a rotating autotune. 0
• Close the run signal (terminal 7 or 8).
• Close the drive enable signal (terminals 11 and 13). The upper row of the display will flash ’Auto Tune’ while the 0
Autotune
drive is performing the test.
(continued)
• Wait for the drive to display 'Ready' or 'Inhibit' and for the motor to come to a standstill.
If the drive trips it cannot be reset until the drive enable signal (terminals 11 and 13) has been removed. See Chapter
13 Diagnostics on page 247.
• Remove the drive enabled and run signal from the drive.
Save Select 'Save Parameters' in Pr mm.000 (alternatively enter a value of 1000 in Pr mm.000) and press red reset
parameters button or toggle the reset digital input.
7.4 Setting up a feedback device

7.4.1 P1 position interface
This section shows the parameter settings which must be made to use each of the compatible feedback device types with P1 position interface on the
drive. For more information on the parameters listed here please refer to the Parameter Reference Guide.
Table 7-3 Parameters required for feedback device set-up on the P1 position interface
AB, FD, FR,

AB Servo,
SC SC EnDat
Parameter FD Servo , EnDat SSI BiSS Resolver
Hiperface SC SSI
FR Servo, SC,
SC Servo
P1 Rotary Turns Bits (03.033)
P1 Rotary Lines Per Revolution (03.034)
P1 Comms Bits (03.035)
P1 Supply Voltage (03.036)*
P1 Comms Baud Rate (03.037)
P1 Device Type (03.038)
P1 Auto–configuration Select (03.041)
P1 Resolver Poles (03.065)
P1 Resolver Excitation (03.066)
Information required to be entered by the user.

Parameter can be set-up automatically by the drive through auto-configuration parameter. Must be set by the user if auto-configuration is disabled
(i.e. Pr 03.041 = Disabled (0)).
* Pr 03.036: If the output voltage from the encoder is >5 V, then termination resistors must be disabled by setting Pr 03.039 to 0.
Table 7-3 shows a summary of the parameters required to set-up each feedback device. More detailed information follows.

Issue Number: 3
7.4.2 P1 position interface: Detailed feedback device commissioning / start-up information

Standard quadrature encoder with or without commutation signals (A, B, Z or A, B, Z, U, V, W), or
Sincos encoder with or without UVW commutation signals
AB (0) for a quadrature encoder without commutation signals *
AB Servo (3) for a quadrature encoder with commutation signals
Device Type (03.038)
SC (6) for a Sincos encoder without commutation signals *
SC Servo (12) for a Sincos encoder with commutation signals
5 V (0), 8 V (1) or 15 V (2)
Supply Voltage (03.036) NOTE
If output voltage from the encoder is >5 V, then the termination resistors must be disabled. Set Pr 03.039 to 0
Rotary Line Per Revolution (03.034) Set to the number of lines or sine waves per revolution of the encoder.
0 = A, B, Z termination resistors disabled
Termination Select (03.039)
1 = A, B termination resistors enabled and Z termination resistors disabled
(AB or AB Servo only)
2 = A, B, Z termination resistors enabled
Bit
Description
3 2 1 0
Error Detection Level (03.040)
x x x 1 Enable wire break detection
1 x x x Disable trips Encoder 1 to Encoder 7
So for example, to enable the wire break error detection, set Pr 03.040 to 0001.
* These settings should only be used in RFC-A mode. If used in RFC-S mode a phase offset test must be performed after every power up.
Incremental encoder with Frequency and Direction (F and D) or Forward and Reverse (CW and CCW) signals with or without commutation
signals.
FD (1) for frequency and direction signals without commutation signals*
FR (3) for forward and reverse signals without commutation signals*
FD Servo (4) for frequency and direction signals with commutation signals
FR Servo (5) for forward and reverse signals with commutation signals
5 V (0), 8 V (1) or 15 V (2)
Supply Voltage (03.036) NOTE
If output voltage from the encoder is >5 V, then the termination resistors must be disabled. Set Pr 03.039 to 0
Rotary Line Per Revolution (03.034) Set to the number of pulses per revolution of the encoder divided by 2.
0 = F or CW, D or CCW, Z termination resistors disabled
Termination Select (03.039) 1 = F or CW, D or CCW termination resistors enabled and Z termination resistors disabled
2 = For CW, D or CCW, Z termination resistors enabled
Bit
Description
3 2 1 0
* These settings should only be used in RFC-A mode. If used in RFC-S mode a phase offset test must be performed after every power up.

Issue Number: 3
Absolute Sincos encoder with Hiperface or EnDat serial communication, or

Absolute EnDat communication only encoder or BiSS encoder
SC Hiperface (7) for a Sincos encoder with Hiperface serial communications
EnDat (8) for an EnDat communications only encoder
SC EnDat (9) for a Sincos encoder with EnDat serial communications
BiSS (13) for a BiSS communication only encoder
Supply Voltage (03.036) 5 V (0), 8 V (1) or 15 V (2)
Auto-configuration is enabled at default and automatically sets up the following parameters.
Rotary Turns Bits (03.033)
Auto-configuration Select (03.041)
Rotary Lines Per Revolutions (03.034)
Comms Bits (03.035)
These parameters can be entered manually when Pr 03.041 is set to Disabled (0).
Comms Baud Rate (03.037) 100 k, 200 k, 300 k, 400 k, 500 k, 1 M, 1.5 M, 2 M, 4 M
Bit
Description
3 2 1 0
Error Detection Level (03.040) x x x 1 Enable wire break detection
x x 1 x Enable phase error detection
So for example, to enable the wire break and phase error detection, set Pr 03.040 to 0011.
Absolute SSI communications only encoder, or Absolute Sincos encoder with SSI communications
SSI (10) for a SSI communications only encoder
SC SSI (11) for a Sincos encoder with SSI serial communications
Rotary Line Per Revolution (03.034) Set the number of sine waves per revolution of the encoder
SSI Binary Mode (03.048) Off = Gray Code
On = Binary Mode
Rotary Turns Bits (03.033) Set to the number of turns bits for the encoder (this is normally 12 bits for a SSI encoder)
Comms Bits (03.035) Total number of bits of position information (this is usually 25 bits for a SSI encoder)
Bit
Description
3 2 1 0
x x 1 x Enable phase error detection
x 1 x x Enable SSI power supply alarm bit monitor
So for example, to enable the wire break and phase error detection, set Pr 03.040 to 0011.
UVW commutation signal only encoders*

Device Type (03.038) Commutation Only (16) for a quadrature encoder with commutation signals*
Error Detection Level (03.040) Set to zero to disable wire break detection
* This feedback device provides very low resolution feedback and should not be used for applications requiring a high level of performance.
Due to the low resolution of UVW communication only encoders, it is recommended that the P1 Feedback Filter (03.042) is set to its maximum value.
A value of 1 ms to 2 ms may also be required in the Current Demand Filter (04.012) and it is also recommended that the speed loop gains are set to
a low value to obtain stable operation.

Issue Number: 3
Resolver
Device Type (03.038) Resolver (14)
Set number of Resolver poles
Resolver Poles (03.065)
2 poles, 4 poles, 6 poles, 8 poles
Set Resolver excitation voltage and frequency
Resolver Excitation (03.066)
6 V Auto (0), 4 V Auto (1), 6 V 6 kHz (2), 4 V 6 kHz (3), 6 V 8 kHz (4), 4 V 8 kHz (5)
Bit
Description
3 2 1 0
Error Detection Level (03.040) x x x 1 Enable wire break detection
7.4.3 P2 position interface

This section shows the parameter settings which must be made to use each of the compatible feedback device types with the P2 position interface on
the drive. For more information on the parameters listed here please refer to the Parameter Reference Guide. If the position feedback device
connected to the P2 position interface is required to be used for motor control feedback then Pr 03.026 will need to be set to P2 Drive (1).
Table 7-4 Parameters required for feedback device set-up on the P2 position interface
Parameter AB, FD, FR EnDat SSI BiSS
P2 Rotary Turns Bits (03.133)
P2 Rotary Lines Per Revolution (03.134)
P2 Comms Bits (03.135)
P2 Comms Baud Rate (03.137)
P2 Device Type (03.138)
P2 Auto–configuration Select (03.141)
Information required to be entered by the user.

Parameter can be set-up automatically by the drive through auto-configuration. Parameter must be set by the user if auto-configuration is
disabled (i.e. Pr 03.041 = Disabled (0)).
The P2 position interface does not have its own independent power supply output. Therefore, any position feedback device connected to the P2
position interface must either share the P1 power supply output on pin 13 of the 15-way D-type, or be supplied from an external source.
NOTE
The termination resistors are always enabled on the P2 position interface. Wire break detection is not available when using AB, FD or FR position
feedback device types on the P2 position interface.
Table 7-4 shows a summary of the parameters required to set-up each feedback device. More detailed information follows.
Standard quadrature encoder (A, B, Z)

Device Type (03.138) AB (1) for a quadrature encoder
Rotary Line Per Revolution (03.134) Set to the number of lines per revolution of the encoder
Incremental encoder with Frequency and Direction (F and D), or Forward and Reverse (CW and CCW) signals
FD (2) for frequency and direction signals without commutation signals
FR (3) for forward and reverse signals without commutation signals
Rotary Line Per Revolution (03.134) Set to the number of pulses per revolution of the encoder divided by 2

Issue Number: 3
Absolute EnDat communication only encoder or BiSS encoder

EnDat (4) for an EnDat communications only encoder
BiSS (6) for a BiSS communication only encoder
Auto-configuration is enabled at default and automatically sets up the following parameters:
Rotary Turns Bits (03.133)
Auto-configuration Select (03.141)
Comms Bits (03.135)
These parameters can be entered manually when Pr 03.141 is set to Disabled (0).
Bit
Error Detection Level (03.140) Description
3 2 1 0
Absolute SSI communications only encoder

Device Type (03.138) SSI (5) for a SSI communications only encoder
Off (0) = Gray Code
SSI Binary Mode (03.148)
On (1) = Binary Mode
Rotary Turns Bits (03.133) Set to the number of turns bits for the encoder (this is usually 12 bits for a multi-turn SSI encoder)
Total number of bits of position information for the encoder (this is usually 25 bits for a multi-turn SSI
Comms Bits (03.135)
encoder)
Bit
Description
3 2 1 0
x 1 x x Enable SSI power supply alarm bit monitor
7.5 Encoder Simulation Output Set-up

The drive supports three modes of encoder simulation output.
• Hardware mode - Incremental signals (AB, FD, FR)
• Software mode - Incremental signals (AB, FD, FR)
• Software mode - Absolute SSI data
The availability of the encoder simulation output on the 15-way D-type on the drive is dependent on the type of feedback device connected to the P1
position interface. See Table 4-27 on page 81 for more information on the availability of the encoder simulation output. The status of the encoder
simulation output can be seen in Encoder Simulation Status (03.086) as follows:
None (0) The encoder simulation output is not enabled or is not available
Full (1) Full encoder simulation with marker output is available
No Marker (2) Encoder simulation without marker output is available
This section shows the parameter settings which must be made to use the encoder simulation output on the drive. For more information on the
parameters listed here please refer to the Parameter Reference Guide.
7.5.1 Hardware mode - Incremental signals (AB, FD, or FR)
Hardware mode provides incremental signals derived via hardware from the P1 position feedback interface on the drive, with negligible delay. The
supported incremental output signals are AB, FD and FR. Hardware mode only produces an output when the input device connected to the P1
position interface is AB, FD, FR, SC, SC Hiperface, SC EnDat or SC SSI type devices. It should be noted that with a SINCOS source device the
output is based on the zero crossings of the sine wave inputs and does not include interpolation.

Issue Number: 3
Hardware mode set-up

Encoder Simulation Source (03.085) This parameter must be set to 03.029 to select the P1 position interface as the source.
Encoder Simulation Mode (03.088) Set to a value of Hardware (0)
This parameter defines the divider ratio between the device connected to the P1 position feedback
interface and the output.
0 = 1/1
1 = 1/2
Encoder Simulation Hardware Divider 2 = 1/4
(03.089) 3 = 1/8
4= 1/16
5 = 1/32
6 = 1/64
7 = 1/128
0 = The marker output is derived directly from the marker input
Encoder Simulation Hardware Marker Lock
1 = The incremental output signals are adjusted on each marker event so that the A and B are high
(03.090)
with an AB type output, or F is high with an FD or FR type output
AB/Gray (0) for a AB quadrature output signals
Encoder Simulation Output Mode (03.098) FD/Binary (1) for Frequency and Direction output signals
FR/Binary (2) for Forward and Reverse output signals
7.5.2 Software mode - Incremental signals (AB, FD, or FR)

In software mode the encoder simulation output is derived via software from the selected source with a minimum delay of 250 μs which may be
extended with Encoder Simulation Sample Period (03.087). For incremental output signals, the resolution of the output can be defined by either
selecting the required output lines per revolution or by an output ratio.
Lines per revolution
The output resolution of the encoder simulation output is defined by Encoder Simulation Output Lines Per Revolution (03.092).
AB quadrature output signals, software mode setup – Lines per revolution

Set to the parameter number of the position source
Pr 03.029 to use the P1 position interface on the drive as the source.
Encoder Simulation Source (03.085) Pr 03.129 to use the P2 position interface on the drive as the source.
This parameter can be set to any other valid position reference generated by the drive or an option
module.
Encoder Simulation Mode (03.088) Set to a value of Lines Per Rev (1)
Encoder Simulation Output Lines Per
Set to the required output lines per revolution. The maximum output lines per revolution are 16384.
Revolution (03.092)
Encoder Simulation Output Mode (03.098) AB/Gray (0) for a AB quadrature output signals
Frequency and Direction or Forward and Reverse output signals, software mode setup – Lines per revolution
This parameter can be set to any other valid position reference generated by the drive or an option
module.
Encoder Simulation Mode (03.088) Set to a value of Lines Per Rev (1)
Encoder Simulation Output Lines Per Set to the required output pulse per revolution divided by 2. For example if 2000 pulses per revolution
Revolution (03.092) is required, set this parameter to 1000.
FD/Binary (1) for Frequency and Direction output signals
Encoder Simulation Output Mode (03.098)

Issue Number: 3
Ratio
In ratio mode the resolution of the input source is based on a 16 bit position feedback device (i.e. equivalent to an AB quadrature encoder with a
resolution of 16384 lines per revolution). The output resolution of the encoder simulation output is defined by the ratio of Encoder Simulation
Numerator (03.093) and Encoder Simulation Denominator (03.094).
AB quadrature output signals, software mode setup – Ratio

Frequency and Direction or Forward and Reverse output signals, software mode setup
This parameter can be set to any other valid position reference generated by the drive or an
option module.
Encoder Simulation Mode (03.088) Set to a value of Ratio (2)
Encoder Simulation Numerator (03.093) and
Set these two parameters to give the required output ratio.
Encoder Simulation Denominator (03.094)
AB/Gray (0) for a AB quadrature output signals
Encoder Simulation Output Mode (03.098) FD/Binary (1) for Frequency and Direction output signals
Software mode - Absolute SSI data
In software mode the encoder simulation output is derived via software from the selected source with a minimum delay of 250 μs which may be
extended with Encoder Simulation Sample Period (03.087). In SSI output mode drive will simulate an SSI encoder, where the number of bits and the
format of the position message can be adjusted.
Absolute SSI data, software mode setup

This parameter can be set to any other valid position reference generated by the drive or an
option module.
Encoder Simulation Mode (03.088) Set to a value of SSI (3)
Encoder Simulation SSI Turns Bits (03.096) Set to the number of bits representing the number of turns in the position message.
Encoder Simulation SSI Comms Bits (03.097) Set to the number bits in the whole position message.
AB/Gray (0) for position data in Gray code format
Encoder Simulation Output Mode (03.098)
FD/Binary (1) or FR/Binary (2) for position data in binary format

Issue Number: 3
8 Optimization
This chapter takes the user through methods of optimizing the drive set-up and maximize the performance. The auto-tuning features of the drive
simplify the optimization tasks.
8.1 Motor map parameters

8.1.1 Open loop motor control
Pr 00.046 {05.007} Rated Current Defines the maximum continuous motor current
• The rated current parameter must be set to the maximum continuous current of the motor. (See section 8.2 Maximum motor rated current on
page 127, for information about setting this parameter higher than the maximum Heavy Duty current rating). The motor rated current is used in
the following:
• Current limits (see section section 8.3 Current limits on page 127, for more information)
• Motor thermal overload protection (see section section 8.4 Motor thermal protection on page 127, for more information)
• Vector mode voltage control (see Open Loop Control Mode (00.007), later in this table)
• Slip compensation (see Enable Slip Compensation (05.027), later in this table)
• Dynamic V/F control
Pr 00.044 {05.009} Rated Voltage Defines the voltage applied to the motor at rated frequency
Pr 00.047 {05.006} Rated Frequency Defines the frequency at which rated voltage is applied
Output voltage characteristic

Output
voltage
The Rated Voltage (00.044) and the Rated Frequency (00.047) are used Pr 00.044
to define the voltage to frequency characteristic applied to the motor (see

Open Loop Control Mode (00.007), later in this table). The Rated
Frequency (00.047) is also used in conjunction with the motor rated Pr 00.044 / 2
speed to calculate the rated slip for slip compensation (see Rated Speed
(00.045), later in this table).
Pr 00.047 / 2 Pr 00.047 Output

frequency
Pr 00.045 {05.008} Rated Speed Defines the full load rated speed of the motor
Pr 00.042 {05.011} Number Of Motor Poles Defines the number of motor poles
The motor rated speed and the number of poles are used with the motor rated frequency to calculate the rated slip of induction machines in Hz.
00.042 00.045
Rated slip (Hz) = Motor rated frequency - (Number of pole pairs x [Motor rated speed / 60]) = 00.047 = ⎛ ------------------ × ------------------⎞
⎝ 2 60 ⎠
If Pr 00.045 is set to 0 or to synchronous speed, slip compensation is disabled. If slip compensation is required this parameter should be set to the
nameplate value, which should give the correct rpm for a hot machine. Sometimes it will be necessary to adjust this when the drive is commissioned
because the nameplate value may be inaccurate. Slip compensation will operate correctly both below base speed and within the field-weakening
region. Slip compensation is normally used to correct for the motor speed to prevent speed variation with load. The rated load rpm can be set higher
than synchronous speed to deliberately introduce speed droop. This can be useful to aid load sharing with mechanically coupled motors.
Pr 00.042 is also used in the calculation of the motor speed display by the drive for a given output frequency. When Pr 00.042 is set to ‘Automatic’,
the number of motor poles is automatically calculated from the rated frequency Pr 00.047, and the motor rated speed Pr 00.045.
Number of poles = 120 x (Rated Frequency (00.047) / Rated Speed (00.045)) rounded to the nearest even number.
Pr 00.043 {05.010} Rated Power Factor Defines the angle between the motor voltage and current
The power factor is the true power factor of the motor, i.e. the angle between the motor voltage and current. The power factor is used in conjunction
with the Rated Current (00.046), to calculate the rated active current and magnetising current of the motor. The rated active current is used
extensively to control the drive, and the magnetising current is used in vector mode stator resistance compensation. It is important that this
parameter is set up correctly. The drive can measure the motor rated power factor by performing a rotating autotune (see Autotune (Pr 00.040),
below).

Issue Number: 3
Pr 0.40 {5.12} Autotune

There are two autotune tests available in open loop mode, a stationary and a rotating test. A rotating autotune should be used whenever possible so
the measured value of power factor of the motor is used by the drive.
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible to remove the load from the motor shaft. The stationary test
measures the Stator Resistance (05.017), Transient Inductance (05.024), Voltage Offset At Zero Current (05.058), Maximum Voltage Offset
(05.059) and Current At Maximum Voltage Offset (05.060) which are required for good performance in vector control modes (see Open Loop
Control Mode (00.007), later in this table). The stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of the motor so the value on the motor
nameplate must be entered into Pr 00.043. To perform a Stationary autotune, set Pr 00.040 to 1, and provide the drive with both an enable
signal (on terminals 11 and 13) and a run signal (on terminal 7 or 8).
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is unloaded. A rotating autotune first performs a stationary autotune, as above, then a
rotating test is performed in which the motor is accelerated with currently selected ramps up to a frequency of Rated Frequency (05.006) x 2/3,
and the frequency is maintained at that level for 4 seconds. Stator Inductance (05.025) is measured and this value is used in conjunction with
other motor parameters to calculate Rated Power Factor (05.010). To perform a Rotating autotune, set Pr 00.040 to 2, and provide the drive with
both an enable signal (on terminals 11 and 13) and a run signal (on terminal 7 or 8).
Following the completion of an autotune test the drive will go into the inhibit state. The drive must be placed into a controlled disable condition
before the drive can be made to run at the required reference. The drive can be put in to a controlled disable condition by removing the SAFE
TORQUE OFF signal from terminals 11 and 13, setting the Drive Enable (06.015) to OFF (0) or disabling the drive via the Control Word (06.042) and
Control Word Enable (06.043).
Pr 00.007 {05.014} Open Loop Control Mode

There are several voltage modes available which fall into two categories, vector control and fixed boost.
Vector control
Vector control mode provides the motor with a linear voltage characteristic from 0 Hz to motor Rated Frequency (00.047), and then a constant
voltage above motor rated frequency. When the drive operates between motor rated frequency/50 and motor rated frequency/4, full vector based
stator resistance compensation is applied. When the drive operates between motor rated frequency/4 and motor rated frequency/2 the stator
resistance compensation is gradually reduced to zero as the frequency increases. For the vector modes to operate correctly the Rated Power
Factor (00.043), Stator Resistance (05.017) and Voltage Offset At Zero Current (05.058) are all required to be set up accurately. The drive can be
made to measure these by performing an autotune (see Pr 00.040 Autotune). The drive can also be made to measure the stator resistance and
voltage offset automatically every time the drive is enabled or the first time the drive is enabled after it is powered up, by selecting one of the vector
control voltage modes.
(0) Ur S = The stator resistance and the voltage offset are measured and the parameters for the selected motor map are over-written each time
the drive is made to run. This test can only be done with a stationary motor where the flux has decayed to zero. Therefore this mode should only
be used if the motor is guaranteed to be stationary each time the drive is made to run. To prevent the test from being done before the flux has
decayed there is a period of 1 second after the drive has been in the ready state during which the test is not done if the drive is made to run
again. In this case, previously measured values are used. Ur S mode ensures that the drive compensates for any change in motor parameters
due to changes in temperature. The new values of stator resistance and voltage offset are not automatically saved to the drive's EEPROM.(4)
(4) Ur I = The stator resistance and voltage offset are measured when the drive is first made to run after each power-up. This test can only be
done with a stationary motor. Therefore this mode should only be used if the motor is guaranteed to be stationary the first time the drive is made
to run after each power-up. The new values of stator resistance and voltage offset are not automatically saved to the drive's EEPROM.
(1) Ur = The stator resistance and voltage offset are not measured. The user can enter the motor and cabling resistance into the Stator
Resistance (05.017). However this will not include resistance effects within the drive inverter. Therefore if this mode is to be used, it is best to
use an autotune test initially to measure the stator resistance and voltage offset.
(3) Ur_Auto= The stator resistance and voltage offset are measured once, the first time the drive is made to run. After the test has been
completed successfully the Open Loop Control Mode (00.007) is changed to Ur mode. The Stator Resistance (05.017) and Voltage Offset At
Zero Current (05.058)) parameters are written to, and along with the Open Loop Control Mode (00.007), are saved in the drive's EEPROM. If
the test fails, the voltage mode will stay set to Ur Auto and the test will be repeated next time the drive is made to run.
Fixed boost
Neither the stator resistance nor the voltage offset are used in the control of the motor, instead a fixed characteristic with low frequency voltage
boost as defined by Pr 00.008, is used. Fixed boost mode should be used when the drive is controlling multiple motors. There are two settings of
fixed boost available:
(2) Fixed = This mode provides the motor with a linear voltage characteristic from 0 Hz to Rated Frequency (00.047), and then a constant
voltage above rated frequency.
(5) Square = This mode provides the motor with a square law voltage characteristic from 0 Hz to Rated Frequency (00.0 47), and then a
constant voltage above rated frequency. This mode is suitable for variable torque applications like fans and pumps where the load is
proportional to the square of the speed of the motor shaft. This mode should not be used if a high starting torque is required.

Issue Number: 3
Pr 00.007 {05.014} Open Loop Control Mode (cont)

Fixed boost
Neither the stator resistance nor the voltage offset are used in the control of the motor, instead a fixed characteristic with low frequency voltage
boost as defined by parameter Pr 00.008, is used. Fixed boost mode should be used when the drive is controlling multiple motors. There are two
settings of fixed boost available:
(2) Fixed = This mode provides the motor with a linear voltage characteristic from 0 Hz to Rated Frequency (00.047), and then a constant voltage
above rated frequency.
(5) Square = This mode provides the motor with a square law voltage characteristic from 0 Hz to Rated Frequency (00.047), and then a constant
voltage above rated frequency. This mode is suitable for variable torque applications like fans and pumps where the load is proportional to the
square of the speed of the motor shaft. This mode should not be used if a high starting torque is required.
For both these modes, at low frequencies (from 0Hz to ½ x Pr 00.047) a voltage boost is applied defined by Pr 00.008 as shown below:

Output
voltage
(Fd)
Pr 00.044
Pr 00.044
Pr 00.044 / 2
Voltage boost
Pr 00.008 Pr 00.008
Pr 00.047 / 2 Pr 00.047 Output

Pr 00.047
frequency
Pr 05.027 Enable Slip Compensation

When a motor, being controlled in open loop mode, has load applied a characteristic of the motor is that the output speed droops in proportion to the
load applied as shown:
Demanded speed
Shaft speed
Load
In order to prevent the speed droop shown above slip compensation should be enabled. To enable slip compensation Pr 05.027 must be set to a 1
(this is the default setting), and the motor rated speed must be entered in Pr 00.045 (Pr 05.008).
The motor rated speed parameter should be set to the synchronous speed of the motor minus the slip speed. This is normally displayed on the
motor nameplate, i.e. for a typical 18.5 kW, 50 Hz, 4 pole motor, the motor rated speed would be approximately 1465 rpm. The synchronous speed
for a 50 Hz, 4 pole motor is 1500 rpm, so therefore the slip speed would be 35 rpm. If the synchronous speed is entered in Pr 00.045, slip
compensation will be disabled. If too small a value is entered in Pr 00.045, the motor will run faster than the demanded frequency. The synchronous
speeds for 50 Hz motors with different numbers of poles are as follows:
2 pole = 3000 rpm, 4 pole = 1500 rpm, 6pole =1000 rpm, 8 pole = 750 rpm

Issue Number: 3
8.1.2 RFC-A mode

Induction motor with Position feedback
Pr 00.046 {05.007} Motor Rated Current Defines the maximum motor continuous current
The motor rated current parameter must be set to the maximum continuous current of the motor. (See section 8.2 Maximum motor rated current on
page 127, for information about setting this parameter higher than the maximum Heavy Duty current rating.) The motor rated current is used in the
following:
• Current limits (see section 8.3 Current limits on page 127, for more information).
• Motor thermal overload protection (see section 8.4 Motor thermal protection on page 127, for more information)
• Vector control algorithm
Pr 00.044 {05.009} Rated Voltage Defines the voltage applied to the motor at rated frequency
Pr 00.047 {05.006} Rated Frequency Defines the frequency at which rated voltage is applied

Output
voltage
Pr 00.044
The Rated Voltage (00.044) and the Rated Frequency (00.047) are used
to define the voltage to frequency characteristic applied to the motor (see
Open Loop Control Mode (00.007), later in this table). The motor rated
frequency is also used in conjunction with the motor rated speed to Pr 00.044 / 2
calculate the rated slip for slip compensation (see motor Rated Speed
(00.045), later in this table).
Pr 00.047 / 2 Pr 00.047 Output

frequency
Pr 00.045 {05.008} Rated Speed Defines the full load rated speed of the motor
The motor rated speed and motor rated frequency are used to determine the full load slip of the motor which is used by the vector control algorithm.
Incorrect setting of this parameter has the following effects:
• Reduced efficiency of motor operation
• Reduction of maximum torque available from the motor
• Reduced transient performance
• Inaccurate control of absolute torque in torque control modes
The nameplate value is normally the value for a hot motor; however, some adjustment may be required when the drive is commissioned if the
nameplate value is inaccurate. Either a fixed value can be entered in this parameter or an optimization system may be used to automatically adjust
this parameter (see Motor Parameter Adaptive Control (05.016), later in this table).
When Pr 00.042 is set to 'Automatic', the number of motor poles is automatically calculated from the motor Rated Frequency (00.047), and the
motor Rated Speed (00.045).
Number of poles = 120 x (Motor Rated Frequency (00.047 / Motor Rated Speed (00.045) rounded to the nearest even number.
Pr 00.043 {5.10} Rated Power Factor Defines the angle between the motor voltage and current
The power factor is the true power factor of the motor, i.e. the angle between the motor voltage and current. If the Stator Inductance (05.025) is set
to zero then the power factor is used in conjunction with the motor Rated Current (00.046) and other motor parameters to calculate the rated active
and magnetising currents of the motor, which are used in the vector control algorithm. If the stator inductance has a non-zero value this parameter
is not used by the drive, but is continuously written with a calculated value of power factor. The stator inductance can be measured by the drive by
performing a rotating autotune (see Autotune (Pr 00.040), later in this table).

Issue Number: 3
Pr 00.040 {05.012} Autotune

There are three autotune tests available in RFC-A mode, a stationary test, a rotating test and an inertia measurement test. A stationary autotune will
give moderate performance whereas a rotating autotune will give improved performance as it measures the actual values of the motor parameters
required by the drive. An inertia measurement test should be performed separately to a stationary or rotating autotune.
NOTE
It is highly recommended that a rotating autotune is performed (Pr 00.040 set to 2).
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible to remove the load from the motor shaft. The stationary
autotune measures the Stator Resistance (05.017) and Transient Inductance (05.024) of the motor. These are used to calculate the current loop
gains, and at the end of the test the values in Pr 04.013 and Pr 04.014 are updated. A stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of
the motor so the value on the motor nameplate must be entered into Pr 00.043. To perform a Stationary autotune, set Pr 00.040 to 1, and
provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminals 11 and 13) and a run signal (on terminal 7 or 8).
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is unloaded. A rotating autotune first performs a stationary autotune, a rotating test is then
performed which the motor is accelerated with currently selected ramps up to a frequency of Rated Frequency (05.006) x 2/3, and the frequency
is maintained at the level for up to 40 s. During the rotating autotune the Stator Inductance (05.025), and the motor saturation breakpoints
(Pr 05.029, Pr 05.030, Pr 06.062 and Pr 05.063) are modified by the drive. The power factor is also modified for user information only, but is not
used after this point as the stator inductance is used in the vector control algorithm instead. To perform a Rotating autotune, set Pr 00.040 to 2,
and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminals 11 and 13) and a run signal (on terminal 7 or 8).
• The inertia measurement test can measure the total inertia of the load and the motor. This is used to set the speed loop gains (see Speed loop
gains) and to provide torque feed-forwards when required during acceleration. During the inertia measurement test motor is accelerated with
the currently selected ramps up to a speed of Rated Speed (05.008) / 4, and this speed is maintained at this level for 60 seconds. The Motor
And Load Inertia (03.018) and load compensation parameters (Load Compensation Param 1 (04.031) to Load Compensation Param 4
(04.034)) are measured. If the required speed is not achieved on the final attempt the test is aborted and an Autotune trip is initiated. To perform
an Inertia measurement autotune, set Pr 00.040 to 3, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminals 11 and 13) and a run signal
(on terminal 7 or 8). Following the completion of an autotune test the drive will go into the inhibit state. The drive must be placed into a controlled
disable condition before the drive can be made to run at the required reference. The drive can be put in to a controlled disable condition by
removing the SAFE TORQUE OFF signal from terminals 11 and 13, setting the Drive Enable (06.015) to OFF (0) or disabling the drive via the
control word (Pr 06.042 & Pr 06.043).
Pr 05.016 Motor Parameter Adaptive Control
The motor Rated Speed (00.045) in conjunction with the motor Rated Frequency (00.047) defines the full load slip of the motor. The slip is used in
the motor model for RFC-A control. The full load slip of the motor varies with rotor resistance which can vary significantly with motor temperature.
When Pr 05.016 is set to 1 or 2 the drive can automatically sense if the value of slip defined by Pr 00.047 and Pr 00.045 has been set incorrectly or
if it has varied with motor temperature. If the value is incorrect Pr 00.045 is automatically adjusted. Pr 00.045 is not saved at power-down, and so
when the drive is powered-down and up again it will return to the last saved value. If the new value is required at the next power-up it must be saved
by the user.
The adaptive control system is only enabled when the |Output Frequency (05.001)| is above Rated Frequency (05.006) / 8, and the |Percentage
Load (04.020)| is greater than 60 %. The adaptive control system is disabled again if the |Percentage Load (04.020)| falls below 50 %. For best
optimization results the correct values of Stator Resistance (05.017), Transient Inductance (05.024), Stator Inductance (05.025), Saturation
Breakpoint 1 (05.029), Saturation Breakpoint 2 (05.062), Saturation Breakpoint 3 (05.030) and Saturation Breakpoint 4 (05.063) should be used.
If Motor Parameter Adaptive Control (05.016) = 1 the gain of the adaptive control system is low and hence the rate at which it converges is slow. If
Motor Parameter Adaptive Control (05.016) = 2 the gain is increased by a factor of 16 and the convergence rate is increased.
Pr 00.038 {04.013} / Pr 00.039 {04.014} Current Loop Gains
The current loop gains proportional (Kp) and integral (Ki) gains control the response of the current loop to a change in current (torque) demand. The
default values give satisfactory operation with most motors. However, for optimal performance in dynamic applications it may be necessary to
change the gains to improve the performance. The Current Controller Kp Gain (04.013) is the most critical value in controlling the performance. The
values for the current loop gains can be calculated by performing a stationary or rotating autotune (see Autotune Pr 00.040, earlier in this table) the
drive measures the Stator Resistance (05.017) and Transient Inductance (05.024) of the motor and calculates the current loop gains.
This will give a step response with minimum overshoot after a step change of current reference. The proportional gain can be increased by a factor
of 1.5 giving a similar increase in bandwidth; however, this gives a step response with approximately 12.5 % overshoot. The equation for the integral
gain gives a conservative value. In some applications where it is necessary for the reference frame used by the drive to dynamically follow the flux
very closely (i.e. high speed Sensorless RFC-A induction motor applications) the integral gain may need to have a significantly higher value.

Issue Number: 3
Speed Loop Gains

(Pr 00.007 {03.010}, Pr 00.008 {03.011}, Pr 00.009 {03.012})
The speed loop gains control the response of the speed controller to a change in speed demand. The speed controller includes proportional (Kp)
and integral (Ki) feed forward terms, and a differential (Kd) feedback term. The drive holds two sets of these gains and either set may be selected for
use by the speed controller with Pr 03.016. If Pr 03.016 = 0, gains Kp1, Ki1 and Kd1 (Pr 00.007 to Pr 00.009) are used, and if Pr 03.016 = 1, gains
Kp2, Ki2 and Kd2 (Pr 03.013 to Pr 03.015) are used. Pr 03.016 may be changed when the drive is enabled or disabled. If the load is predominantly
a constant inertia and constant torque, the drive can calculate the required Kp and Ki gains to give a required compliance angle or bandwidth
dependant on the setting of Pr 03.017.
Speed Controller Proportional Gain (Kp), Pr 00.007 {03.010} and Pr 03.013
If the proportional gain has a value and the integral gain is set to zero the controller will only have a proportional term, and there must be a speed
error to produce a torque reference. Therefore as the motor load increases there will be a difference between the reference and actual speeds. This
effect, called regulation, depends on the level of the proportional gain, the higher the gain the smaller the speed error for a given load. If the
proportional gain is too high either the acoustic noise produced by speed feedback quantization becomes unacceptable, or the stability limit is
reached.
Speed Controller Integral Gain (Ki), Pr 00.008 {03.011} and Pr 03.014
The integral gain is provided to prevent speed regulation. The error is accumulated over a period of time and used to produce the necessary torque
demand without any speed error. Increasing the integral gain reduces the time taken for the speed to reach the correct level and increases the
stiffness of the system, i.e. it reduces the positional displacement produced by applying a load torque to the motor. Unfortunately increasing the
integral gain also reduces the system damping giving overshoot after a transient. For a given integral gain the damping can be improved by
increasing the proportional gain. A compromise must be reached where the system response, stiffness and damping are all adequate for the
application. For RFC-A Sensorless mode, it is unlikely that the integral gain can be increased much above 0.50.
Differential Gain (Kd), Pr 00.009 {03.012} and Pr 03.015
The differential gain is provided in the feedback of the speed controller to give additional damping. The differential term is implemented in a way that
does not introduce excessive noise normally associated with this type of function. Increasing the differential term reduces the overshoot produced
by under-damping, however, for most applications the proportional and integral gains alone are sufficient.
There are three methods of tuning the speed loop gains dependant on
the setting of Pr 03.017:
1. Pr 03.017 = 0, User set-up.
Speed demand
This involves the connecting of an oscilloscope to analog output 1 to
monitor the speed feedback.
Give the drive a step change in speed reference and monitor the
response of the drive on the oscilloscope.
The proportional gain (Kp) should be set up initially. The value Insufficient proportional
should be increased up to the point where the speed overshoots and gain [00.007]
then reduced slightly.
The integral gain (Ki) should then be increased up to the point where
the speed becomes unstable and then reduced slightly.
It may now be possible to increase the proportional gain to a higher Excessive proportional
value and the process should be repeated until the system response gain [00.007]
matches the ideal response as shown.

The diagram shows the effect of incorrect P and I gain settings as
well as the ideal response.
2. Pr 03.017 = 1, Bandwidth set-up Excessive integral gain
[00.008]
If bandwidth based set-up is required, the drive can calculate Kp and
Ki if the following parameters are set up correctly:
Pr 03.020 - Required bandwidth,
Pr 03.021 - Required damping factor,
Ideal response
Pr 03.018 - Motor and load inertia.
The drive can be made to measure the motor and load inertia by
performing an inertia measurement autotune (see Autotune
Pr 00.040, earlier in this table).
3. Pr 03.017 = 2, Compliance angle set-up
5. Pr 03.017 = 4 - 6
If compliance angle based set-up is required, the drive can calculate
If Speed Controller Set-up Method (03.017) is set to a value from 4 to 6
Kp and Ki if the following parameters are set up correctly:
the Speed Controller Proportional Gain Kp1 (03.010) and Speed
Pr 03.019 - Required compliance angle,
Controller Integral Gain Ki1 (03.011) are automatically set up to give
the bandwidths given in the table below and a damping factor of unity.
Pr 03.018 - Motor and load inertia The drive can be made to
measure the motor and load inertia by performing an inertia These settings give low, standard or high performance.
measurement autotune (see Autotune Pr 00.040, earlier in this
Speed Controller
table).
Set-up Method Performance Bandwidth
4. Pr 03.017 = 3, Kp gains times 16
(03.017)
If Speed Controller Set-up Method (03.017) = 3 the selected
proportional gain used by the drive is multiplied by 16. 4 Low 5 Hz
5 Standard 25 Hz
6 High 100 Hz

Issue Number: 3
8.1.3 RFC-S mode

Permanent magnet motor with Position feedback
Pr 00.046 {05.007} Rated Current Defines the maximum motor continuous current
The motor rated current parameter must be set to the maximum continuous current of the motor. The motor rated current is used in the following:
• Current limits (see section 8.3 Current limits on page 127, for more information)
• Motor thermal overload protection (see section 8.4 Motor thermal protection on page 127, for more information)
The number of motor poles parameter defines the number of electrical revolutions in one whole mechanical revolution of the motor. This parameter
must be set correctly for the control algorithms to operate correctly. When Pr 00.042 is set to "Automatic" the number of poles is 6.
Pr 00.040 {05.012} Autotune
There are four autotune tests available in RFC-S mode, a stationary autotune, a rotating autotune, an inertia measurement test and a locked rotor
test to measure load dependent parameters.
• Stationary Autotune
The stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible uncouple the load from motor shaft. This test can be used to
measure all the necessary parameters for basic control. During the stationary autotune, a test is performed to locate the flux axis of the motor.
However this test may not be able to calculate such an accurate value for the Position Feedback Phase Angle (03.025) as compared to rotating
autotune. A stationary test is performed to measure Stator Resistance (05.017), Ld (05.024), Voltage Offset At Zero Current (05.058), Maximum
Voltage Offset (05.059), Current At Maximum Voltage Offset (05.060), No Load Lq (05.068) and No Load Phase Offset (05.070). If Enable Stator
Compensation (05.049) = 1 then Stator Base Temperature (05.048) is made equal to Stator Temperature (05.046). The Stator Resistance (05.017)
and the Ld (05.024) are then used to set up Current controller Kp Gain (04.013) and Current Controller Ki Gain (04.014). If sensorless mode is not
selected then Position Feedback Phase Angle (03.025) is set up for the position from the position feedback interface selected with Motor Control
Feedback Select (03.026). To perform a Stationary autotune, set Pr 00.040 to 1, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminals 11
and 13) and a run signal (on terminal 7 or 8).
• Rotating Autotune
The rotating autotune must be performed on unloaded motor. This test can be used to measure all the necessary parameters for the basic control
and parameters for cancelling the effects of the cogging torque.
During the rotating autotune, Rated Current (05.007) is applied and the motor is rotated by 2 electrical revolutions (i.e. up to 2 mechanical
revolutions) in the required direction. If sensorless mode is not selected then the Position Feedback Phase Angle (03.025) is set-up for the position
from the position feedback interface selected with Motor Control Feedback Select (03.026). A stationary test is then performed to measure Stator
Resistance (05.017), Ld (05.024), Voltage Offset At Zero Current (05.058), Maximum Voltage Offset (05.059), Current At Maximum Voltage Offset
(05.060) and No Load Lq (05.068). Stator Resistance (05.017) and Ld (05.024) are used to set up Current Controller Kp Gain (04.013) and Current
Controller Ki Gain (04.014). This is only done once during the test, and so the user can make further adjustments to the current controller gains if
required. After a delay of 5 s the motor is rotated through a further electrical revolution and Cogging Data Parameter 1 (05.074) to Cogging Data
Parameter 8 (05.081) are measured. To perform a Rotating autotune, set Pr 00.040 to 2, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on
terminals 11 and 13) and a run signal (on terminal 7 or 8).
0
• Inertia measurement test

The inertia measurement test can measure the total inertia of the load and the motor. This is used to set the speed loop gains (see Speed loop
gains) and to provide torque feed-forwards when required during acceleration. During the inertia measurement test motor is accelerated with the
currently selected ramps up to a speed of Rated Speed (05.008) / 4, and this speed is maintained at this level for 60 seconds. The Motor And Load
Inertia (03.018) and load compensation parameters (Load Compensation Param 1 (04.031) to Load Compensation Param 4 (04.034)) are
measured. If the required speed is not achieved on the final attempt the test is aborted and an Autotune trip is initiated. To perform an Inertia
measurement autotune, set Pr 00.040 to 3, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminals 11 and 13) and a run signal (on terminal 7
or 8). Following the completion of an autotune test the drive will go into the inhibit state. The drive must be placed into a controlled disable condition
before the drive can be made to run at the required reference. The drive can be put in to a controlled disable condition by removing the SAFE
TORQUE OFF signal from terminals 11 and 13, setting the drive Enable Parameter (06.015) to OFF (0) or disabling the drive via the control word
(Pr 06.042 & Pr 06.043).
• Locked rotor test
This test can be used to measure the parameters necessary to operate in sensorless mode at low speeds using signal injection, or to exploit the
torque produced from saliency, provided all the basic control parameters have been set-up correctly. The test can only be carried out if the rotor is
locked is such a way that it will not move even when a torque producing current equal to Rated Current (05.007) is applied to the motor. Rated Load
Lq (05.069), Rated Load Offset (05.071) and Maximum Low Speed Sensorless Mode Current (05.072) are measured. To perform a Rotating
autotune, set Pr 00.040 to 4, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (terminals 11 and 13) and a run signal (on terminal 7 or 8).

Issue Number: 3
Pr 00.038 {04.013} / Pr 00.039 {04.014} Current Loop Gains

The current loop gains proportional (Kp) and integral (Ki) gains control the response of the current loop to a change in current (torque) demand. The
default values give satisfactory operation with most motors. However, for optimal performance in dynamic applications it may be necessary to
change the gains to improve the performance. The proportional gain (Pr 04.013) is the most critical value in controlling the performance. The values
for the current loop gains can be calculated by performing a stationary or rotating autotune (see Autotune Pr 00.040, earlier in this table) the drive
measures the Stator Resistance (05.017) and Transient Inductance (05.024) of the motor and calculates the current loop gains.
This will give a step response with minimum overshoot after a step change of current reference. The proportional gain can be increased by a factor
of 1.5 giving a similar increase in bandwidth; however, this gives a step response with approximately 12.5 % overshoot. The equation for the integral
gain gives a conservative value. In some applications where it is necessary for the reference frame used by the drive to dynamically follow the flux
very closely (i.e. high speed Sensorless RFC-A induction motor applications) the integral gain may need to have a significantly higher value.
Speed loop gains
(Pr 00.007 {03.010}, Pr 00.008 {03.011}, Pr 00.009 {03.012})
The speed loop gains control the response of the speed controller to a change in speed demand. The speed controller includes proportional (Kp)
and integral (Ki) feed forward terms, and a differential (Kd) feedback term. The drive holds two sets of these gains and either set may be selected for
use by the speed controller with Pr 03.016. If Pr 03.016 = 0, gains Kp1, Ki1 and Kd1 (Pr 00.007 to Pr 00.009) are used, and if Pr 03.016 = 1, gains
Kp2, Ki2 and Kd2 (Pr 03.013 to Pr 03.015) are used. Pr 03.016 may be changed when the drive is enabled or disabled. If the load is predominantly
a constant inertia and constant torque, the drive can calculate the required Kp and Ki gains to give a required compliance angle or bandwidth
dependant on the setting of Pr 03.017.
Speed Controller Proportional Gain (Kp), Pr 00.007 {03.010} and Pr 03.013
If the proportional gain has a value and the integral gain is set to zero the controller will only have a proportional term, and there must be a speed
error to produce a torque reference. Therefore as the motor load increases there will be a difference between the reference and actual speeds. This
effect, called regulation, depends on the level of the proportional gain, the higher the gain the smaller the speed error for a given load. If the
proportional gain is too high either the acoustic noise produced by speed feedback quantization becomes unacceptable, or the stability limit is
reached.
Speed Controller Integral Gain (Ki), Pr 00.008 {03.011} and Pr 03.014
The integral gain is provided to prevent speed regulation. The error is accumulated over a period of time and used to produce the necessary torque
demand without any speed error. Increasing the integral gain reduces the time taken for the speed to reach the correct level and increases the
stiffness of the system, i.e. it reduces the positional displacement produced by applying a load torque to the motor. Unfortunately increasing the
integral gain also reduces the system damping giving overshoot after a transient. For a given integral gain the damping can be improved by
increasing the proportional gain. A compromise must be reached where the system response, stiffness and damping are all adequate for the
application. For RFC-A Sensorless mode, it is unlikely that the integral gain can be increased much above 0.50.
Differential Gain (Kd), Pr 00.009 {03.012} and Pr 03.015
The differential gain is provided in the feedback of the speed controller to give additional damping. The differential term is implemented in a way that
does not introduce excessive noise normally associated with this type of function. Increasing the differential term reduces the overshoot produced
by under-damping, however, for most applications the proportional and integral gains alone are sufficient.

Issue Number: 3
Speed loop gains (cont)

(Pr 00.007 {03.010}, Pr 00.008 {03.011}, Pr 00.009 {03.012})
There are three methods of tuning the speed loop gains dependant on
the setting of Pr 03.017:
1. Pr 03.017 = 0, User set-up.
This involves the connecting of an oscilloscope to analog output 1 to Speed demand
monitor the speed feedback.

Give the drive a step change in speed reference and monitor the
response of the drive on the oscilloscope.
The proportional gain (Kp) should be set up initially. The value Insufficient proportional
should be increased up to the point where the speed overshoots and gain [00.007]
then reduced slightly.
The integral gain (Ki) should then be increased up to the point where
the speed becomes unstable and then reduced slightly.
It may now be possible to increase the proportional gain to a higher Excessive proportional
value and the process should be repeated until the system response gain [00.007]
matches the ideal response as shown.
The diagram shows the effect of incorrect P and I gain settings as
well as the ideal response.
2. Pr 03.017 = 1, Bandwidth set-up Excessive integral gain
[00.008]
If bandwidth based set-up is required, the drive can calculate Kp and
Ki if the following parameters are set up correctly:
Pr 03.020 - Required bandwidth,
Ideal response
Pr 03.018 - Motor and load inertia.
The drive can be made to measure the motor and load inertia by
performing an inertia measurement autotune (see Autotune
Pr 00.040, earlier in this table).
3. Pr 03.017 = 2, Compliance angle set-up 5. Pr 03.017 = 4 - 6
If compliance angle based set-up is required, the drive can calculate If Speed Controller Set-up Method (03.017) is set to a value from 4 to
Kp and Ki if the following parameters are set up correctly: 6 the Speed Controller Proportional Gain Kp1 (03.010) and Speed
Pr 03.019 - Required compliance angle, Controller Integral Gain Ki1 (03.011) are automatically set up to give
Pr 03.021 - Required damping factor, the bandwidths given in the table below and a damping factor of unity.
Pr 03.018 - Motor and load inertia.The drive can be made to These settings give low, standard or high performance.
measure the motor and load inertia by performing an inertia
measurement autotune (see Autotune Pr 00.040, earlier in this Speed Controller
table). Set-up Method Performance Bandwidth
4. Pr 03.017 = 3, Kp gains times 16 (03.017)
If Speed Controller Set-up Method (03.017) = 3 the selected 4 Low 5 Hz
proportional gain used by the drive is multiplied by 16.
5 Standard 25 Hz
6 High 100 Hz

Issue Number: 3
8.2 Maximum motor rated current Figure 8-1 Motor thermal protection (Heavy Duty)
The maximum motor rated current allowed by the drive is greater than
1.05
the Maximum Heavy Duty Current Rating (11.032). The ratio between 1.00
the Normal Duty rating and the Maximum Heavy Duty Current Rating
(11.032) varies between drive sizes. The values for the Normal and 0.70 Pr 04.025 = 0
Heavy Duty rating can be found in section 2.3 Ratings on page 11. If the Pr 04.025 = 1
K
motor Rated Current (00.046) is set above the Maximum Heavy Duty
Current Rating (11.032), the current limits and the motor thermal
protection scheme are modified (see section 8.3 Current limits on
page 127 and section 8.4 Motor thermal protection on page 127 for
more information). 0.00
8.3 Current limits 50% of base Base speed/

speed/frequency frequency
The default setting for the current limit parameters is:
• 165 % x motor rated current for open loop mode If Pr 04.025 is 0 the characteristic is for a motor which can operate at
• 175 % x motor rated current for RFC-A and RFC-S modes rated current over the whole speed range. Induction motors with this
type of characteristic normally have forced cooling. If Pr 04.025 is 1 the
There are three parameters which control the current limits: characteristic is intended for motors where the cooling effect of motor
• Motoring current limit: power flowing from the drive to the motor fan reduces with reduced motor speed below 50 % of base speed/
• Regen current limit: power flowing from the motor to the drive frequency. The maximum value for K1 is 1.05, so that above the knee of
• Symmetrical current limit: current limit for both motoring and regen the characteristics the motor can operate continuously up to 105 %
operation current.
The lowest of either the motoring and regen current limit, or the
symmetrical current limit applies. Figure 8-2 Motor thermal protection (Normal Duty)
The maximum setting of these parameters depends on the values of

motor rated current, drive rated current and the power factor. 1.00 1.01
Increasing the motor rated current (Pr 00.046/05.007) above the Heavy
Duty rating (default value), will automatically reduce the current limits in 0.70 Pr 04.025 = 0
Pr 04.005 to Pr 04.007. If the motor rated current is then set to or below Pr 04.025 = 1
K
the Heavy Duty rating, the current limits will be left at their reduced
values.
The drive can be oversized to permit a higher current limit setting to
provide higher accelerating torque as required up to a maximum of
1000 %. 0.00
8.4 Motor thermal protection 15% of 50% of Base speed/

base speed/ base speed/ frequency
A dual time constant thermal model is provided to estimate the motor frequency frequency
temperature as a percentage of its maximum allowed temperature.
The motor thermal protection is modelled using losses in the motor. The Both settings of Pr 04.025 are intended for motors where the cooling
losses in the motor are calculated as a percentage value, so that under effect of the motor fan reduces with reduced motor speed, but with
these conditions the Motor Protection Accumulator (04.019) would different speeds below which the cooling effect is reduced. If Pr 04.025
eventually reach 100 %. is 0 the characteristic is intended for motors where the cooling effect
reduces with motor speed below 15 % of base speed/frequency. If
Percentage losses = 100 % x [Load related losses + Iron losses]
Pr 04.025 is 1 the characteristic is intended for motors where the cooling
Where: effect reduces with motor speed below 50 % of base speed/frequency.
Load related losses = (1 - Kfe) x (I / (K1 x IRated)2 The maximum value for K1 is 1.01, so that above the knee of the
characteristics the motor can operate continuously up to 101 % current.
Iron losses = Kfe x (w / wRated)1.6 When the estimated temperature in Pr 04.019 reaches 100 % the drive
Where: takes some action depending on the setting of Pr 04.016. If Pr 04.016 is
0, the drive trips when Pr 04.019 reaches 100 %. If Pr 04.016 is 1, the
I = Current Magnitude (04.001)
current limit is reduced to (K - 0.05) x 100 % when Pr 04.019 reaches
IRated = Rated Current (05.007) 100 %.
Kfe = Rated Iron Losses As Percentage Of Losses (04.039) / 100 % The current limit is set back to the user defined level when Pr 04.019
The Motor Protection Accumulator (04.019) is given by: falls below 95 %. The thermal model temperature accumulator is reset to
zero at power-up and accumulates the temperature of the motor while
Pr 04.019 = Percentage Losses x [(1 - K2) (1 - e-t/τ1) + K2 (1 - e-t/τ2)] them drive remains powered-up. If the rated current defined by
Where: Pr 05.007 is altered, the accumulator is reset to zero.
T = Motor Protection Accumulator (04.019) The default setting of the thermal time constant (Pr 04.015) is 89 s which
is equivalent to an overload of 150 % for 60 s from cold.
K2 = Motor Thermal Time Constant 2 Scaling (04.038) / 100 %
τ1
= Motor Thermal Time Constant 1 (04.015)
τ2
= Motor Thermal Time Constant 2 (04.037)
K1 = Varies, see below
If Rated Current (05.007) ≤ Maximum Heavy Duty Current (11.032)

Issue Number: 3
8.5 Switching frequency • F and D encoder ELPR = number of lines per revolution / 2
• SINCOS encoder ELPR = number of sine waves per revolution
The default switching frequency is 3 kHz (6 kHz in RFC-S mode),
however this can be increased up to a maximum of 16 kHz by Pr 05.018 This maximum speed limit is defined by the device selected with the
speed feedback selector (Pr 03.026), and the ELPR set for the position
(dependent on drive size). The available switching frequencies are
feedback device. In RFC-A mode it is possible to disable this limit via
shown below.
Pr 03.024, so that the drive can be switched between operation with and
Table 8-1 Available switching frequencies without feedback when the speed becomes too high for the feedback
device. The maximum speed limit is defined as above when Pr 03.024 =
Drive 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
Model 0 and is 36,000 rpm when Pr 03.024 = 1,2, 3 or 4.
size kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz
3 8.6.2 Field weakening (constant power) operation
(Open loop and RFC-A mode only)
4
The drive can be used to run an induction machine above synchronous
5*
All speed into the constant power region. The speed continues to increase
6 and the available shaft torque reduces. The characteristics below show
7 the torque and output voltage characteristics as the speed is increased
8 above the rated value.
Figure 8-3 Torque and rated voltage against speed
NOTE
* Size 5 - 575 V variant does not support 16 kHz switching frequency.
If switching frequency is increased from 3 kHz the following apply: Torque
1. Increased heat loss in the drive, which means that derating to the
output current must be applied.
See the derating tables for switching frequency and ambient
temperature in section 12.1.1 Power and current ratings (Derating
for switching frequency and temperature) on page 227.
2. Reduced heating of the motor - due to improved output waveform Speed
quality.
3. Reduced acoustic noise generated by the motor. Rated
4. Increased sample rate on the speed and current controllers. A trade voltage
off must be made between motor heating, drive heating and the
demands of the application with respect to the sample time required.
Table 8-2 Sample rates for various control tasks at each
switching frequency
3, 6, 12 2, 4, 8, 16 Open RFC-A Rated speed Speed
Level
kHz kHz loop RFC-S Care must be taken to ensure the torque available above base speed is
2 kHz - 250 μs sufficient for the application to run satisfactorily.
3 kHz - 167μs
4 kHz - 125 μs Current The saturation breakpoint parameters (Pr 05.029, Pr 05. 030, Pr 05.062
Level 1 6 kHz - 83 μs Peak limit
8 kHz - 62.5 μs controllers
and Pr 05.063) found during the autotune in RFC-A mode ensure the
12 kHz - 83 μs
16 kHz - 62.5 μs magnetizing current is reduced in the correct proportion for the specific
2 kHz - 500 μs motor. (In open loop mode the magnetizing current is not actively
Current Speed
4 kHz - 250 μs controlled).
Level 2 250 μs limit and controller
8 kHz - 250 μs
16 kHz - 250 μs
ramps and ramps 8.6.3 Permanent magnet motor high speed operation
High speed servo mode is enabled by setting Pr 05.022 =1. Care must
Level 3 1 ms Voltage controller
be taken when using this mode with permanent magnet motor to avoid
Time critical user damaging the drive. The voltage produced by the permanent magnet
Level 4 4 ms
interface
motor magnets is proportional to speed. For high speed operation the
Non-time critical user drive must apply currents to the motor to counter-act the flux produced
Background
interface by the magnets. It is possible to operate the motor at very high speeds
that would give a very high motor terminal voltage, but this voltage is
8.6 High speed operation prevented by the action of the drive.
8.6.1 Encoder feedback limits If however, the drive is disabled (or tripped) when the motor voltages
The maximum encoder frequency should be prevented from exceeding would be higher than the rating of the drive without the currents to
500 kHz. In RFC-A and RFC-S modes the maximum speed that can be counter-act the flux from the magnets, it is possible to damage the drive.
entered in to the speed reference clamps (Pr 01.006 and Pr 01.007) can If high speed mode is enabled the motor speed must be limited to the
be limited by the drive. This is defined by the following (subject to an levels given in the table below unless an additional hardware protection
absolute maximum of 40,000 rpm): system is used to limit the voltages applied to the drive output terminals
to a safe level.
500 kHz x 60
Maximum speed limit (rpm) =
ELPR Drive Maximum safe line to line
Maximum motor speed
7 voltage voltage at the motor
3.0 x 10 (rpm)
= rating terminals (V rms)
ELPR
200 400 x 1000 / (Ke x √2) 400 / √2
Where:
400 800 x 1000 / (Ke x √2) 800 / √2
ELPR is the equivalent encoder lines per revolution and is the
575 955 x 1000 / (Ke x √2) 955 / √2
number of lines that would be produced by a quadrature encoder.
690 1145 x 1000 / (Ke x √2) 1145 / √2
• Quadrature encoder ELPR = number of lines per revolution

Issue Number: 3
Ke is the ratio between r.m.s. line to line voltage produced by the motor
and the speed in V/1000 rpm. Care must also be taken not to de-
magnetize the motor. The motor manufacturer should always be
consulted before using this mode.
8.6.4 Maximum speed / frequency
In all operating modes (Open loop, RFC-A and RFC-S) the maximum
output frequency is limited to 550 Hz. However, in RFC-S mode the
speed is also limited by the voltage constant (Ke) of the motor. Ke is a
specific constant for the servo motor being used. It can normally be
found on the motor data sheet in V/k rpm (volts per 1,000 rpm).
8.6.5 Quasi-Square wave (open-loop only)
The maximum output voltage level of the drive is normally limited to an
equivalent of the drive input voltage minus voltage drops within the drive
(the drive will also retain a few percent of the voltage in order to maintain
current control). If the motor rated voltage is set at the same level as the
supply voltage, some pulse deletion will occur as the drive output voltage
approaches the rated voltage level. If Pr 05.020 (Quasi-square wave
enable) is set to 1 the modulator will allow over modulation, so that as
the output frequency increases beyond the rated frequency the voltage
continues to increase above the rated voltage. The modulation depth will
increase beyond unity; first producing trapezoidal and then quasi-square
waveforms.
This can be used for example:
• To obtain high output frequencies with a low switching frequency
which would not be possible with space vector modulation limited to
unity modulation depth,
or
• In order to maintain a higher output voltage with a low supply
voltage.
The disadvantage is that the machine current will be distorted as the
modulation depth increases above unity, and will contain a significant
amount of low order odd harmonics of the fundamental output frequency.
The additional low order harmonics cause increased losses and heating
in the motor.

Issue Number: 3
9 NV Media Card Operation 3. If the target drive has a different rating to the source drive then the
normal rules for this type of transfer apply.
Figure 9-2 Basic SMARTCARD operation
9.1 Introduction
The Non-Volatile Media Card feature enables simple configuration of
parameters, parameter back-up and drive copying using a
SMARTCARD or SD card in the future. The drive offers backward
compatibility for a Unidrive SP SMARTCARD.
The SMARTCARD can be used for: Drive reads all
• Parameter copying between drives parameters from
• Saving drive parameter sets the SMARTCARD
The NV Media Card (SMARTCARD) is located at the top of the module

under the drive display (if installed) on the left-hand side.
Ensure SMARTCARD is inserted with the contacts facing the left-hand
side of the drive.
The drive only communicates with the NV Media Card when
Pr 00.030 = Read +
commanded to read or write, meaning the card may be "hot swapped".
Beware of possible live terminals when installing the NV Programs all drive
Media Card. parameters to the
SMARTCARD
WARNING
NOTE
Figure 9-1 Installation of the SMARTCARD Overwrites any
data already in
data block 1
Pr 00.030 = Program +
Drive automatically
writes to the
SMARTCARD
when a parameter Auto
save is performed Save
Pr 00.030 = Auto +
1. Installing the SMARTCARD Boot Drive boots from the

2. SMARTCARD installed SMARTCARD on
power up and
9.2 SMARTCARD support automatically writes
to the SMARTCARD
The SMARTCARD can be used to store one drive parameter set from when a parameter
Auto Save save is performed
the Unidrive M in data block 001 on the SMARTCARD.
The Unidrive M is compatible with a Unidrive SP SMARTCARD and is
able to read and translate the Unidrive SP parameter set into a Pr 00.030 = Boot +
compatible parameter set for Unidrive M. This is only possible if the
Unidrive SP parameter set was transferred to the SMARTCARD using
the difference from defaults transfer method (i.e. 4yyy transfer). The The whole card may be protected from writing or erasing by setting the
Unidrive M is not able to read any other type of Unidrive SP data block
read-only flag as detailed section 9.3.9 9888 / 9777 - Setting and
on the card. Although it is possible to transfer difference from default
clearing the SMARTCARD read only flag on page 132.
data blocks from a Unidrive SP into the Unidrive M, the following should
be noted: The card should not be removed during data transfer, as the drive will
produce a trip. If this occurs then either the transfer should be
1. If a parameter from the source drive does not exist in the target drive
reattempted or in the case of a card to drive transfer, default parameters
then no data is transferred for that parameter.
should be loaded.
2. If the data for the parameter in the target drive is out of range then
the data is limited to the range of the target parameter.

Issue Number: 3
9.3 Transferring data Pr 05.010, Pr 21.010 Rated Power Factor

Pr 05.017, Pr 21.012 Stator Resistance
Data transfer, erasing and protecting the information is performed by
entering a code in Pr mm.000 and then resetting the drive as shown in Pr 05.018 Maximum Switching Frequency
Table 9-1. Pr 05.024, Pr 21.014 Transient Inductance
Pr 05.025, Pr 21.024 Stator Inductance
Table 9-1 SMARTCARD codes
Pr 06.006 Injection Braking Level
Code Action Pr 06.048 Supply Loss Detection Level
Transfer drive parameters as difference from defaults to a Pr 06.065 Standard Under Voltage Threshold
2001
bootable SMARTCARD block in data block number 001
Pr 06.066 Low Under Voltage Threshold
Transfer drive data as difference from defaults to
4001 Reading a parameter set from the SMARTCARD (Pr 11.042 =
SMARTCARD block number 001
6yyy Transfer SMARTCARD data block yyy to the drive
Read (1))
Setting Pr 11.042 to Read (1) and resetting the drive will transfer the
9555 Clear SMARTCARD warning suppression flag parameters from the card into the drive parameter set and the drive
9666 Set SMARTCARD warning suppression flag EEPROM, i.e. this is equivalent to writing 6001 to Pr mm.000.
9777 Clear SMARTCARD read-only flag All SMARTCARD trips apply. Once the parameters are successfully
9888 Set SMARTCARD read-only flag copied this parameter is automatically reset to None (0). Parameters are
9999 Erase SMARTCARD saved to the drive EEPROM after this action is complete.
Where yyy indicates the block number 001 to 999. 9.3.3 Auto saving parameter changes (Pr 11.042 =
Auto (3))
NOTE
This setting causes the drive to automatically save any changes made to
If the read only flag is set then only codes 6yyy or 9777 are effective. menu 0 parameters on the drive to the SMARTCARD. The latest menu 0
parameter set in the drive is therefore always backed up on the
9.3.1 Writing to the SMARTCARD SMARTCARD. Changing Pr 11.042 to Auto (3) and resetting the drive
4001 - Writes defaults differences to the SMARTCARD will immediately save the complete parameter set from the drive to the
The data block only contains the parameter differences from the last
card, i.e. all parameters except parameters with the NC coding bit set.
time default settings were loaded. Once the whole parameter set is stored only the individual modified
All parameters except those with the NC (Not clonable) coding bit set are menu 0 parameter setting is updated.
transferred to the SMARTCARD. In addition to these parameters all
Advanced parameter changes are only saved to the SMARTCARD when
menu 20 parameters (except Pr 20.000), can be transferred to the Pr mm.000 is set to 'Save Parameters' or a 1000 and the drive reset.
SMARTCARD.
All SMARTCARD trips apply, except 'Card Change'. If the data block
Writing a parameter set to the SMARTCARD (Pr 11.042 = already contains information it is automatically overwritten.
Program (2))
Setting Pr 11.042 to Program (2) and resetting the drive will save the If the card is removed when Pr 11.042 is set to 3, Pr 11.042 is then
parameters to the SMARTCARD, i.e. this is equivalent to writing 4001 to automatically set to None (0).
Pr mm.000. All SMARTCARD trips apply except 'Card Change'. If the When a new SMARTCARD is installed Pr 11.042 must be set back to
data block already exists it is automatically overwritten. When the action Auto (3) by the user and the drive reset so the complete parameter set is
is complete this parameter is automatically reset to None (0). rewritten to the new SMARTCARD if auto mode is still required.
9.3.2 Reading from the SMARTCARD When Pr 11.042 is set to Auto (3) and the parameters in the drive are
6yyy - Reading from SMARTCARD saved, the SMARTCARD is also updated, and therefore the
When the data is transferred back to the drive, using 6yyy in Pr mm.000, SMARTCARD becomes a copy of the drives stored configuration.
it is transferred to the drive RAM and the EEPROM. A parameter save is At power up, if Pr 11.042 is set to Auto (3), the drive will save the
not required to retain the data after-power down. Set up data for any complete parameter set to the SMARTCARD. The drive will display
option modules installed stored on the card are transferred to the drive. If 'Card Write' during this operation. This is done to ensure that if a user
the option modules installed are different between source and puts a new SMARTCARD in during power down the new SMARTCARD
destination drives, the menus for the option module slots where the will have the correct data.
option module categories are different are not updated from the card and
NOTE
will contain their default values after the copying action. The drive will
produce a 'Card Option' trip if the option module installed to the source When Pr 11.042 is set to Auto (3) the setting of Pr 11.042 itself is saved
and the destination drives are different or are in different slots. If the data to the drive EEPROM but not the SMARTCARD.
is being transferred to the drive with different voltage or current rating a 9.3.4 Booting up from the SMARTCARD on every
'Card Rating' trip will occur. power up (Pr 11.042 = Boot (4))
The following drive rating dependant parameters (RA coding bit set) will When Pr 11.042 is set to Boot (4) the drive operates the same as Auto
not be transferred to the destination drive by a SMARTCARD when the mode except when the drive is powered-up. The parameters on the
voltage rating of the destination drive is different from the source drive SMARTCARD will be automatically transferred to the drive at power up if
and the file is a parameter file. the following are true:
However, drive rating dependent parameters will be transferred if only • A card is inserted in the drive
the current rating is different. If drive rating dependant parameters are • Parameter data block 1 exists on the card
not transferred to the destination drive they will contain their default • The data in block 1 is type 1 to 4 (as defined in Pr 11.038)
values. • Pr 11.042 on the card set to Boot (4)
Pr 02.008 Standard Ramp Voltage The drive will display 'Booting Parameters during this operation. If the
Pr 04.005 to Pr 04.007 and Pr 21.027 to Pr 21.029 Motoring Current Limits drive mode is different from that on the card, the drive gives a 'Card
Drive Mode' trip and the data is not transferred.
Pr 04.024, User Current Maximum Scaling
Pr 05.007, Pr 21.007 Rated Current If 'Boot' mode is stored on the copying SMARTCARD this makes the
copying SMARTCARD the master device. This provides a very fast and
Pr 05.009, Pr 21.009 Rated Voltage
efficient way of re-programming a number of drives.

Issue Number: 3
NOTE 9.5 NV Media Card parameters

'Boot' mode is saved to the card, but when the card is read, the value of
Pr 11.042 is not transferred to the drive. Table 9-2 Key to parameter table coding
RW Read / Write ND No default value
9.3.5 Booting up from the SMARTCARD on every
power up (Pr mm.000 = 2001) RO Read only NC Not copied
It is possible to create a bootable parameter data block by setting Num Number parameter PT Protected parameter
Pr mm.000 to 2001 and initiating a drive reset. This data block is created Bit Bit parameter RA Rating dependant
in one operation and is not updated when further parameter changes are Txt Text string US User save
made.
Bin Binary parameter PS Power-down save
Setting Pr mm.000 to 2001 will overwrite the data block 1 on the card if it
FI Filtered DE Destination
already exists.
9.3.6 800yy - Comparing the drive full parameter set

with the SMARTCARD values 11.036 {00.029} NV Media Card File Previously Loaded
Setting 8yyy in Pr mm.000, will compare the SMARTCARD file with the RO Num NC PT
data in the drive. If the compare is successful Pr mm.000 is simply set to 0 to 999 0
0. If the compare fails a 'Card Compare' trip is initiated.
9.3.7 700yy / 9999 - Erasing data from the This parameter shows the number of the data block last transferred from
SMARTCARD values a SMARTCARD to the drive. If defaults are subsequently reloaded this
Data can be erased from the SMARTCARD either one block at a time or parameter is set to 0.
all blocks in one go.
• Setting 7yyy in Pr mm.000 will erase SMARTCARD data block yyy
• Setting 9999 in Pr mm.000 will erase all SMARTCARD data blocks 11.037 NV Media Card File Number
RW Num
9.3.8 9666 / 9555 - Setting and clearing the
0 to 999 0
SMARTCARD warning suppression flag
If the option modules installed to the source and destination drive are
This parameter should have the data block number which the user would
different or are in different slots the drive will produce a 'Card Option' trip.
like the information displayed in Pr 11.038, Pr 11.039 and Pr 11.040.
If the data is being transferred to a drive of a different voltage or current
rating a 'Card Rating' trip will occur. It is possible to suppress these trips
by setting the warning suppression flag. If this flag is set the drive will not
11.038 NV Media Card File Type
trip if the option module(s) or drive ratings are different between the
source and destination drives. The options module or rating dependent RO Txt ND NC PT
parameters will not be transferred.
0 to 6
• Setting 9666 in Pr mm.000 will set the warning suppression flag
• Setting 9555 in Pr mm.000 will clear the warning suppression flag Displays the type/mode of the data block selected with Pr 11.037.
9.3.9 9888 / 9777 - Setting and clearing the Pr 11.038 String Type / mode
SMARTCARD read only flag
0 None No file selected
The SMARTCARD may be protected from writing or erasing by setting
the read only flag. If an attempt is made to write or erase a data block 1 Open loop Open-loop mode parameter file
when the read only flag is set, a 'Card Read Only' trip is initiated. When 2 RFC-A RFC-A mode parameter file
the read only flag is set only codes 6yyy or 9777 are effective. 3 RFC-S RFC-S mode parameter file
• Setting 9888 in Pr mm.000 will set the read only flag 4 Regen Regen mode parameter file
• Setting 9777 in Pr mm.000 will clear the read only flag 5 User Prog Onboard user program file
6 Option App Option module application file
9.4 Data block header information
Each data block stored on a SMARTCARD has header information
detailing the following: 11.039 NV Media Card File Version
• NV Media Card File Number (11.037) RO Num ND NC PT
• NV Media Card File Type (11.038)
• NV Media Card File Version (11.039) 0 to 9999
• NV Media Card File Checksum (11.040)
The header information for each data block which has been used can be Displays the version number of the file selected in Pr 11.037.
viewed in Pr 11.038 to Pr 11.040 by increasing or decreasing the data
block number set in Pr 11.037.
11.040 NV Media Card File Checksum
If there is no data on the card Pr 11.037 can only have a value of 0.
RO Num ND NC PT
-2147483648 to
2147483647
Displays the checksum of the data block selected in Pr 11.037.

Issue Number: 3
11.042 Parameter Cloning

RW Txt NC US
None (0), Read (1),
Program (2), Auto (3), None (0)
Boot (4)
NOTE
If Pr 11.042 is equal to 1 or 2, this value is not transferred to the drive or
saved to the EEPROM. If Pr 11.042 is set to 3 or 4 the value is saved to
the EEPROM
None (0) = Inactive
Read (1) = Read parameter set from the SMARTCARD
Program (2) = Program a parameter set to the SMARTCARD
Auto (3) = Auto save
Boot (4) = Boot mode
9.6 NV Media Card trips

After an attempt to read, write or erase data from a NV Media Card a trip
is initiated if there has been a problem with the command.
See Chapter 13 Diagnostics on page 247 for more information on NV
Media Card trips.

Issue Number: 3
10 Onboard PLC 10.3 Features

The Unidrive M Onboard PLC user program has the following features:
10.1 Onboard PLC and Machine Control 10.3.1 Tasks
Studio The Onboard PLC allows use of two tasks.
The drive has the ability to store and execute a 16 kB Onboard PLC user • Clock: A high priority real time task. The clock task interval can be
program without the need for additional hardware in the form of an set from 4 ms to 262 s in multiples of 4 ms. The parameter Onboard
option module. User Program: Clock Task Time Used (11.051) shows the
percentage of the available time used by clock task. A read or write
Machine Control Studio is an IEC61131-3 development environment
designed for use with Unidrive M and compatible application modules. of a drive parameter by the user program takes a finite period of
time. It is possible to select up to 10 parameters as fast access
Machine Control Studio is based on CoDeSys from 3S-Smart Software
parameter which reduced the amount of time it takes for the user
Solutions.
program to read from or write to a drive parameter. This is useful
All of the programming languages defined in the IEC standard IEC when using a clock task with a fast update rate as selecting a
61131-3 are supported in the Machine Control Studio development parameter for fast access reduces the amount of the clock task
environment. resource required to access parameters.
• ST (Structured text) • Freewheeling: A non-real time background task. The freewheeling
• LD (Ladder diagram) task is scheduled for a short period once every 64 ms. The time for
• FBD (Function block diagram) which the task is scheduled will vary depending on the loading of the
• IL (Instruction list) drive's processor. When scheduled, several scans of the user
• SFC (Sequential function chart) program may be performed. Some scans may execute in
• CFC (Continuous Function Chart). CFC is an extension to the microseconds. However, when the main drive functions are
standard IEC programming languages scheduled there will be a pause in the execution of the program
Machine Control Studio provides a complete environment for the causing some scans to take many milliseconds. The parameter
development of user programs. Programs can be created, compiled and Onboard User Program: Freewheeling Tasks Per Second (11.050)
downloaded to a Unidrive M or compatible applications module for shows the number of times the freewheeling task has started per
execution, via the communications port on the front of the drive. The run- second.
time operation of the compiled program on the target can also be 10.3.2 Variables
monitored using Machine Control Studio and facilities are provided to The Onboard PLC supports the use of variables with the data types of
interact with the program on the target by setting new values for target Boolean, integer (8 bit, 16 bit and 32 bit, signed and unsigned), floating
variables and parameters. point (64 bit only), strings and time.
The Onboard PLC and Machine Control Studio form the first level of 10.3.3 Custom menu
functionality in a range of programmable options for Unidrive M.
Machine Control Studio can construct a custom drive menu to reside in
Machine Control Studio can be downloaded from menu 30 on the drive. The following properties of each parameter can be
www.controltechniques.com. defined using Machine Control Studio:
See the Machine Control Studio help file for more information regarding • Parameter name
using Machine Control Studio, creating user programs and downloading • Number of decimal places
user programs to the drive. • The units for the parameter to be display on the keypad.
• The minimum, maximum and default values
10.2 Benefits • Memory handling (i.e. power down save, user save or volatile)
The combination of the Onboard PLC and Machine Control Studio, • Data type. The drive provides a limited set of 1 bit, 8 bit, 16 bit and
means that the drive can replace nano and some micro PLCs in many 32 bit integer parameters to create the customer menu.
applications Parameters in this customer menu can be accessed by the user
program and will appear on the keypad.
Machine Control Studio benefits from access to the standard CoDeSys
function and function block libraries as well as those from third parties. 10.3.4 Limitations
Functions and function blocks available as standard in Machine Control Compared with the Applications Modules when programmed with
Studio include, but not limited to, the following: Machine Control Studio, the Onboard PLC user program has the
following limitations:
• Arithmetic blocks
• Comparison blocks • The flash memory allocated to the Onboard PLC is 16 kB which
• Timers includes the user program and its header which results in a
• Counters maximum user program size of about 12 kB
• Multiplexers • The Onboard PLC is provided with 2 kB of RAM with up to 1 kB
• Latches available for variables.
• Bit manipulation • The drive is rated for 100 program downloads. This limitation is
imposed by the flash memory used to store the program within the
Typical applications for the Onboard PLC include: drive.
• There is only one real-time task with a minimum period of 4 ms.
• Ancillary pumps • The freewheeling background task runs at a low priority. The drive is
• Fans and control valves prioritized to perform the clock task and its major functions first, e.g.
• Interlocking logic motor control, and will use any remaining processing time to execute
• Sequences routines the freewheeling task as a background activity. As the drive's
• Custom control words. processor becomes more heavily loaded, less time is spent
executing the freewheeling task.
• Breakpoints, single stepping and online program changes are not
possible.
• The Graphing tool is not supported.

Issue Number: 3
• The variable data types REAL (32 bit floating point), LWORD (64 bit This parameter shows the interval at which the clock task is scheduled to
integer) and WSTRING (Unicode string), and retained variables are run at in ms.
not supported.
10.5 Onboard PLC trips
10.4 Onboard PLC parameters If the drive detects an error in the user program it will initiate a User
The following parameters are associated with the Onboard PLC user Program trip. The sub-trip number for the User Program trip details the
program. reason for the error. See Chapter 13 Diagnostics on page 247 for more
information on the User Program trip.
11.047 Onboard User Program: Enable

RW Txt US
Stop (0) or Run (1) Run (1)
This parameter stops and starts the user program.

0 - Stop the User Program
The onboard user program is stopped. If it is restarted by setting
Onboard User Program: Enable (11.047) to a non-zero value the
background task starts from the beginning.
1 - Run the User Program
The user program will execute.
11.048 Onboard User Program: Status

RO Num ND NC PT
-2147483648 to
2147483647
This parameter is read-only and indicates the status of the user program
in the drive. The user program writes the value to this parameter.
11.049 Onboard User Program: Programming Events

RO Num ND NC PT PS
0 to 65535
This parameter holds the number of times an Onboard PLC user

program download has taken place and is 0 on dispatch from the factory.
The drive is rated for one hundred ladder program downloads. This
parameter is not altered when defaults are loaded.
Onboard User Program: Freewheeling Tasks Per

11.050
Second
RO Num ND NC PT
0 to 65535
This parameter shows the number of times the freewheeling task has
started per second.
11.051 Onboard User Program: Clock Task Time Used

RO Num ND NC PT
0.0 to 100.0 %
This parameter shows the percentage of the available time used by the
user program clock task.
Onboard User Program: Clock Task Scheduled

11.055
Interval
RO Num ND NC PT
0 to 262140 ms

Issue Number: 3
11 Advanced parameters Operation mode abbreviations:

Open-loop: Sensorless control for induction motors
This is a quick reference to all parameters in the drive showing units, RFC-A: Asynchronous Rotor Flux Control for induction motors
ranges limits etc, with block diagrams to illustrate their function. RFC-S: Synchronous Rotor Flux Control for synchronous motors
These advanced parameters are listed for reference including permanent magnet motors.
purposes only. The lists in this chapter do not include Default abbreviations:
sufficient information for adjusting these parameters. Standard default value (50 Hz AC supply frequency)
Incorrect adjustment can affect the safety of the system,
WARNING
and damage the drive and or external equipment. Before USA default value (60 Hz AC supply frequency)
attempting to adjust any of these parameters, refer to NOTE
the Advanced User Guide. Parameter numbers shown in brackets {...} are the equivalent Menu 0
parameters. Some Menu 0 parameters appear twice since their function
Table 11-1 Menu descriptions depends on the operating mode.
Menu Description The Range - RFC-A / S column applies to both RFC-A and RFC-S. For
some parameters, this column applies to only one of these modes, this is
Commonly used basic set-up parameters for quick / easy indicated accordingly in the Default columns.
0
programming
In some cases, the function or range of a parameter is affected by the
1 Frequency / Speed reference
setting of another parameter. The information in the lists relates to the
2 Ramps default condition of any parameters affected in this way.
3 Frequency slaving, speed feedback and speed control
Table 11-2 Key to parameter table coding
4 Torque and current control
5 Motor control Coding Attribute
6 Sequencer and clock RW Read/Write: can be written by the user
7 Temperature monitoring RO Read only: can only be read by the user
8 Digital I/O Bit 1 bit parameter. ‘On’ or ‘Off’ on the display
Programmable logic, motorized pot, binary sum, timers and Num Number: can be uni-polar or bi-polar
9
scope
Txt Text: the parameter uses text strings instead of numbers.
10 Status and trips
Bin Binary parameter
11 Drive set-up and identification, serial communications
IP IP Address parameter
12 Threshold detectors and variable selectors
Mac Mac Address parameter
13 Standard motion control
Date Date parameter
14 User PID controller
Time Time parameter
Filtered: some parameters which can have rapidly changing
FI values are filtered when displayed on the drive keypad for
17 Option module slot 3 set-up menu easy viewing.
18 General option module application menu 1 Destination: This parameter selects the destination of an
19 General option module application menu 2 DE
input or logic function.
20 General option module application menu 3 Rating dependent: this parameter is likely to have different
21 Second motor parameters values and ranges with drives of different voltage and
22 Menu 0 set-up current ratings. Parameters with this attribute will be
23 Not allocated transferred to the destination drive by non-volatile storage
24 Ethernet module (slot 4) set-up menu RA media when the rating of the destination drive is different
from the source drive and the file is a parameter file.
However, the values will be transferred if only the current
26 Option module slot 2 application parameters rating is different and the file is a difference from default
27 Option module slot 3 application parameters type file.
28 Option module slot 4 application parameters No default: The parameter is not modified when defaults are
ND
29 Reserved menu loaded
30 Onboard user programming application menu Not copied: not transferred to or from non-volatile media
NC
31-41 Advanced motion controller set-up parameters during copying.
Slot 1 Slot 1 option menus* PT Protected: cannot be used as a destination.
Slot 2 Slot 2 option menus* User save: parameter saved in drive EEPROM when the
US
Slot 3 Slot 3 option menus* user initiates a parameter save.
Slot 4 Ethernet menus Power-down save: parameter automatically saved in drive
PS
EEPROM when the under volts (UV) trip occurs.
* Only displayed when the option modules are installed.

Issue Number: 3
Table 11-3 Feature look-up table

Feature Related parameters (Pr)
Acceleration rates 02.010 02.011 to 02.019 02.032 02.033 02.034 02.002
Application menu Menu 18 Menu 19 Menu 20
At speed indicator bit 03.006 03.007 03.009 10.006 10.005 10.007
Auto reset 10.034 10.035 10.036 10.001
Autotune 05.012 05.016 05.017 05.023 05.024 05.025 05.010 05.029 05.030
Binary sum 09.029 09.030 09.031 09.032 09.033 09.034
Bipolar speed 01.010
Brake control 12.040 to 12.049
Braking 10.011 10.010 10.030 10.031 06.001 02.004 02.002 10.012 10.039 10.040 10.061
Catch a spinning motor 06.009 05.040
Coast to stop 06.001
Copying 11.042 11.036 to 11.040
Cost - per kWh electricity 06.016 06.017 06.024 06.025 06.026 06.040
Current controller 04.013 04.014
Current feedback 04.001 04.002 04.017 04.004 04.012 04.020 04.023 04.024 04.026 10.008 10.009 10.017
Current limits 04.005 04.006 04.007 04.018 04.015 04.019 04.016 05.007 05.010 10.008 10.009 10.017
DC bus voltage 05.005 02.008
DC injection braking 06.006 06.007 06.001
02.021 to 02.035 to
Deceleration rates 02.020 02.004 02.002 02.008 06.001 10.030 10.031 10.039 02.009
02.029 02.037
Defaults 11.043 11.046
Digital I/O Menu 8
Digital I/O read word 08.020
Digital I/O T4 08.001 08.011 08.021
Digital I/O T5 08.002 08.012 08.022
Digital input T7 08.004 08.014 08.024
Digital input T8 08.005 08.015 08.025
Digital lock 13.010 13.001 to 13.009 13.011 13.012 13.016 03.022 03.023 13.019 to 13.023
Digital output T2 08.008 08.018 08.028
Direction 10.013 06.030 06.031 01.003 10.014 02.001 03.002 08.003 08.004 10.040
Display timeout 11.041
Drive active 10.002 10.040
Drive derivative 11.028 11.033 11.064
Drive OK 10.001 08.027 08.007 08.017 10.036 10.040
Dynamic performance 05.026
Dynamic V/F 05.013
Electronic nameplate 03.049
Enable 06.015 08.009 08.010 08.040
Encoder reference 03.043 03.044 03.045 03.046
Encoder set up 03.033 03.034 to 03.042 03.047 03.048 03.133 03.134 to 03.142
External trip 10.032 08.010 08.007
Fan speed 06.045
Fast disable 06.029
Field weakening - induction motor 05.029 05.030 01.006 05.028
Field weakening - servo 05.022 01.006 05.009
Filter change 06.019 06.018
Frequency reference selection 01.014 01.015
Frequency slaving 03.001 03.013 03.014 03.015 03.016 03.017 03.018
Hard speed reference 03.022 03.023
Heavy duty rating 05.007 11.032
High stability space vector modulation 05.019
I/O sequencer 06.004 06.030 06.031 06.032 06.033 06.034 06.042 06.043 06.041
Inertia compensation 02.038 05.012 04.022 03.018
Jog reference 01.005 02.019 02.029
Keypad reference 01.017 01.014 01.043 01.051 06.012 06.013
Kt 05.032
Limit switches 06.035 06.036
Line power supply loss 06.003 10.015 10.016 05.005
Local position reference 13.020 to 13.023
Logic function 1 09.001 09.004 09.005 09.006 09.007 09.008 09.009 09.010
Logic function 2 09.002 09.014 09.015 09.016 09.017 09.018 09.019 09.020
Low voltage supply 06.044 06.046 06.066 06.067
Marker pulse 03.032 03.031
Maximum speed 01.006
Menu 0 set-up 11.001 to 11.022 Menu 22

Issue Number: 3
Feature Related parameters (Pr)

Minimum speed 01.007 10.004
Modules - number of 11.035
Motor map 05.006 05.007 05.008 05.009 05.010 05.011
Motor map 2 Menu 21 11.45
Motorized potentiometer 09.021 09.022 09.023 09.024 09.025 09.026 09.027 09.028
Offset speed reference 01.004 01.038 01.009
Onboard PLC 11.047 to 11.051
Open collector digital outputs 08.030
Open loop vector mode 05.014 05.017 05.023
Operating mode 00.048 11.031 03.024 05.014
Orientation 13.010 13.013 to 13.015
Output 05.001 05.002 05.003 05.004
Overspeed threshold 03.008
Phase angle 03.025 05.012
PID controller Menu 14
Position feedback - drive 03.028 03.029 03.030 03.050
Positive logic 08.029
Power up parameter 11.022 11.021
Precision reference 01.018 01.019 01.020 01.044
Preset speeds 01.015 01.021 to 01.028 01.016 01.014 01.042 01.045 to 01.048 01.050
Programmable logic Menu 9
Quasi square operation 05.020
Ramp (accel / decel) mode 02.004 02.008 06.001 02.002 02.003 10.030 10.031 10.039
Rated speed autotune 05.016 05.008
Regenerating 10.010 10.011 10.030 10.031 06.001 02.004 02.002 10.012 10.039 10.040
Relative jog 13.017 to 13.019
Relay output 08.007 08.017 08.027
Reset 10.033 08.002 08.022 10.034 10.035 10.036 10.001
RFC mode (encoder less CLV mode) 03.024 03.042 04.012 05.040
S ramp 02.006 02.007
Sample rates 05.018
SAFE TORQUE OFF input 08.009 08.010 08.040
Security code 11.030 11.044
Skip speeds 01.029 01.030 01.031 01.032 01.033 01.034 01.035
Slip compensation 05.027 05.008
NV media card 11.036 to 11.040 11.042
Firmware version 11.029 11.034
Speed controller 03.010 to 03.017 03.019 03.020 03.021
Speed feedback 03.002 03.003 03.004
Speed feedback - drive 03.026 03.027 03.028 03.029 03.030 03.031 03.042
Speed reference selection 01.014 01.015 01.049 01.050 01.001
Status word 10.040
Supply 06.044 05.005 06.046
Switching frequency 05.018 05.035 07.034 07.035
Thermal protection - drive 05.018 05.035 07.004 07.005 07.006 07.032 07.035 10.018
Thermal protection - motor 04.015 05.007 04.019 04.016 04.025 07.015
Threshold detector 1 12.001 12.003 to 12.007
Threshold detector 2 12.002 12.023 to 12.027
Time - filter change 06.019 06.018
Time - powered up log 06.020 06.021 06.028
Time - run log 06.022 06.023 06.028
Torque 04.003 04.026 05.032
Torque mode 04.008 04.011 04.009 04.010
Trip detection 10.037 10.038 10.020 to 10.029
Trip log 10.020 to 10.029 10.041 to 10.051 06.028 10.070 to 10.079
Under voltage 05.005 10.016 10.015
V/F mode 05.015 05.014
Variable selector 1 12.008 to 12.015
Variable selector 2 12.028 to 12.035
Velocity feed forward 01.039 01.040
Voltage controller 05.031
Voltage mode 05.014 05.017 05.023 05.015
Voltage rating 11.033 05.009 05.005
Voltage supply 06.044 06.046 05.005
Warning 10.019 10.012 10.017 10.018 10.040
Zero speed indicator bit 03.005 10.003

Issue Number: 3
Parameter ranges and Variable minimum/maximums:

Some parameters in the drive have a variable range with a variable minimum and a variable maximum values which is dependent on one of the
following:
• The settings of other parameters
• The drive rating
• The drive mode
• Combination of any of the above
The tables below give the definition of variable minimum/maximum and the maximum range of these.
VM_AC_VOLTAGE Range applied to parameters showing AC Voltage

Units V
Range of [MIN] 0
Range of [MAX] 0 to the value listed below
VM_AC_VOLTAGE[MAX] is drive voltage rating dependent. See Table 11-4
Definition
VM_AC_VOLTAGE[MIN] = 0
VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET Range applied to the AC Voltage set-up parameters

Units V
Range of [MIN] 0
VM_AC_VOLTAGE[MAX] is drive voltage rating dependent. See Table 11-4
Definition
VM_AC_VOLTAGE[MIN] = 0
VM_ACCEL_RATE Maximum applied to the ramp rate parameters

Units s / 100 Hz, s / 1000 rpm, s / 1000 mm/s
Open-loop: 0.0
Range of [MIN]
RFC-A, RFC-S: 0.000
Open-loop: 0.0 to 3200.0
Range of [MAX]
RFC-A, RFC-S: 0.000 to 3200.000
Open-loop mode
If Ramp Rate Units (02.039) = 0:
VM_ACCEL_RATE[MAX] = 3200.0
VM_ACCEL_RATE[MAX] = 3200.0 x Pr 01.006 / 100.0
VM_ACCEL_RATE[MIN] = 0.0
Definition RFC-A, RFC-S modes

VM_ACCEL_RATE[MAX] = 3200.000
VM_ACCEL_RATE[MAX] = 3200.000 x Pr 01.006 / 1000.0
VM_ACCEL_RATE[MIN] = 0.000
If the second motor map is selected (Pr 11.045 = 1) Pr 21.001 is used instead of Pr 01.006.
VM_AMC_ROLL_OVER Range applied the position parameters in the advanced motion controller
Units User units
Range of [MIN] 0 or -231
Range of [MAX] 0 or -231-1
VM_AMC_ROLL_OVER[MAX] = 231-1
Definition
VM_AMC_ROLL_OVER[MIN] = 231

Issue Number: 3
Range applied the position parameters in the advanced motion controller that are restricted
VM_AMC_UNIPOLAR_ROLL_OVER
to positive values
Units User units
Range of [MIN] 0
Range of [MAX] 0 to 231-1
VM_AMC_UNIPOLAR_ROLL_OVER[MAX] = VM_AMC_ROLL_OVER[MAX]
Definition
VM_AMC_UNIPOLAR_ROLL_OVER[MIN] = 0
VM_DC_VOLTAGE Range applied to parameters showing DC Voltage

Units V
Range of [MIN] 0
VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX] is the full scale DC link voltage feedback (over voltage trip level) for the drive. This level is
drive voltage rating dependent. See Table 11-4
Definition
VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MIN] = 0
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET Range applied to DC Voltage reference parameters

Units V
Range of [MIN] 0
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX] is drive voltage rating dependent. See Table 11-4
Definition
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MIN] = 0
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT Range applied to parameters showing current in A

Units A
Range of [MIN] -99999.999 to 0.000
Range of [MAX] 0.000 to 99999.999
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MAX] is equivalent to the full scale (over current trip level) or Kc value for the drive and is given
by Full Scale Current Kc (11.061).
Definition
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MIN] = - VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MAX]
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR Unipolar version of VM_DRIVE_CURRENT

Units A
Range of [MIN] 0.000
Range of [MAX] 0.000 to 99999.999
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR[MAX] = VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MAX]
Definition
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR[MIN] = 0.000
VM_HIGH_DC_VOLTAGE Range applied to parameters showing high DC Voltage

Units V
Range of [MIN] 0
Range of [MAX] 0 to 1500
VM_HIGH_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX] is the full scale DC link voltage feedback for the high DC link voltage measurement
which can measure the voltage if it goes above the normal full scale value. This level is drive voltage rating dependent.
Definition See Table 11-4
VM_HIGH_DC_VOLTAGE[MIN] = 0

Issue Number: 3
VM_LOW_UNDER_VOLTS Range applied the low under-voltage threshold

Units V
Range of [MIN] 24
If Back-up Mode Enable (06.068) = 0:
VM_LOW_UNDER_VOLTS[MAX] = VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS[MIN]
If Back-up Mode Enable (06.068) = 1:
Definition
VM_LOW_UNDER_VOLTS[MAX] = VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS[MIN] / 1.1.
VM_LOW_UNDER_VOLTS[MIN] = 24.
VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT
Range applied to current limit parameters
VM_MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT
Units %
Range of [MIN] 0.0
Range of [MAX] 0.0 to 1000.0
VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT[MIN] = 0.0
Open-loop
VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT[MAX] = (ITlimit / ITrated) x 100 %
Where:
ITlimit = IMaxRef x cos(sin-1(IMrated / IMaxRef))
IMrated = Pr 05.007 sin φ
ITrated = Pr 05.007 x cos φ
cos φ = Pr 05.010
IMaxRef is 0.7 x Pr 11.061 when the motor rated current set in Pr 05.007 is less than or equal to Pr 11.032 (i.e.
Heavy duty), otherwise it is the lower of 0.7 x Pr 11.061 or 1.1 x Pr 11.060 (i.e. Normal duty).
RFC-A
VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT[MAX] = (ITlimit / ITrated) x 100 %
Where:
Definition
ITlimit = IMaxRef x cos(sin-1(IMrated / IMaxRef))
IMrated = Pr 05.007 x cos φ1
ITrated = Pr 05.007 x sin φ1
φ1 = cos-1 (Pr 05.010) + φ2. φ1 is calculated during an autotune. See the variable minimum / maximum calculations
in the Parameter Reference Guide for more information regarding φ2.
RFC-S and Regen

VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT[MAX] = (IMaxRef / Pr 05.007) x 100 %
Where:
For VM_MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT[MAX] use Pr 21.007 instead of Pr 05.007 and Pr 21.010 instead of Pr 05.010.

Issue Number: 3
VM_NEGATIVE_REF_CLAMP1
Limits applied to the negative frequency or speed clamp
VM_NEGATIVE_REF_CLAMP2
Open-loop: Hz
Units
RFC-A, RFC-S: rpm or mm/s
Open-loop: -550.0 to 0.0
Range of [MIN]
RFC-A, RFC-S: -50000.0 to 0.0
Range of [MAX]
RFC-A, RFC-S: 0.0 to 50000.0
Negative Reference Bipolar Reference VM_NEGATIVE_REF_ VM_NEGATIVE_REF_

Clamp Enable (01.008) Enable (01.010) CLAMP1[MIN] CLAMP1[MAX]
0 0 0.0 Pr 01.006
Definition
0 1 0.0 0.0
1 X -VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP[MAX] 0.0
VM_NEGATIVE_REF_CLAMP2 is defined in the same way except that Pr 21.001 is used instead of Pr 01.006.
VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP Limits applied to the positive frequency or speed reference clamp

Open-loop: Hz
Units
Open-loop: 0.0
Range of [MIN]
RFC-A, RFC-S: 0.0
Open-loop: 550.0
Range of [MAX]
RFC-A, RFC-S: 0.0 to 50000.0
In open-loop mode VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP[MAX] is fixed at 550.0
In RFC-A and RFC-S modes a limit is applied so that the position feedback does not exceed the speed where the drive
can no longer interpret the feedback signal correctly. The limit is based on the position feedback device selected with
Motor Control Feedback Select (03.026). It is possible to disable this limit if the RFC Feedback Mode (03.024) = 2 or 3
(i.e. VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP[MAX] = 50000.0). The table below shows how VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP[MAX]
is defined for different feedback device types
Feedback device VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP[MAX]

AB, (500 kHz x 60 / rotary lines per revolution) rpm
AB Servo (500 kHz / linear line pitch in mm) mm/s
Definition
FD, FR, (500 kHz x 60 / rotary lines per revolution)/2 rpm
FD Servo, FR Servo (500 kHz / linear line pitch in mm)/2 mm/s
SC,
(500 kHz x 60 / sine waves per revolution) rpm
SC Hiper, SC EnDat,
(500 kHz / linear sine wave pitch in mm) mm/s
SC SSI, SC Servo
(1000 Hz x 60 / resolver pole pairs) rpm
Resolver
(1000 Hz / pole pitch in mm / resolver pole pairs) mm/s
Any other device 50000.0 rpm or mm/s
In all modes VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP[MIN] is fixed at 0.0
VM_POWER Range applied to parameters that either set or display power

Units kW
Range of [MIN] -99999.999 to 0.000
Range of [MAX] 0.000 to 99999.999
VM_POWER[MAX] is rating dependent and is chosen to allow for the maximum power that can be output by the drive
with maximum a.c. output voltage, at maximum controlled current and unity power factor.
Definition
VM_POWER[MAX] = √3 x VM_AC_VOLTAGE[MAX] x VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MAX] / 1000
VM_POWER[MIN] = -VM_POWER[MAX]

Issue Number: 3
VM_RATED_CURRENT Range applied to rated current parameters

Units A
Range of [MIN] -99999.999 to 0.000
Range of [MAX] 0.000 to 99999.999
VM_RATED_CURRENT [MAX] = Maximum Rated Current (11.060) and is dependent on the drive rating. This is the
Normal Duty rating of the drive.
Definition
VM_RATED_CURRENT [MIN] = 0.00
VM_REGEN_REACTIVE Range applied to the reactive current reference in Regen mode

Units %
Range of [MIN] -1000.0 to 0.0
VM_REGEN_REACTIVE[MAX] = ?(VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT2 - ILimit2)
where
ILimit gives the highest level of the active current reference that can occur. This value is defined by the current limit
values. If the current limits are all set to their maximum values (i.e. VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT) then there is no
Definition
current capability left for the reactive current. However, if the current limits are reduced the resulting headroom can be
used for the reactive current. ILimit is defined by a combination of all the current limits excluding any reduction of the
current limit due to the motor thermal model.
VM_REGEN_REACTIVE[MIN] = - VM_REGEN_REACTIVE[MAX]
VM_SPEED Range applied to parameters showing speed

Units Open-loop, RFC-A, RFC-S: rpm or mm/s
Range of [MIN] Open-loop, RFC-A, RFC-S: -50000.0 to 0.0
Range of [MAX] Open-loop, RFC-A, RFC-S: 0.0 to 50000.0
This variable minimum/maximum defines the range of speed monitoring parameters. To allow headroom for overshoot
the range is set to twice the range of the speed references.
Definition
VM_SPEED[MAX] = 2 x VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
VM_SPEED[MIN] = 2 x VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MIN]
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Range applied to the frequency or speed reference parameters

Open-loop: Hz
Units
Open-loop: -550.0 to 0.0
Range of [MIN]
RFC-A, RFC-S: -50000.0 to 0.0
Range of [MAX]
RFC-A, RFC-S: 0.0 to 50000.0
If Pr 01.008 = 0: VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX] = Pr 01.006
If Pr 01.008 = 1: VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX] = Pr 01.006 or |Pr 01.007|, whichever is larger.
If the second motor map is selected (Pr 11.045 = 1) Pr 21.001 is used instead of Pr 01.006 and Pr 21.002 instead of
Definition
Pr 01.007.
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MIN] = -VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX].

Issue Number: 3
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR Unipolar version of VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF

Open-loop: Hz
Units
Open-loop: 0.0
Range of [MIN]
RFC-A, RFC-S: 0.0
Range of [MAX]
RFC-A, RFC-S: 0.0 to 50000.0
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR[MAX] = VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
Definition
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR[MIN] = 0.0
VM_SPEED_FREQ_USER_REFS Range applied to some Menu 1 reference parameters

Open-loop: Hz
Units
Open-loop: -550.0 to 550.0
Range of [MIN]
RFC-A, RFC-S: -50000.0 to 50000.0
Range of [MAX]
RFC-A, RFC-S: 0.0 to 50000.0
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR[MAX] = VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
Negative Reference Bipolar Reference

VM_SPEED_FREQ_USER_REFS [MIN]
Clamp Enable (01.008) Enable (01.010)
0 0 Pr 01.007
Definition
0 1 -VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
1 0 0.0
1 1 -VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
If the second motor map is selected (Pr 11.045 = 1) Pr 21.002 is used instead of Pr 01.007.
VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS Range applied the standard under-voltage threshold

Units V
Range of [MIN] 0 to 1150
VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS[MAX] = VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET / 1.1
Definition
VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS[MIN] is voltage rating dependent. See Table 11-4
VM_SUPPLY_LOSS_LEVEL Maximum applied to the ramp rate parameters

Units s / 100 Hz, s / 1000 rpm, s / 1000 mm/s
Open-loop: 0.0
Range of [MIN]
RFC-A, RFC-S: 0.000
Range of [MAX]
RFC-A, RFC-S: 0.000 to 3200.000
VM_SUPPLY_LOSS_LEVEL[MAX] = VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX]
Definition
VM_SUPPLY_LOSS_LEVEL[MIN] is drive voltage rating dependent. See Table 11-4
VM_SWITCHING_FREQUENCY Range applied the switching frequency parameters

Units
Range of [MIN] 0
Range of [MAX] 6
VM_SWITCHING_FREQUENCY[MAX] = Power stage dependent
Definition
VM_SWITCHING_FREQUENCY[MIN] = 0

Issue Number: 3
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT Range applied to torque and torque producing current parameters

Units %
Select Motor 2 Parameters (11.045) VM_TORQUE_CURRENT [MAX]

Definition 0 VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT[MAX]
1 VM_MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT[MAX]
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT[MIN] = -VM_TORQUE_CURRENT[MAX]
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR Unipolar version of VM_TORQUE_CURRENT

Units %
Range of [MIN] 0.0
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR[MAX] = VM_TORQUE_CURRENT[MAX]
Definition
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR[MIN] =0.0
VM_USER_CURRENT Range applied to torque reference and percentage load parameters with one decimal place
Units %
VM_USER_CURRENT[MAX] = User Current Maximum Scaling (04.024)
Definition
VM_USER_CURRENT[MIN] = -VM_USER_CURRENT[MAX]
Range applied to torque reference and percentage load parameters with two decimal
VM_USER_CURRENT_HIGH_RES
places
Units %
Range of [MIN] -1000.00 to 0.00
VM_USER_CURRENT_HIGH_RES[MAX] = User Current Maximum Scaling (04.024) with an additional decimal place
Definition
VM_USER_CURRENT_HIGH_RES[MIN] = -VM_USER_CURRENT_HIGH_RES[MAX]
Table 11-4 Voltage ratings dependant values
Voltage level (V)

Variable min/max
200 V 400 V 575 V 690 V
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX] 400 800 955 1150
VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX] 415 830 990 1190
VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX] 240 480 575 690
VM_AC_VOLTAGE[MAX] 325 650 780 930
VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS[MIN] 175 330 435 435
VM_SUPPLY_LOSS_LEVEL[MIN] 205 410 540 540
VM_HIGH_DC_VOLTAGE 1500 1500 1500 1500

Issue Number: 3
11.1 Menu 1: Frequency / speed reference

Analog
Reference 1
01.036
01.041 Reference Select

Flag 1
01.037
Analog
Reference 2
Reference Select
01.042 Flag 2
Preset Reference
Preset Reference Reference Select
01.015 01.043 Flag 3
Selector*
Preset Reference Select Bits 1 ~ 3
Reference Select
01.044
01.047 01.046 Flag 4
01.045 Reference
Selector*
01.014
Reference Selected
Indicator
0 01.049
01.021 ~01.028 1
Preset 2 +
References
1 to 8 3
+
4
5
Scan Timer 6
01.038 01.001
1.20
Preset Reference
Reference Pr 01.050 set Percentage Level Of
Selected 01.050 to greater than 1 Trim Reference
01.016 Indicator Selected
Preset Selector
Timer 01.004
Pr 01.049 Pr 01.050 Reference being used Reference

1 >1 Preset Reference defined by Pr 01.050 Offset
01.048 2 >1 Preset Reference defined by Pr 01.050
Preset Selector 3 x Preset Reference defined by Pr 01.050 01.009
Timer Reset 4 x Keypad Control Mode Reference (01.017)
x Reference
5 Precision Reference
Keypad Control Mode Reference (01.017) Offset Mode
Keypad Reference 6 x
Power-Up Keypad Select
01.051 Control Mode
Reference
01.017
Keypad Control
Mode Reference
Precision Reference
Precision-Reference
Update Disable Key
01.020
X Input Read-write (RW)
X terminals mm.ppp
parameter
Precision
Reference
X Output mm.ppp Read-only (RO)
01.018 X
Memory terminals parameter
01.019
Precision
Reference Trim

Issue Number: 3
RUN FORWARD RUN REVERSE
29 7 8
Menu 8
Menu 6
Sequencer
Sequencer (Menu 6)
Jog selected 01.013 Reference in skip
indicator freq./speed band
indicator
Menu 13
Bipolar Position control Reference
reference 01.010 01.035
01.011 enabled
enable indicator
Pre-ramp
reference
Feed-forward Pre-filter
selected 01.006 01.002 reference 01.003
indicator Maximum
Reverse freq./speed
selected 01.012 01.040 "clamp"
indicator
01.007
Menu 2
Minimum
Negative freq./speed
minimum "clamp"
speed (Maximum
select reverse
01.008 freq./speed)
[01.006]
[01.007]
[01.007]
[01.006]
x(-1)
01.029 01.031 01.033

01.039 [01.006]
Skip freq./ Skip freq./ Skip freq./
speed 1 speed 2 speed 3
Velocity
01.005 feed-forward
reference [01.006] 01.030 01.032 01.034
Jog
Skip freq./ Skip freq./ Skip freq./
reference
speed band speed band speed band
1 2 3
[01.006]
[01.007]

Issue Number: 3
Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
OL RFC-A / S OL RFC-A RFC-S
01.001 Reference Selected ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF rpm RO Num ND NC PT
01.001 Reference Selected ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF rpm
01.002 Pre-Skip Filter Reference ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF rpm RO Num ND NC PT
01.003 Pre-Ramp Reference ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF rpm RO Num ND NC PT
01.004 Reference Offset ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF rpm 0.0 RW Num US
01.005 Jog Reference 0.0 - 400.0 Hz 0.0 - 4000.0 rpm 0.0 RW Num US
±VM_POSITIVE_REF_ ±VM_POSITIVE_REF_ 50 Hz: 50.0 50Hz: 1500.0
01.006 Maximum Reference Clamp 3000.0 RW Num US
CLAMP Hz CLAMP rpm 60 Hz: 60.0 60Hz: 1800.0
±VM_NEGATIVE_REF_
01.007 Minimum Reference Clamp 0.0 RW Num US
CLAMP1
01.008 Negative Reference Clamp Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
01.009 Reference Offset Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
01.010 Bipolar Reference Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
01.011 Reference On Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
01.012 Reverse Select Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
01.013 Jog Select Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
A1 A2 (0), A1 Preset (1), A2 Preset (2)
01.014 Reference Selector Preset (3), Keypad (4), Precision (5) Preset (3) RW Txt ND US
Keypad Ref (6)
01.015 Preset Selector 0 to 9 0 RW Num US
01.016 Preset Selector Time 0 to 400.0 s 10.0 s RW Num US
01.017 Keypad Control Mode Reference ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_USER_REFS 0.0 RO Num NC PT PS
01.018 Precision Reference Coarse ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF 0.0 RW Num US
01.019 Precision Reference Fine 0.000 to 0.099 Hz 0.000 to 0.099 rpm 0.000 RW Num us
01.020 Precision Reference Update Disable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
01.021 Preset Reference 1 ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF 0.0 RW Num US
01.029 Skip Reference 1 0.0 to 3000.0 Hz 0 to 50, 000 rpm 0.0 0 RW Num US
01.030 Skip Reference Band 1 0.0 to 25.0 Hz 0 to 250 rpm 0.0 0 RW Num US
01.035 Reference In Rejection Zone Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
01.036 Analog Reference 1 ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_USER_ ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_USER_ 0.0 RO Num NC
01.037 Analog Reference 2 REFS Hz REFS rpm 0.0 RO Num NC
01.038 Percentage Trim ±100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num NC
01.039 Speed Feed-forwards ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF RO Num ND NC PT
01.040 Speed Feed-forwards Select Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
01.041 Reference Select Flag 1 Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
01.045 Preset Select Flag 1 Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
01.048 Preset Selector Timer Reset Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
01.049 Reference Selected Indicator 1 to 5 RO Num ND NC PT
01.050 Preset Selected Indicator 1 to 8 RO Num ND NC PT
Power-up Keypad Control Mode
01.051 Reset (0), Last (1), Preset (2) Reset (0) RW Txt US
Reference
01.052 Hand/Off/Auto Operating Mode 0 to 3 0 RW Num US
01.055 Linear Speed Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
01.056 Linear Speed Selected Off (0) or On (1) RW Bit ND NC PT
01.057 Force Reference Direction None (0), Forward (1), Reverse (2) None (0) RW Txt

Issue Number: 3

Issue Number: 3
11.2 Menu 2: Ramps

Key
Acceleration Rate Select Bits
2.32 X Input Read-write (RW)
02.034 02.033 02.032 X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

0 0 0 1 X
terminals parameter
0 0 1 2
0 1 0 3 The parameters are all shown in their default settings
0 1 1 4
1 0 0 5
1 0 1 6
Acceleration
1 1 0 7 Rate Selected
1 1 1 8 02.010
Acceleration rates 1 ~ 8
0
02.011 Acceleration Rate 1 1
02.012 Acceleration Rate 2 2 02.030

Acceleration
Rate Selected

Preset Selected 01.050

Indicator
Jog Acceleration
1 1 02.019
Rate
2 2
3 3
1 0
4 4 Jog Select 01.013
5 5
6 6
7 7 Reverse Forward
8 8 Accel. Rate Accel. Rate
N N
t t
Acceleration
Ramp Control
02.003 Ramp Hold
Pre-Ramp Speed 02.004 Ramp Mode

Reference 01.003
02.008 Standard Ramp Voltage
Deceleration Fail
02.009
Detection Disable
02.039 Ramp Rate Units

Issue Number: 3
Deceleration Rate Select Bits
02.037 02.036 02.035
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 1
3 0 1 0
4 0 1 1
5 1 0 0
6 1 0 1
Deceleration
Rate Selector 7 1 1 0
8 1 1 1
02.020
Deceleration Rates 1 ~ 8
0
1 02.021 Deceleration Rate 1

Deceleration
Rate Selected 02.031 2 02.022 Deceleration Rate 2
Preset
01.050 Selected
Indicator
02.029 Jog Deceleration 1 1

Rate
2 2
3 3
0 1
Jog Selected 4 4
01.013
Indicator
5 5
6 6
Forward Reverse 7 7
Decel. rate Decel. rate 8 8
N N
Current control
t t Menu 4
(Open-loop only) Ramp Enable
02.002 (RFC-A, RFC-S modes only)
Deceleration
_ Ramps always enabled
Ramp Control Post-Ramp
in Open-loop Reference
+
02.006 S-Ramp Enable 1
02.001
02.007 Maximum Rate Of Change
0
02.040 S-Ramp Percentage
Motor And Load 03.018
02.041 S-Ramp Set-up Mode Inertia
d/dt 02.038
Torque Per Amp 05.032
Inertia
Compensation
Torque

Issue Number: 3
Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_ ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_
02.001 Post Ramp Reference RO Num ND NC PT
REF Hz REF rpm
02.002 Ramp Enable Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
02.003 Ramp Hold Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
Fast (0), Standard (1),
02.004 Ramp Mode Fast (0), Standard (1) Standard (1) RW Txt US
Std boost (2)
02.005 Disable Ramp Output Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
02.006 S Ramp Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
02.007 Maximum Rate Of Change Of Acceleration 0.0 to 300.0 s2/100 Hz 0.000 to 100.000 s2/1000 rpm 3.1 1.500 0.030 RW Num US
200 V drive: 375 V
50 Hz - 400 V drive: 750 V
02.008 Standard Ramp Voltage ±VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET V 60 Hz - 400 V drive: 775 V RW Num RA US
575 V drive: 895 V
690 V drive: 1075 V
02.009 Deceleration Fail Detection Disable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
02.010 Acceleration Rate Selector 0 to 9 0 RW Num US
±VM_ACCEL_RATE ±VM_ACCEL_RATE
02.011 Acceleration Rate 1 5.0 2.000 0.200 RW Num US
s/100 Hz s/1000 rpm
s/100 Hz s/1000 rpm
s/100 Hz s/1000 rpm
s/100 Hz s/1000 rpm
s/100 Hz s/1000 rpm
s/100 Hz s/1000 rpm
s/100 Hz s/1000 rpm
s/100 Hz s/1000 rpm
02.019 Jog Acceleration Rate 0.2 0.000 RW Num US
s/100 Hz s/1000 rpm
02.020 Deceleration Rate Selector 0 to 9 0 RW Num US
02.021 Deceleration Rate 1 10.0 2.000 0.200 RW Num US
s/100 Hz s/1000 rpm
s/100 Hz s/1000 rpm
s/100 Hz s/1000 rpm
s/100 Hz s/1000 rpm
s/100 Hz s/1000 rpm
s/100 Hz s/1000 rpm
s/100 Hz s/1000 rpm
s/100 Hz s/1000 rpm
02.029 Jog Deceleration Rate 0.2 0.000 RW Num US
s/100 Hz s/1000 rpm
02.030 Acceleration Rate Selected 0 to 8 RO Num ND NC PT
02.031 Deceleration Rate Selected 0 to 8 RO Num ND NC PT
02.032 Acceleration Rate Select Bit 0 Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
02.035 Deceleration Rate Select Bit 0 Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
02.038 Inertia Compensation Torque ±1000.0 % RO Num ND NC PT
02.039 Ramp Rate Units Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW BIt US
02.040 S Ramp Percentage 0.0 to 50.0 % 0.0 % RW US
02.041 S Ramp Set-up Mode 0 to 2 0 RW Num US
02.042 Maximum Rate Of Change Of Acceleration 1 0.0 to 300.0 0.000 to 100.000 0.0 0.000 RW Num US

Issue Number: 3
11.3 Menu 3: Frequency slaving, speed feedback and speed control

Figure 11-3 Menu 3 Open-loop logic diagram
Enable Frequency
Slaving
03.013
03.014 Slaving Ratio Frequency Slaving

1 Numerator Demand
P1 Interface 1
2048
Slaving Ratio 03.001
03.015
Denominator 0
Slip
compensation
Menu 5 Motor
Post Ramp Frequency
Reference 1
+
05.001
+ 0
Menu 2 02.001
15 way sub-D
connector
Zero Speed Bipolar Reference

Threshold Zero Speed Enable
03.005 + 01.010
010.003
_ 7 F (A)
At Or Below
Minimum Speed Enable 8 F (A)
Minimum 03.016 Frequency
1 9 D (B)
Reference Clamp Slaving
010.004 Output 10 D (B)
01.007 +0.5Hz +
0
_
Maximum + Over Speed

Reference Clamp 01.006 +20% 0 _ Trip
Over Speed
Threshold 03.008 1
03.008>0
At Speed
Lower Limit Below Set-Speed
03.006 +
Pre Ramp
010.005
Reference _
_ At Speed
1
01.003 +
0 NOR 010.006
03.009
+
010.007 Key
Absolute At-Speed 03.007
_
Select Above Set-Speed X Input Read-write (RW)
At Speed X mm.ppp
Upper Limit terminals parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 3
Figure 11-4 Menu 3 RFC-A, RFC-S logic diagram
Hard Speed
Reference 03.022
Hard Speed
Reference 1 0
Select
03.023
Reference
1 0
On
01.011
Post-Ramp VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX] Final Speed
Reference + Reference
02.001 0 + 03.001
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MIN]
02.005
Disable Ramp 7
Output
P1 Speed
Feedback
P1 Interface 03.027
P2 Speed Motor Control

Feedback Feedback Select
03.026
P2 Interface 03.127
0
Option Slot 1
??.???
P1 Speed Feedback 1
Option Slot 1 2 Sensorless Mode

??.??? Active RFC Feedback
P2 Speed Feedback
3 Mode
03.078 03.024
Option Slot 2 4
??.???
P1 Speed Feedback
d/dt 0
5
Option Slot 2
??.???
P2 Speed Feedback 6
1
7
Option Slot 3
??.???
P1 Speed Feedback
8
2
Option Slot 3 9
??.???
P2 Speed Feedback
3
Option Slot 4
??.???
P1 Speed Feedback
0
4
Option Slot 4 1
??.???
P2 Speed Feedback
Motor Control Feedback

03.026 Select*
03.080 d/dt 03.079
Sensorless 03.076 Position Feedback
Mode Filter Initialized*
Sensorless
Position
NOTE
*Automatic change over if the relevant ‘bit’ of Position Feedback Initialized (03.076) is 0.

Issue Number: 3
Speed Controller
Gain Select
03.016
Speed Loop Gains

Speed
Speed 03.010 (Kp1) Controller
Error 0 Output
03.011 (Ki1)
+ 03.003
+ 03.004 Menu 4
_ _ 03.013 (Kp2)
1
03.014 (Ki2)
(Kd1) (Kd2)
Speed Controller
Differential 03.012 03.015
Feedback Gains
0 1
Zero Speed Bipolar Reference

Threshold Zero Speed Enable
03.005 + 01.010
10.003
_ Running At Or
Below Minimum
Speed
Min Reference Clamp 1
01.007 +5min-1 + 10.004
0
_
Speed Feedback
+
Max Reference Clamp Over Speed Trip
01.006 +20% 0 _
03.002
Overspeed Threshold 1
03.008
03.008 >0
Below Set Speed

At Speed
Pre Ramp Lower Limit 03.006 +
10.005
Reference _
_ At Speed
1
01.003
+
0 NOR 10.006
+
03.009 10.007
Absolute At Speed 03.007
_
Select
At Speed Above Set Speed
Upper Limit Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 3
Figure 11-5 P1 Interface
03.050 P1 Feedback Lock 03.038 P1 Device Type

15 way sub-D 03.056 P1 Feedback Reverse 03.039 P1 Termination Select
connector
03.036 P1 Supply Voltage 03.040 P1 Error Detection Level
03.049 P1 Additional
03.066 P1 Resolver Excitation Power-Up Delay
P1 Revolution / P1 Fine
Pole Pitch Counter P1 Position Position
03.033 P1 Rotary Turns Bits
03.028 03.029 03.030
0 03.034 P1 Rotary Lines
Per Revolution
1 03.052 P1 Linear Comms Bits P1 Normalized

Position
03.053 P1 Linear Line Pitch 03.031 P1 Marker Mode
03.051 03.055 P1 Pole Pitch 03.032 P1 Marker Flag 03.058
P1 Linear
03.057 P1 Normalization Turns
Feeback Select
03.035 P1 Comms Bits P1 Normalized
Marker Position
03.037 P1 Comms Baud Rate
03.041 P1 Auto-Configuration 03.059

Enable
03.047 P1 SSI Incremental
Mode
03.048 P1 SSI Binary Mode
03.060 P1 Calculation Time
03.061 P1 Recovery Time

P1 Speed
03.062 P1 Line Delay Time Feedback
03.063 P1 Low Speed Update 03.042 P1 Feedback Filter 03.027

Rate Active
P1 Encoder Protocol
03.064
Detected
03.067 P1 User Comms Enable
03.068 P1 User Comms

Transmit Register
Receive Register
03.065 P1 Resolver Poles
P1 Reference Any
Destination unprotected
03.046 variable
P1 parameter
Reference P1 Reference
??.???
Scaling
03.043 P1 Maximum Reference 03.045 03.044
??.???
Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 3
Figure 11-6 P2 Interface
15 way sub-D 03.138 P2 Device Type

connector 03.150 P2 Feedback Lock
03.140 P2 Error Detection Level
03.156 P2 Feedback Reverse
03.149 P2 Additional
Power-Up Delay
P2 Revolution / P2 Fine
Pole Pitch Counter P2 Position Position
03.133 P2 Rotary Turns Bits
03.128 03.129 03.130
0 03.134 P2 Rotary Lines
Per Revolution
1 03.152 P2 Linear Comms Bits P2 Normalized

Position
03.153 P2 Linear Line Pitch 03.131 P2 Marker Mode
03.151 03.155 P2 Pole Pitch 03.132 P2 Marker Flag 03.158
P2 Linear
03.157 P2 Normalization Turns
Feeback Select
03.135 P2 Comms Bits P2 Normalized
Marker Position
03.137 P2 Comms Baud Rate
03.141 P2 Auto-Configuration 03.159

Enable
03.147 P2 SSI Incremental
Mode
03.148 P2 SSI Binary Mode
03.160 P2 Calculation Time
03.161 P2 Recovery Time

P2 Speed
03.162 P2 Line Delay Time Feedback
03.163 P2 Low Speed Update 03.142 P2 Feedback Filter 03.127

Rate Active
P2 Encoder Protocol
03.164
Detected
03.167 P2 User Comms Enable

Transmit Register
Receive Register
P2 Reference Any
Destination unprotected
03.146 variable
P2 parameter
Reference P2 Reference
??.???
Scaling
03.143 P2 Maximum Reference 03.145 03.144
??.???
Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 3
Figure 11-7 Freeze system logic
F1 Freeze
Trigger Source F1 Freeze
Position Source
03.100
03.102
F1 Freeze
Digital input 4 0 Mode P1 Position 0
03.101
Digital input 5 1 P2 Position 1
P1 Marker 2 03.103 F1 Normalized Freeze

Position
03.104 F1 Freeze Flag
P2 Marker 3
Common freeze 4
Freeze Input
States
03.113
F2 Freeze
Trigger Source
03.105 F2 Freeze
Position Source
F2 Freeze
Digital input 4 0 Mode 03.107
P1 Position 0
03.106
Digital input 5 1
P2 Position 1
P1 Marker 2 03.108 F2 Normalized Freeze

Position
03.109 F2 Freeze Flag
P2 Marker 3
Common freeze 4
Common Freeze
Source 1
03.110
Digital input 4 0
03.112 Common Freeze Mode
Digital input 5 1
P1 Marker 2
P2 Marker 3
x(-1)
Disabled 4
Common Freeze
Source 2 Common
03.111 Freeze
x(-1) Option Module

Digital input 4 0 Freeze Line
Digital input 5 1
Key
P1 Marker 2
X terminals mm.ppp
parameter
P2 Marker 3
x(-1)
X
terminals parameter
Disabled 4

Issue Number: 3
Figure 11-8 P1 Position feedback interface thermistor input
P1 Thermistor Short
Circuit Detect
03.123
P1 Thermistor
Feedback 0
{Th Short circuit.001}
{Th Short circuit.001}
03.119 1
trip detect
{Thermistor.001} trip detect

03.118 P1 Thermistor Type
03.120 P1 Thermistor Trip Threshold {Thermistor.001}
03.121 P1 Thermistor Reset Threshold

P1 Thermistor
Temperature
Resistance to
03.122
temperature conversion
Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter
Figure 11-9 Encoder simulation
Encoder Simulation
Encoder Simulation Encoder Simulation Mode
Encoder Simulation Hardware
Source 03.088
Hardware Divider Marker Lock
03.085
03.089 03.089
Any variable
parameter 0
??.??
Encoder Simulation 1
Output Lines
??.?? Per Revolution
03.092 2
Encoder Simulation
Incremental Mode
Select 3
03.091 Encoder Simulation
Output Roll-Over
Encoder Simulation
03.093 Encoder Simulation Limit
Sample Period Numerator
03.095
03.087 03.094 Encoder Simulation
Denominator

SSI Turns Bits
SSI Comms Bits
Encoder Simulation
Output Mode
03.098 Encoder simulation out
Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 3
Range Default
Parameter Type
Open-loop> Frequency Slaving Demand ±1000.0 Hz RO Num ND NC PT FI
03.001
RFC> Final Speed Reference ±VM_SPEED RO Num ND NC PT FI
03.002 Speed Feedback ±VM_SPEED RO Num ND NC PT FI
03.003 Speed Error ±VM_SPEED RO Num ND NC PT FI
03.004 Speed Controller Output ±VM_TORQUE_CURRENT % RO Num ND NC PT FI
03.005 Zero Speed Threshold 0.0 to 20.0 Hz 0 to 200 rpm 1.0 Hz 5 rpm RW Num US
03.006 0.0 to 1.0 Hz 5 rpm RW

At Speed Lower Limit 0 to 50000 rpm Num US
3000.0 Hz
03.007 0.0 to 1.0 Hz 5 rpm RW

At Speed Upper Limit 0 to 50000 rpm Num US
3000.0 Hz
03.008 0.0 to 0.0 Hz 0 rpm RW

Over Speed Threshold 0 to 50000 rpm Num US
3000.0 Hz
03.009 Absolute At Speed Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
03.010 Speed Controller Proportional Gain Kp1 0.0000 to 200.0000 s/rad 0.0300 s/rad 0.0100 s/rad RW Num US
03.011 Speed Controller Integral Gain Ki1 0.00 to 655.35 s2/rad 0.10 s2/rad 1.00 s2/rad RW Num US
03.012 RFC> Speed Controller Differential Feedback 0.00000 1/rad RW

0.00000 to 0.65535 1/rad Num US
Gain Kd1
Open-loop> Enable Frequency Slaving Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
03.013
RFC> Speed Controller Proportional Gain Kp2 0.0000 to 200.0000 s/rad 0.0300 s/rad 0.0100 s/rad RW Num US
Open-loop> Slaving Ratio Numerator 0.000 to 1.000 1.000 RW Num US
03.014
RFC> Speed Controller Integral Gain Ki2 0.00 to 655.35 s2/rad 0.10 s2/rad 1.00 s2/rad RW Num US
Open-loop> Slaving Ratio Denominator 0.001 to 1.000 1.000 RW Num US
03.015 RFC> Speed Controller Differential Feedback
0.00000 to 0.65535 1/rad 0.00000 1/rad RW Num US
Gain Kd2
Open-loop> Reference Frame Angle 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT
03.016
RFC> Speed Controller Gain Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
Disabled (0), Bandwidth (1),
Comp Angle (2),
03.017 Kp Gain Times 16 (3), Disabled (0) RW
Speed Controller Set-up Method Txt US
Low Performance (4),
Std Performance (5),
High Performance (6)
03.018 Motor And Load Inertia 0.00000 to 1000.00000 kgm2 0.00000 kgm2 RW Num US
03.019 Compliance Angle 0.0 to 360.0 ° 4.0 ° RW Num US
03.020 Bandwidth 0 to 1000 Hz 10 Hz RW Num US
03.021 Damping Factor 0.0 to 10.0 1.0 RW Num US
03.022 ±VM_SPEED_ 0.0 RW

Hard Speed Reference ±VM_SPEED Num US
FREQ_REF
03.023 Hard Speed Reference Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
Feedback (0), Sensorless (1),

03.024 RFC Feedback Mode Feedback NoMax (2), Feedback (0) RW Txt US
Sensorless NoMax (3)
03.025 Position Feedback Phase Angle 0.0 to 359.9 ° RW Num ND US

P1 Drive (0), P2 Drive (1),
P1 Slot 1 (2), P2 Slot 1 (3),
03.026 Motor Control Feedback Select P1 Slot 2 (4), P2 Slot 2 (5), P1 Drive (0) RW Txt US
P1 Slot 3 (6), P2 Slot 3 (7),
P1 Slot 4 (8), P2 Slot 4 (9)
03.027 P1 Speed Feedback ±VM_SPEED RO Num ND NC PT FI
03.028 P1 Revolution/Pole Pitch Counter 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT
03.029 P1 Position 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT
03.030 P1 Fine Position 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT
03.031 P1 Marker Mode 0000 to 1111 0000 RW Bin US
03.032 P1 Marker Flag Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
03.033 P1 Rotary Turns Bits 0 to 16 16 RW Num US
03.034 P1 Rotary Lines Per Revolution 1 to 100000 1024 4096 RW Num US
03.035 P1 Comms Bits 0 to 48 0 RW Num US
03.036 P1 Supply Voltage 5V (0), 8V (1), 15V (2) 5V (0) RW Txt US
03.037 100K (0), 200K (1), 300K (2), 400K (3), 500K (4), 300K (2) Baud RW Txt
P1 Comms Baud Rate US
1M (5), 1.5M (6), 2M (7), 4M (8) Baud

Issue Number: 3
Range Default
Parameter Type
AB (0), FD (1), FR (2), AB Servo (3), FD Servo (4),

FR Servo (5), SC (6), SC Hiperface (7), EnDat (8),
03.038 P1 Device Type SC EnDat (9), SSI (10), SC SSI (11), SC Servo (12), AB (0) AB Servo (3) RW Txt US
BiSS (13), Resolver (14), SC SC (15),
Commutation Only (16)
03.039 P1 Termination Select 0 to 2 1 RW Num US

03.040 P1 Error Detection Level 0000 to 1111 0000 0001 RW Bin US
03.041 P1 Auto-configuration Select Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) Enabled (1) RW Txt US
03.042 P1 Feedback Filter Disabled (0), 1 (1), 2 (2), 4 (3), 8 (4), 16 (5) ms Disabled (0) RW Txt US
03.043 P1 Maximum Reference 0 to 50000 rpm 1500 rpm 3000 rpm RW Num US
03.044 P1 Reference Scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Num US
03.045 P1 Reference ±100.0 % RO Num ND NC PT FI
03.046 P1 Reference destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
03.047 P1 SSI Incremental Mode Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
03.048 P1 SSI Binary Mode Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
03.049 P1 Additional Power-up Delay 0.0 to 25.0 s 0.0 s RW Num US
03.050 P1 Feedback Lock Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
03.051 P1 Linear Feedback Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
03.052 P1 Linear Comms Pitch 0.001 to 100.000 0.001 RW Num US
03.053 P1 Linear Line Pitch 0.001 to 100.000 0.001 RW Num US
03.054 P1 Linear Comms And Line Pitch Units millimetres (0) or micrometres (1) millimetres (0) RW Txt US
03.055 P1 Pole Pitch 0.01 to 1000.00 mm 10.00 mm RW Num US
03.056 P1 Feedback Reverse Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
03.057 P1 Normalization Turns 0 to 16 16 RO Num US
03.058 P1 Normalized Position -2147483648 to 2147483647 RO Num ND NC PT
03.059 P1 Normalized Marker Position -2147483648 to 2147483647 RO Num ND NC PT

03.060 P1 Calculation Time 0 to 20 µs 5 µs RW Num US
03.061 P1 Recovery Time 5 to 100 µs 30 µs RW Num US
03.062 P1 Line Delay Time 0 to 5000 ns RW Num ND NC PT US
03.063 P1 Low Speed Update Rate Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
03.064 None (0), Hiperface (1), EnDat 2.1 (2), RW

P1 Encoder Protocol Detected Txt ND NC PT
EnDat 2.2 (3), BiSS (4)
03.065 P1 Resolver Poles 2 Pole (1) to 8 Pole (4) 2 Pole (1) RW Txt US
03.066 P1 Resolver Excitation 6kHz (0), 8kHz (1) 6kHz (0) RW Txt US
03.067 P1 User Comms Enable 0 to 1 0 RW Num US

03.068 P1 User Comms Transmit Register 0 to 65535 0 RW Num
03.069 P1 User Comms Receive register 0 to 65535 0 RW Num
03.070 P1 Position Feedback Signals 000000 to 111111 RO Num ND NC PT
03.071 P1 Error Detected Off (0) or On (1) RW Bit ND NC PT
03.075 Initialise Position Feedback Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
03.076 Position Feedback Initialized 0000000000 to 1111111111 0000000000 RO Bin NC PT
03.078 Sensorless Mode Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
03.079 4 (0), 8 (1), 16 (2), 32 (3), 4 (0) ms RW

Sensorless Mode Filter Txt US
64 (4) ms
03.080 Sensorless Position -2147483648 to 2147483647 RO Num ND NC PT
03.083 Full Motor Object Nameplate Transfer Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
03.085 Encoder Simulation Source 0.000 to 59.999 3.016 0.000 RW Num PT US
03.086 Encoder Simulation Status None (0), Full (1), No Marker Pulse (2) RO Txt ND NC PT
03.087 Encoder Simulation Sample Period 0.25 (0), 1 (1), 4, (2), 16 (3) ms 4 (2) ms 0.25 (0) ms RW Txt US
Lines Per
03.088 Encoder Simulation Mode Hardware (0), Lines Per Rev (1), Ratio (2), SSI (3) Hardware (0) RW Txt US
Rev (1)
03.089 Encoder Simulation Hardware Divider 0 to 7 0 RW Num US
03.090 Encoder Simulation Hardware Marker Lock Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
03.091 Encoder Simulation Incremental Mode Select Off (0) or On (1) On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
03.092 Encoder Simulation Output Lines Per 1024 4096 RW

1 to 16384 Num US
Revolution
03.093 Encoder Simulation Numerator 1 to 65536 65536 RW Num US
03.094 Encoder Simulation Denominator 1 to 65536 65536 RW Num US

Issue Number: 3
Range Default
Parameter Type
03.095 Encoder Simulation Output Roll-over Limit 1 to 65535 65535 RW Num US
03.096 Encoder Simulation SSI Turns Bits 0 to 16 16 RW Num US
03.097 Encoder Simulation SSI Position Bits 2 to 48 33 RW Num US
03.098 Encoder Simulation Output Mode AB/Gray (0), FD/Binary (1), FR/Binary (2) AB/Gray (0) RW Txt US
03.100 F1 Freeze Trigger Source Dig I/O 4 (0), Dig I/O 5 (1), Z1 (2), Z2 (3), Common (4) Dig I/O 4 (0) RW Txt US
03.101 Rising 1st (0), Falling 1st (1), Rising all (2), Rising 1st (0) RW Txt
F1 Freeze Mode US
Falling all (3)
03.102 F1 Freeze Position Source P1 (0) or P2 (1) P1 (0) RW Txt US
03.103 F1 Normalized Freeze Position -2147483648 to 2147483647 RO Num ND NC PT
03.104 F1 Freeze Flag Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
03.105 F2 Freeze Trigger Source Dig I/O 4 (0), Dig I/O 5 (1), Z1 (2), Z2 (3), Common (4) Dig I/O 4 (0) RW Txt US
03.106 Rising 1st (0), Falling 1st (1), Rising all (2), Rising 1st (0) RW Txt
F2 Freeze Mode US
Falling all (3)
03.107 F2 Freeze Position Source P1 (0) or P2 (1) P1 (0) RW Txt US
03.108 F2 Normalized Freeze Position -2147483648 to 2147483647 RO Num ND NC PT
03.109 F2 Freeze Flag Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
03.110 Common Freeze Source 1 Dig I/O 4 (0), Dig I/O 5 (1), Z1 (2), Z2 (3),Disabled (4) Dig I/O 4 (0) RW Txt US
03.111 Common Freeze Source 2 Dig I/O 4 (0), Dig I/O 5 (1), Z1 (2), Z2 (3),Disabled (4) Dig I/O 4 (0) RW Txt US
03.112 Common Freeze Mode 0000 to 1111 0000 RW Bin US
03.113 Freeze Input States 00 to 11 RO Num ND NC PT
03.118 P1 Thermistor Type DIN44082 (0), KTY84 (1), 0.8mA (2) DIN44082 (0) RW Txt US
03.119 P1 Thermistor Feedback 0 to 10000 Ω RO Num ND NC PT
03.120 P1 Thermistor Trip Threshold 0 to 10000 Ω 3300 Ω RW Num US
03.121 P1 Thermistor Reset Threshold 0 to 10000 Ω 1800 Ω RW Num US
03.122 P1 Thermistor Temperature -50 to 300 °C RO Num ND NC PT
03.123 P1 Thermistor Fault Detection None (0), Temperature (1), Temp or Short (2) None (0) RW Bit US
03.127 P2 Speed Feedback ±VM_SPEED RO Num ND NC PT FI
03.128 P2 Revolution/Pole Pitch Counter 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT
03.129 P2 Position 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT
03.130 P2 Fine Position 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT
03.131 P2 Marker Mode 0000 to 1111 0000 RW Bin US
03.132 P2 Marker Flag Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
03.133 P2 Rotary Turns Bits 0 to 16 16 RW Num US
03.134 P2 Rotary Lines Per Revolution 0 to 100000 1024 4096 RW Num US
03.135 P2 Comms Bits 0 to 48 0 RW Num US
100k (0), 200k (1), 300k (2), 400k (3), 500k (4), 1M
03.137 P2 Comms Baud Rate (5), 1.5M (6), 2M (7), 4M (8) Baud 300K (2) Baud RW Txt US
03.138 P2 Device type None (0), AB (1), FD (2), FR (3), EnDat (4), SSI (5), None (0) RW Txt US
BiSS (6)
03.140 P2 Error Detection Level 0000 to 1111 0001 RW Bin US
03.141 P2 Auto-configuration Select Disabled (0), Enabled (1) Enabled (1) RW Txt US
03.142 P2 Feedback Filter Disabled (0), 1 (1), 2 (2), 4 (3), 8 (4), 16 (5) ms Disabled (0) RW Txt US
03.143 P2 Maximum Reference 0 to 50000 rpm 1500 rpm 3000 rpm RW Num US
03.144 P2 Reference Scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Num US
03.145 P2 Reference ±100.0 % RO Num ND NC PT FI
03.146 P2 Reference Destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
03.147 P2 SSI Incremental Mode Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
03.148 P2 SSI Binary Mode Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
03.149 P2 Additional Power-up Delay 0.0 to 25.0 s 0.0 s RW Num US
03.150 P2 Feedback Lock Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
03.151 P2 Linear Feedback Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
03.152 P2 Linear Comms Pitch 0.001 to 100.000 0.001 RW Num US
03.153 P2 Linear Line Pitch 0.001 to 100.000 0.001 RW Txt US
03.154 P2 Linear Comms And Line Pitch Units Millimetres (0) or Micrometres (1) Millimetres (0) RW Txt US
03.155 P2 Pole Pitch 0.01 to 1000.00 mm 10.00 mm RW Num US
03.156 P2 Feedback Reverse Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
03.157 P2 Normalization Turns 0 to 16 16 RO Num US
03.158 P2 Normalized Position -2147483648 to 2147483647 RO Num ND NC PT
03.159 P2 Normalized Marker Position --2147483648 to 2147483647 RO Num ND NC PT

Issue Number: 3
Range Default
Parameter Type
03.160 P2 Calculation Time 0 to 20 µs 5 µs RW Num US
03.161 P2 Recovery Time 5 to 100 µs 30 µs RW Num US
03.162 P2 Line Delay Time 0 to 5000 ns RO Num ND NC PT US
03.163 P2 Low Speed Update Rate Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
03.164 P2 Encoder Protocol Detected None (0), Hiperface (1), EnDat 2.1 (2), RO Txt ND NC PT
EnDat 2.2 (3), BiSS (4)
03.167 P2 User Comms Enable 0 to 1 0 RW Num US
03.168 P2 User Comms Transmit Register 0 to 65535 0 RW Num
03.169 P2 User Comms Receive Register 0 to 65535 0 RW Num
03.171 P2 Error Detected Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
None (0), AB (1), FD (2), FR (3), EnDat (4), SSI (5),

03.172 P2 Status RO Txt ND NC PT
BiSS (6), EnDat Alt (7), SSI Alt (8), BiSS Alt (9)

Issue Number: 3
11.4 Menu 4: Torque and current control

Figure 11-10 Menu 4 Open loop logic diagram
Menu 2 ramp Torque Mode
Pre Ramp controller Selector
Reference
04.011 Post Ramp Output
+
01.003
2.01 Reference Frequency
+ 02.001
2.01 Motor map 05.001
10.009
Current
Limit
Active Current loop
04.013 P Gain
04.014 I Gain Torque

Producing
Current Current
Magnitude
_
04.002
04.020 04.001
+
04.002 - Active
Output Current
Frequency Rated (Amp)
Frequency
04.020 - Percentage 04.017 Magnetising
05.001 05.006
Load Current
Final
Torque Current
Reference Reference
Torque + Torque to +
Reference 04.008 04.003 current 04.004
conversion _
+
Torque
Offset 04.010
Select
04.009
Torque Offset
Current limits Final Thermal

Maximum Current Limit Motor Thermal Protection Low Speed Thermal
04.005 Motoring
Heavy Duty 11.032 Time Constant 1 Mode Protection Mode
Rating 04.018
04.006 Regenerating 04.015 04.016 04.025
Rated
05.007
Current 04.007 Symmetrical
Overload detection
10.008 10.009 10.039 04.019 10.017
Rate Current Limit Braking Resistor Motor Motor Overload

Load Reached Active Thermal Protection Alarm
Accumulator Accumulator
Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 3
Figure 11-11 Menu 4 RFC-A logic diagram
Inertia
Compensation
Torque
02.038
Current Current
Speed Reference Reference
Rated
Feedback Inertia Filter 1 Time Filter 2 Time
Rated Power Speed
03.002 04.022 Compensation Current Factor Constant Constant
Enable Controller
05.007 05.010 Gain 04.012 04.023
Torque Mode Select
Speed Controller 04.011
_ Output Selector 03.016
+
Final Final
+ + Torque
Speed 03.001 03.004 0 Current Controller
Reference Reference
1 Current Loop
+ 04.013 P Gain
2 04.003 04.004
+ Current Loop
3 _ 04.014 I Gain
Final Filter
4 Current
Reference
Speed +
Pre-
Ramp 01.003 Over-Ride
Reference Level
Coiler/Uncoiler
Speed
Zero Over-Ride Torque Producing
Speed 03.005 Level Current Current
Threshold (Amp) Magnitude
Torque +
Reference 04.008
04.002 04.001
+
Torque
Offset 04.010
Select
04.009 Magnetising
04.017
Torque Reference Current
Offset User Current
Maximum Scaling 04.024
Current limits Final Motor Thermal Motor Protection Low Speed

Maximum Current Limit Time Constant Mode Protection Mode
04.005 Motoring
Heavy Duty 11.032
Rating 04.018 04.015 04.016 04.025
04.006 Regenerating
Rated
05.007
Overload detection
Key
X Input Read-write (RW) 10.008 10.009 10.039 04.019 10.017

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter
At 100% Current Limit Braking Energy Motor Motor Current
X Output mm.ppp Read-only (RO) Load Indicator Active Overload Overload Overload Alarm
X
terminals parameter Indicator Indicator Accumulator Indicator

Issue Number: 3
Figure 11-12 Menu 4 RFC-S logic diagram
Inertia
Compensation
Torque
Current Current
Reference Reference
02.038 Filter 1 Time Filter 2 Time
Speed
Constant Constant
Feedback
Inertia 04.012 04.023
Rated Rated
03.002 04.022 Compensation Current Speed Speed Controller
Enable Gain Select
05.007 05.008
Speed Loop Torque Mode 03.016
_ 04.011
Output Selector
+
Final + +
Speed 03.001 03.004 0 Torque Final Current Current controller
Demand Demand Reference
1 Current Loop
+ 04.013 P Gain
2 04.003 04.004
+ + Current Loop
3 _ 04.014 I Gain
4 Filter
Speed +
Pre-
Ramp 01.003 Over-Ride
Reference Level
Coiler/uncoiler
Speed
Zero Over-Ride
Speed 03.005 Level User Current
Threshold Maximum
Percentage Scaling
Load Torque
Torque + 04.020 04.024 04.002 Producing
Reference* 04.008 Current
+
Torque
Reference
04.010
Offset
Enable
04.009
Torque Reference
Offset
Current limits Over-Riding Motor Thermal Motor Protection Low Speed

Drive Rated Current Limit Time Constant Mode Protection Mode
04.005 Motoring
Continuous 11.032
Current 04.018 04.015 04.016 04.025
04.006 Regenerating
Motor Rated
05.007
Overload detection
Key
X Input Read-write (RW) 10.008 10.009 10.039 04.019 10.017

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter
At 100% Current Limit Braking Energy Motor Motor Current
X Output mm.ppp Read-only (RO) Load Active Overload Indicator Overload Overload Alarm
X
terminals parameter Indicator Indicator Accumulator Indicator

Issue Number: 3
Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
04.001 Current Magnitude ±VM_DRIVE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR A RO Num ND NC PT FI
04.002 Torque Producing Current ±VM_DRIVE_CURRENT A RO Num ND NC PT FI
04.003 Final Torque Reference ±VM_TORQUE_CURRENT % RO Num ND NC PT FI
04.004 Final Current Reference ±VM_TORQUE_CURRENT % RO Num ND NC PT FI
04.005 Motoring Current Limit ±VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT % 0.0 % RW Num RA US
04.006 Regenerating Current Limit ±VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT % 0.0 % RW Num RA US
04.007 Symmetrical Current Limit ±VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT % 0.0 % RW Num RA US
04.008 Torque Reference ±VM_USER_CURRENT_HIGH_RES % 0.00 % RW Num US
04.009 Torque Offset ±VM_USER_CURRENT % 0.0 % RW Num US
04.010 Torque Offset Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
04.011 Torque Mode Selector 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 RW Num US
04.012 Current Reference Filter 1 Time Constant 0.0 to 25.0 ms 0.0 ms RW Num US
04.013 Current Controller Kp Gain 0 to 30000 20 150 RW Num US
04.014 Current Controller Ki Gain 0 to 30000 40 2000 RW Num US
04.015 Motor Thermal Time Constant 1 1.0 to 3000.0 s 89.0 s RW Num US
04.016 Thermal Protection Mode 00 to 11 00 RW Bin US
04.017 Magnetising Current ±VM_DRIVE_CURRENT A RO Num ND NC PT FI
04.018 Final Current Limit ±VM_TORQUE_CURRENT % RO Num ND NC PT
04.019 Motor Protection Accumulator 0.0 to 100.0 % RO Num ND NC PT PS
04.020 Percentage Load ±VM_USER_CURRENT % RO Num ND NC PT FI
04.021 Current feedback filter disable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
04.022 Inertia Compensation Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
04.023 Current Reference Filter 2 Time Constant 0.0 to 25.0 ms 0.0 ms RW Num US
04.024 User Current Maximum Scaling ±VM_TORQUE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR % 165.0 % 175.0 % RW Num RA US
04.025 Low Speed Thermal Protection Mode 0 to 1 0 RW Num US
04.026 Percentage Torque ±VM_USER_CURRENT % RO Num ND NC PT FI
04.027 Low Load Detection Level 0.0 to 100.0 % 0.0 % RW Num US
04.028 Low Load Detection Speed/Frequency Threshold ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR 0.0 RW Num US
04.029 Enable Trip On Low Load Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
04.030 Current Controller Mode Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
04.031 Notch Filter Centre Frequency 50 to 1000 Hz 500 Hz RW Num US
04.032 Notch Filter Bandwidth 0 to 500 Hz 0 Hz RW Num US
04.036 Motor Protection Accumulator Power-up Value Power down (0), Zero (1), Real time (2) Power down (0) RW Txt US
04.037 Motor Thermal Time Constant 2 1.0 to 3000.0 s 89.0 s RW Num US
04.038 Motor Thermal Time Constant 2 Scaling 0 to 100 % 0% RW Num US
04.039 Rated Iron Losses As Percentage Of Losses 0 to 100 % 0% RW Num US

Issue Number: 3
11.5 Menu 5: Motor control

Figure 11-13 Menu 5 Open-loop logic diagram
Open-Loop
L1 L2 L3
05.014 Control Mode
Autotune
05.012 DC Bus
Voltage
Dynamic V To F
Enable 05.013 Select 05.005
Frequency Motormap Low Frequency
Slaving Frequency Slaving 05.015 Voltage Boost
Rated
Demand 03.013 05.006 Frequency Stator
05.017
Rated Resistance
05.007 Output
03.001 Current Transient Voltage
05.024
Rated Inductance
05.008 Speed
05.002 Volt
1 Rated
05.009
Voltage
Post Ramp Rated
Reference 0 05.010 Power Factor
+ Number Of 05.001 Hertz
02.001 05.011 Motor Poles Output
Frequency
Maximum
+ 05.018 Switching
Enable Frequency
05.004 High Stability
Slip
Compensation 0 1 05.019 Space Vector
Output Motor Modulation
05.027 Power (kW)
05.003 Ö3xVxI
RPM Quasi Square
05.020
Enable
Auto Switching
05.035 Frequency
Change Disable
Slip
compensation Voltage
05.031 Controller
Torque Current Gain
Producing Magnitude
Current
04.002
04.001
04.020
Percentage
Load
Key
X Input Read-write (RW) 04.017

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter Magnetising
Current
X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 3

Issue Number: 3
Figure 11-14 Menu 5 RFC-A, RFC-S logic diagram
Output
Frequency
05.001
Flux Calculator
Rated
05.007 Current
Number Of
05.011 Motor Poles
05.017 Stator
Resistance
05.024 Transient
Inductance
RFC-A
Position Rated
05.006 Frequency Reference
Feedback Flux angle
ò
Speed
03.002 frame
Feedback 05.008 Rated Speed transformation
Rated
05.009 Voltage
Rated
05.010 Power Factor
05.025 Stator
Inductance
Saturation
05.029 Break-Point 1
Saturation
05.030 Break-Point 3
RFC-S
03.025 Position Feedback
Phase Angle
Current Flux
References Magnitude
Current control
Menu 4
Speed
controller 03.004 Current limits
output Overload detection
Current loop gains
Current demand filter
Torque reference
Current
feedback
05.012 Autotune
05.015 Low frequency Voltage Boost
05.026 High Dynamic Performance Enable
05.031 Voltage Controller Gain

Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 3
DC Bus
Voltage
05.005
Voltage reference
Modulator U
Maximum Switching
05.018 Frequency V
Auto Switching W
05.035 Frequency Change
Disable
Flux Controller
Rated
05.009 Voltage
Output
RFC-A 05.002
Voltage
Flux Optimization Output
05.013 Select Power
Motor Parameter
05.016 Adaptive Control Power Calculation (V x 1) 05.003
RFC-S
05.022 Enable High Current

Speed Mode Torque Magnitude
Producing
Current
04.002 04.001
04.017
Magnetising
Current

Issue Number: 3
Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
±VM_SPEED_
05.001 Output Frequency ±2000.0 Hz RO Num ND NC PT FI
FREQ_REF
05.002 Output Voltage ±VM_AC_VOLTAGE V RO Num ND NC PT FI
05.003 Output Power ±VM_POWER kW RO Num ND NC PT FI
05.004 Motor Rpm ±180000 rpm RO Num ND NC PT FI
05.005 DC Bus Voltage ±VM_DC_VOLTAGE V RO Num ND NC PT FI
0.0 to 50Hz: 50.0

05.006 Rated Frequency 0.0 to 3000.0 Hz RW Num US
1667.0 Hz 60Hz: 60.0
05.007 Rated Current ±VM_RATED_CURRENT A Maximum Heavy Duty Rating 11.032 RW Num RA US
50Hz:
50Hz: 1500.00
1500.0 rpm rpm
05.008 Rated Speed 0 to 180000 rpm 0.00 to 50000.00 rpm 3000.00 rpm RW Num US
60Hz: 60Hz:
1800.0 rpm 1750.00
rpm
200V drive: 230 V
50 Hz - 400V drive: 400 V
05.009 Rated Voltage ±VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET RW Num RA US
60 Hz - 400V drive: 460 V
575V drive: 575 V
05.010 Rated Power Factor 0.000 to 1.000 0.850 RW Num RA US
05.011 Number Of Motor Poles Automatic (0) to 480 Poles (240) Automatic (0) 6 Poles (3)
05.012 Autotune 0 to 2 0 to 3 0 to 4 0 RW Num NC
OL: Dynamic V To F Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
05.013
RFC-A Flux Optimization Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
Ur S (0), Ur (1),
Fixed (2), Ur Auto
OL: Open-loop Control Mode Ur I (4) RW Txt US
(3), Ur I (4), Square
(5), Current 1P (6)
05.014
None (0),
RFC: Action On Enable Phase (1), None (0)
Phase Init (2)
05.015 Low Frequency Voltage Boost 0.0 to 25.0 % 3.0 % RW Num US

05.016 Motor Parameter Adaptive Control 0 to 2 0 RW Num US
05.017 Stator Resistance 0.000000 to 1000.000000 Ω 0.000000 Ω RW RA US
05.018 Maximum Switching Frequency 0 to VM_SWITCHING_FREQUENCY kHz 3 kHz (1) 6 kHz (3) RW Txt RA US
05.019 High Stability Space Vector Modulation Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
05.020 Quasi-square Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
05.022 Enable High Speed Mode Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
05.023 DC Bus Voltage High Range ±VM_HIGH_DC_VOLTAGE V RO Num ND NC PT
OL: Transient Inductance 0.000 to 500.000 mH 0.000 mH RW Num RA US
05.024 RFC-A: Transient Inductance 0.000 to 500.000 mH 0.000 mH RW Num RA US
RFC-S: Ld 0.000 to 500.000 mH 0.000 mH RW Num RA US
05.025 Stator Inductance 0.00 to 5000.00 mH 0.00 mH RW Num RA US
05.026 High Dynamic Performance Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
05.027 Enable Slip Compensation Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
05.028 Flux Control Compensation Disable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
05.029 Saturation Breakpoint 1 0.0 to 100.0 % 50.0 % RW Num US
05.031 Voltage Controller Gain 1 to 30 1 RW Num US
05.032 Torque Per Amp 0.00 to 500.00 Nm/A 1.60 Nm/A RO Num ND NC PT
05.034 Percentage Flux 0.0 to 150.0 % RO Num ND NC PT
05.035 Auto-switching Frequency Change Disable Enabled (0), Disabled (1), No Ripple Detect (2) Enabled (0) RW Txt US
05.036 Auto-switching Frequency Step Size 1 to 2 2 RW Num US
2 kHz (0), 3 kHz (1), 4 kHz (2), 6 kHz (3),
05.037 Switching Frequency RO Txt ND NC PT
8 kHz (4), 12 kHz (5), 16 kHz (6)
05.038 Minimum Switching Frequency 0 to VM_MIN_SWITCHING_FREQUENCY kHz 2 (0) kHz RW Txt US
05.039 Maximum Inverter Temperature Ripple 0.0 to 10.0 1.0 RW Num US
05.040 Spin Start Boost 0.0 to 10.0 1.0 RW Num US
05.042 Reverse Output Phase Sequence Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
An In 3 (0), User (1), P1 Drive (2), P1 Slot 1 (3),
05.044 Stator Temperature Source An In 3 (0) RW Txt US
P1 Slot 2 (4), P1 Slot 3 (5), P1 Slot 4 (6)
05.045 User Stator Temperature -50 to 300 °C 0 °C RW Num
05.046 Stator Temperature -50 to 300 °C RO Num ND NC PT
05.047 Stator Temperature Coefficient 0.00000 to 0.10000 °C-1 0.00390 °C-1 RW Num US
05.048 Stator Base Temperature -50 to 300 °C 0 °C RW Num US

Issue Number: 3
Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
05.049 Enable Stator Compensation Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
Temperature Compensated Stator 0.000000 to
05.050 0.000000 to 1000.000000 RO Num ND NC PT
Resistance 1000.000000 Ω
An In 3 (0), User (1), P1 Drive (2), P1 Slot 1 (3),
05.051 Rotor Temperature Source An In 3 (0) RW Txt US
P1 Slot 2 (4), P1 Slot 3 (5), P1 Slot 4 (6)
05.052 User Rotor Temperature -50 to 300 °C 0 °C RW Num US
05.053 Rotor Temperature -50 to 300 °C RO Num ND NC PT
05.054 Rotor Temperature Coefficient 0.00000 to 0.10000 °C-1 0.00390°C-1 0.00100 °C-1 RW Num US
05.055 Rotor Base Temperature -50 to 300 °C 0 °C RW Num US

05.056 Enable Rotor Compensation Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
0.00 to
OL: Temperature compensated rated speed RO Num ND NC PT
18000.00 rpm
05.057 RFC-A: Temperature compensated rated 0.00 to
RO Num ND NC PT
speed 50000.00 rpm
RFC-S: Rotor Temperature Compensation 0.000 to 2.000 RO Num ND NC PT
05.059 Maximum Deadtime Compensation 0.000 to 10.000 µs 0.000 µs RO Num NC PT US
05.060 Current At Maximum Deadtime Compensation 0.00 to 100.00 % 0.00 % RO Num NC PT US
05.061 Disable Deadtime Compensation Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
Injection (0) or
05.064 RFC Low Speed Mode Injection (0) RW Txt US
Current (1)
05.065 Saliency Torque Control Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
10 (0), 20 (1),
30 (2), 40 (3),
50 (4), 60 (5),
05.067 Percentage Over-current Trip Level 100 (9) % RW Txt US
70 (6), 80 (7),
90 (8),
100 (9) %
05.070 Inverted Saturation Characteristic Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
05.071 Low Speed Sensorless Mode Current Limit 0.0 to 1000.0 % 20.0 % RW Num RA US
0.000 to
05.072 No-load Lq 0.000 mH RW Num RA US
500.000 mH
Iq Test Current For Inductance
05.075 0 to 200 % 0% RW Num US
Measurement
05.077 Phase Offset At Iq Test Current ±90.0 ° 0.0 ° RW Num RA US
0.000 to
05.078 Lq At The Defined Iq Test Current 0.000 mH RW Num RA US
500.000 mH
Id Test Current for Inductance
05.082 -100 to 0 % 0% RW Num US
Measurement
0.000 to
05.084 Lq At The Defined Id Test Current 0.000 mH RW Num RA US
500.000 mH
0.000 to
05.088 Estimated Lq RO Num ND NC PT FI
500.000 mH
05.090 Torque Ripple Compensation Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
05.091 Torque ripple compensation magnitude 1 0.0 to 100 % 0.00 % RW Num US
05.092 Torque ripple compensation phase 1 0.0 to 359 ° 0.0 ° RW Num US

Issue Number: 3
11.6 Menu 6: Sequencer and clock

Control word
Enable
06.043
0
Control Word
06.042 Sequencer
Drive Enable 0
06.001 Stop Mode
06.015
Run Forward 1
06.003 Supply Loss Mode
06.030
Hold Zero Speed/
Jog 1 06.008 Motor Pre-Heat
06.031 Enable
Catch A
0 06.009
Run Spinning Motor
T7 digital input 3 06.032 Enable Sequencer
06.040
0 Latching
Forward / Reverse
7 Menu 8 06.033
01.011 Reference On
Run 0
T8 digital input 4
06.034
Jog Reverse 0
8 06.037
Not Stop 0 01.012 Reverse Select
06.039
0
Hardware
Enable 06.029
01.013 Jog Select
Forward Limit Switch 06.035
0
Reverse Limit Switch 06.036
0
RUN
Inverter enable
STOP/ RESET
RESET
Pr 01.052 = 0
Auxiliary RFC only

Menu 2
Logic 1 Ramp enable
Open loop only Menu 3
0 1 Hard speed
01.049 Pr 01.049 = 4 reference enable
06.006 Injection
Braking Level
Reference 06.007 Injection
Selected Braking Time
Indicator 06.012
Keypad STOP
Clock control
06.019 Date/Time
Selector 06.024 Reset Energy Meter 06.023 Time Before Filter
Change Due
0 Set
06.016 Date 1 Powered
2 Running 06.021 Time Between Filter
Changes
06.017 Time 3 Accumulated powered
4 Local keypad
5 Remote keypad 06.022 Filter Change 06.028 Running Cost
Day Of Required/Done
6 Slot 1
06.018 Week
7 Slot 2 Energy Cost
8 Slot 3 06.027
Per kWh
9 Slot 4
06.020 Date Format 06.025
Output Energy Meter
06.026
Power 05.003
DC Bus Voltage 05.005
Drive power supply monitor 06.044 Active Supply

Low voltage supply
Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 3
Figure 11-16 Menu 6 Low voltage operation
Low Under Back-Up Supply

Voltage Threshold Mode Enable
Select
06.067 06.068
Standard
Under Voltage
Threshold
Under Voltage
06.065 Active
Low Voltage 10.016

Under Voltage
Threshold
06.066
DC Bus
Voltage
05.005
Under voltage
control logic 06.069
Under Voltage
System Contator
Close
Slow rectifier charge
06.071 Rate Enable
06.070
06.072 User Supply Select

Under Voltage
System Contactor
Closed
Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 3
Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
Coast (0), Ramp (1),
Coast (0), Ramp (1), No Ramp
06.001 Stop Mode Ramp dc I (2), dc I (3), Ramp (1) Ramp (1) RW Txt US
No Ramp (2) (2)
Timed dc I (4), Disable (5)
06.002 Limit Switch Stop Mode Stop (0) or Ramp (1) Stop (0) RW Txt US
Disable (0),
Disable (0), Ramp Stop (1), Ramp Stop (1),
06.003 Supply Loss Mode Disable (0) RW Txt US
Ride Thru (2) Ride Thru (2),
Limit Stop (3)
06.006 Injection Braking Level 0.0 to 150.0 % 100.0 % RW Num RA US

06.007 Injection Braking Time 0.0 to 25.0 s 1.0 s RW Num US
06.008 Hold Zero Speed Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) On (1) RW Bit US
06.009 Catch A Spinning Motor Disable (0), Enable (1), Fwd Only (2), Rev Only (3) Disable (0) Enable (1) RW Txt US
06.010 Enable Conditions 000000000000 to 111111111111 RO Bin ND NC PT
06.011 Sequencer State Machine Inputs 0000000 to 1111111 RO Bin ND NC PT
06.012 Enable Stop Key Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.013 Enable Auxiliary Key Disabled (0), Forward / Reverse (2) Disabled (0) RW Num US
06.015 Drive Enable Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit NC US
06.016 Date 00-00-00 to 31-12-99 RW Date ND NC PT
06.017 Time 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 RW Time ND NC PT
Sunday (0), Monday (1), Tuesday (2), Wednesday (3),

06.018 Day Of Week RO Txt ND NC PT
Thursday (4), Friday (5), Saturday (6)
Set (0), Powered (1), Running (2), Acc Powered (3),

06.019 Date/Time Selector Local Keypad (4), Remote Keypad (5), Powered (1) RW Txt US
Slot 1 (6), Slot 2 (7), Slot 3 (8), Slot 4 (9)
06.020 Date Format Std (0) or US (1) Std (0) RW Txt Us

06.021 Time Between Filter Changes 0 to 30000 Hours 0 Hours RW Num US
06.022 Filter Change Required / Change Done Off (0) or On (1) RW Bit ND NC
06.023 Time Before Filter Change Due 0 to 30000 Hours RO Num ND NC PT PS
06.024 Reset Energy Meter Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit
06.025 Energy Meter: MWh -999.9 to 999.0 MWh RO Num ND NC PT PS
06.026 Energy Meter: kWh ±99.99 kWh RO Num ND NC PT PS
06.027 Energy Cost Per kWh 0.0 to 600.0 0.0 RW Num US
06.028 Running Cost ±32000 RO Num ND NC PT
06.029 Hardware Enable Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
06.030 Run Forward Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.031 Jog Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.032 Run Reverse Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.033 Forward/Reverse Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.034 Run Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.035 Forward Limit Switch Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.036 Reverse Limit Switch Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.037 Jog Reverse Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.039 Not Stop Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.040 Enable Sequencer Latching Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.041 Drive Event Flags 00 to 11 00 RW Bin NC
06.042 Control Word 000000000000000 to 111111111111111 000000000000000 RW Bin NC
06.043 Control Word Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.044 Active Supply Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
06.045 Cooling Fan control 0 to 11 10 RW Num US
06.046 Supply Loss Hold Disable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.047 Input Phase Loss Detection Mode Full (0), Ripple Only (1), Disabled (2) Full (0) RW Txt US
200 V drive: 205 V
400 V drive: 410 V
06.048 Supply Loss Detection Level ±VM_SUPPLY_LOSS_LEVEL V RW Num RA US
575 V drive: 540 V
690 V drive: 540 V
06.051 Allow Motoring Load Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.052 Motor Pre-heat Current Magnitude 0 to 100 % 0% RW Num US
06.053 Sleep / Wake Threshold ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR 0.0 RW Num US
06.054 Sleep Time 0.0 to 250.0 s 10.0 s RW Num US
06.055 Wake Time 0.0 to 250.0 s 10.0 s RW Num US
06.056 Sleep Required Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT

Issue Number: 3
Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
06.057 Sleep Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
06.059 Output Phase Loss Detection Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.060 Standby Mode Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.061 Standby Mode Mask 0000000 to 1111111 0000000 RW Bin US
200 V drive: 175 V
400 V drive: 330 V
06.065 Standard Under Voltage Threshold ±VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS V RW Num RA US
575 V drive: 435 V
690 V drive: 435 V
200 V drive: 175 V
400 V drive: 330 V
06.066 Low Voltage Under Voltage Threshold ±VM_LOW_UNDER_VOLTS V RW Num RA US
575 V drive: 435 V
690 V drive: 435 V
06.067 Low Under Voltage Threshold Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.068 Back Up Supply Mode Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.069 Under-Voltage System Contactor Close Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
06.070 Under-Voltage System Contactor Closed Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.071 Slow Rectifier Charge Rate Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.072 User Supply Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
200 V drive: 390 V
400 V drive: 780 V
06.073 Braking IGBT Lower Threshold ±VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET V RW Num US
575 V drive: 930 V
690 V drive: 1120 V
200 V drive: 390 V
400 V drive: 780 V
06.074 Braking IGBT Upper Threshold ±VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET V RW Num US
575 V drive: 930 V
690 V drive: 1120 V
06.075 Low Voltage Braking IGBT Threshold ±VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET V 0V RW Num US
Low Voltage Braking IGBT
06.076 Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit
Threshold Select

Issue Number: 3
11.7 Menu 7: Temperature monitoring

Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
07.004 Monitored Temperature 1 ±250 °C RO Num ND NC PT
07.033 Power Output ±100.0 % RO Num ND NC PT
07.034 Inverter Temperature ±250 °C RO Num ND NC PT
07.035 Percentage Of d.c. Link Thermal Trip Level 0 to 100 % RO Num ND NC PT
07.036 Percentage Of Drive Thermal Trip Level 0 to 100 % RO Num ND NC PT
07.037 Temperature Nearest To Trip Level 0 to 29999 RO Num ND NC PT
07.038 Temperature Monitor Select 1 0 to 29999 1001 RW Num US

Issue Number: 3

Issue Number: 3
11.8 Menu 8: Digital I/O

T2 24V Output T2 24V Output Source

T2 24V Source Invert
Output 08.028 Any
State 08.008 08.018 unprotected
bit
parameter
T2 24V Output ??.???
00.000
2
x(-1) ??.???
T4 Digital T4 Digital
Output 1 Invert Output 1 Source
08.011 08.021
T4 Digital At Zero
Output 1 State ??.??? Speed
08.001 10.003
x(-1) ??.???
Any bit
T4 Digital Output 1 parameter
4 08.029
I/O Input
Logic Polarity
T5 Digital T5 Digital
Output 2 Invert Output 2 Source
08.012 08.022
T5 Digital At Zero
Output 2 State ??.??? Speed
08.002 10.003
x(-1) ??.???
Any bit
T5 Digital Output 2 parameter
5 08.029
I/O Input
Logic Polarity
Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 3
T7 Digital Stop/Start T7 Digital Input 4

T7 Digital Input 4 Invert Logic Select Destination
Input 4 State
08.004 08.014 06.004 08.024 Any
unprotected
bit
T7 Digital Input 4 parameter
??.??? Run Forward
7 08.029
06.030
I/O Input
x(-1)
Logic Polarity ??.???
T8 Digital
T8 Digital Input 5
T8 Digital Input 5 Invert Destination Any
Input 5 State unprotected
08.005 08.015 08.025 bit
T8 Digital Input 5 parameter
??.??? Run Reverse
8 08.029
06.032
I/O Input x(-1)
Logic Polarity ??.???
24 V Supply
Input State 24 V Supply 24 V Supply
Input Invert Input Destination
08.043 08.053 08.063 Any
unprotected
bit
T9 24V Input parameter
??.???
9
00.000
x(-1)
??.???
T11 STO Input 1 STO input 1 state
08.009
11
08.010
An Option Module with External Trip Generator
safety functions can Combine with I/O input (Menu 6) 06.029
open these switches External Trip Mode 0
Hardware
T13 STO Input 2 Enable
08.040
13
STO input 2 state

Issue Number: 3
Figure 11-18 Menu 8 logic (cont)
Relay Source Relay

Invert Source
08.017 08.027
Any bit
parameter
Relay
State ??.??? Drive OK
10.001
41 08.007
x(-1) ??.???
42
0V
Figure 11-19 Menu 8 logic (cont)
Keypad Run
Button State Keypad Run Button Keypad Run
Invert/Toggle Button Destination
08.041 08.051 08.061 Any
unprotected
bit parameter
Run button 0 ??.???
1 00.000
2 ??.???
x(-1)
Toggle
Keypad
DI/O 12 State Keypad Auxiliary Auxiliary Button
Button Invert/Toggle Destination
08.042 08.052 08.062 Any
unprotected
bit parameter
Auxiliary Button ??.???

0
1 00.000
2 ??.???
x(-1)
Key
Toggle
X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 3
Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
08.001 Digital I/O 01 State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.002 Digital I/O 02 State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.004 Digital Input 04 State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.005 Digital Input 05 State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.007 Relay Output State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.008 24V Supply Output State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.009 STO Input 01 State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.010 External Trip Mode Disable (0), STO 1 (1), STO 2 (2), STO 1 OR STO 2 (3) Disable (0) RW Txt US
08.011 Digital I/O 01 Invert Not Invert (0) or Invert (1) Not Invert (0) RW Txt US
08.012 Digital I/O 02 Invert Not Invert (0) or Invert (1) Not Invert (0) RW Txt US
08.014 Digital Input 04 Invert Not Invert (0) or Invert (1) Not Invert (0) RW Txt US
08.015 Digital Input 05 Invert Not Invert (0) or Invert (1) Not Invert (0) RW Txt US
08.017 Relay Invert Not Invert (0) or Invert (1) Not Invert (0) RW Txt US
08.018 24V Supply Output Invert Not Invert (0) or Invert (1) Invert (1) RW Txt US
08.020 Digital I/O Read Word 0 to 511 RO Num ND NC PT
08.021 Digital I/O 01 Source/Destination 0.000 to 59.999 10.003 RW Num DE PT US
08.022 Digital I/O 02 Source/Destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
08.024 Digital Input 04 Destination 0.000 to 59.999 6.030 RW Num DE PT US
08.025 Digital Input 05 Destination 0.000 to 59.999 6.032 RW Num DE PT US
08.027 Relay Output Source 0.000 to 59.999 10.001 RW Num PT US
08.028 24V Supply Output Source 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
08.029 Input Logic Polarity Negative Logic (0) or Positive Logic (1) Positive Logic (1) RW Txt US
08.040 STO Input 02 State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.041 Keypad Run Button State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.042 Keypad Auxiliary Button State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.043 24V Supply Input State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.051 Keypad Run Button Invert/Toggle Not Invert (0) RW Txt US
Not Invert (0), Invert (1) or Toggle (2)
08.052 Keypad Auxiliary Button Invert/Toggle Not Invert (0) RW Txt US
08.053 24V Supply Input Invert Not Invert (0) or Invert (1) Not Invert (0) RW Txt US
08.061 Keypad Run Button Destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
08.062 Keypad Auxiliary Button Destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
08.063 24V Supply Input Source 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
08.071 DI/O Output Enable Register 1 0000000000000000 to 1111111111111111 0000000000000000 RW Bin PT US
08.072 DI/O Input Register 1 0000000000000000 to 1111111111111111 0000000000000000 RO Bin PT
08.073 DI/O Output Register 1 0000000000000000 to 1111111111111111 0000000000000000 RW Bin PT

Issue Number: 3
11.9 Menu 9: Programmable logic, motorized pot, binary sum and timers
Figure 11-20 Menu 9 logic diagram: Programmable logic
Any bit Function-1 09.005

parameter Input-1 Invert Function-1
??.??? Output Function-1
Indicator Destination
Function-1 Parameter
Output Invert 09.001 09.010
??.??? x(-1) Any
09.008 unprotected
bit
parameter
09.004 Function-1 Input-1
Source Parameter ??.???
09.009
parameter x(-1) Function-1
Input-2 Invert ??.???
Delay
??.???
??.??? x(-1)

Source Parameter

parameter Input-1 Invert Function-2
??.??? Output Function-2
Indicator Destination
Function-2 Parameter
output Invert 09.002 09.020
??.??? x(-1) Any
09.018 unprotected
bit
parameter
Source Parameter ??.???
09.019
parameter x(-1) Function-2
Input-2 Invert ??.???
Delay
??.???
??.??? x(-1)
Key
Source Parameter X Input
X mm.ppp Read-write (RW)
terminals parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 3
Figure 11-21 Menu 9 logic diagram: Motorized pot and binary sum
Motorized
Pot. Bipolar Motorized Pot. Motorized Pot.
Motorized Output Indicator Destination
Select
Pot. Rate Parameter
09.022
09.023 09.003 09.025
Motorized Pot. Any
Up unprotected
variable
09.026 parameter
??.???
M 09.024
Motorized Pot. ??.???
Output Scale
09.027 Function disabled if set
to a non valid destination
Motorized Pot.
Down
09.028 09.021 Motorized Pot.

Mode
Motorized Pot.
Reset To Zero
Binary-Sum
Logic Output Binary-Sum
Binary-Sum Value Logic Destination
Offset Parameter
09.034 09.032 09.033
09.029
Any
unprotected
Binary-Sum bit
Logic Ones(LSB) parameter
+ ??.???
+
09.030 S
??.???
Binary-Sum
Logic Twos Function disabled if set
to a non valid destination
09.031
Key
Binary-Sum
Logic Fours(MSB) X Input Read-write (RW)
X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 3
Figure 11-22 Menu 9 logic diagram: Timers

Timer 1
Output Timer 1
Timer 1 Destination
Invert 09.042 09.043
Any
09.035 Timer 1 Start Date 09.041 unprotected
bit
Timer 1 parameter
09.036 Timer 1 Start Time
Enable
??.???
09.040 09.037 Timer 1 Stop Date
09.038 Timer 1 Stop Time x(-1)

??.???
Timer 1 Repeat Timer disabled if set
09.039
Function to a non valid destination
Timer 2
Output Timer 2
Timer 2 Destination
Invert 09.052 09.053
Any
09.045 Timer 2 Start Date 09.051 unprotected
bit
Timer 2 parameter
09.046 Timer 2 Start Time
Enable
??.???
09.050 09.047 Timer 2 Stop Date
09.048 Timer 2 Stop Time x(-1)

??.???
Timer 2 Repeat Timer disabled if set
09.049
Function to a non valid destination
Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 3
Figure 11-23 Menu 9 logic diagram: Scope function

Scope Data Scope Saving
Not Ready Data
09.065 09.066
Scope Trace 1
Source
09.055
09.063 Scope Mode
Scope Trace 2
Source 09.067 Scope Sample Time
09.056
Scope Trace 3 09.068 Scope Trigger Delay

Source
09.057 09.069 Time Period
Scope Trace 4
Source
09.058
Scope Arm
09.064
Scope
Trigger Invert
09.062
Scope
Trigger
09.059
OR
Scope Trigger
Source x(-1)
09.060
Scope Trigger
+
Threshold _
09.061
Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 3
Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
09.001 Logic Function 1 Output Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
09.002 Logic Function 2 Output Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
09.003 Motorized Pot Output ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT PS
09.004 Logic Function 1 Source 1 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
09.005 Logic Function 1 Source 1 Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
09.008 Logic Function 1 Output Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
09.009 Logic Function 1 Delay ±25.0 s 0.0s RW Num US
09.010 Logic Function 1 Destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
09.018 Logic Function 2 Output Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
09.019 Logic Function 2 Delay ±25.0 s 0.0 s RW Num US
09.020 Logic Function 2 Destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
09.021 Motorized Pot Mode 0 to 4 0 RW Num US
09.022 Motorized Pot Bipolar Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
09.023 Motorized Pot Rate 0 to 250 s 20 s RW Num US
09.024 Motorized Pot Scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Num US
09.025 Motorized Pot Destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
09.026 Motorized Pot Up Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
09.027 Motorized Pot Down Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
09.028 Motorized Pot Reset Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
09.029 Binary Sum Ones Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
09.030 Binary Sum Twos Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
09.031 Binary Sum Fours Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
09.032 Binary Sum Output 0 to 255 RO Num ND NC PT
09.033 Binary Sum Destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
09.034 Binary Sum Offset 0 to 248 0 RW Num US
09.035 Timer 1 Start Date 00-00-00 to 31-12-99 00-00-00 RW Date US
09.036 Timer 1 Start Time 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 00:00:00 RW Time US
09.037 Timer 1 Stop Date 00-00-00 to 31-12-99 00-00-00 RW Date US
09.038 Timer 1 Stop Time 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 00:00:00 RW Time US
None (0), Hour (1), Day (2), Week (3), Month (4), Year (5),
09.039 Timer 1 Repeat Function None (0) RW Txt US
One off (6), Minute (7)
09.040 Timer 1 Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US

09.041 Timer 1 Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
09.042 Timer 1 Output Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
09.043 Timer 1 Destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW DE PT US
09.045 Timer 2 Start Date 00-00-00 to 31-12-99 0 RW Date US
09.046 Timer 2 Start Time 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 0 RW Time US
09.047 Timer 2 Stop Date 00-00-00 to 31-12-99 0 RW Date US
09.048 Timer 2 Stop Time 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 0 RW Time US
None (0), Hour (1), Day (2), Week (3), Month (4), Year (5),
09.049 Timer 2 Repeat Function None (0) RW Txt US
One off (6), Minute (7)
09.050 Timer 2 Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US

09.051 Timer 2 Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
09.052 Timer 2 Output Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
09.053 Timer 2 Destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW DE PT US
09.055 Scope Trace 1 Source 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
09.059 Scope Trigger Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit

Issue Number: 3
Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
09.060 Scope Trigger Source 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
09.061 Scope Trigger Threshold -2147483648 to 2147483647 0 RW Num US
09.062 Scope Trigger Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
09.063 Scope Mode Single (0), Normal (1), Auto (2) Single (0) RW Txt US
09.064 Scope Arm Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
09.065 Scope Data Not Ready Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
09.066 Scope Saving Data Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
09.067 Scope Sample Time 1 to 200 1 RW Num US
09.068 Scope Trigger Delay 0 to 100 % 0% RW Num US
09.069 Scope Time Period 0.00 to 200000.00 ms RO Num ND NC PT
09.070 Scope Auto-save Mode Disabled (0), Overwrite (1), Keep (2) Disabled (0) RW Txt US
09.071 Scope Auto-save File Number 0 to 99 0 RO Num PS
09.072 Scope Auto-save Reset Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit
09.073 Scope Auto-save Status Disabled (0), Active (1), Stopped (2), Failed (3) Disabled (0) RO Txt PS

Issue Number: 3
11.10 Menu 10: Status and trips

Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
10.001 Drive OK Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.002 Drive Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.003 Zero Speed Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.004 Running At Or Below Minimum Speed Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.005 Below Set Speed Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.006 At Speed Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.007 Above Set Speed Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.008 Rate Load Reached Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.009 Current Limit Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.010 Regenerating Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.011 Braking IGBT Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.012 Braking Resistor Alarm Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.013 Reverse Direction Commanded Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.014 Reverse Direction Running Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.015 Supply Loss Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.016 Under Voltage Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.017 Motor Overload Alarm Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.018 Drive Over-temperature Alarm Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.019 Drive Warning Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.020 Trip 0 0 to 255 RO Txt ND NC PT PS
10.030 Braking Resistor Rated Power 0.000 to 99999.999 kW See Table 11-5 RW Num US
10.031 Braking Resistor Thermal Time Constant 0.000 to 1500.000 s See Table 11-5 RW Num US
10.032 External Trip Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
10.033 Drive Reset Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
10.034 Number Of Auto-reset Attempts None (0), 1 (1), 2 (2), 3 (3), 4 (4), 5 (5), Infinite (6) None (0) RW Txt US
10.035 Auto-reset Delay 0.0 to 600.0 s 1.0 s RW Num US
10.036 Auto-reset Hold Drive ok Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
10.037 Action On Trip Detection 00000 to 11111 00000 RW Bin US
10.038 User Trip 0 to 255 RW Num ND NC
10.039 Braking Resistor Thermal Accumulator 0.0 to 100.0 % RO Num ND NC PT
10.040 Status Word 000000000000000 to 111111111111111 RO Bin ND NC PT
10.041 Trip 0 Date 00-00-00 to 31-12-99 RO Date ND NC PT PS
10.042 Trip 0 Time 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 RO Time ND NC PT PS

Issue Number: 3
Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
10.061 Braking Resistor Resistance 0.00 to 10000.00 Ω See Table 11-5 RW Num US
10.062 Low Load Detected Alarm Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.063 Local Keypad Battery Low Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.064 Remote Keypad Battery Low Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.065 Auto-tune Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.066 Limit Switch Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.068 Hold Drive Healthy On Under Voltage Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
10.069 Additional Status Bits 0000000000 to 1111111111 RO Bin ND NC PT
10.070 Trip 0 Sub-trip Number 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT PS
10.080 Stop Motor Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.081 Phase Loss Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
Inhibit (0), Ready (1), Stop (2), Scan (3), Run (4),
Supply Loss (5), Deceleration (6), dc Injection (7),
10.101 Drive Status Position (8), Trip (9), Active (10), Off (11), RO Txt ND NC PT
Hand (12), Auto (13), Heat (14),
Under Voltage (15)
10.102 Trip Reset Source 0 to 1023 RO Num ND NC PT PS
10.103 Trip Time Identifier -2147483648 to 2147483647 ms RO Num ND NC PT

None (0), Brake Resistor (1), Motor Overload (2),
Ind Overload (3), Drive Overload (4),
10.104 Active Alarm Auto Tune (5), Limit Switch (6), Fire Mode (7), RO Txt ND NC PT
Low Load (8), Option Slot 1 (9), Option Slot 2 (10),
Option Slot 3 (11), Option Slot 4 (12)
10.105 Hand Off Auto State Not Active (0), Off (1), Hand (2), Auto (3) RO Txt ND NC PT PS
10.106 Potential Drive Damage Conditions 0000 to 1111 RO Bin ND NC PT PS
Table 11-5 Defaults for Pr 10.030, Pr 10.031 and Pr 10.061
Drive size Pr 10.030 Pr 10.031 Pr 10.061

Size 3 50 W 3.3 s 75 Ω
Size 4 and 5 100 W 2.0 s 38 Ω
All other ratings and frame sizes 0.000 0.00

Issue Number: 3
11.11 Menu 11: General drive set-up

Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
11.018 Status Mode Parameter 1 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
11.019 Status Mode Parameter 2 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
11.021 Parameter 00.030 Scaling 0.000 to 10.000 1.000 RW Num US
11.022 Parameter Displayed At Power-up 0.000 to 0.080 0.010 RW Num US
11.028 Drive Derivative 0 to 255 RO Num ND NC PT
11.029 Software Version 00.00.00.00 to 99.99.99.99 RO Num ND NC PT
11.030 User Security Code 0 to 2147483647 RW Num ND NC PT US
11.031 User Drive Mode Open-loop (1), RFC-A (2), RFC-S (3), Regen (4) RW Txt ND NC PT
11.032 Maximum Heavy Duty Rating 0.000 to 99999.999 RO Num ND NC PT
11.033 Drive Rated Voltage 200 V (0), 400 V (1), 575 V (2), 690 V (3) RO Txt ND NC PT
11.035 Number Of Power Modules Test -1 to 32 -1 RW Num US
11.036 NV Media Card File Previously Loaded 0 to 999 0 RO Num NC PT
11.037 NV Media Card File Number 0 to 999 0 RW Num
None (0), Open-loop (1), RFC-A (2), RFC-S (3),

11.038 NV Media Card File Type RO Txt ND NC PT
Regen (4), User Prog (5), Option App (6)
11.039 NV Media Card File Version 0 to 9999 RO Num ND NC PT
11.040 NV Media Card File Checksum -2147483648 to 2147483647 RO Num ND NC PT
11.042 Parameter Cloning None (0), Read (1), Program (2), Auto (3), Boot (4) None (0) RW Txt NC US
11.043 Load Defaults None (0), Standard (1), US (2) None (0) RW Txt NC
Menu 0 (0), All Menus (1), Read-only Menu 0 (2),

11.044 User Security Status RW Txt ND PT
Read-only (3), Status Only (4), No Access (5)
11.045 Select Motor 2 Parameters Motor 1 (0) or Motor 2 (1) Motor 1 (0) RW Txt US
11.046 Defaults Previously Loaded 0 to 2000 RO Num ND NC PT US
11.047 Onboard User Program: Enable Stop (0) or Run (1) Run (1) RW Txt US
11.048 Onboard User Program: Status -2147483648 to 2147483647 RO Num ND NC PT
11.049 Onboard User Program: Programming Events 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT
11.050 Onboard User Program: Freewheeling Tasks Per Second 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT
11.051 Onboard User Program: Clock Task Time Used 0.0 to 100.0 % RO Num ND NC PT
11.052 Serial Number LS 000000000 to 999999999 RO Num ND NC PT
11.053 Serial Number MS 0 to 999999999 RO Num ND NC PT
11.054 Drive Date Code 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT
11.055 Onboard User Program: Clock Task Scheduled Interval 0 to 262140 ms RO Num ND NC PT
1234 (0), 1243 (1), 1324 (2), 1342 (3), 1423 (4),
1432 (5), 4123 (6),
3124 (7), 4132 (8), 2134 (9), 3142 (10), 2143 (11),
11.056 Option Slot Identifiers 1234 (0) RW Txt PT
3412 (12), 4312 (13), 2413 (14), 4213 (15), 2314
(16), 3214 (17), 2341 (18), 2431 (19),
3241 (20), 3421 (21), 4231 (22), 4321 (23)
11.060 Maximum Rated Current 0.000 to 99999.999 RO Num ND NC PT
11.061 Full Scale Current Kc 0.000 to 99999.999 RO Num ND NC PT
11.063 Product Type 0 to 255 RO Num ND NC PT
11.064 Product Identifier Characters M702 (1295462450) to (2147483647) RO Chr ND NC PT
11.065 Drive Rating And Configuration 0 to 999999999 RO Num ND NC PT
11.066 Power Stage Identifier 0 to 255 RO Num ND NC PT
11.067 Control Board Identifier 0.000 to 65.535 RO Num ND NC PT
11.068 Internal I/O Identifier 0 to 255 RO Num ND NC PT
11.069 Position Feedback Interface Identifier 0 to 255 RO Num ND NC PT
11.070 Core Parameter Database Version 0.00 to 99.99 RO Num ND NC PT
11.071 Number Of Power Modules Detected 0 to 32 RO Num ND NC PT US
11.072 NV Media Card Create Special File 0 to 1 0 RW Num NC
11.073 NV Media Card Size 0 to 100000 RO Num ND NC PT
11.074 NV Media Card Space Left 0 to 100000 RO Num ND NC PT
11.075 NV Media Card Read-only Flag Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
11.076 NV Media Card Warning Suppression Flag Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
11.077 NV Media Card File Required Version 0 to 9999 RW Num ND NC PT

Issue Number: 3
Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
11.079 Drive Name Characters 1-4 (-2147483648) to (2147483647) (0) RW Chr PT US
11.084 Drive Mode Open-loop (1), RFC-A (2), RFC-S (3), Regen (4) RO Txt ND NC PT US
None (0), Read-only (1), Status-only (2),

11.085 Security Status RO Txt ND NC PT PS
No Access (3)
11.086 Menu Access Status Menu 0 (0) or All Menus (1) RO Txt ND NC PT PS
11.090 Keypad Port Serial Address 1 to 16 1 RW Num US
11.091 Additional Identifier Characters 1 (-2147483648) to (2147483647) RO Chr ND NC PT

Issue Number: 3
11.12 Menu 12: Threshold detectors, variable selectors and brake control function
Threshold Threshold
Detector 1 Threshold Detector 1 Threshold
Detector 1 Output Detector 1
Level Destination
Parameter Any
Any variable 12.004 12.001
Threshold 12.007 unprotected
parameter Detector 1 bit parameter
??.??? ??.???
??.??? x(-1) ??.???
12.003 12.005 12.006

Threshold Threshold Threshold
Detector 1 Detector 1 Detector 1
Source Hysteresis Output Invert
Threshold Threshold
Detector 2 Threshold Detector 2
Detector 2 Output Threshold
Level Detector 2
Destination Any
Any variable 12.024 12.002 unprotected
Threshold 12.027
parameter Detector 2 bit parameter
??.??? ??.???
??.??? x(-1) ??.???
12.023 12.025 12.026 All parameters are shown

Threshold Threshold Threshold at their default setting
Detector 2 Detector 2 Detector 2
Source Hysteresis Output Invert
Key

X mm.ppp Hysteresis
terminals parameter Threshold
level
X Output mm.ppp Read-only (RO) t
X
terminals parameter
Threshold
The parameters are all shown in their default settings output
t

Issue Number: 3
Figure 11-25 Menu 12 logic diagram (continued)
Variable Selector 1
Any variable
parameter Variable
Variable Selector 1 Selector 1 Variable
??.??? Input 1 Scaling Output Selector 1 Any
12.013 Destination unprotected
variable
12.012 12.011
??.??? parameter
Variable Selector 1 ??.???
12.010
12.008 Variable Selector 1 Mode
Source 1
Any variable 12.015 Variable Selector 1
parameter Control ??.???
Variable Selector 1
??.??? Source 2 Scaling
12.014
??.???
12.009 Variable Selector 1

Source 2
Variable Selector 2
Any variable
parameter Variable
Variable Selector 2 Selector 2 Variable
??.??? Source 1 Any
Output Selector 2
12.033 Destination unprotected
variable
12.032 12.031 parameter
??.???
12.030 Variable Selector 2 ??.???

12.028 Variable Selector 2 Mode
Source 1
Any variable 12.035 Variable Selector 2
parameter Control ??.???
Variable Selector 2
??.??? Source 2 Scaling
12.034
Key
??.???

X
12.029 Variable Selector 2 terminals mm.ppp
parameter
Source 2

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 3
The brake control functions are provided to allow well co-ordinated operation of an external brake with the drive. While both hardware and
software are designed to high standards of quality and robustness, they are not intended for use as safety functions, i.e. where a fault or
failure would result in a risk of injury. In any application where the incorrect operation of the brake release mechanism could result in injury,
WARNING independent protection devices of proven integrity must also be incorporated.
The control terminal relay can be selected as an output to release a brake. If a drive is set up in this manner and a drive replacement takes
place, prior to programming the drive on initial power up, the brake may be released.
When drive terminals are programmed to non default settings the result of incorrect or delayed programming must be considered. The use of
WARNING
a NV media card in boot mode or an SI-Applications module can ensure drive parameters are immediately programmed to avoid this situation.
Figure 11-26 Open-loop brake function
Current Key
Magnitude
X terminals mm.ppp
04.001 + parameter
_ Drive
Brake Control: X Output mm.ppp Read-only (RO)
Active X
Lower Current 12.043 terminals parameter
Threshold
10.002
Hysteresis
Brake Control: Brake Control: Brake Control:
Upper Current Lower Current Post-Brake
Threshold _ Threshold Release
12.042 12.043 Delay
12.047
Ramp
Hold
Output
02.003
Frequency
05.001 +
i o
_
LAT 12.041
Brake Control:
r
Brake Release Brake Control: 12.046
Frequency Enable
Brake Control: 12.040
12.044 Brake Delay
Brake Control:
Brake
Brake Control: Release
Brake Apply
Frequency
12.045 +
_
Reference
On
01.011 x(-1)
+
_
12.051 input output

Brake Control: i o
Brake Apply Through LAT
Zero Threshold reset
r
If the reset input is 1, the output is 0.

If the reset input is 0, the output
latches at 1 if the input is 1.

Issue Number: 3
Figure 11-27 Open-loop brake sequence
Pr 12.044 Brake Control: Pr 12.045 Brake Control:

Brake Release Frequency Brake Apply Frequency
Pr 05.001 Output Frequency
Pr 12.042 Brake Control:
Upper Current Threshold
Pr 04.001 Current Magnitude
1. Wait for upper current threshold and brake release frequency

Pr 10.002 Drive Active 2. Pre-brake release delay
3. Post-brake release delay
4. Wait for brake apply frequency
5. Wait for zero frequency
Pr 01.011 Reference On 6. 1s delay as phase 2 of stopping sequence (Pr 06.001=1,2 or 3)
Pr 12.040 Brake Control:

Brake Release
Pr 02.003 Ramp Hold
1 2 3 4 5 6
Pr 12.046 Pr 12.047

Issue Number: 3
WARNING
Figure 11-28 RFC-A mode with brake controller mode (12.052) =1

Percentage
Flux Brake Control:
Brake Delay Ramp
05.034 + Hold
12.046
_ 02.003
90%
Current Brake Control:

Magnitude Brake Release
i o
_
04.001 LAT 12.040
OR r
+
12.041
12.047
Brake Control:
12.043 Post-Brake
Enable
Brake Control: Release Delay
Lower Current
Threshold input output
10.002 x(-1) i o
LAT
Drive active reset
r
Final Speed
Reference If the reset input is 1, the output is 0.
If the reset input is 0, the output latches
03.001 + at 1 if the input is 1.
i o
_
LAT
Brake Control r Key
Brake Release
Speed
12.044 X terminals mm.ppp
parameter
Brake Control
Brake Apply _ X Output mm.ppp Read-only (RO)
X
Speed terminals parameter
12.045 +
x(-1)
01.011
Reference
On
Brake Control
Brake Apply
+
Zero Threshold
_
12.051

Issue Number: 3
Figure 11-29 RFC-A brake sequence
Pr 12.045 Brake Control: Brake Apply Speed

Pr 03.002 Speed Feedback
Pr 04.001 Current Magnitude
1. Wait for motor fluxed (closed-loop vector only)

Pr 10.002 Drive Active 2. Post-brake release delay
3. Wait for speed threshold
4. Wait for brake apply speed delay
Pr 01.011 Reference On 5. Brake apply delay
Pr 12.040 Brake Control: Brake Release
Pr 02.003 Ramp Hold

Pr 13.010 Position Control
Mode
Pr 06.008 Hold Zero Speed
1 2 3 4 5
Pr 12.047 Pr 12.046 Pr 12.048

Issue Number: 3
WARNING
Figure 11-30 RFC-A mode (brake controller (12.052) = 0) and RFC-S mode
Brake Control:
Position
Enable Position
Percentage Control
Controller During 13.010
Flux Mode
Brake Release
( = 1)
12.049
05.034 +
90% _ Post-Brake
Release Delay 12.047
Ramp
02.003
Current Hold
Magnitude
i o
_
04.001 LAT
OR r
+
Brake Control:
12.043 12.040
Brake Apply Brake Release
Brake Control: 12.048
Delay
Lower Current
Threshold 10.002 x(-1) Hold Zero
12.041 06.008
Reference Speed
On Drive Active Brake Control:
Enable
01.011
OR
Brake Apply
Speed Speed Delay 12.046
Feedback
03.002 +
_
Brake Control:
Brake Apply Speed Key
input output
12.045 i o
X terminals mm.ppp LAT
parameter reset
r

X
terminals parameter
If the reset input is 1, the output is 0.
If the reset input is 0, the output latches
The parameters are all shown in their default settings at 1 if the input is 1.

Issue Number: 3
Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
OL RFC- A RFC- A OL RFC-A RFC-S
12.001 Threshold Detector 1 Output Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
12.002 Threshold Detector 2 Output Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
12.003 Threshold Detector 1 Source 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
12.004 Threshold Detector 1 Level 0.00 to 100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
12.005 Threshold Detector 1 Hysteresis 0.00 to 25.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
12.006 Threshold Detector 1 Output Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
12.007 Threshold Detector 1 Destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
12.008 Variable Selector 1 Source 1 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
Input 1 (0), Input 2 (1), Add (2), Subtract (3), Multiply

12.010 Variable Selector 1 Mode (4), Divide (5), Time Const (6), Ramp (7), Modulus Input 1 (0) RW Txt US
(8), Powers (9), Sectional (10)
12.011 Variable Selector 1 Destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US

12.012 Variable Selector 1 Output ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT
12.013 Variable Selector 1 Source 1 Scaling ±4.000 1.000 RW Num US
12.015 Variable Selector 1 Control 0.00 to 100.00 0.00 RW Num US
12.016 Variable Selector 1 Enable Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
12.023 Threshold Detector 2 Source 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
12.024 Threshold Detector 2 Level 0.00 to 100.00 % RW Num US
0.00 %
12.025 Threshold Detector 2 Hysteresis 0.00 to 25.00 % RW Num US
12.026 Threshold Detector 2 Output Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
12.027 Threshold Detector 2 Destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
Input 1 (0), Input 2 (1), Add (2), Subtract (3), Multiply

12.030 Variable Selector 2 Mode (4), Divide (5), Time Const (6), Ramp (7), Modulus Input 1 (0) RW Txt US
(8), Powers (9), Sectional (10)
12.031 Variable Selector 2 Destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US

12.032 Variable Selector 2 Output ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT
12.035 Variable Selector 2 Control 0.00 to 100.00 0.00 RW Num US
12.036 Variable Selector 2 Enable Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
12.040 Brake Control: Brake Release Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
12.041 Brake Control: Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
12.042 Brake Control: Upper Current Threshold 0 to 200 % 50 % RW Num US
12.043 Brake Control: Lower Current Threshold 0 to 200 % 10 % RW Num US
OL: Brake Control: Brake Release Frequency 0.0 to 20.0 Hz 1.0 Hz RW Num US
12.044
Brake Control: Brake Release Speed 0 to 200 10 rpm
OL: Brake Control: Brake Apply Frequency 0.0 to 20.0 Hz 2.0 Hz RW Num US
12.045
RFC: Brake Control: Brake Apply Speed 0 to 200 5 rpm
12.046 Brake Control: Brake Delay 0.0 to 25.0 s 1.0 s RW Num US
12.047 Brake Control: Post-brake Release Delay 0.0 to 25.0 s 1.0 s RW Num US
12.048 Brake Control: Brake Apply Delay 0.0 to 25.0 s 1.0 s RW Num US
Brake Control: Enable Position Control During
12.049 Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
Brake Release
12.050 Brake Control: Initial Direction Ref (0), Forward (1), Reverse (2) Ref (0) RW Txt US
Brake Control: Brake Apply Through Zero
12.051 0.0 to 25.0 Hz 0 to 250 rpm 0.0 Hz 0 rpm RW Num US
Threshold
12.052 Brake Control: Mode Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US

Issue Number: 3
11.13 Menu 13: Standard motion controller

P1 Speed
Feedback
P1 Interface 03.027 Standard Motion Standard Motion

Relative Relative
Jog Reverse Jog Enable
P2 Speed Standard Motion 13.019 13.018
Standard Motion
Feedback Reference Source
Relative
13.004 Jog Reference
P2 Interface 03.127
13.017 0
1
1
0 x(-1)
Option Slot 1 0
P1 Speed Feedback
1
Option Slot 1
P2 Speed Feedback
Position
2 reference
invert
Option Slot 2 3 13.006
P1 Speed Feedback
Option Slot 2 4 Ratio +
P2 Speed Feedback d/dt 0
5 1
13.007
13.008
+
ò
x(-1)
6
Option Slot 3
P1 Speed Feedback
7
Option Slot 3
P2 Speed Feedback
8
9
Option Slot 4 Standard Motion
P1 Speed Feedback Position Error 13.016
10 +
Option Slot 4 Reset
P2 Speed Feedback
_
Fine
Revolutions Position Position
Standard Motion 13.020 13.021 13.022 0

Local Reference
1
Ignore Local Reference
Revolutions
13.024
Standard Motion
ò
13.023 Local Reference
Disable
P1 Speed
Feedback
P1 Interface 03.027
P2 Speed Standard Motion

Feedback Feedback Source
13.005
P2 Interface 03.127
0
Option Slot 1
P1 Speed Feedback
1
Option Slot 1
P2 Speed Feedback
2
Option Slot 2 3
P1 Speed Feedback
Option Slot 2 4 _
P2 Speed Feedback d/dt
5
+
Limited to
6 ±1/2 rev or
Option Slot 3 pole pitch
P1 Speed Feedback
7 13.013
Option Slot 3
P2 Speed Feedback Standard Motion
8 Orientation Position
Reference
9
Option Slot 4
P1 Speed Feedback
10
Option Slot 4
P2 Speed Feedback
RFC-A / S only
Sensorless Position 03.080

Issue Number: 3
Reference
Selected Pre-Ramp Post Ramp
Reference Reference Final Speed
01.001 0 Reference
Menu 2 + 03.001
01.003 Ramp Control 02.001
1
+
Speed
Feed- 01.039
Forwards Speed Feed
01.040 -Forwards
Select
Standard Motion Hard Speed
Controller Reference
Mode Select
13.010 = 13.010 = 13.010 =
13.010 03.023
5 or 6 1 or 3 1 to 6
1 0
Position loop
disabled 0
1
2 0
3
1 1
4
1 5
6
0
Hard Speed
Reference 03.022
Hold Zero
06.008
Speed
Standard Motion
0 Standard Motion Error Proportional
Gain Kp
1
1 13.001 13.002 13.003 13.009
0
Revolutions Position Fine
Position
13.012
Standard Motion
Position loop Speed Clamp
enabled*
Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter
Standard Motion
Orientation
acceptance X Output mm.ppp Read-only (RO)
X
window terminals parameter
13.014
This logic diagram applies only when all
parameters are at their default settings
Orientation
13.015
Standard Motion
Orientation
complete
*The position controller is disabled and the error integrator is also reset under the following conditions:
1. If the drive is disabled (i.e. inhibited, ready or tripped)
2. If the position controller mode (Pr 13.010) is changed. The position controller is disabled transiently to reset the error integrator.
3. The absolute mode parameter (Pr 13.011) is changed. The position controller is disabled transiently to reset the error integrator.
4. One of the position sources is invalid.
5. The position feedback initialized parameter (Pr 03.048) is zero.

Issue Number: 3
Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
13.001 Standard Motion Revolutions Error -32768 to 32767 revs RO Num ND NC PT
13.002 Standard Motion Position Error -32768 to 32767 RO Num ND NC PT
13.003 Standard Motion Fine Position Error -32768 to 32767 RO Num ND NC PT
P1 Drive (0), P2 Drive (1), P1 Slot 1 (2), P2 Slot 1 (3), P1
13.004 Standard Motion Reference Source Slot 2 (4), P2 Slot 2 (5), P1 Slot 3 (6), P2 Slot 3 (7), P1 Slot P1 Drive (0) RW Txt US
4 (8), P2 Slot 4 (9), Local (10)
P1 Drive (0), P2 Drive (1), P1
Slot 1 (2), P2 Slot 1 (3),
P1 Slot 1 (2), P2 Slot 1 (3),
P1 Slot 2 (4), P2 Slot 2 (5),
13.005 Standard Motion Feedback Source P1 Slot 2 (4), P2 Slot 2 (5), P1 Drive (0) RW Txt US
P1 Slot 3 (6), P2 Slot 3 (7),
P1 Slot 3 (6), P2 Slot 3 (7),
P1 Slot 4 (8), P2 Slot 4 (9),
P1 Slot 4 (8), P2 Slot 4 (9)
Sensorless (10)
13.006 Standard Motion Reference Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit
13.007 Standard Motion Ratio Numerator 0.000 to 10.000 1.000 RW Num US
13.008 Standard Motion Ratio Denominator 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Num US
13.009 Standard Motion Proportional Gain Kp 0.00 to 100.00 25.00 RW Num US
Disabled (0), Rigid FFwd (1),
Disabled (0), Rigid FFwd
Rigid (2), Non-Rigid FFwd (3),
13.010 Standard Motion Controller Mode (1), Rigid (2), Non-Rigid Disabled (0) RW Num US
Non-Rigid (4), Orientate Stop
FFwd (3), Non-Rigid (4)
(5), Orientate (6)
13.011 Standard Motion Absolute Mode Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
13.012 Standard Motion Speed Clamp 0 to 250 rpm 150 rpm RW Num US
13.013 Standard Motion Orientation Position Reference 0 to 65535 0 RW Num US
13.014 Standard Motion Orientation Acceptance Window 0 to 4096 256 RW Num US
13.015 Standard Motion Orientation Complete Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
13.016 Standard Motion Position Error Reset Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
13.017 Standard Motion Relative Jog Reference 0.0 to 4000.0 rpm 0.0 rpm RW Num US
13.018 Standard Motion Relative Jog Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
13.019 Standard Motion Relative Jog Reverse Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
13.020 Standard Motion Local Reference Revolutions 0 to 65535 revs 0 revs RW Num NC
13.021 Standard Motion Local Reference Position 0 to 65535 0 RW Num NC
13.022 Standard Motion Local Reference Fine Position 0 to 65535 0 RW Num NC
13.023 Standard Motion Local Reference Disable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
13.024 Standard Motion Ignore Local Reference Revolutions Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
13.025 Standard Motion Rate Select 4 ms (0), 250 us (1) 4ms (0) RW Txt US
13.026 Standard Motion Sample Rate 4 ms (0), 250 us (1), Not Selected (2) RO Txt ND NC PT US

Issue Number: 3

Issue Number: 3
11.14 Menu 14: User PID controller

Figure 11-32 Menu 14 Logic diagram
PID Feed-Forwards
Reference Source
14.002
Any variable
parameter
PID Feed-Forwards
??.???
14.019
??.???
PID Reference
Source
14.003
Any variable
parameter
??.??? PID Reference
+ PID 14.005
Invert
Reference
??.??? + PID Error
PID Reference Scaling
14.020 0 +
14.023
14.007 14.022
14.025
1 PID Reference _
PID Digital x(-1)
Reference Slew-Rate
PID Feedback
Source
PID Feedback
14.004 Invert
Any variable 14.006
parameter PID
Feedback
??.???
+ PID Feedback Scaling
14.021 0
14.024
??.??? +
1
x(-1)
PID Digital
14.026
Feedback
PID Enable
14.008
Logic 1
Any bit
parameter 1
??.??? Logic 1
Any bit
0
parameter 1
??.??? ??.???
0
Source ??.???
14.009
not used
PID Enable
Source 1 Source
14.027
not used
PID Enable
Source 2

Issue Number: 3
PID Output
14.013
Upper Limit
PID Integral
Hold PID Output
14.014 PID
Lower Limit
14.017 Destination
14.010
PID Symmetrical 14.016 Any
PID Proportional 14.018 unprotected
Gain Limit Enable
variable
14.011 parameter
PID Output PID Output
Scaling
+ ??.???
PID Integral
Gain +
14.001 14.015
14.012
??.???
PID Derivative
Gain
Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 3
Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
14.001 PID1 Output ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT
14.002 PID1 Feed-forwards Reference Source 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
14.003 PID1 Reference Source 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
14.004 PID1 Feedback Source 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
14.005 PID1 Reference Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
14.006 PID1 Feedback Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
14.007 PID1 Reference Slew Rate 0.0 to 3200.0 s 0.0 s RW Num US
14.008 PID1 Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
14.009 PID1 Enable Source 1 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
14.010 PID1 Proportional Gain 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Num US
14.011 PID1 Integral Gain 0.000 to 4.000 0.500 RW Num US
14.012 PID1 Differential Gain 0.000 to 4.000 0.000 RW Num US
14.013 PID1 Output Upper Limit 0.00 to 100.00 % 100.00 % RW Num US
14.014 PID1 Output Lower Limit ±100.00 % -100.00 % RW Num US
14.015 PID1 Output Scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Num US
14.016 PID1 Destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
14.017 PID1 Integral Hold Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit
14.018 PID1 Symmetrical Limit Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
14.019 PID1 Feed-forwards Reference ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT
14.020 PID1 Reference ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT
14.021 PID1 Feedback ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT
14.022 PID1 Error ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT
14.023 PID1 Reference Scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Num US
14.024 PID1 Feedback Scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Num US
14.025 PID1 Digital Reference ±100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
14.026 PID1 Digital Feedback ±100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
14.028 PID1 Pre-sleep Boost Level 0.00 to 100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
14.029 PID1 Maximum Boost Time 0.0 to 250.0 s 0.0 s RW Num US
14.030 PID1 Pre-sleep Boost Level Enable Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
14.031 PID2 Output ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT
14.032 PID2 Feed-forwards Reference Source 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
14.033 PID2 Reference Source 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
14.034 PID2 Feedback Source 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
14.035 PID2 Reference Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
14.036 PID2 Feedback Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
14.037 PID2 Reference Slew Rate Limit 0.0 to 3200.0 s 0.0 s RW Num US
14.038 PID2 Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
14.040 PID2 Proportional Gain 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Num US
14.041 PID2 Integral Gain 0.000 to 4.000 0.500 RW Num US
14.042 PID2 Differential Gain 0.000 to 4.000 0.000 RW Num US
14.043 PID2 Output Upper Limit 0.00 to 100.00 % 100.00 % RW Num US
14.044 PID2 Output Lower Limit ±100.00 % -100.00 % RW Num US
14.045 PID2 Output Scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Num US
14.046 PID2 Destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
14.047 PID2 Integral Hold Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit
14.048 PID2 Symmetrical Limit Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
14.049 PID2 Feed-forwards Reference ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT
14.050 PID2 Reference ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT
14.051 PID2 Feedback ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT
14.052 PID2 Error ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT
14.053 PID2 Reference Scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Num US
14.054 PID2 Feedback Scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Num US
14.055 PID2 Digital Reference ±100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
14.056 PID2 Digital Feedback ±100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
14.058 PID1 Feedback Output Scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Num US

Issue Number: 3
Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
Fbk1 (0), Fbk2 (1), Fbk1 + Fbk2 (2), Min Fbk (3),
14.059 PID1 Mode Selector Fbk1 (0) RW Txt US
Max Fbk (4), Av Fbk (5), Min Error (6), Max Error (7)
14.060 PID1 Feedback Square Root Enable 1 Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
14.061 PID2 Feedback Square Root Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
14.062 PID1 Feedback Square Root Enable 2 Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US

Issue Number: 3
11.15 Menus 15, 16 and 17: Option module set-up

Figure 11-33 Location of option module slots and their corresponding menu numbers
1. Solutions Module Slot 1 - Menu 15

11.15.1 Parameters common to all categories

Parameter Range( ) Default( ) Type
mm.001 Module ID 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT
mm.002 Software Version 00.00.00 to 99.99.99 RO Num ND NC PT
mm.003 Hardware Version 0.00 to 99.99 RO Num ND NC PT
mm.004 Serial Number LS RO Num ND NC PT
0 to 99999999
mm.005 Serial Number MS RO Num ND NC PT
The option module ID indicates the type of module that is installed in the corresponding slot. See the relevant option module user guide for more
information regarding the module.
Option module ID Module Category

0 No module installed
209 SI-I/O Automation (I/O Expansion)
304 SI-Applications Plus
310 MCi210
Automation (Applications)
311 MCi200
306 SI-Register
443 SI-PROFIBUS
Fieldbus
447 SI-DeviceNet

Issue Number: 3
11.16 Menu 18: Application menu 1

Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
18.001 Application Menu 1 Power-down Save Integer -32768 to 32767 0 RW Num PS
18.002 Application Menu 1 Read-only Integer 2 -32768 to 32767 RO Num ND NC PT US
18.011 Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 11 -32768 to 32767 0 RW Num US
18.031 Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 31 Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
18.051 Application Menu 1 Power-down Save long Integer 51 -2147483648 to 2147483647 0 RW Num PS

Issue Number: 3

Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
19.001 Application Menu 2 Power-down Save Integer -32768 to 32767 0 RW Num PS
19.002 Application Menu 2 Read-only Integer 2 -32768 to 32767 RO Num ND NC PT

Issue Number: 3

Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
20.001 Application Menu 3 Read-write Integer 1 -32768 to 32767 0 RW Num
20.021 Application Menu 3 Read-write Long Integer 21 -2147483648 to 2147483647 0 RW Num

Issue Number: 3
11.19 Menu 21: Second motor parameters

Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
50 Hz: 50.0 50 Hz: 1500.0
21.001 M2 Maximum Reference Clamp ±VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP 3000.0 RW Num US
60 Hz: 60.0 60 Hz: 1800.0
21.002 M2 Minimum Reference Clamp ±VM_NEGATIVE_REF_CLAMP2 0.0 RW Num US
A1 A2 (0), A1 Preset (1), A2 Preset (2), Preset (3),

21.003 M2 Reference Selector A1 A2 (0) RW Txt US
Keypad (4), Precision (5), Keypad Ref (6)
21.004 M2 Acceleration Rate 1 ±VM_ACCEL_RATE 5.0 2.000 0.200 RW Num US
21.005 M2 Deceleration Rate 1 ±VM_ACCEL_RATE 10.0 2.000 0.200 RW Num US
0.0 to 50 Hz: 50.0

21.006 M2 Rated Frequency 0.0 to 3000.0 Hz RW Num US
1667.0 Hz 60 Hz: 60.0
21.007 M2 Rated Current ±VM_RATED_CURRENT A 0.000 A RW Num RA US

50 Hz: 1500 50 Hz:
rpm 1500.00 rpm
21.008 M2 Rated Speed 0 to 180000 rpm 0.00 to 50000.00 rpm 3000.00 rpm RW Num US
60 Hz: 1800 60 Hz:
rpm 1800.00 rpm
200V drive: 230 V
400V drive 50Hz: 400 V
21.009 M2 Rated Voltage ±VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET V 400V drive 60Hz: 460 V RW Num RA US
575V drive: 575 V
690V drive: 690 V
21.010 M2 Rated Power Factor 0.000 to 1.000 0.850 RW Num RA US
21.011 M2 Number Of Motor Poles Automatic (0) to 480 Poles (240) Automatic (0) 6 Poles (3) RW Txt US
21.012 M2 Stator Resistance 0.000000 to 1000.000000 Ω 0.000000 Ω RW Num RA US
21.014 M2 Transient Inductance / Ld 0.000 to 500.000 mH 0.000 mH RW Num RA US
21.015 Motor 2 Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
21.016 M2 Motor Thermal Time Constant 1 1.0 to 3000.0 s 89.0 s RW Num US
21.017 M2 Speed Controller Proportional Gain Kp1 0.0000 to 200.0000 0.0300 RW Num US
21.018 M2 Speed Controller Integral Gain Ki1 0.00 to 655.35 0.10 1.00 RW Num US
M2 Speed Controller Differential Feedback Gain
21.019 0.00000 to 0.65535 0.00000 RW Num US
Kd1
21.020 M2 Position Feedback Phase Angle 0.0 to 359.9 ° RW Num ND US
P1 Slot 1 (2), P2 Slot 1 (3),
P1 Slot 2 (4),
21.021 M2 Motor Control Feedback Select P1 Drive (0) RW Txt US
P2 Slot 2 (5), P1 Slot 3 (6),
P2 Slot 3 (7), P1 Slot 4 (8),
P2 Slot 4 (9)
21.022 M2 Current Controller Kp Gain 0 to 30000 20 150 RW Num US
21.023 M2 Current Controller Ki Gain 0 to 30000 40 2000 RW Num US
21.024 M2 Stator Inductance 0.00 to 5000.00 mH 0.00 mH RW Num RA US
0.0 to
21.025 M2 Saturation Breakpoint 1 50.0 % RW Num US
100.0 %
0.0 to
100.0 %
±VM_MOTOR2_ ±VM_MOTOR
21.027 M2 Motoring Current Limit 165.0 % 175.0 % 0.0 RW Num RA US
CURRENT_LIMIT % 2_CURRENT_
LIMIT
±VM_MOTOR
±VM_MOTOR2_
21.028 M2 Regenerating Current Limit 2_CURRENT_ 165.0 % 175.0 % 0.0 RW Num RA US
CURRENT_LIMIT %
LIMIT
±VM_MOTOR
±VM_MOTOR2_
21.029 M2 Symmetrical Current Limit 2_CURRENT_ 165.0 % 175.0 % 0.0 RW Num RA US
CURRENT_LIMIT %
LIMIT
21.032 M2 Current Reference Filter Time Constant 1 0.0 to 25.0 ms 0.0 ms RW Num US
21.033 M2 Low Speed Thermal Protection Mode 0 to 1 0 RW Num US
21.034 M2 Current Controller Mode Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
21.035 M2 Load Compensation Param 1 0 to 1000 0 RW Num US
21.036 M2 Load Compensation Param 2 0 to 500 0 RW Num US
21.039 M2 Motor Thermal Time Constant 2 1.0 to 3000.0 s 89.0 s RW Num US
21.040 M2 Motor Thermal Time Constant 2 Scaling 0 to 100 % 0% RW Num US
0.0 to
100.0 %
0.0 to
100.0 %
0.00 to 0.00 to
21.043 M2 Torque Per Amp 1.60 Nm/A RO Num ND NC PT
500.00 500.00 Nm/A
Off (0) or
21.046 M2 Inverted Motor Saturation Characteristic Off (0) RW Bit US
On (1)
0.0 to
21.047 M2 Low Speed Sensorless Mode Current Limit 20.0 % RW Num RA US
1000.0 %

Issue Number: 3
Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
0.000 to
21.048 M2 No-load Lq 0.0 RW Num RA US
500.000 mH
M2 Iq Test Current For Inductance
21.051 0 to 200 % 0% RW Num US
Measurement
21.053 M2 Phase Offset At Iq Test Current 0.0 to 359 ° 0.0 ° RW Num RA US
0.00 to
21.054 M2 Lq At Defined Iq Test Current 0.000 mH RW Num RA US
500.00 Nm/A
M2 Id Test Current For Inductance
21.058 -100 to 0 % 0% RW Num US
Measurement
0.000 to
21.060 M2 Lq at the defined Id test current 0.000 mH RW Num RA US
500.000 mH
21.066 M2 Torque Ripple Compensation Magnitude 1 0.0 to 100.0 % 0.00 % RW Num US
21.067 M2 Torque Ripple Compensation Phase 1 0.0 to 359 ° 0.0 ° RW Num US

Issue Number: 3
11.20 Menu 22: Additional Menu 0 set-up

Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
22.001 Parameter 00.001 Set-up 0.000 to 59.999 1.007 RW Num PT US
22.007 Parameter 00.007 Set-up 0.000 to 59.999 5.014 3.010 RW Num PT US
22.033 Parameter 00.033 Set-up 0.000 to 59.999 6.009 5.016 0.000 RW Num PT US

Issue Number: 3
Range( ) Default( )
Parameter Type
11.21 Menu 24: Ethernet status and monitoring

Range Default
Parameter Type
24.001 Module ID 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT
24.003 Hardware Version 0.00 to 99.99 RO Num ND NC PT
Bootldr-Update (-2), Bootldr-Idle (-1),
24.006 Status RO Txt ND NC PT
Initializing (0), OK (1), Config (2), Error (3)
24.007 Reset Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
24.008 Default Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
24.009 Active Alarm Bits 0000000000000000 to 1111111111111111 0000000000000000 RO Bin NC
24.010 Active IP Address 128.0.0.0 to 127.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 RO IP NC PT
IP IP address Mac Mac address Date Date parameter Time Time parameter SMP Slot,menu,parameter Chr Character parameter Ver Version number

Issue Number: 3
11.21.1 Slot 4 Menu 0: Ethernet status and monitoring

Range Default
Parameter Type
24.001 Module ID 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT
24.003 Hardware Version 0.00 to 99.99 RO Num ND NC PT
Bootldr-Update (-2), Bootldr-Idle (-1),
24.006 Status RO Txt ND NC PT
Initializing (0), OK (1), Config (2), Error (3)
24.007 Reset Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
24.008 Default Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
24.009 Active Alarm Bits 0000000000000000 to 1111111111111111 0000000000000000 RO Bin NC
24.010 Active IP Address 128.0.0.0 to 127.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 RO IP NC PT
11.21.2 Slot 4 Menu 2: Ethernet configuration

Range Default
Parameter Type
Initializing (0), Links Down (1),
4.02.003 Network Status DHCP In Progress (2), No Address (3), RO Txt ND NC PT
Ready (4), Active (5)
4.02.004 Network Message Count 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT
4.02.005 DHCP Enable Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Num US
4.02.006 IP Address 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 192.168.001.100 RW IP US
4.02.007 Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.000 RW IP US
4.02.008 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 192.168.1.254 RW IP US
4.02.009 Primary DNS 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 RW IP US
4.02.010 Secondary DNS 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 RW IP US
4.02.011 MAC Address 00:00:00:00:00:00 to FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF RO Mac ND NC PT
4.02.020 Priority Protocol None (0), Modbus TCP (1), EtherNet/IP (2) 0 RW Txt US
4.02.021 Web Server Enable Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
4.02.022 Web Server Port 0 to 65535 80 RW Num US
4.02.024 Ethernet MTU 158 to 1500 Bytes 1500 Bytes RW Num US
Switch (0), Gateway (1),
4.02.025 Gateway Mode Switch (0) RW Txt US
Strict Gateway (2)
4.02.030 VLAN Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
4.02.031 VLAN ID 0 to 255 0 RW Num US
4.02.035 Non cyclic enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
4.02.036 Non cyclic base parameter 0.00.000 to 0.59.999 0.00.000 RW SMP US

Issue Number: 3
11.21.3 Slot 4 Menu 9: Resources

Range Default
Parameter Type
4.09.001 Cyclic Tx Links Free 0 to 255 RO Num ND NC
4.09.002 Cyclic Rx Links Free 0 to 255 RO Num ND NC
4.09.003 Fieldbus Links Free 0 to 255 RO Num ND NC
4.09.004 Cyclic Mappings Free 0 to 255 RO Num ND NC
4.09.009 Idle Task % Free 0 to 255 % RO Num ND NC
4.09.010 Synchronous Task % Free 0 to 255 % RO Num ND NC
4.09.020 Synchronous Task % Worst Free 0 to 255 % RO Num ND NC
4.09.030 PCB Temperature -128 to 127 °C RO Num

Issue Number: 3
11.21.4 Slot 4 Menu 10: Easy Mode

Range Default
Parameter Type
4.10.001 Enable Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
4.10.002 Reset Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit
4.10.003 Default Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit
4.10.004 Message Rate 0 to 100 ms 0 ms RW Num US
4.10.010 Tx1 Link Profile 0 to 0 0 RW Num US
4.10.011 Tx1 Link Number 0 to 255 0 RW Num US
4.10.012 Tx1 Source Parameter 0.00.000 to 4.99.999 0.00.000 RW Num PT US
4.10.013 Tx1 Parameter Count 0 to 32 0 RW Num US
Unicast (0), Broadcast (1), Muliticast1 (2),
4.10.014 Tx1 Link Transmission Type Multicast2 (3), Multicast3 (4), Unicast (0) RW Txt US
Multicast4 (5)
4.10.015 Tx1 Destination Address 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 RW IP DE US
Invalid profile (-16), Invalid mapping (-15),

Read only param (-14), Timeout (-8),
4.10.019 Tx1 Link Status In error (-7), Link num in use (-6), OK (0) RO Txt
Not editable (-5), Invalid link num (-4), Invalid args (-3),
Too many links (-2), Out of memory (-1), OK (0)

Unicast (0), Broadcast (1), Muliticast1 (2), Multicast2 (3),

4.10.024 Tx2 Link Transmission Type
Multicast3 (4), Multicast4 (5)
Unicast (0) RW Txt US
Invalid profile (-16), Invalid mapping (-15), Read only

param (-14), Timeout (-8),

Unicast (0), Broadcast (1), Muliticast1 (2), Multicast2 (3),
4.10.034 Tx3 Link Transmission Type
Multicast3 (4), Multicast4 (5)
Unicast (0) RW Txt US

4.10.040 Rx1 Link Profile 0 to 0 0 RW Num US

4.10.041 Rx1 Link Number 0 to 255 0 RW Num US
4.10.042 Rx1 Destination Parameter 0 to 4.99.999 0.00.000 RW Num DE US
4.10.043 Rx1 Parameter Count 0 to 32 0.000 RW Num US
Direct (0), Multicast1 (1), Multicast2 (2),
4.10.044 Rx1 Source Type
Multicast3 (3), Multicast4 (4), Local (5)
Direct (0) RW Txt US
4.10.045 Rx1 Timeout 0 to 65535 ms 100 ms RW Num US

4.10.046 Rx1 Timeout Action Trip (0), Clear output (1), Hold last (2) Trip (0) RW Txt US
This slot (0), Slot 1 (1), Slot 2 (2),
4.10.047 Rx1 Timeout Event Destination
Slot 3 (3), Slot 4 (4)
This slot (0) RW Txt US
No event (0), Event (1), Event1 (2),
4.10.048 Rx1 Timeout Event Type
Event2 (3), Event3 (4)
No event (0) RW Txt US

4.10.049 Rx1 Link Status In error (-7), Link num in use (-6), OK (0) RO Txt

4.10.052 Rx2 Destination Parameter 0 to 4.99.999 0.00.000 RW Num DE US
4.10.053 Rx2 Parameter Count 0 to 32 0 RW Num US

Issue Number: 3
Range Default
Parameter Type

Slot 3 (3), Slot 4 (4)


4.10.062 Rx3 Destination Parameter 0.00.000 to 4.99.999 0.00.000 RW Num DE US
4.10.063 Rx3 Parameter Count 0 to 32 0.000 RW Num US

Slot 3 (3), Slot 4 (4)


Issue Number: 3
11.21.5 Slot 4 Menu 11: Synchronization

Range Default
Parameter Type
4.11.001 Preferred Sync Master 0 to 4 1 RW Num US
4.11.002 Master Clock Domain 0 to 3 0 RW Num US
4.11.005 Grandmaster MAC Address 00:00:00:00:00:00 to FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF RO Mac ND NC PT
4.11.006 Synchronization Jitter From Grandmaster -2147483648 to 2147483647 ns RO Num ND NC PT
4.11.007 Synchronization Jitter Threshold 10 to 4294967295 1000 RW Num US
4.11.008 Module Synchronized Flag Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RO Bit
4.11.009 Inhibit Drive Synchronization Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
4.11.010 PTP Date 00-00-00 to 31-12-99 RO Date ND NC PT
4.11.011 PTP Time 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 RO Time ND NC PT
4.11.013 Network Transport Layer Select 802.3 (0), UDP (1) UDP (1) RW Txt US
4.11.014 1 Step Clock Correction Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
4.11.015 PTP Delay Measurement Select E2E DELAY (0), P2P DELAY (1) P2P DELAY (1) RW Txt US
4.11.016 PTP Sync Rate -4 to 4 -2 RW Num US
4.11.020 Network Error Count 0 to 4294967295 RO Num ND NC PT
MASTER (0), PRODUCER (1),
4.11.022 Interoption Sync Status RO Txt ND NC
INDEPENDENT (2)
4.11.030 Tx1 Link Maximum Network Delay 0 to 100 ms 0 ms RW Num US
4.11.040 Rx1 Late Synchronization Frame Action Off (0), Trip (1), Do not use (2), Use (3) Off (0) RW Txt US
4.11.041 Rx1 Late Synchronization Frame Destination This slot (0) RW Txt US
Slot 3 (3), Slot 4 (4)
4.11.042 Rx1 Late Synchronization Frame Event No event (0) RW Txt US
Slot 3 (3), Slot 4 (4)
Slot 3 (3), Slot 4 (4)

Issue Number: 3
11.21.6 Slot 4 Menu 15: Modbus

Range Default
Parameter Type
4.15.001 Enable Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
No error (0), Port in use (1),
4.15.004 Modbus Configuration Error RO Txt
Timeout event (2)
4.15.005 Modbus Listening Port 0 to 65535 502 RW Num
4.15.006 Maximum Connections 0 to 4 2 RW Num US
4.15.007 Maximum Priority Connections 0 to 4 1 RW Num US
4.15.008 Maximum Connections Per Client 1 to 4 2 RW Num US
4.15.009 Modbus Timeout 1 to 10000 ms 100 ms RW Num US
4.15.010 Modbus Timeout Action Trip (0), No action (1) No action (1) RW Txt US
4.15.011 Modbus Timeout Event Destination This slot (0), Slot 1 (1), Slot 2 (2), Slot 3 (3), Slot 4 (4) This slot (0) RW Txt US
No event (0), Trigger Event (1), Trigger Event 1 (2),
4.15.012 Modbus Timeout Event Type Trigger Event 2 (3), Trigger Event 3 (4), No event (0) RW Txt US
Trigger Event 4 (5)
4.15.013 Modbus Register Addressing Mode Standard (0), Modified (1) Standard (0) RW Txt US
4.15.020 Priority Connection 1 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 RW IP US

Issue Number: 3
11.21.7 Slot 4 Menu 20: EtherNet/IP

Range Default
Parameter Type
4.20.001 Enable EtherNet/IP Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US

No error (0), RPI event dst (1), RPI event type (2), IDLE
4.20.004 Configuration Error event dst (3), IDLE event type (4), Input mapping (5), RO Txt ND
Output mapping (6), In cons trig pr (7), Out cons trig pr (8)
4.20.007 Cyclic Data Transfers Per Second 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT

Trip (0), Send fit values (1), Clear output (2),
4.20.011 RPI Timeout Action Hold last (3) RW Txt US
Hold last (3), No Action (4)
4.20.012 RPI Timeout Event Destination This slot (0), Slot 1 (1), Slot 2 (2), Slot 3 (3), Slot 4 (4) This slot (0) RW Txt US
No event (0), Trigger Event (1), Trigger Event 1 (2), Trigger

4.20.013 RPI Timeout Event Type No event (0) RW Txt US
Event 2 (3), Trigger Event 3 (4), Trigger Event 4 (5)
Trip (0), Send fit values (1), Clear output (2),

4.20.015 PLC Idle Action No Action (4) RW Txt US
Hold last (3), No Action (4)
4.20.016 PLC Idle Event Destination This slot (0), Slot 1 (1), Slot 2 (2), Slot 3 (3), Slot 4 (4) This slot (0) RW Txt US
No event (0), Trigger Event (1), Trigger Event 1 (2), Trigger

4.20.017 PLC Idle Event Type No event (0) RW Txt US
Event 2 (3), Trigger Event 3 (4), Trigger Event 4 (5)
100-Primaryl (0), 70-BscSpdCtrll (1), 71-ExtSpedCtrll (2),

4.20.018 Active Input Assembly Object 100-Primaryl (0) RO Txt
72-SpdTqCtrll (3), 73-ExtSpdTqCtrll (4)
101-Primaryl (0), 20-BscSpdCtrll (1), 21-ExtSpedCtrll (2),

4.20.019 Active Output Assembly Object 101-Primaryl (0) RO Txt
22-SpdTqCtrll (3), 23-ExtSpdTqCtrll (4)
4.20.020 Input Assembly Object Size 4 to 80 8 RW Num

4.20.021 Output Assembly Object Size 4 to 80 8 RW Num US
4.20.024 Input Assembly Object Process Time 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC
4.20.025 Output Assembly Object Process Time 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC
Input Assembly Object Consistency
4.20.026 Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
Enable
4.20.027 0.00.000 to 4.99.999 0.00.000 RW Num
Trigger Parameter
4.20.028 Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
Enable
Output Assembly Object Consistency
4.20.029 0.00.000 to 4.99.999 0.00.000 RW Num US
Trigger Parameter
4.20.030 Custom Vender ID 257 - CT (0), 553 - CT America (1) 257-CT (0) RW Txt
4.20.031 Custom product code 0 to 65535 0 RW Num US
4.20.032 Custom product revision code 0 to 65535 0 RW Num US
4.20.033 Actual Product Code 0 to 65535 0 RO Num
4.20.034 Actual Product Revision 0 to 65535 0
2-FC DC (0), 6-WRI (1), 7-SCI (2), 9-Sin PM BL (3),
4.20.040 Type of Motor 1 7-SCI (2) RO Txt PT US
10-Trap PM BL (4)
2-FC DC (0), 6-WRI (1), 7-SCI (2), 9-Sin PM BL (3),
4.20.041 Type of Motor 2 7-SCI (2) RO Txt PT US
10-Trap PM BL (4)

Issue Number: 3
11.21.8 Menu 21 EtherNet/IP In Mappings

Range Default
Parameter Type
4.21.001 Input Mapping Parameter 1 0.00.000 to 4.99.999 0.10.040 RW Num DE PT US
11.21.9 Menu 22 EtherNet/IP Out Mappings

Range Default
Parameter Type
4.22.001 Output Mapping Parameter 1 0.00.000 to 4.99.999 0.06.042 RW Num DE PT US

Issue Number: 3
11.21.10 Menu 23 EtherNet/IP Fault Values

Range Default
Parameter Type
4.23.001 Output Fault Value 1 -2147483648 to 2147483647 0 RW Num PT US

Issue Number: 3
12 Technical data
12.1 Drive technical data
12.1.1 Power and current ratings (Derating for switching frequency and temperature)
For a full explanation of ‘Normal Duty’ and ‘Heavy Duty’ refer to section 2.1 Introduction on page 10.
Table 12-1 Maximum permissible continuous output current @ 40 °C (104 °F) ambient
Nominal Maximum permissible continuous output current Nominal Maximum permissible continuous output current (A)
Model rating (A) for the following switching frequencies rating for the following switching frequencies
2 3 4 6 8 12 16 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
kW hp kW hp
kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz
200 V
03200050 1.1 1.5 6.6 0.75 1.0 5.0
03200066 1.5 2.0 8.0 1.1 1.5 6.6
03200080 2.2 3.0 11.0 10.9 9.0 1.5 2.0 8.0 7.8 6.6
03200106 3.0 3.0 12.7 10.9 9.0 2.2 3.0 10.6 10.4 9.4 7.8 6.6
04200137 4.0 5.0 18.0 3.0 3.0 13.7
04200185 5.5 7.5 25.0 24.2 22.0 4.0 5.0 18.5 17.7
05200250 7.5 10.0 30.0 28.2 24.6 18.3 14.1 5.5 7.5 25.0 22.7 20.2 16.0 13.0
06200330 11.0 15.0 50.0 42.5 7.5 10.0 33.0
06200440 15.0 20.0 58.0 53.9 42.5 11.0 15.0 44.0 41.4 33.4
07200610
07200750
07200830
08201160
08201320
400 V
03400025 1.1 1.5 3.4 0.75 1.0 2.5
03400031 1.5 2.0 4.5 1.1 1.5 3.1
03400045 2.2 3.0 6.2 5.2 1.5 2.0 4.5 3.7
03400062 3.0 5.0 7.7 6.2 5.2 2.2 3.0 6.2 6.0 5.7 4.5 3.7
03400078 4.0 5.0 10.4 8.8 6.4 4.9 3.0 5.0 7.8 7.7 6.5 4.8 3.7
03400100 5.5 7.5 12.3 10.6 8.8 6.4 4.9 4.0 5.0 10.0 9.2 7.7 6.5 4.8 3.7
04400150 7.5 10.0 18.5 14.6 11.1 5.5 10.0 15.0 14.4 11.5 9.4
04400172 11.0 15.0 24.0 21.8 19.2 14.6 11.2 7.5 10.0 17.2 16.1 14.4 11.5 9.4
05400270 15.0 20.0 30.0 27.0 23.7 18.3 14.1 11.0 20.0 27.0 25.6 23.7 21.0 18.6 14.8 12.1
05400300 15.0 20.0 31.0 27.9 22.3 18.9 15.0 20.0 30.0 25.5 22.5 18.3 15.6
06400350 18.5 25.0 38.0 32.3 15.0 25.0 35.0 32.2 25.6
06400420 22.0 30.0 48.0 42.2 32.6 18.5 30.0 42.0 37.4 32.3 25.6
06400470 30.0 40.0 63.0 58.6 48.5 42.2 32.8 22.0 30.0 47.0 43.7 37.4 32.4 25.6
07400660
07400770
07401000
08401340
08401570
575 V
05500030 2.2 3.0 3.9 1.5 2.0 3.0
05500040 4.0 5.0 6.1 2.2 3.0 4.0

Issue Number: 3
Nominal Maximum permissible continuous output current Nominal Maximum permissible continuous output current (A)
Model rating (A) for the following switching frequencies rating for the following switching frequencies
2 3 4 6 8 12 16 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
kW hp kW hp
05500069 5.5 7.5 10.0 4.0 5.0 6.9
06500100 7.50 10.0 12.0 5.5 7.5 10.0
06500150 11.0 15.0 17.0 7.5 10.0 15.0
06500190 15.0 20.0 22.0 20.5 11.0 15.0 19.0 15.6
06500230 18.5 25.0 27.0 26.2 20.5 15.0 20.0 23.0 20.0 15.6
06500290 22.0 30.0 34.0 31.3 26.2 20.5 18.5 25.0 29.0 23.8 20.0 15.6
06500350 30.0 40.0 43.0 39.6 31.3 26.2 20.5 22.0 30.0 35.0 34.0 29.8 23.8 20.0 15.6
07500440
07500550
08500630
08500860
690 V
07600190
07600240
07600290
07600380
07600440
07600540
08600630
08600860

Issue Number: 3
Table 12-2 Maximum permissible continuous output current @ 40 °C (104 °F) ambient with high IP insert installed
Maximum permissible continuous output current (A) Maximum permissible continuous output current (A)
Model for the following switching frequencies for the following switching frequencies
2 3 4 6 8 12 16 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
200 V
03200050 6.6 5.0
03200066 8.0 6.6
03200080 11.0 9.7 8.0 6.9
03200106 12.7 11.0 9.7 10.6 10.4 9.3 8.0 6.9
04200137 18.0 16.3 14.2 13.1 13.7 13.2
04200185 24.7 22.5 20.7 18.2 16.5 14.2 13.2 18.5 18.1 16.2 14.2 13.1
05200250 17.1 15.6 14.4 12.6 11.4 9.6 8.7 17.0 15.7 14.5 12.7 11.5 9.8 9.8
400 V
03400025 3.4 3.3 2.5
03400031 4.5 4.4 4.1 3.6 3.3 3.1
03400045 5.1 4.9 4.7 4.4 4.1 3.6 3.3 4.5 4.4 4.1 3.6 3.2
03400062 7.7 6.2 5.2 6.2 5.6 4.5 3.8
03400078 10.4 9.9 9.0 6.4 4.8 7.8 6.6 4.8 3.6
03400100 12.3 11.9 11.1 10.0 9.0 6.4 4.8 10.0 9.4 7.8 6.6 4.8 3.6
04400150 8.9 8.7 8.3 7.0 8.7 8.4 7.0
04400172 8.6 8.4 6.9 8.7 8.4 7.0
05400270 17.1 15.6 14.4 12.6 11.4 9.6 8.7 17.2 15.6 14.5 12.6 11.3 9.7 8.6
05400300 19.8 19.5 18.9 17.6 16.4 13.9 11.7 19.8 19.5 18.9 17.7 16.2 13.8 11.7
575 V
05500030 3.9 3.0
05500040 6.1 4.0
05500069 10.0 6.9

Issue Number: 3
Table 12-3 Maximum permissible continuous output current @ 50 °C (122 °F)

2 3 4 6 8 12 16 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
200 V
03200050 6.6 5.0
03200066 8.0 6.6 6.0
03200080 11.0 9.9 8.3 8.0 7.2 6.1
03200106 12.7 12.6 12.2 11.7 9.9 8.3 10.6 10.6 9.5 8.6 7.2 6.1
04200137 18.0 13.7
04200185 22.2 18.5 17.9 16.2 14.8
05200250 26.1 25.5 24.6 23.4 21.3 15.9 12.3 25.0 23.5 20.7 18.5 14.7 11.7
06200330 50.0 49.0 38.0 33.0
06200440 58.0 55.7 49.0 38.0 44.0 42.2 37.8 30.0
07200610
07200750
07200830
400 V
03400025 3.4 2.5
03400031 4.5 3.1
03400045 6.2 5.9 5.5 4.7 4.5 4.2 3.4
03400062 7.6 7.2 6.9 6.4 5.9 5.5 4.7 6.2 6.0 5.2 4.2 3.4
03400078 10.4 9.4 8.1 5.8 4.4 7.8 7.1 5.9 4.3 3.4
03400100 11.9 11.2 10.5 9.4 7.8 5.8 4.4 10.0 9.5 8.5 7.1 5.9 4.3 3.4
04400150 18.1 17.5 17.0 16.4 15.9 12.3 9.4 15.0 14.8 13.2 10.6 8.7
04400172 18.0 17.5 17.0 16.3 15.8 12.2 9.3 17.2 16.8 14.8 13.2 10.6 8.6
05400270 30.0 28.8 24.6 21.3 15.9 12.3 25.6 23.7 22.1 19.4 17.0 13.7 10.5
05400300 31.0 30.3 28.8 26.0 23.5 19.2 15.5 30.0 27.6 23.4 20.7 16.8 14.4
06400350 38.0 29.3 35.0 34.0 29.4 22.8
06400420 48.0 44.6 38.0 29.3 42.0 42.0 40.3 34.0 29.4 23.1
06400470 59.0 59.2 52.9 44.7 38.4 29.3 47.0 42.0 38.0 32.0 29.4 23.1
07400660
07400770
07401000
575 V
05500030 3.9 3.0
05500040 6.1 4.0
05500069 10.0 6.9
06500100 12.0 10.0
06500150 17.0 15.0 14.0
06500190 22.0 18.3 19.0 14.1
06500230 27.0 23.5 18.3 23.0 21.6 19.0 14.1
06500290 34.0 28.2 23.5 18.3 29.0 27.3 21.8 19.0 14.1
06500350 43.0 41.7 36.1 28.2 23.7 18.3 35.0 31.2 27.3 21.8 19.0 14.1
07500440
07500550

Issue Number: 3
2 3 4 6 8 12 16 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
690 V
07600190
07600240
07600290
07600380
07600440
07600540

Issue Number: 3
12.1.2 Power dissipation

Table 12-4 Losses @ 40°C (104°F) ambient
Nominal Drive losses (w) taking into account any Nominal Drive losses (w) taking into account any
Model rating current derating for the given conditions rating current derating for the given conditions
2 3 4 6 8 12 16 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
kW hp kW hp
200 V
03200050 1.1 1.5 93 95 99 104 113 122 0.75 1.0 78 80 84 87 94 101

03200066 1.5 2.0 100 102 107 113 122 133 1.1 1.5 89 91 94 99 108 116
03200080 2.2 123 126 133 139 147 135 1.5 2.0 97 99 105 109 114 106
3.0
03200106 3.0 136 141 149 158 149 138 2.2 3.0 115 118 120 115 108 102
04200137 4.0 5.0 3.0 3.0
04200185 5.5 7.5 4.0 5.0
06200330 11 15 394 413 452 490 483 7.5 10 277 290 316 342 394
06200440 15 20 463 484 528 531 483 11 15 366 382 417 424 393
400 V
03400025 1.1 1.5 80 84 94 103 123 141 0.75 1.0 79 76 83 92 108 124
03400031 1.5 2.0 88 92 104 115 137 160 1.1 1.5 69 73 82 91 107 124
03400045 2.2 3.0 104 112 125 139 167 182 1.5 2.0 83 88 99 109 131 142
03400062 3.0 114 122 137 153 166 171 2.2 3.0 98 105 118 131 131 141
5.0
03400078 4.0 145 158 180 173 164 166 3.0 5.0 115 125 135 131 134 135
03400100 5.0 7.5 160 177 172 168 167 166 4.0 5.0 134 131 129 131 134 135
04400150
04400172
06400350 18.5 25 417 456 532 613 679 15 25 389 424 498 532 559
06400420 22 30 515 561 657 670 679 18.5 30 455 497 520 523 551
06400470 30 40 656 677 657 665 681 22 30 511 516 520 525 551
575 V
06500100 7.5 10 215 239 287 334 5.5 7.5 187 208 249 291
06500150 11 15 284 315 376 438 7.5 10 265 294 351 410
06500190 15 20 362 399 484 568 11 15 317 350 418 496

06500230 18.5 25 448 505 596 682 15 20 382 421 508 523
06500290 22 30 18.5 25
06500350 30 40 22 30

Issue Number: 3
Table 12-5 Losses @ 40°C (104°F) ambient with high IP insert installed
Drive losses (W) taking into consideration any Drive losses (W) taking into consideration any
Model current derating for the given conditions current derating for the given conditions
2 3 4 6 8 12 16 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
200 V
03200050
03200066
03200080
03200106
04200137
04200185
05200250
400 V
03400025
03400031
03400045
03400062
03400078
03400100
04400150
04400172
05400270
05400300
575 V
05500030
05500040
05500069

Issue Number: 3
Table 12-6 Losses @ 50°C (122°F) ambient
Drive losses (w) taking into account any current Drive losses (w) taking into account any current
Model derating for the given conditions derating for the given conditions
2 3 4 6 8 12 16 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
200 V
03200050
03200066
03200080
03200106
04200137
04200185
06200330
06200440
400 V
03400025
03400031
03400045
03400062
03400078
03400100
04400150
04400172
06400350
06400420
06400470
575 V
06500100
06500150
06500190
06500230
06500290
06500350
Table 12-7 Power losses from the front of the drive when through- 12.1.3 Supply requirements
panel mounted AC supply voltage:
200 V drive: 200 V to 240 V ±10 %
Frame size Power loss 400 V drive: 380 V to 480 V ±10 %
3 575 V drive: 500 V to 575 V ±10 %
4 690 V drive: 500 V to 690 V ±10 %
5 Number of phases: 3
6 Maximum supply imbalance: 2 % negative phase sequence (equivalent
7 to 3 % voltage imbalance between phases).
8 Frequency range: 45 to 66 Hz
For UL compliance only, the maximum supply symmetrical fault current
must be limited to 100 kA

Issue Number: 3
12.1.4 Line reactors Low voltage capacitors cannot be reformed due to their location in the
Input line reactors reduce the risk of damage to the drive resulting from circuit and thus may require replacing if the drive is stored for a period of
poor phase balance or severe disturbances on the supply network. 2 years or greater without power being applied.
Where line reactors are to be used, reactance values of approximately 2 It is therefore recommended that drives are powered up for a minimum
% are recommended. Higher values may be used if necessary, but may of 1 hour after every 2 years of storage.
result in a loss of drive output (reduced torque at high speed) because of This process allows the drive to be stored for a further 2 years.
the voltage drop.
12.1.8 Altitude
For all drive ratings, 2 % line reactors permit drives to be used with a Altitude range: 0 to 3,000 m (9,900 ft), subject to the following
supply unbalance of up to 3.5 % negative phase sequence (equivalent to conditions:
5% voltage imbalance between phases).
1,000 m to 3,000 m (3,300 ft to 9,900 ft) above sea level: de-rate the
Severe disturbances may be caused by the following factors, for example: maximum output current from the specified figure by 1% per 100 m
• Power factor correction equipment connected close to the drive. (330 ft) above 1,000 m (3,300 ft)
• Large DC drives having no or inadequate line reactors connected to For example at 3,000 m (9,900 ft) the output current of the drive would
the supply. have to be de-rated by 20 %.
• Across the line (DOL) started motor(s) connected to the supply such
that when any of these motors are started, the voltage dip exceeds 12.1.9 IP / UL Rating
20 %. The drive is rated to IP20 pollution degree 2 (dry, non-conductive
contamination only) (NEMA 1). However, it is possible to configure the
Such disturbances may cause excessive peak currents to flow in the
drive to achieve IP65 rating (NEMA 12) at the rear of the heatsink for
input power circuit of the drive. This may cause nuisance tripping, or in
through-panel mounting (some current derating is required).
extreme cases, failure of the drive.
In order to achieve the high IP rating at the rear of the heatsink with drive
Drives of low power rating may also be susceptible to disturbance when
sizes 3, 4 and 5 it is necessary to seal a heatsink vent by installing the
connected to supplies with a high rated capacity.
high IP insert.
Line reactors are particularly recommended for use with the following
The IP rating of a product is a measure of protection against ingress and
drive models when one of the above factors exists, or when the supply
contact to foreign bodies and water. It is stated as IP XX, where the two
capacity exceeds 175 kVA:
digits (XX) indicate the degree of protection provided as shown in Table
03200050, 03200066, 03200080, 03200106,
12-8.
03400025, 03400031, 03400045, 03400062
Table 12-8 IP Rating degrees of protection
Model sizes 03400078 to 07600540 have an internal DC choke and
082001160 to 08600860 have internal AC line chokes so they do not First digit Second digit
require AC line reactors except for cases of excessive phase unbalance Protection against contact and Protection against ingress of water
or extreme supply conditions. ingress of foreign bodies
When required, each drive must have its own reactor(s). Three individual 0 No protection 0 No protection
reactors or a single three-phase reactor should be used. Protection against large
Reactor current ratings foreign bodies φ > 50 mm Protection against vertically
1 1
The current rating of the line reactors should be as follows: (large area contact with the falling drops of water
hand)
Continuous current rating:
Not less than the continuous input current rating of the drive Protection against medium
Protection against spraywater
2 size foreign bodies φ > 12 mm 2
Repetitive peak current rating: (up to 15 ° from the vertical)
(finger)
Not less than twice the continuous input current rating of the drive
Protection against small
Protection against spraywater
12.1.5 Motor requirements 3 foreign bodies φ > 2.5 mm 3
(up to 60 ° from the vertical)
No. of phases: 3 (tools, wires)
Maximum voltage: Protection against granular
Protection against splashwater
200 V drive: 240 V 4 foreign bodies φ > 1mm (tools, 4
(from all directions)
400 V drive: 480 V wires)
575 V drive: 575 V Protection against dust Protection against heavy
690 V drive: 690 V 5 deposit, complete protection 5 splash water (from all
against accidental contact. directions, at high pressure)
12.1.6 Temperature, humidity and cooling method Protection against dust
Protection against deckwater
Ambient temperature operating range: 6 ingress, complete protection 6
(e.g. in heavy seas)
- 20 °C to 50 °C (- 4 °F to 122 °F). against accidental contact.
Output current derating must be applied at ambient temperatures 7 - 7 Protection against immersion
>40 °C (104 °F). 8 - 8 Protection against submersion
Cooling method: Forced convection
Table 12-9 UL enclosure ratings
Maximum humidity: 95 % non-condensing at 40 °C (104 °F)
UL rating Description
12.1.7 Storage
Enclosures are intended for indoor use, primarily
-40 °C (-40 °F) to +50 °C (122 °F) for long term storage, or to +70 °C
Type 1 to provide a degree of protection against limited
(158 °F) for short term storage.
amounts of falling dirt.
Storage time is 2 years.
Enclosures are intended for indoor use, primarily
Electrolytic capacitors in any electronic product have a storage period Type 12 to provide a degree of protection against dust,
after which they require reforming or replacing. falling dirt and dripping non-corrosive liquids.
The DC bus capacitors have a storage period of 10 years.
The low voltage capacitors on the control supplies typically have a
storage period of 2 years and are thus the limiting factor.

Issue Number: 3
12.1.10 Corrosive gasses The following data applies to the drive only; it does not include the
Concentrations of corrosive gases must not exceed the levels given in: performance of the source of the control signals.
• Table A2 of EN 50178:1998 Open loop resolution:
• Class 3C2 of IEC 60721-3-3 Preset frequency reference: 0.1 Hz
This corresponds to the levels typical of urban areas with industrial Precision frequency reference: 0.001 Hz
activities and/or heavy traffic, but not in the immediate neighborhood of Closed loop resolution
industrial sources with chemical emissions. Preset speed reference: 0.1 rpm
12.1.11 RoHS compliance Precision speed reference: 0.001 rpm
The drive meets EU directive 2002-95-EC for RoHS compliance. Analog input 1: 11 bit plus sign
Analog input 2: 11 bit plus sign
12.1.12 Vibration
Current:
Maximum recommended continuous vibration level 0.14 g r.m.s. broad-
The resolution of the current feedback is 10 bit plus sign.
band 5 to 200 Hz.
Accuracy: typical 2 %
NOTE
worst case 5 %
This is the limit for broad-band (random) vibration. Narrow-band
vibration at this level which coincides with a structural resonance could 12.1.17 Acoustic noise
result in premature failure. The heatsink fan generates the majority of the sound pressure level at 1 m
Bump Test produced by the drive. The heatsink fan on all drive sizes is a variable
Testing in each of three mutually perpendicular axes in turn. speed fan. The drive controls the speed at which the fan runs based on
Referenced standard:IEC 60068-2-27 the temperature of the heatsink and the drive's thermal model system.
Severity: 18 g, 6 ms, half sine Table 12-10 gives the acoustic noise produced by the drive for the
No. of Bumps: 600 (100 in each direction of each axis) heatsink fan running at the maximum and minimum speeds.
Random Vibration Test Table 12-10 Acoustic noise data
Testing in each of three mutually perpendicular axes in turn.
Max speed Min speed
Referenced standard:IEC 60068-2-64: Test Fh: Size
dBA dBA
Severity: 1.0 m²/s³ (0.01 g²/Hz) ASD from 5 to 20 Hz
-3 dB/octave from 20 to 200 Hz 3 35 30
Duration: 30 minutes in each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes. 4 40 35
Sinusoidal Vibration Test 5
Testing in each of three mutually perpendicular axes in turn. 6 48 40
Referenced standard: IEC 60068-2-6: Test Fc: 7
Frequency range: 5 to 500 Hz 8
Severity: 3.5 mm peak displacement from 5 to 9 Hz
10 m/s² peak acceleration from 9 to 200 Hz
15 m/s² peak acceleration from 200 to 500 Hz 12.1.18 Overall dimensions
Sweep rate: 1 octave/minute H Height including surface mounting brackets
Duration: 15 minutes in each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes. W Width
D Projection forward of panel when surface mounted
EN 61800-5-1:2007, Section 5.2.6.4. referring to IEC 60068-2-6 F Projection forward of panel when through-panel mounted
Frequency range: 10 to 150 Hz R Projection rear of panel when through-panel mounted
Amplitude: 10 to 57 Hz at 0.075 mm pk
Table 12-11 Overall drive dimensions
57 to 150 Hz at 1g p
Sweep rate: 1 octave/minute Dimension
Size
Duration: 10 sweep cycles per axis in each of 3 mutually H W D F R
perpendicular axes
382 mm 83 mm 67 mm
3
(15.04 in) (3.27 in) 200 mm 134 mm (2.64 in)
12.1.13 Starts per hour 391 mm 124 mm (7.87 in) (5.28 in) 66 mm
4
By electronic control: unlimited (15.39 in) (4.88 in) (2.59 in)
By interrupting the AC supply: ≤20 (equally spaced) 391 mm 143 mm 202 mm 135 mm 67 mm
5
(15.39 in) (5.63 in) (7.95 in) (5.32 in) (2.64 in)
12.1.14 Start up time
391 mm 210 mm 227 mm 131 mm 96 mm
This is the time taken from the moment of applying power to the drive, to 6
(15.39 in) (8.27 in) (8.94 in) (5.16 in) (3.78 in)
the drive being ready to run the motor:
557 mm 270 mm 279 mm 187 mm 92 mm
Sizes 3: 7
(21.93 in) (10.63 in) (10.98 in) (7.36 in) (3.62 in)
12.1.15 Output frequency / speed range 803 mm 310 mm 290 mm 190 mm 100 mm
8
In all operating modes (Open loop, RFC-A, RFC-S) the maximum output (31.61 in) (12.21 in) (11.42 in) (7.48 in) (3.94 in)
frequency is limited to 550 Hz.
12.1.16 Accuracy and resolution

Speed:
The absolute frequency and speed accuracy depends on the accuracy
of the crystal used with the drive microprocessor. The accuracy of the
crystal is 100 ppm, and so the absolute frequency/speed accuracy is
100 ppm (0.01 %) of the reference, when a preset speed is used. If an
analog input is used the absolute accuracy is further limited by the
absolute accuracy of the analog input.

Issue Number: 3
12.1.19 Weights
Table 12-12 Overall drive weights
Size Model kg lb
034300078, 034300100 4.5 9.9
3
All other variants 4.0 8.8
4 All variants 6.5 14.30
5 All variants 7.4 16.30
6 All variants 14 30.90
7 All variants 28 61.70
8
12.1.20 SAFE TORQUE OFF data

Data as verified by TÜV Rheinland:
According to EN ISO 13849-1:
PL = e
Category = 4
MTTFD = High
DCav = High
Mission Time and Proof Test Interval = 20 years
The calculated MTTFD for the complete STO function is:

STO1 2574 yr
STO2 2716 yr
According to EN 61800-5-2:
SIL = 3
PFH = 4.21 x 10-11 h-1
Logic levels comply with IEC 61131-2:2007 for type 1 digital inputs rated
at 24 V. Maximum level for logic low to achieve SIL3 and PL e 5 V and
0.5 mA.
12.1.21 Input current, fuse and cable size ratings

The input current is affected by the supply voltage and impedance.
Typical input current
The values of typical input current are given to aid calculations for power
flow and power loss.
The values of typical input current are stated for a balanced supply.
Maximum continuous input current
The values of maximum continuous input current are given to aid the
selection of cables and fuses. These values are stated for the worst case
condition with the unusual combination of stiff supply with bad balance.
The value stated for the maximum continuous input current would only
be seen in one of the input phases. The current in the other two phases
would be significantly lower.
The values of maximum input current are stated for a supply with a 2 %
negative phase-sequence imbalance and rated at the maximum supply
fault current given in Table 12-13.
Table 12-13 Supply fault current used to calculate maximum input currents
Model Symmetrical fault level (kA)
All 100

Issue Number: 3
Fuses
The AC supply to the drive must be installed with suitable protection against overload and short-circuits. Table 12.1.22 shows the
recommended fuse ratings. Failure to observe this requirement will cause risk of fire.
WARNING

Typical
continuous overload
input IEC UL / USA
Model input input
current
Class Class
A A A A A A A
03200050 8.2 10.4 15.8 16 16
20
03200066 9.9 12.6 20.9 20 CC
20 25 gG
03200080 14 17 25 or J
25 25
03200106 16 20 34 25
04200137 17 20 30 25 25 25 25 CC
gG
04200185 23 28 41 32 32 30 30 or J
CC
05200250 24 31 52 40 40 gG 40 40
or J
06200330 42 48 64 60 CC
63 63 gG 70
06200440 49 56 85 70 or J
07200610 58 67 109 80 80 80 80
CC
07200750 73 84 135 100 100 gG 100 100
or J
07200830 91 105 149 125 125 125 125
08201160 123 137 213 200 200
200 200 gR HSJ
08201320 149 166 243 225 225

Typical
continuous overload
input IEC UL / USA
Model input input
current
Class Class
A A A A A A A
03400025 5 5 7
03400031 6 7 9 10 10 10 10
03400045 8 9 13 CC
gG
03400062 11 21 or J
13
03400078 12 20 20 20 20 20
03400100 14 16 25
04400150 17 19 30 25 25 25 25 CC
gG
04400172 22 24 35 32 32 30 30 or J
05400270 26 29 52 CC
40 40 gG 35 35
05400300 27 30 58 or J
06400350 32 36 67 40
HSJ
06400420 41 46 80 63 63 gR 50 70
or DFJ
06400470 54 60 90 70
07400660 67 74 124 80 80
100 100 CC
07400770 80 88 145 gG 100 100
or J
07401000 96 105 188 125 125 125 125
08401340 137 155 267
250 250 gR 225 225 HSJ
08401570 164 177 303

Issue Number: 3

Fuse rating
Maximum Maximum
Typical input
continuous overload input IEC UL / USA
Model current
input current current
Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum
Class Class
A A A A A A A
05500030 4 4 7
10 10 CC
05500040 6 7 9 20 gG
or J
05500069 9 11 15 20 20
06500100 12 13 22 20 20
06500150 17 19 33 32 40 25 30
06500190 22 24 41 40 30 CC
gG
06500230 26 29 50 35 or J
50
06500290 33 37 63 63 40 50
06500350 41 47 76 63 50
07500440 41 45 75 50 50 50 50 CC
gG
07500550 57 62 94 80 80 80 80 or J
08500630 74 83 121 125 125 100 100
gR HSJ
08500860 92 104 165 160 160 150 150

Typical
continuous overload
input IEC UL / USA
Model input input
current
Class Class
A A A A A A A
07600190 18 20 32 25 25
07600240 23 26 41 32 30
50 50
07600290 28 31 49 40 35 CC
gG
07600380 36 39 65 or J
50 50
07600440 40 44 75
80 80
07600540 57 62 92 80 80
08600630 74 83 121 125 125 100 100
gR HSJ
08600860 92 104 165 160 160 150 150

Issue Number: 3
NOTE
Ensure cables used suit local wiring regulations.
The nominal cable sizes below are only a guide. The mounting and grouping of cables affects their current-carrying capacity, in some cases
smaller cables may be acceptable but in other cases a larger cable is required to avoid excessive temperature or voltage drop. Refer to
local wiring regulations for the correct size of cables.
CAUTION

mm2 AWG
Model
03200050
1.5 1.5 14 14
03200066
4 4 10 10
03200080
4 4 12 12
03200106
04200137 6 6 10 10
8 8 8 8
04200185 8 8 8 8
05200250 10 10 10 10 8 8 8 8
06200330 16 16 4 4
25 25 3 3
06200440 25 25 3 3
07200610 2 2
35 35
07200750 70 70 1 1/0 1 1/0
07200830 70 70 1/0 1/0
08201160 95 95 3/0 3/0
2 x 70 2 x 70 2x1 2x1
08201320 2 x 70 2 x 70 2x1 2x1

mm2 AWG
Model
03400025 18 18
03400031 1.5 1.5 16 16
03400045
4 4 10 10
03400062 14 14
03400078 2.5 2.5
03400100 12 12
04400150 6 6 10 10
8 8 8 8
04400172 8 8 8 8
05400270
6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8
05400300
06400350 10 10 6 6
06400420 16 25 16 25 4 3 4 3
06400470 25 25 3 3
07400660 35 35 1 1
07400770 50 70 50 70 2 1/0 2 1/0
07401000 70 70 1/0 1/0
08401340 2 x 50 2 x 50 2x1 2x1
2 x 70 2 x 70 2 x 1/0 2 x 1/0
08401570 2 x 70 2 x 70 2 x 1/0 2 x 1/0

Issue Number: 3

mm2 AWG
Model
05500030 0.75 0.75 16 16
05500040 1 1.5 1 1.5 14 16 14 16
05500069 1.5 1.5 14 14
06500100 2.5 2.5 14 14
06500150 4 4 10 10
06500190 6 6 10 10
25 25 3 3
06500230 8 8
10
06500290 10 6 6
06500350 16 6 6
07500440 16 16 4 4
25 25 3 3
07500550 25 25 3 3
08500630 35 35
50 50 1 1 1 1
08500860 50 50

mm2 AWG
Model
07600190 8 8
07600240 10 10 6 6
07600290 6 6
25 25 3 3
07600380 16 16 4 4
07600440 16 16 4 4
07600540 25 25 3 3
08600630 50 50 2 2
70 70 1/0 1/0
08600860 70 70 1/0 1/0
12.1.23 Maximum motor cable lengths

12.1.22 Protective ground cable ratings Table 12-23 Maximum motor cable lengths (200 V drives)
Table 12-22 Protective ground cable ratings 200 V Nominal AC supply voltage
Input phase Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of
Minimum ground conductor size
conductor size the following switching frequencies
Model
Either 10 mm2 or two conductors of the 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
same cross-sectional area as the input kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz
≤ 10 mm2 phase conductor (an additional ground 03200050 65 m (210 ft)
connection is provided on sizes 3, 4 and 5
03200066 100 m (330 ft)
for this purpose). 50 m 37 m
03200080 130 m (425 ft) 75 m
The same cross-sectional area as the input 100 m (165 ft) (120 ft)
> 10 mm2 and ≤ 16 mm2 150 m (245 ft)
phase conductor 03200106 200 m (660 ft) (330 ft)
(490 ft)
> 16 mm2 and ≤ 35 mm2 16 mm2 04200137 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m 37 m
Half of the cross-sectional area of the input 200 m (660 ft) (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (120 ft)
2 04200185
> 35 mm phase conductor 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m 37 m
05200250 200 m (660 ft)
(490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (120 ft)
06200330 300 m 200 m 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m
06200440 (984 ft) (660 ft) (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft)
07200610
185 m 125 m 90 m
07200750 250 m (820 ft)
(607 ft) (410 ft) (295 ft)
07200830
08201160 185 m 125 m 90 m
250 m (820 ft)
08201320 (607 ft) (410 ft) (295 ft)

Issue Number: 3
Table 12-24 Maximum motor cable lengths (400 V drives) • Cable lengths in excess of the specified values may be used only
when special techniques are adopted; refer to the supplier of the
400 V Nominal AC supply voltage drive.
Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of • The default switching frequency is 3 kHz for Open-loop and RFC-A
the following switching frequencies and 6 kHz for RFC-S mode.
Model The maximum cable length is reduced from that shown in Table 12-23
2 3 4 6 8 12 16 and Table 12-24 if high capacitance motor cables are used. For further
kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz
information, refer to section 4.9.2 High-capacitance / reduced diameter
03400025 65 m (210 ft) cables on page 64.
03400031 100 m (330 ft)
03400045 130 m (425 ft) 50 m 37 m 12.1.24 Minimum resistances and power ratings for
75 m the braking resistor at 40 °C (104 °F)
03400062 100 m (165 ft) (120 ft)
150 m (245 ft)
03400078 200 m (660 ft) (330 ft) Table 12-27 Braking resistor resistance and power rating (200 V)
(490 ft)
03400100
Minimum Instantaneous Continuous
04400150 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m 37 m
200 m (660 ft) Model resistance * power rating power rating
04400172 (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (120 ft)
05400270 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m 37 m Ω kW kW
200 m (660 ft) 03200050 1.5
05400300 (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (120 ft)
03200066 1.9
06400350 20 8.5
300 m 200 m 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m 03200080 2.8
06400420
(984 ft) (660 ft) (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) 03200106 3.6
06400470
04200137 4.6
07400660 18 9.4
185 m 125 m 90 m 04200185 6.3
07400770 250 m (820 ft)
(607 ft) (410 ft) (295 ft) 05200250 16.5 10.3 8.6
07401000
06200330 12.6
08401340 185 m 125 m 90 m 8.6 19.7
250 m (820 ft) 06200440 16.4
08401570 (607 ft) (410 ft) (295 ft)
07200610 20.5
6.1 27.8
07200750 24.4
Table 12-25 Maximum motor cable lengths (575 V drives)
07200830 4.5 37.6 32.5
575 V Nominal AC supply voltage
08201160
Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of 08201320
the following switching frequencies
Model
2 3 4 6 8 12 16 Table 12-28 Braking resistor resistance and power rating (400 V)
kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz
05500030 Minimum Instantaneous Continuous
Model resistance * power rating power rating
05500040
05500069 Ω kW kW
06500100 03400025 1.5
06500150 03400031 2.0
74 9.2
06500190 300 m 200 m 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m 03400045 2.8
06500230 (984 ft) (660 ft) (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) 03400062 4.6
06500290 03400078 5.0
50 13.6
06500350 03400100 6.6
07500440 04400150 9.0

34 19.9
07500550 04400172 12.6
05400270 31.5 21.5 16.2
08500630
05400300 18 37.5 19.6
08500860
06400350 21.6
06400420 17 39.8 25
Table 12-26 Maximum motor cable lengths (690 V drives) 06400470 32.7
690 V Nominal AC supply voltage 07400660 41.6
9.0 75.2
Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of 07400770 50.6
the following switching frequencies 07401000 7.0 96.6 60.1
Model 08401340
2 3 4 6 8 12 16
kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz 08401570
07600190
07600240
07600290 250 m 185 m 125 m 90 m
07600380 (820 ft) (607 ft) (410 ft) (295 ft)
07600440
07600540
08600630 250 m 185 m 125 m 90 m
08600860 (820 ft) (607 ft) (410 ft) (295 ft)

Issue Number: 3
Table 12-29 Braking resistor resistance and power rating (575 V) Table 12-30 Braking resistor resistance and power rating (690 V)
Minimum Instantaneous Continuous Minimum Instantaneous Continuous

Model resistance * power rating power rating Model resistance * power rating power rating
Ω kW kW Ω kW kW
05500030 2.6 07600190
05500040 80 12.1 4.6 07600240
05500069 6.5 07600290
06500100 8.7 07600380
06500150 12.3 07600440
06500190 16.3 07600540
13 74
06500230 19.9 08600630
06500290 24.2 08600860
06500350 31.7
* Resistor tolerance: ±10 %
07500440
07500550 12.1.25 Torque settings
08500630 Table 12-31 Drive control and relay terminal data
08500860 Model Connection type Torque setting
All Plug-in terminal block 0.5 N m (0.4 lb ft)
Table 12-32 Drive power terminal data
Unidrive M AC and motor terminals DC and braking Ground terminal

frame size Recommended Maximum Recommended Maximum Recommended Maximum
Plug-in terminal block T20 Torx (M4) T20 Torx (M4) / M4 Nut (7 mm AF)
3 and 4
Plug-in terminal block T20 Torx (M4) / M4 Nut (7 mm AF) T20 Torx (M4) / M4 Nut (7 mm AF)
5
6
6.0 N m(4.4 Ib ft) 8.0 N m(6.0 Ib ft) 6.0 N m(4.4 Ib ft) 8.0 N m(6.0 Ib ft) 6.0 N m(4.4 Ib ft) 8.0 N m(6.0 Ib ft)
7
12 N m (8.8 Ib ft) 14 N m (10.0 Ib ft) 12 N m (8.8 Ib ft) 14 N m (10.0 Ib ft) 12 N m (8.8 Ib ft) 14 N m (10.0 Ib ft)
8
Table 12-33 Plug-in terminal block maximum cable sizes

Model size Terminal block description Max cable size
11 way control connectors 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG)
All
2 way relay connector 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG)
3
6 way AC power connector 6 mm2 (10 AWG)
4
3 way AC power connector
5
3 way motor connector 8 mm2 (8 AWG)
6
2 way low voltage power
7
24 V supply connector 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG)
8

Issue Number: 3
12.1.26 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Table 12-36 Size 3 emission compliance (400 V drives)
This is a summary of the EMC performance of the drive. For full details,
Motor cable Switching frequency (kHz)
refer to the EMC Data Sheet which can be obtained from the supplier of
the drive. length (m) 3 4 6 8 12 16
Table 12-34 Immunity compliance Using internal filter:
Type of 0–5 C3 C4
Standard Test specification Application Level
immunity Using internal filter and external ferrite ring (2 turns):
6 kV contact 0 – 10 C3 C4
IEC61000-4-2 Electrostatic Module Level 3
discharge
EN61000-4-2 discharge enclosure (industrial) Using external filter:
8 kV air discharge
10 V/m prior to 0 – 20 R I I I I I
Radio modulation
IEC61000-4-3 Module Level 3 20 - 100 I - - - - -
frequency 80 - 1000 MHz
EN61000-4-3 enclosure (industrial)
radiated field 80 % AM (1 kHz) Key (shown in decreasing order of permitted emission level):
modulation
5/50 ns 2 kV E2R EN 61800-3:2004 second environment, restricted distribution
Level 4 (Additional measures may be required to prevent interference)
transient at 5 kHz
Control lines (industrial
repetition frequency
harsh) E2U EN 61800-3:2004 second environment, unrestricted distribution
IEC61000-4-4 Fast transient via coupling clamp
EN61000-4-4 burst 5/50 ns 2 kV I Industrial generic standard EN 61000-6-4:2007
transient at 5 kHz Level 3 EN 61800-3:2004 first environment restricted distribution (The
Power lines
repetition frequency (industrial) following caution is required by EN 61800-3:2004)
by direct injection
Common mode 4 kV AC supply This is a product of the restricted distribution class according
1.2/50 μs lines: Level 4 to IEC 61800-3. In a residential environment this product may
waveshape line to ground
cause radio interference in which case the user may be
Differential mode required to take adequate measures.
IEC61000-4-5 AC supply CAUTION
Surges 2 kV
EN61000-4-5 lines: Level 3
1.2/50 μs
line to line
waveshape R Residential generic standard EN 61000-6-3:2007
Signal ports EN 61800-3:2004 first environment unrestricted distribution
Lines to ground Level 2
to ground 1
EN 61800-3:2004 defines the following:
10V prior to
Conducted modulation • The first environment is one that includes residential premises. It
IEC61000-4-6 Control and Level 3
EN61000-4-6
radio 0.15 - 80 MHz
power lines (industrial)
also includes establishments directly connected without intermediate
frequency 80 % AM (1 kHz) transformers to a low-voltage power supply network which supplies
modulation
buildings used for residential purposes.
-30 % 10 ms • The second environment is one that includes all establishments
Voltage dips
IEC61000-4-11 +60 % 100 ms AC power
and other than those directly connected to a low-voltage power supply
EN61000-4-11 -60 % 1 s ports
interruptions network which supplies buildings used for residential purposes.
<-95 % 5 s
IEC61000-6-1 Generic immunity standard for the • Restricted distribution is defined as a mode of sales distribution in
EN61000-6- residential, commercial and light - Complies which the manufacturer restricts the supply of equipment to
1:2007 industrial environment suppliers, customers or users who separately or jointly have
IEC61000-6-2 technical competence in the EMC requirements of the application of
Generic immunity standard for the
EN61000-6- Complies drives.
industrial environment
2:2005
IEC61800-3 Product standard for adjustable Meets immunity IEC 61800-3:2004 and EN 61800-3:2004
EN61800- speed power drive systems requirements for first and The 2004 revision of the standard uses different terminology to align the
3:2004 (immunity requirements) second environments requirements of the standard better with the EC EMC Directive.
1
See section Surge immunity of control circuits - long cables and Power drive systems are categorized C1 to C4:
connections outside a building on page 76 for control ports for possible Corresponding
requirements regarding grounding and external surge protection Category Definition code used
Emission above
The drive contains an in-built filter for basic emission control. An Intended for use in the first or second
additional optional external filter provides further reduction of emission. C1 R
environments
The requirements of the following standards are met, depending on the
Not a plug-in or movable device, and
motor cable length and switching frequency.
intended for use in the first environment
C2 I
Table 12-35 Size 3 emission compliance (200 V drives) only when installed by a professional, or
in the second environment
Motor cable Switching frequency (kHz)
Intended for use in the second
length (m) 3 4 6 8 12 16 C3 E2U
environment, not the first environment
Using internal filter: Rated at over 1000 V or over 400 A,
0–2 C3 C4 C4 intended for use in complex systems in E2R
Using internal filter and external ferrite ring (1 turn): the second environment
0 – 10 C3 C4 Note that category 4 is more restrictive than E2R, since the rated current
10 - 20 C3 C4 of the PDS must exceed 400 A or the supply voltage exceed 1000 V, for
Using external filter: the complete PDS.
0 – 20 R I I I I I
20 - 100 I - - - - -

Issue Number: 3
12.2 Optional external EMC filters

Table 12-37 EMC filter cross reference

200 V
03200050 to 03200106 4200-3230
04200137 to 04200185
05200250
06200330 to 06200440 4200-2300
07200610 to 07200830
08201160 to 08201320
400 V
03400025 to 03400100 4200-3480
04400150 to 04400172
05400270 to 05400300
06400350 to 06400470 4200-4800
07400660 to 07401000
08401340 to 08401570
575 V
05500030 to 05500069
06500100 to 06500350 4200-3690
07500440 to 07500550
08500630 to 08500860
690 V
07600190 to 07600540
08600630 to 08600860
12.2.1 EMC filter ratings

Table 12-38 Optional external EMC filter details
Maximum Power dissipation at Ground leakage
Voltage rating
continuous current rated current Balanced supply Discharge
CT part phase-to-phase
@ 40 °C @ 50 °C IP rating @ 40 °C @ 50 °C Worst case resistors
number IEC UL and
(104 °F) (122 °F) (104 °F) (122 °F)
phase-to-ground
A A V V W W mA mA MΩ
4200-3230 20 18.5 250 300 20 17 2.4 60
4200-3480 16 15 528 600 13 11 11 151
4200-2300 55 51 250 300 20 41 35 4.2 69 1.5
4200-4800 63 58 528 600 54 46 11.2 183
4200-3690 42 39 760 600 45 39 12 234
12.2.2 Overall EMC filter dimensions

Table 12-39 Optional external EMC filter dimensions
Dimension (mm)
CT part Weight
H W D
number
mm inch mm inch mm inch kg lb
4200-3230 1.9 4.20
372 14.65 80 3.15 41 1.61
4200-3480 2.0 4.40
4200-2300 6.5 14.30
4200-4800 434 17.09 210 8.27 60 2.36 6.7 14.80
4200-3690 7.0 15.40

Issue Number: 3
12.2.3 EMC filter torque settings

Table 12-40 Optional external EMC Filter terminal data
Power connections Ground connections
CT part Max cable size Max torque Max torque
number Ground stud size
mm2 AWG Nm Ib ft Nm Ib ft
4200-3230
4 12 0.8 0.59 M5 3.0 2.2
4200-3480
4200-2300
4200-4800 16 6 2.3 1.70 M6 4.8 2.8
4200-3690

Issue Number: 3
13 Diagnostics Figure 13-2 Location of the status LED
The keypad display on the drive gives various information about the
status of the drive. The keypad display provides information on the
following categories:
• Trip indications
• Alarm indications
• Status indications
Users must not attempt to repair a drive if it is faulty, nor

carry out fault diagnosis other than through the use of the
diagnostic features described in this chapter.
If a drive is faulty, it must be returned to an authorized
WARNING Control Techniques distributor for repair.
13.1 Status modes (Keypad and LED status)

Figure 13-1 Keypad status modes
1. Non flashing: Normal status
2. Flashing: Trip status
13.1.1 Ethernet status LEDs

Each of the Ethernet ports provide a status LED for diagnostic and
information purposes. Refer to Table 13-1 for Ethernet LED status.
Figure 13-3 Ethernet port status LED
1. Ethernet port status LED.

Table 13-1 Ethernet LED status
LED status Description
Off Ethernet connection not detected
Solid green Ethernet connection detected but no data
Flashing green Ethernet connection detected and data flow
13.2 Trip indications

The output of the drive is disabled under any trip condition so that the
drive stops controlling the motor. If the motor is running when the trip
occurs it will coast to a stop.
During a trip condition, where a KI-Keypad is being used, the upper row
of the display indicates that a trip has occurred and the lower row of the
keypad display will display the trip string. Some trips have a sub-trip
number to provide additional information about the trip. If a trip has a
sub-trip number, the sub-trip number is flashed alternately with the trip
string unless there is space on the second row for both the trip string and
the sub-trip number in which case both the trip string and sub-trip
information is displayed separated by a decimal place.
The back-light of the KI-Keypad display will also flash during a trip
condition. If a display is not being used, the drive LED Status indicator will
flash with 0.5 s duty cycle if the drive has tripped. Refer to Figure 13-2.
Trips are listed alphabetically in Table 13-4 based on the trip indication
1. Drive OK status shown on the drive display. Alternatively, the drive status can be read in
2. Trip status Pr 10.001 'Drive OK' using communication protocols. The most recent
3. Alarm status trip can be read in Pr 10.020 providing a trip number. It must be noted
that the hardware trips (HF01 to HF20) do not have trip numbers. The
trip number must be checked in Table 13-5 to identify the specific trip.

Issue Number: 3
Example Table 13-3 Sub-trip identification

1. Trip code 2 is read from Pr 10.020 via serial communications.
Source xx y zz Description
2. Checking Table 13-4 shows Trip 2 is an Over Volts trip.
Control
00 0 01 Control board thermistor 1 over temperature
Comms No. Trip Keypad system
code display
2 Over Volts
Control
system
Control
3. Look up Over Volts in Table 13-4. system
4. Perform checks detailed under Diagnosis.
13.3 Identifying a trip / trip source

Some trips only contain a trip string whereas some other trips have a trip
string along with a sub-trip number which provides the user with
additional information about the trip.
A trip can be generated from a control system or from a power system.
The sub-trip number associated with the trips listed in Table 13-2 is in
the form xxyzz and used to identify the source of the trip.
Table 13-2 Trips associated with xxyzz sub-trip number
Over Volts OHt dc bus
OI ac Phase Loss
OI Brake Power Comms
PSU OI Snubber
OHt Inverter OHt Rectifier
OHt Power Temp Feedback
OHt Control Power Data
The digits xx are 00 for a trip generated by the control system. For a
single drive (not part of a multi-power module drive), if the trip is related
to the power system then xx will have a value of 01, when displayed the
leading zeros are suppressed.
The y digit is used to identify the location of a trip which is generated by
a rectifier module connected to a power module (if xx is non zero). For a
control system trip (xx is zero), the y digit, where relevant is defined for
each trip. If not relevant, the y digit will have a value of zero.
The zz digits give the reason for the trip and are defined in each trip
description.
Figure 13-4 Key to sub-trip number
x x y z z
00 - Generated by the control module
01 - Generated by the power module
0 - Always zero for a single drive
00
01
. - Reason for the trip
.
07
For example, if the drive has tripped and the lower line of the display
shows 'OHt Control.2’, with the help Table 13-3 below the trip can be
interpreted as; an over temperature has been detected; the trip was
generated by fault in the control module, the control board thermistor 2
over temperature.

Issue Number: 3
13.4 Trips, Sub-trip numbers

Table 13-4 Trip indications
Trip Diagnosis
An Input 1 Loss Analog input 1 current loss
An Input 1 Loss trip indicates that a current loss was detected in current mode on Analog input 1 (Terminal 5, 6). In 4-20 mA
and 20-4 mA modes loss of input is detected if the current falls below 3 mA.
Recommended actions:
28 • Check control wiring is correct
• Check control wiring is undamaged
• Check the Analog Input 1 Mode (07.007)
• Current signal is present and greater than 3 mA
An Input 2 Loss Analog input 2 current loss
An Input 2 Loss indicates that a current loss was detected in current mode on Analog input 2 (Terminal 7). In 4-20 mA and
20-4 mA modes loss of input is detected if the current falls below 3 mA.
• Check control wiring is correct
29 • Check control wiring is undamaged
• Check the Analog Input 2 Mode (07.011)
• Current signal is present and greater than 3 mA
An Output Calib Analog output calibration failed
The An output Calib trip indicates that one or both of the Analog outputs have failed during the zero offset calibration. The
failed output can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 Output 1 failed (Terminal 9)
219 2 Output 2 failed (Terminal 10)
• Check the wiring associated with analog outputs
• Remove all the wiring that is connected to analog outputs and perform the calibration
• If trip persists replace the drive
App Menu Changed Customization table for an application module has changed
The App Menu Changed trip indicates that the customization table for an application menu has changed. The menu that
has been changed can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 Menu 18
217 2 Menu 19
3 Menu 20
• Reset the trip and perform a parameter save to accept the new settings
Autotune 1 Position feedback did not change or required speed could not be reached
The drive has tripped during an autotune. The cause of the trip can be identified from the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 The position feedback did not change when position feedback is being used during rotating autotune.
2 The motor did not reach the required speed during rotating autotune or mechanical load measurement.
11
• Ensure the motor is free to turn i.e. mechanical brake was released
• Ensure Pr 03.026 and Pr 03.038 are set correctly (or appropriate 2nd motor map parameters)
• Check feedback device wiring is correct
• Check encoder mechanical coupling to the motor

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
Autotune 2 Position feedback direction incorrect
The drive has tripped during a rotating autotune. The cause of the trip can be identified from the associated sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 The position feedback direction is incorrect when position feedback is being used during a rotating autotune
2 The motor did not reach the required speed during rotating autotune or mechanical load measurement.
12
• Check motor cable wiring is correct
• Check feedback device wiring is correct
• Swap any two motor phases
Autotune 3 Measured inertia has exceeded the parameter range or commutation signals changed in wrong direction
The drive has tripped during a rotating autotune or mechanical load measurement test. The cause of the trip can be
identified from the associated sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 Measured inertia has exceeded the parameter range during a mechanical load measurement
13
2 The commutation signals changed in the wrong direction during a rotating autotune
• Check motor cable wiring is correct
• Check feedback device U,V and W commutation signal wiring is correct
Autotune 4 Drive encoder U commutation signal fail
A position feedback device with commutation signals is being used (i.e. AB Servo, FD Servo, FR Servo, SC Servo, or
Commutations only encoder) and the U commutation signal did not change during a rotating autotune.
14
• Check feedback device U commutation signal wiring is correct (Encoder terminals 7 and 8)
Autotune 5 Drive encoder V commutation signal fail
Commutations only encoder) and the V commutation signal did not change during a rotating autotune.
15
• Check feedback device V commutation signal wiring is correct (Encoder terminals 9 and 10)
Autotune 6 Drive encoder W commutation signal fail
Commutations only encoder) and the W commutation signal did not change during a rotating autotune.
16
• Check feedback device W commutation signal wiring is correct (Encoder terminals 11 and 12)
Autotune 7 Motor number of poles / position feedback resolution set incorrectly
An Autotune 7 trip is initiated during a rotating autotune, if the motor poles or the position feedback resolution have been
set up incorrectly where position feedback is being used.
17 Recommended actions:
• Check line per revolution for feedback device
• Check the number of poles in Pr 05.011
Autotune Stopped Autotune test stopped before completion
The drive was prevented from completing an autotune test, because either the drive enable or the drive run were removed.
18
• Check the drive enable signal (Terminals 11 and 13) was active during the autotune
• Check the run command was active in Pr 08.005 during autotune
Brake R Too Hot Braking resistor overload timed out (I2t)
The Brake R Too Hot indicates that braking resistor overload has timed out. The value in Braking Resistor Thermal
Accumulator (10.039) is calculated using Braking Resistor Rated Power (10.030), Braking Resistor Thermal Time Constant
(10.031) and Braking Resistor Resistance (10.061). The Brake R Too Hot trip is initiated when Braking Resistor Thermal
Accumulator (10.039) reaches 100 %.
19
• Ensure the values entered in Pr 10.030, Pr 10.031 and Pr 10.061 are correct
• If an external thermal protection device is being used and the braking resistor software overload protection is not
required, set Pr 10.030, Pr 10.031 or Pr 10.061 to 0 to disable the trip.

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
CAM Advanced motion controller CAM failure
The CAM trip indicates that the advanced motion controller CAM has detected a problem.
Sub-trip Reason
99
1 CAM index or segment is out of range
2 AMC CAM Index (35.007) has been made to change by more than 2 in one sample
Card Access NV Media Card Write fail

The Card Access trip indicates that the drive was unable to access the NV Media Card. If the trip occurs during the data
transfer to the card then the file being written may be corrupted. If the trip occurs when the data being transferred to the
drive then the data transfer may be incomplete. If a parameter file is transferred to the drive and this trip occurs during the
transfer, the parameters are not saved to non-volatile memory, and so the original parameters can be restored by powering
185 the drive down and up again.
• Check NV Media Card is installed / located correctly
• Replace the NV Media Card
Card Boot The Menu 0 parameter modification cannot be saved to the NV Media Card
Menu 0 changes are automatically saved on exiting edit mode.
The Card Boot trip will occur if a write to a Menu 0 parameter has been initiated via the keypad by exiting edit mode
and Pr 11.042 is set for auto or boot mode, but the necessary boot file has not been created on the NV Media Card to take
the new parameter value. This occurs when Pr 11.042 is changed to Auto (3) or Boot (4) mode, but the drive is not
177
subsequently reset.
• Ensure that Pr 11.042 is correctly set, and then reset the drive to create the necessary file on the NV Media Card
• Re-attempt the parameter write to the Menu 0 parameter
Card Busy NV Media Card cannot be accessed as it is being accessed by an option module
The Card Busy trip indicates that an attempt has been made to access a file on NV Media Card, but the NV Media Card is
already being accessed by an Option Module, such as one of the Applications modules. No data is transferred.
178
• Wait for the option module to finish accessing the NV Media Card and re-attempt the required function
Card Data Exists NV Media Card data location already contains data
The Card Data Exists trip indicates that an attempt has been made to store data on a NV Media Card in a data block which
already contains data.
• Erase the data in data location
• Write data to an alternative data location
Card Compare NV Media Card file/data is different to the one in the drive
A compare has been carried out between a file on the NV Media Card, a Card Compare trip is initiated if the parameters on
the NV Media Card are different to the drive.
188
• Set Pr mm.000 to 0 and reset the trip
• Check to ensure the correct data block on the
• NV Media Card has been used for the compare
Card Drive Mode NV Media Card parameter set not compatible with current drive mode
The Card Drive Mode trip is produced during a compare if the drive mode in the data block on the NV Media Card is
different from the current drive mode. This trip is also produced if an attempt is made to transfer parameters from a NV
Media Card to the drive if the operating mode in the data block is outside the allowed range of operating modes.
• Ensure the destination drive supports the drive operating mode in the parameter file.
• Clear the value in Pr mm.000 and reset the drive
• Ensure destination drive operating mode is the same as the source parameter file

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
Card Error NV Media Card data structure error
The Card Error trip indicates that an attempt has been made to access a NV Media Card but an error has been detected in
the data structure on the card. Resetting the trip will cause the drive to erase and create the correct folder structure. The
cause of the trip can be identified by the sub-trip.
Sub-trip Reason
1 The required folder and file structure is not present
182 2 The HEADER.DAT file is corrupted
3 Two or more files in the GT8DATA \ DRIVE folder have the same file identification number
• Erase all the data block and re-attempt the process
• Ensure the card is located correctly
• Replace the NV Media Card
Card Full NV Media Card full
The Card Full trip indicates that an attempt has been made to create a data block on a NV Media Card, but there is not
enough space left on the card.
• Delete a data block or the entire NV Media Card to create space
• Use a different NV Media Card
Card No Data NV Media Card data not found
The Card No Data trip indicates that an attempt has been made to access non-existent file or block on a NV Media Card.
• Ensure data block number is correct
Card Option NV Media Card trip; option modules installed are different between source drive and destination drive
The Card Option trip indicates that parameter data or default difference data is being transferred from a NV Media Card to
the drive, but the option module categories are different between source and destination drives. This trip does not stop the
data transfer, but is a warning that the data for the option modules that are different will be set to the default values and not
the values from the card. This trip also applies if a compare is attempted between the data block and the drive.
180
• Ensure the correct option modules are installed.
• Ensure the option modules are in the same option module slot as the parameter set stored.
• Press the red reset button to acknowledge that the parameters for one or more of the option modules installed will be at
their default values
• This trip can be suppressed by setting Pr mm.000 to 9666 and resetting the drive.
Card Product NV Media Card data blocks are not compatible with the drive derivative
The Card Product trip is initiated either at power-up or when the card is accessed, If Drive Derivative (11.028) is different
between the source and target drives. This trip can be reset and data can be transferred in either direction between the
drive and the card.
175
• Use a different NV Media Card
• This trip can be suppressed by setting Pr mm.000 to 9666 and resetting the drive
Card Rating NV Media Card Trip; The voltage and / or current rating of the source and destination drives are different
The Card Rating trip indicates that parameter data is being transferred from a NV Media Card to the drive, but the current
and / or voltage ratings are different between source and destination drives. This trip also applies if a compare (using
Pr mm.000 set to 8yyy) is attempted between the data block on a NV Media Card and the drive. The Card Rating trip does
not stop the data transfer but is a warning that rating specific parameters with the RA attribute may not be transferred to the
186 destination drive.
• Reset the drive to clear the trip
• Ensure that the drive rating dependent parameters have transferred correctly
Card Read Only NV Media Card has the Read Only bit set
The Card Read Only trip indicates that an attempt has been made to modify a read-only NV Media Card or a read-only data
block. A NV Media Card is read-only if the read-only flag has been set.
• Clear the read only flag by setting Pr mm.000 to 9777 and reset the drive. This will clear the read-only flag for all data
blocks in the NV Media Card

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
Card Slot NV Media Card Trip; Option module application program transfer has failed
The Card Slot trip is initiated, if the transfer of an option module application program to or from an application module failed
because the option module does not respond correctly. If this happens this trip is produced with the sub-trip indicating the
174 option module slot number.
• Ensure the source / destination option module is installed on the correct slot
Configuration The number of power modules installed is different from the modules expected
The Configuration trip indicates that the Number Of Power Modules Detected (11.071) does not match the previous value
stored.
111 • Ensure that all the power modules are correctly connected / simultaneously
• Ensure all the power modules have powered up correctly
• Ensure that the value in Pr 11.071 is set to the number of power modules connected
• Set Pr 11.035 to 0 to disable the trip if it is not required
Control Word Trip initiated from the Control Word (06.042)
The Control Word trip is initiated by setting bit 12 on the control word in Pr 06.042 when the control word is enabled
(Pr 06.043 = On).
35 • Check the value of Pr 06.042.
• Disable the control word in Control Word Enable (Pr 06.043)
Bit 12 of the control word set to a one causes the drive to trip on Control Word
When the control word is enabled, the trip can only be cleared by setting bit 12 to zero
Current Offset Current feedback offset error
The Current Offset trip indicates that the current offset is too larger to be trimmed.
225
• Ensure that there is no possibility of current flowing in the output phases of the drive when the drive is not enabled
• Hardware fault – Contact the supplier of the drive
Data Changing Drive parameters are being changed
A user action or a file system write is active that is changing the drive parameters and the drive has been commanded to
enable, i.e. Drive Active (10.002) = 1.
97 • Ensure the drive is not enabled when one of he following is being carried out
Loading defaults
Changing drive mode
Transferring data from NV Media Card or position feedback device
Transferring user programs
Derivative Image Derivative product image error
The Derivative Image trip indicates that an error has been detected in the derivative image.
248 Recommended action:
Contact the supplier of the drive
Destination Two or more parameters are writing to the same destination parameter
The Destination trip indicates that destination output parameters of two or more logic functions (Menus 3, 7, 8, 9, 12 or 14)
within the drive are writing to the same parameter.
199
• Set Pr mm.000 to ‘Destinations’ or 12001 and check all visible parameters in all menus for parameter write conflicts
Drive Size Power stage recognition: Unrecognized drive size
The Drive Size trip indicates that the control PCB has not recognized the drive size of the power circuit to which it is
connected.
224 Recommended action:
• Ensure the drive is programmed to the latest firmware version
• Hardware fault - return drive to supplier

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
EEPROM Fail Default parameters have been loaded
The EEPROM Fail trip indicates that default parameters have been loaded. The exact cause/reason of the trip can be
identified from the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 The most significant digit of the internal parameter database version number has changed
The CRC's applied to the parameter data stored in internal non-volatile memory indicate that a valid set
2
of parameters cannot be loaded
The drive mode restored from internal non-volatile memory is outside the allowed range for the product
3
or the derivative image does not allow the previous drive mode
4 The drive derivative image has changed
31 5 The power stage hardware has changed
6 The internal I/O hardware has changed
7 The position feedback interface hardware has changed
8 The control board hardware has changed
9 The checksum on the non-parameter area of the EEPROM has failed
• Default the drive and perform a reset
• Allow sufficient time to perform a save before the supply to the drive is removed
• If the trip persists - return drive to supplier
Encoder 1 Drive position feedback interface power supply overload
The Encoder 1 trip indicates that the drive encoder power supply has been overloaded. Terminals 13 and 14 of the 15 way
D type connector can supply a maximum current of 200 mA @ 15 V or 300 mA @ 8 V and 5 V.
• Check encoder power supply wiring
189 • Disable the termination resistors (Pr 03.039 set to 0) to reduce current consumption
• For 5 V encoders with long cables, select 8 V (Pr 03.036) and fit a 5 V voltage regulator close to the encoder
• Check the encoder specification to confirm if it is compatible with the encoder port power supply current capability
• Replace the encoder
• Use an external power supply with higher current capability
Encoder 2 Drive encoder (Feedback) wire break
The Encoder 2 trip indicates that the drive has detected a wire break on the 15 way D-type connector on the drive. The
exact cause of the trip can be identified from the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
10 Drive position feedback interface 1 on any input
20 Drive position feedback interface 2 on any input
11 Drive position feedback interface 1 on the A channel
190 12 Drive position feedback interface 1 on the B channel

13 Drive position feedback interface 1 on the Z channel
• If wire break detection on the drive encoder input is not required, set Pr 03.040 = XXX0 to disable the Encoder 2 trip
• Check cable continuity
• Check wiring of feedback signals is correct
• Check encoder power supply is set correctly (Pr 03.036)
• Replace encoder

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
Encoder 3 Phase offset incorrect while running
The Encoder 3 trip indicates that the drive has detected an incorrect UVW phase angle while running (RFC-S mode only) or
SINCOS phase error. The feedback device which has caused the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 Drive position feedback interface 1
191 • Check encoder shield connections
• Ensure the encoder cable is one uninterrupted cable
• Check the encoder signal for noise with an oscilloscope
• Check the integrity of the encoder mechanical mounting
• For a UVW servo encoder, ensure that the phase rotation of the UVW commutation signals is the same as
• the phase rotation of the motor
• For a SINCOS encoder, ensure that motor and incremental SINCOS connections are correct and that for forward
rotation of the motor, the encoder rotates clockwise (when looking at the shaft of the encoder)
• Repeat the offset measurement test
Encoder 4 Feedback device comms failure
The Encoder 4 trip indicates that the encoder communications has timed out or the communications position
message transfer time is too long. This trip can also be caused due to wire break in the communication channel between
the drive and the encoder. The feedback device which has caused the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
192 2 Drive position feedback interface 2
• Ensure the encoder power supply setting (Pr 03.036) is correct
• Complete encoder auto-configuration (Pr 03.041)
• Check the encoder wiring
• Replace the feedback device
Encoder 5 Checksum or CRC error
The Encoder 5 trip indicates that there is a checksum or CRC error, or the SSI encoder is not ready. The Encoder 5 trip can
also indicate a wire break to a communications based encoder.
Sub-trip Reason

• Check the encoder cable shield connections
• Ensure the cable is one uninterrupted cable - remove any connector blocks or if unavoidable minimise the length of any
shield pigtails to the connector block
• Check the encoder signal for noise with an oscilloscope
• Check the comms resolution setting (Pr 03.035)
• If using a Hiperface, EnDat encoder or BiSS encoder carry out an encoder auto-configuration (Pr 03.041 = Enabled)
• Replace the encoder
Encoder 6 Encoder has indicated an error
The Encoder 6 trip indicates that the encoder has indicated an error or that the power supply has failed to an SSI encoder.
The Encoder 6 trip can also indicate a wire break to an SSI encoder.
Sub-trip Reason
194
• For SSI encoders, check the wiring and encoder power supply setting (Pr 03.036)
• Replace the encoder / contact the supplier of the encoder

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
Encoder 7 Initialization failed
The Encoder 7 trip indicates that the set-up parameters for position feedback device has changed. The feedback device
which has caused the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
195
• Reset the trip and perform a save.
• Ensure Pr 3.033 and Pr 03.035 are set correctly or carry out an encoder auto-configuration (Pr 03.041 = Enabled)
Encoder 8 Position feedback interface has timed out
The Encoder 8 trip indicates that Position feedback interface communications time exceeds 250 μs. The feedback device
which has caused the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
• Ensure the encoder is connected correctly
• Ensure that the encoder is compatible
• Increase baud rate
Encoder 9 Position feedback is selected from a option module slot which does not have a feedback option module installed
The Encoder 9 trip indicates that position feedback source selected in Pr 03.026 (or Pr 21.021 for the second motor map) is
not valid
• Check the setting of Pr 03.026 (or Pr 21.021 if the second motor parameters have been enabled)
• Ensure that the option slot selected in Pr 03.026 has a feedback option module installed
Encoder 10 RFC-S mode phasing failure due to incorrect phase angle
The Encoder 10 indicates that the phase offset angle in Pr 03.025 (or Pr 21.020 if the second motor map is being used) is
incorrect and the drive is unable to control the motor correctly.
• Check the encoder wiring
198 • Check the encoder signals for noise with an oscilloscope
• Check the encoder mechanical coupling
• Perform an auto-tune to measure the encoder phase angle or manually enter the correct phase angle into Pr 03.025
• Spurious Encoder 10 trips can sometimes be seen in very dynamic applications. This trip can be disabled by setting the
over-speed threshold in Pr 03.008 to a value greater than zero.
Encoder 12 Encoder could not be identified during auto-configuration
The Encoder 12 trip indicates that the drive is communicating with the encoder but the encoder type is not recognized.
Sub-trip Reason
• Enter the encoder setup parameters manually
• Check to see the encoder supports auto-configuration

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
Encoder 13 Data read from the encoder is out of range during auto-configuration
The Encoder 13 trip indicates that the data read from the encoder was out of the range during auto-configuration. No
parameters will be modified with the data read from the encoder as a result of auto configuration.
Sub-trip Reason Parameter
11 P1 Rotary lines per revolution error 03.034
12 P1 Linear comms pitch error 03.052
13 P1 Linear line pitch error 03.053
14 P1 Rotary turns bits error 03.033
15 P1 Communications bits error 03.035
16 P1 Calculation time is too long 03.060
17 P1 Line delay measured is longer than 5 μs 03.062
163
21 P2 Rotary lines per revolution error 03.134
22 P2 Linear comms pitch error 03.152
23 P2 Linear line pitch error 03.153
24 P2 Rotary turns bits error 03.133
25 P2 Communications bits error 03.135
26 P2 Calculation time is too long 03.160
27 P2 Line delay measured is longer than 5 μs 03.162
• Enter the encoder setup parameters manually
• Check to see the encoder supports auto-configuration
External Trip An External trip is initiated
An External Trip has occurred. The cause of the trip can be identified from the sub trip number displayed after the trip string.
See table below. An external trip can also be initiated by writing a value of 6 in Pr 10.038.
Sub-trip Reason
1 External Trip Mode (08.010) = 1 or 3 and SAFE TORQUE OFF input 1 is low
2 External Trip Mode (08.010) = 2 or 3 and SAFE TORQUE OFF input 2 is low
3 External Trip (10.032) = 1
6
• Check the SAFE TORQUE OFF signal voltage on terminals 11 and 13 equals to 24 V
• Check the value of Pr 08.009 which indicates the digital state of terminal 11 and 13, equates to ‘on’.
• If external trip detection of the SAFE TORQUE OFF input is not required, set Pr 08.010 to OFF (0).
• Check the value of Pr 10.032.
• Select ‘Destinations’ (or enter 12001) in Pr mm.000 and check for a parameter controlling Pr 10.032.
• Ensure Pr 10.032 or Pr 10.038 (= 6) is not being controlled by serial comms
Frequency Range Out of range of frequency has been detected in regen mode
The Frequency Range trip indicates that the supply frequency is outside the range defined by Regen Minimum Frequency
(03.024) and Regen Maximum Frequency (03.025) for more than 100 ms.
168 • Ensure the supply is operating within the drive specification
• Ensure Pr 03.024 and Pr 03.025 are set correctly
• Check the supply voltage waveform using an oscilloscope
• Reduce the level of supply disturbance
HF01 Data processing error: CPU address error
The HF01 trip indicates that a CPU address error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has
failed.
HF02 Data processing error: DMAC address error
The HF02 trip indicates that a DMAC address error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has
failed.
HF03 Data processing error: Illegal instruction
The HF03 trip indicates that an illegal instruction has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has failed.

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
HF04 Data processing error: Illegal slot instruction
The HF04 trip indicates that an illegal slot instruction has occurred.This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has
failed.
HF05 Data processing error: Undefined exception
The HF05 trip indicates that an undefined exception error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive
has failed.
HF06 Data processing error: Reserved exception
The HF06 trip indicates that a reserved exception error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive
has failed.
HF07 Data processing error: Watchdog failure
The HF07 trip indicates that a watchdog failure has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has failed.
HF08 Data processing error: CPU Interrupt crash
The HF08 trip indicates that a CPU interrupt crash has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has
failed.
HF09 Data processing error: Free store overflow
The HF09 trip indicates that a free store overflow has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has
failed.
HF10 Data processing error: Parameter routing system error
The HF10 trip indicates that a Parameter routing system error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the
drive has failed.
HF11 Data processing error: Access to EEPROM failed
The HF11 trip indicates that access to the drive EEPROM has failed. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive
has failed.
HF12 Data processing error: Main program stack overflow
The HF12 trip indicates that the main program stack over flow has occurred. The stack can be identified by the sub-trip
number. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has failed.
Sub-trip Stack
1 Freewheeling tasks
2 Clock tasks
3 Main system interrupts
HF13 Data processing error: Firmware incompatible with hardware
The HF13 trip indicates that the drive firmware is not compatible with the hardware. This trip indicates that the control PCB
on the drive has failed.
• Re-program the drive with the latest version of the drive firmware for Unidrive M702

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
HF14 Data processing error: CPU register bank error
The HF14 trip indicates that a CPU register bank error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive
has failed.
HF15 Data processing error: CPU divide error
The HF15 trip indicates that a CPU divide error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has
failed.
HF16 Data processing error: RTOS error
The HF16 trip indicates that a RTOS error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has failed.
HF17 Data processing error: Clock supplied to the control board is out of specification
The HF17 trip indicates that the clock supplied to the control board logic is out of specification. This trip indicates that the
control PCB on the drive has failed.
HF18 Data processing error: Internal flash memory has failed
The HF18 trip indicates that the internal flash memory has failed when writing option module parameter data. The reason
for the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 Option module initialization timed out
2 Programming error while writing menu in flash
3 Erase flash block containing setup menus failed
4 Erase flash block containing application menus failed
5 Incorrect setup menu CRC contained in flash
6 Incorrect application menu CRC contained in flash
7 Incorrect common application menu 18 CRC contained in flash
• Hardware fault - Contact the supplier of the drive.
HF19 Data processing error: CRC check on the firmware has failed
The HF19 trip indicates that the CRC check on the drive firmware has failed.
• Re-program the drive
• Hardware fault - Contact the supplier of the drive
HF20 Data processing error: ASIC is not compatible with the hardware
The HF20 trip indicates that the ASIC version is not compatible with the drive firmware. The ASIC version can be identified
from the sub-trip number.
• Hardware fault - Contact the supplier of the drive

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
Inductance Inductance measurement out of range or motor saturation not detected
The drive has been enabled in RFC-S mode with RFC Feedback Mode (03.024) set for sensorless control, or for auto-
change over on position feedback loss, and the motor inductance will prevent the control algorithm from operating correctly.
The reason for the trip can be identified from the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
The difference between Ld (05.024) and No-load Lq (05.072) is too small. (Lq-Ld)/Ld
must be greater than 0.2. Also Lq-Ld must be greater than K/Full Scale Current Kc
(11.061), K is related to the drive voltage rating as given in the table below. It is
recommended that the differences are larger than these minimum limits if possible.
1 Drive rated voltage K
8 200 V 0.037
400 V 0.073
575 V 0.087
690 V 0.105
A test is carried out to determine the direction of the flux in the motor which relies on
2 detecting motor saturation. If a change in motor saturation cannot be detected during this
test then this trip is initiated. This type of failure is unlikely in most normal motors.
During the stationary auto-tuning in RFC-S mode it is necessary to determine the
3 location of the flux axis. If a change in motor saturation cannot be detected during this
test then this trip is initiated. This type of failure is unlikely in most normal motors.
Inductor Too Hot The regen inductor has overloaded

In Regen mode, this trip indicates a regen inductor thermal overload based on the Rated Current (Pr 05.007) and the
Inductor Thermal Time Constant (Pr 04.015). Pr 04.019 displays the inductor temperature as a percentage of the maximum
value. The drive will trip on Inductor Too Hot when Pr 04.019 gets to 100 %.
93
• Check the load / current through the inductor has not changed.
• Ensure the Rated Current (Pr 05.007) is not zero.
I/O Overload Digital output overload
The I/O Overload trip indicates that the total current drawn from 24 V user supply or from the digital output has exceeded
the limit. A trip is initiated if one or more of the following conditions:
• Maximum output current from one digital output is 100 mA.
• The combined maximum output current from outputs 1 and 2 is 100 mA
26 • The combined maximum output current from output 3 and +24 V output is 100 mA
• Check total loads on digital outputs
• Check control wiring is correct
• Check output wiring is undamaged
Island Island condition detected in regen mode
The Island trip indicates that the AC mains is no longer present and the inverter would be on ‘islanded’ power supply if it
continued to operate.
160
• Check the supply / supply connections to the regen drive
Keypad Mode Keypad has been removed when the drive is receiving the speed reference from the keypad
The Keypad Mode trip indicates that the drive is in keypad mode [Reference Selector (01.014) = 4 or 6] and the keypad has
been removed or disconnected from the drive.
• Re-install keypad and reset
• Change Reference Selector (01.014) to select the reference from another source
Line Sync Synchronization to the power supply has been lost
The Line Sync trip indicates that the inverter has lost the synchronization with the AC supply in Regen mode.
• Check the supply / supply connections to the regen drive

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
Low Load The load on the drive has fallen below the low load detection level
When the low load detector is active, the low load condition is detected when the Percentage Load (Pr 04.020) falls below
the threshold defined by the Low Load Detection Level (Pr 04.027).
Enable Trip On Low Load (Pr 04.029) defines the action taken when low load is detected. If Enable Trip On Low Load
38 (Pr 04.029) = 0, a Low Load warning is displayed and Low Load Detected Alarm (Pr 10.062) = 1. If Enable Trip On Low
Load (Pr 04.029) = 1 no warning is given, but a Low Load trip is initiated.
• Check the load on the motor has not changed
Motor Too Hot Output current overload timed out (I2t)
The Motor Too Hot trip indicates a motor thermal overload based on the output current (Pr 05.007) and motor thermal time
constant (Pr 04.015). Pr 04.019 displays the motor temperature as a percentage of the maximum value. The drive will trip
on Motor Too Hot when Pr 04.019 gets to 100 %.
• Ensure the load is not jammed / sticking
20 • Check the load on the motor has not changed
• If seen during an auto-tune test in RFC-S mode, ensure the motor rated current in Pr 05.007 is ≤ Heavy duty current
rating of the drive
• Tune the rated speed parameter (RFC-A mode only)
• Check feedback signal for noise
• Ensure the motor rated current is not zero
Name Plate Electronic nameplate transfer has failed
The Name Plate trip is initiated if an electronic name plate transfer between the drive and the motor has failed. The exact
reason for the trip can be identified from the sub-trip number.
176
• Ensure that the correct data is stored in the encoder by re-transferring the required data from drive into the encoder.
• Enter the motor nameplate parameters manually
• Replace the feedback device
OHt Brake Braking IGBT over-temperature
The OHt Brake over-temperature trip indicates that braking IGBT over-temperature has been detected based on software
thermal model.
101
• Check braking resistor value is greater than or equal to the minimum resistance value
OHt Control Control stage over temperature
This OHt Control trip indicates that a control stage over-temperature has been detected. From the sub-trip ‘xxyzz’, the
Thermistor location is identified by ‘zz’.
Control system 00 0 01 Control board thermistor 1 over temperature
Control system 00 0 02 Control board thermistor 2 over temperature
Control system 00 0 03 I/O board thermistor over temperature
23
• Check enclosure / drive fans are still functioning correctly
• Check enclosure ventilation paths
• Check enclosure door filters
• Increase ventilation
• Reduce the drive switching frequency
• Check ambient temperature

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
OHt dc bus DC bus over temperature
The OHt dc bus trip indicates a DC bus component over temperature based on a software thermal model. The drive
includes a thermal protection system to protect the DC bus components within the drive. This includes the effects of the
output current and DC bus ripple. The estimated temperature is displayed as a percentage of the trip level in Pr 07.035. If
this parameter reaches 100 % then an OHt dc bus trip is initiated. The drive will attempt to stop the motor before tripping. If
the motor does not stop in 10 seconds the drive trips immediately.
Control system 00 2 00 DC bus thermal model gives trip with sub-trip 0
• Check the AC supply voltage balance and levels
• Check DC bus ripple level
• Reduce duty cycle
27 • Reduce motor load
• Check the output current stability. If unstable;
Check the motor map settings with motor nameplate (Pr 05.006, Pr 05.007, Pr 05.008, Pr 05.009, Pr 05.010,
Pr 05.011) – (All Modes)
Disable slip compensation (Pr 05.027 = 0) – (Open loop)
Disable dynamic V to F operation (Pr 05.013 = 0) - (Open loop)
Select fixed boost (Pr 05.014 = Fixed) – (Open loop)
Select high stability space vector modulation (Pr 05.020 = 1) – (Open loop)
Disconnect the load and complete a rotating auto-tune (Pr 05.012) – (RFC-A, RFC-S)
Auto-tune the rated speed value (Pr 05.016 = 1) – (RFC-A, RFC-S)
Reduce speed loop gains (Pr 03.010, Pr 03.011, Pr 03.012) – (RFC-A, RFC-S)
Add a speed feedback filter value (Pr 03.042) – (RFC-A, RFC-S)
Add a current demand filter (Pr 04.012) – (RFC-A, RFC-S)
Check encoder signals for noise with an oscilloscope (RFC-A, RFC-S)
Check encoder mechanical coupling - (RFC-A, RFC-S)
OHt Inverter Inverter over temperature based on thermal model
This trip indicates that an IGBT junction over-temperature has been detected based on a software thermal model.
Control system 00 1 00 Inverter thermal model gives {OHt Inverter} trip with sub-trip 0
21 • Reduce the selected drive switching frequency
• Ensure Auto-switching Frequency Change Disable (05.035) is set to OFF
• Decrease acceleration / deceleration rates
• Reduce motor load
• Check DC bus ripple
• Ensure all three input phases are present and balanced
OHt Power Power stage over temperature
This trip indicates that a power stage over-temperature has been detected. From the sub-trip ‘xxyzz’, the Thermistor
location is identified by ‘zz’.
Power system 01 0 zz Thermistor location in the drive defined by zz
• Force the heatsink fans to run at maximum speed
22
• Reduce the drive switching frequency
• Check the derating tables and confirm the drive is correctly sized for the application.
• Use a drive with larger current / power rating

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
OHt Rectifier Rectifier over temperature
The OHt Rectifier indicates that a rectifier over-temperature has been detected. The thermistor location can be identified
from the sub-trip number.
Power Power module Rectifier

zz Thermistor location defined by zz
system number number
Recommend actions:
102
• Check the motor and motor cable insulation with an insulation tester
• Fit an output line reactor or sinusoidal filter
• Force the heatsink fans to run at maximum speeds by setting Pr 06.045 = 11
OI ac Instantaneous output over current detected
The instantaneous drive output current has exceeded above VM_DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX.
Control Rectifier
00
system number
Instantaneous over-current trip when the measured AC current
00
Power exceeds VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MAX].
Power
module 0
system
number
• Acceleration/deceleration rate is too short
• If seen during auto-tune reduce the voltage boost
• Check for short circuit on the output cabling
• Check integrity of the motor insulation using an insulation tester
• Check feedback device wiring
• Check feedback device mechanical coupling
• Check feedback signals are free from noise
• Is motor cable length within limits for the frame size
• Reduce the values in the speed loop gain parameters - (Pr 03.010, 03.011, 03.012) or (Pr 03.013, 03.014, 03.015)
• Has the phase angle autotune been completed? (RFC-S mode only)
• Reduce the values in current loop gain parameters (RFC-A, RFC-S modes only)
OI Brake Braking IGBT over current detected: short circuit protection for the braking IGBT activated
The OI Brake trip indicates that over current has been detected in braking IGBT or braking IGBT protection has been
activated.
Power
Power
4 module 0 00 Braking IGBT instantaneous over-current trip
system
number
• Check brake resistor wiring
• Check braking resistor insulation
OI dc Power module over current detected from IGBT on state voltage monitoring
The OI dc trip indicates that the short circuit protection for the drive output stage has been activated.
109
• Disconnect the motor cable at the drive end and check the motor and cable insulation with an insulation tester
• Replace the drive

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
OI Snubber Snubber over-current detected
The OI Snubber trip indicates that an over-current condition has been detected in the rectifier snubber circuit. The reason
for the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Power
Power Rectifier
module 00 Rectifier snubber over-current trip detected.
system number
number
92
• Ensure the internal EMC Filter is installed
• Ensure the motor cable length does not exceed the maximum for selected switching frequency
• Check for supply voltage imbalance
• Check for supply disturbance such as notching from a DC drive
• Check the motor and motor cable insulation with an insulation tester
• Fit an output line reactor or sinusoidal filter
Option Disable Option module does not acknowledge during drive mode changeover
The Option Disable trip indicates that the option module did not acknowledge notifying the drive that communications with
the drive has been stopped during the drive mode changeover with in the allocated time.
215 Recommended trip:
• Reset the trip
• If the trip persists replace the option module
Out Phase Loss Output phase loss detected
The Out Phase Loss trip indicates that a phase loss has been detected at the drive output. If Output Phase Loss Detection
Enable (06.059) = 1 then output phase loss is detected as follows:
1. When the drive is enabled short pulses are applied to make sure each output phase is connected.
2. During running the output current is monitored and the output phase loss condition is detected if the current contains
98
more than TBD % negative phase sequence current for TBDs.
Recommended action:
• Check motor and drive connections
• To disable the trip set Output Phase Loss Detection Enable (06.059) = 0
Over Frequency Output frequency has exceeded the maximum frequency threshold
222 The Over Frequency trip indicates that the output frequency has exceeded 560 Hz for more than 4 ms.
Over Speed Motor speed has exceeded the over speed threshold
In open loop mode, if the Output Frequency (05.001) exceeds the threshold set in Over Speed Threshold (03.008) in either
direction an Over Speed trip is produced. In RFC-A and RFC-S mode, if the Speed Feedback (03.002) exceeds the Over
Speed Threshold in Pr 03.008 in either direction an Over Speed trip is produced. If Pr 03.008 is set to 0.0 the threshold is
then equal to 1.2 x the value set in Pr 01.006.
7 In RFC-A and RFC-S mode, if an SSI encoder is being used and Pr 03.047 is set to 0 an Over Speed trip will be produced
when the encoder passes through the boundary between its maximum position and zero.
• Reduce the Speed Controller Proportional Gain (03.010) to reduce the speed overshoot (RFC-A, RFC-S modes only)
• If an SSI encoder is being used set Pr 03.047 to 1

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
Over Volts DC bus voltage has exceeded the peak level or maximum continuous level for 15 seconds
The Over Volts trip indicates that the DC bus voltage has exceeded the VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX] or
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX] for 15 s. The trip threshold varies depending on voltage rating of the drive as shown below.
Voltage rating VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX] VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX]
200 415 410
400 830 815
575 990 970
690 1190 1175
Sub-trip Identification
Source xx y zz
2 Control 01: Instantaneous trip when the DC bus voltage exceeds
00 0
system VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX].
Control 02: Time delayed trip indicating that the DC bus voltage is above
00 0
system VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX].
Power Power module 00: Instantaneous trip when the DC bus voltage exceeds
0
system number VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX].
• Increase deceleration ramp (Pr 00.004)
• Decrease the braking resistor value (staying above the minimum value)
• Check nominal AC supply level
• Check for supply disturbances which could cause the DC bus to rise
• Check motor insulation using a insulation tester
Phase Loss Supply phase loss
The Phase Loss trip indicates that the drive has detected an input phase loss or large supply imbalance. The drive will
attempt to stop the motor before this trip is initiated. If the motor cannot be stopped in 10 seconds the trip occurs
immediately. The Phase Loss trip works by monitoring the ripple voltage on the DC bus of the drive, if the DC bus ripple
exceeds the threshold, the drive will trip on Phase Loss. Potential causes of the DC bus ripple are input phase loss, Large
supply impedance and severe output current instability.
Source xx y zz
00: Phase loss detected based on control system feedback. The drive
Control
00 0 attempts to stop the drive before tripping unless bit 2 of Action On Trip
system
Detection (10.037) is set to one.
Power
00: Phase loss has been detected by the rectifier module
system
Power module Rectifier
32 01: Mains loss has been detected by the rectifier module in a multi-power
Control number number
module system, where this must be treated as a phase loss condition to
system
prevent damage to the drive.
Input phase loss detection can be disabled when the drive is required to operate from the DC supply or from a single phase
supply in Input Phase Loss Detection Mode (06.047).
• Check the AC supply voltage balance and level at full load
• Check the DC bus ripple level with an isolated oscilloscope
• Check the output current stability
• Reduce the duty cycle
• Reduce the motor load
• Disable the phase loss detection, set Pr 06.047 to 2.

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
Power Comms Communication has been lost / errors detected between power, control and rectifier modules
The Power Comms trip is initiated if there is no communications between power, control or the rectifier module or if
excessive communication errors have been detected. The reason for the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Source xx y zz
01: No communications between the control system and the power
system
00 0
90 Control 02: Excessive communication errors between the control system and
system power system
Power module Rectifier
00: Excessive communications errors detected by the rectifier module
number number
Power Data Power system configuration data error
The Power Data trip indicates that there is an error in the configuration data stored in the power system.
Control
00 0 01 No data was obtained from the power board.
system
Control
00 0 02 There is no data table in node 1.
system
Control The power system data table is bigger than the space available in
00 0 03
system the control pod to store it.
Control
00 0 04 The size of the table given in the table is incorrect.
system
Control
00 0 05 Table CRC error.
system
220 Control The version number of the generator software that produced the
00 0 06
system table is too low.
Control The power data table version does not match the power board
00 0 07
system hardware identifier
Power
Power The power data table used internally by the power module has an
module 0 00
system error.
number
Power
Power The power data table that is uploaded to the control system on
module 0 01
system power up has an error.
number
Power
Power The power data table used internally by the power module does
module 0 02
system not match the hardware identification of the power module.
number
Power Down Save Power down save error
The Power Down Save trip indicates that an error has been detected in the power down save parameters saved in non-
volatile memory.
37
• Perform a 1001 save in Pr mm.000 to ensure that the trip doesn’t occur the next time the drive is powered up.
PSU Internal power supply fault
The PSU trip indicates that one or more internal power supply rails are outside limits or overloaded.
Control
00 0
system
00 Internal power supply overload.
Power Rectifier
5 Power module number
system number
• Remove any option modules and perform a reset
• Remove encoder connection and perform a reset
• Hardware fault within the drive – return the drive to the supplier

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
PSU 24V 24V internal power supply overload
The total user load of the drive and option modules has exceeded the internal 24 V power supply limit. The user load
consists of the drive digital outputs and main encoder supply.
9
• Reduce the load and reset
• Provide an external 24 V power supply on control terminal 2
• Remove all option modules
Rating Mismatch Power stage recognition: Multi module voltage or current rating mismatch
The Rating Mismatch trip indicates that there is a voltage rating or current rating mismatch in a multi-module drive system.
This trip is only applicable to modular drives that are connected in parallel. A mixture of power modules with different
voltage or current ratings within the same multi-module drive system is not allowed and will cause a Rating Mismatch trip.
223
Recommended action:
• Ensure that all modules in a multi-modular drive system are of the same frame size and rating (voltage and current)
Reserved Reserved trips
These trip numbers are reserved trip numbers for future use. These trips should not be used by the user application
programs.
01 Trip Number Description

94 -95 01 Reserved resettable trip
103 – 108 94 -95 Reserved resettable trip
170 – 173
228 - 247 103 - 108 Reserved resettable trip
170 - 173 Reserved resettable trip
228 - 247 Reserved non-resettable trip
Resistance Measured resistance has exceeded the parameter range

The Resistance trip indicates that the measured stator resistance during an auto-tune test has exceeded the maximum
possible value of Stator Resistance (05.017).
The stationary auto-tune is initiated using the auto-tune function (Pr 05.012) or in open loop vector mode (Pr 05.014) on the
first run command after power up in mode 4 (Ur_I) or on every run command in modes 0 (Ur_S) or 3 (Ur_Auto). This trip
can occur if the motor is very small in comparison to the rating of the drive.
33
• Check the motor cable / connections
• Check the integrity of the motor stator winding using a insulation tester
• Check the motor phase to phase resistance at the drive terminals
• Check the motor phase to phase resistance at the motor terminals
• Ensure the stator resistance of the motor falls within the range of the drive model
• Select fixed boost mode (Pr 05.014 = Fixed) and verify the output current waveforms with an oscilloscope
• Replace the motor
Slot4 Different Ethernet interface in slot 4 has changed
The Slot4 Different trip indicates that the Ethernet interface in slot 4 has changed / not found. The reason for the trip can be
identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 No module was installed previously
2 A module with the same identifier is installed, but the set-up menu for this option slot has been
changed, and so default parameters have been loaded for this menu.
3 A module with the same identifier is installed, but the applications menu for this option slot has been
254 changed, and so default parameters have been loaded for this menu.
4 A module with the same identifier is installed, but the set-up and applications menu for this option slot
have been changed, and so default parameters have been loaded for these menus.
>99 Shows the identifier of the module previously installed.
• To confirm that the parameter changes detected is acceptable, reset the trip and perform a parameter save to ensure
that the trip doesn't occur the next time the drive is powered up.
• If the trip persists - Contact the supplier of the drive.

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
Slot4 Error Ethernet interface in slot 4 has detected a fault
The Slot4 Error trip indicates that the Ethernet interface in slot 4 on the drive has detected an error. The reason for the trip
can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Trip string Description

100 Link Loss Network link has been lost
101 E/IP Timeout An EtherNet/IP RPI timeout trip has occurred
102 E/IP Read Param Invalid read consistency parameter
103 E/IP Write Param Invalid write consistency parameter
104 E/IP Fault An unexpected EtherNet/IP error has occurred
105 Modbus Timeout The Modbus connection has timed out
106 DA-RT Timeout DA-RX Rx link has timeout
107 DA-RT Rx Late Rx data was received late
108 INIT Switch
109 INIT PTP
110 INIT DA-RT
111 INIT Modbus
112 INIT SMTP
113 INIT EtherNet/IP
114 INIT TCP/IP
115 Ethernet Failure
200 Software Fault Software Fault
201 BG Overrun Background task overrun
202 Firmware Invalid Firmware is not compatible for the hardware version
203 Drive Unknown Unknown drive type
204 Drive Unsupported Unsupported drive type
252
205 Mode Unknown Unknown drive mode
206 Mode Unsupported Unsupported drive mode
207 FLASH Error Corrupted Non-volatile FLASH
208 Database Init Database initialization error
209 File System Init File system initialization error
210 Mem Allocation Memory allocation error
211 Filesystem Error File system error
212 Config Save Configuration file save error
213 Over Temperature Option module over temperature
214 Drive Timeout The drive has not responded within watchdog period
215 eCMP Comms Error eCMP communication failure
216 TO eCMP Slot1 eCMP communication to slot 1 timeout
220 I/O Overload Digital output current demand too high
221 Factory Settings Missing factory settings
222 Functional Test Functional test failure
223 Config Restore Configuration file restore error
224 Self Test Error Power on self test error
225 Runtime Config Runtime configuration error
• Identify the reason for the trip from the trip string or from sub-trip number and resolve the error.
• Reset the trip, If the trip persists, Hardware fault - Contact the supplier of the drive.

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
Slot4 HF Ethernet interface in slot 4 hardware fault
The Slot4 HF trip indicates that the Ethernet interface in slot 4 on the drive has detected an error. The reason for the error
Sub-trip Reason
1 The module category cannot be identified
2 All the required customized menu table information has not been supplied or the tables supplied are corrupt
3 There is insufficient memory available to allocate the comms buffers for this module
4 The module has not indicated that it is running correctly during drive power-up
250
5 Module has been removed after power-up or it has stopped working
6 The module has not indicated that it has stopped accessing drive parameters during a drive mode change
7 The module has failed to acknowledge that a request has been made to reset the drive processor
8 The drive failed to correctly read the menu table from the module during drive power up
9 The drive failed to upload menu tables from the module and timed out (5 s)
Slot4 Not Fitted Ethernet interface in slot 4 has been removed
The Slot4 Not Fitted trip indicates that the Ethernet interface in slot 4 on the drive has been removed since the last power-
up.
253
Slot4 Watchdog Ethernet interface watchdog service error
The Slot4 Watchdog trip indicates that the Ethernet interface installed in slot 4 has started the option watchdog function and
then failed to service the watchdog correctly.
251
Slot App Menu Application menu Customization conflict error
The Slot App Menu trip indicates that more than one option slot has requested to customize the application menus 18, 19
and 20. The sub-trip number indicates which option slot has been allowed to customize the menus.
• Ensure that only one of the Application modules is configured to customize the application menus 18, 19 and 20
SlotX Different Option module in option slot X has changed
The SlotX Different trip indicates that the option module in option slot X on the drive is a different type to that installed when
parameters were last saved on the drive. The reason for the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 No module was installed previously
2 A module with the same identifier is installed, but the set-up menu for this option slot has been
changed, and so default parameters have been loaded for this menu.
204 A module with the same identifier is installed, but the applications menu for this option slot has been
3
209 changed, and so default parameters have been loaded for this menu.
214 A module with the same identifier is installed, but the set-up and applications menu for this option slot
4
have been changed, and so default parameters have been loaded for these menus.
>99 Shows the identifier of the module previously installed.
• Turn off the power, ensure the correct option modules are installed in the correct option slots and re-apply the power.
• Confirm that the currently installed option module is correct, ensure option module parameters are set correctly and
perform a user save in Pr mm.000.
SlotX Error Option module in option slot X has detected a fault
The SlotX Error trip indicates that the option module in option slot X on the drive has detected an error. The reason for the
202 error can be identified by the sub-trip number.
207
212
• See relevant Option Module User Guide for details of the trip

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
SlotX HF Option module X hardware fault
The SlotX HF trip indicates that the option module in option slot X on the drive has indicated a hardware fault. The possible
causes of the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 The module category cannot be identified
2 All the required customized menu table information has not been supplied or the tables supplied are corrupt
3 There is insufficient memory available to allocate the comms buffers for this module
4 The module has not indicated that it is running correctly during drive power-up
200 5 Module has been removed after power-up or it has stopped working
205
210 6 The module has not indicated that it has stopped accessing drive parameters during a drive mode change
7 The module has failed to acknowledge that a request has been made to reset the drive processor
8 The drive failed to correctly read the menu table from the module during drive power up
9 The drive failed to upload menu tables from the module and timed out (5 s)
• Ensure the option module is installed correctly
• Replace the option module
• Replace the drive
SlotX Not Fitted Option module in option slot X has been removed
The SlotX Not Fitted trip indicates that the option module in option slot X on the drive has been removed since the last
power up.
203
208
213 • Ensure the option module is installed correctly.
• Re-install the option module.
• To confirm that the removed option module is no longer required perform a save function in Pr mm.000.
SlotX Watchdog Option module watchdog function service error
The SlotX Watchdog trip indicates that the option module installed in Slot X has started the option watchdog function and
201 then failed to service the watchdog correctly.
206
211
• Replace the option module
Soft Start Soft start relay failed to close, soft start monitor failed
The Soft Start trip indicates that the soft start relay in the drive failed to close or the soft start monitoring circuit has failed.
Stored HF Hardware trip has occurred during last power down
The Stored HF trip indicates that a hardware trip (HF01 –HF17) has occurred and the drive has been power cycled. The
sub-trip number identifies the HF trip i.e. stored HF.17.
221
• Enter 1299 in Pr mm.000 and press reset to clear the trip

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
Sub-array RAM RAM allocation error
The Sub-array RAM indicates that an option module, derivative image or user program image has requested more
parameter RAM than is allowed. The RAM allocation is checked in order of resulting sub-trip numbers, and so the failure
with the highest sub-trip number is given. The sub-trip is calculated as (parameter size) + (parameter type) + sub-array
number.
Parameter size Value Parameter type Value
1 bit 1000 Volatile 0
8 bit 2000 User save 100
16 bit 3000 Power-down save 200
32 bit 4000
64 bit 5000
227 Sub-array Menus Value

Applications menus 18-20 1
Derivative image 29 2
User program image 30 3
Option slot 1 set-up 15 4
Option slot 1 applications 25 5
Temp Feedback Internal thermistor has failed

The Temp Feedback trip indicates that an internal thermistor has failed. The thermistor location can be identified by the
sub-trip number.
Source xx y zz
Power system Power module number 0 Always zero
218
Power system Power module number Rectifier number Always zero
Th Brake Res Brake resistor over temperature
The Th Brake Res is initiated, If hardware based braking resistor thermal monitoring is connected and the resistor
overheats. If the braking resistor is not used then this trip must be disabled with bit 3 of Action On Trip Detection (10.037) to
prevent this trip.
• Check brake resistor wiring
• Check braking resistor insulation
Th Short Circuit Motor thermistor short circuit
The Th Short Circuit trip indicates that the motor thermistor connected to terminal 8 (analog input 3) on the control
connections or terminal 15 on the encoder terminal (15-way D-type connector) is short circuit or low impedance. The cause
of the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 P1 Thermistor Short Circuit Detect (03.123) = 1 and the resistance of the thermistor connected to the
25 drive P1 position feedback interface is less than 50 Ω.
2 Analog Input 3 Mode (07.015) = 7 and the resistance of the thermistor connected to analog input 3 is
less than 50 Ω.
• Check thermistor continuity
• Replace motor / motor thermistor

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
Thermistor Motor thermistor over-temperature
The Thermistor trip indicates that the motor thermistor connected to terminal 8 (analog input 3) on the control connections
or terminal 15 on the encoder terminal (15 way D-type connector) has indicated a motor over temperature. The cause of the
trip can be identified by the sub-trip number
Sub-trip Reason
24 1 Trip initiated from P1 position feedback interface

2 Trip initiated from analog input 3
• Check motor temperature
• Check thermistor continuity
Undefined Drive has tripped and the cause of the trip is Undefined
The Undefined trip indicates that the power system has generated but did not identify the trip the power system. The cause
of the trip is unknown.
110
• Hardware fault – return the drive to the supplier
User 24V User 24 V supply is not present on control terminals (1,2)
A User 24 V trip is initiated, if User Supply Select (Pr 06.072) is set to 1 or Low Under Voltage Threshold Select (06.067) =
1 and no user 24 V supply is present on control terminals 1 and 2.
91
• Ensure the user 24 V supply is present on control terminals 1 (0 V) and 2 (24 V)

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
User Program On board user program error
The User Program trip indicates that an error has been detected in the onboard user program image. The reason for the trip
Sub-trip Reason Comments
1 Divide by zero
2 Undefined trip
Attempted fast parameter access set-up with

3
non-existent parameter
4 Attempted access to non-existent parameter
5 Attempted write to read-only parameter
6 Attempted and over-range write
7 Attempted read from write-only parameter

The image has failed because either its CRC Occurs when the drive powers-up or the image is
30
is incorrect, or there are less than 6 bytes in programmed. The image tasks will not run
The image requires more RAM for heap and
31 As 30
stack than can be provided by the drive.
The image requires an OS function call that is
32 As 30
higher than the maximum allowed
33 The ID code within the image is not valid As 30
The derivative image has been changed for
34 As 30
an image with a different derivative number.
The timed task has not completed in time and
40
has been suspended
Undefined function called, i.e. a function in the
249 41 As 40
host system vector table that has not been
Core menu customization table CRC check
51 As 30
failed
52 Customized menu table CRC check failed As 30
Occurs when the drive powers-up or the image is
53 Customized menu table changed
programmed and the table has changed. Defaults are
The option module installed in slot 1 is not
61 As 30
allowed with the derivative image
62 As 30
63 As 30
64 As 30
An option module that is required by the
70 As 30
derivative image is not installed in any slot.
An option module specifically required to be
71 As 30
installed in slot 1 not present
72 As 30
73 As 30
74 As 30
80 Image is not compatible with the control board Initiated from within the image code
Image is not compatible with the control board
81 As 80
serial number

Issue Number: 3
Trip Diagnosis
User Prog Trip Trip generated by an onboard user program
This trip can be initiated from within an onboard user program using a function call which defines the sub-trip number.
• Check the user program
User Save User Save error / not completed
The User Save trip indicates that an error has been detected in the user save parameters saved in non-volatile memory.
For example, following a user save command, If the power to the drive was removed when the user parameters were being
saved.
36
• Perform a user save in Pr mm.000 to ensure that the trip doesn’t occur the next time the drive is powered up.
• Ensure that the drive has enough time to complete the save before removing the power to the drive.
User Trip User generated trip
These trips are not generated by the drive and are to be used by the user to trip the drive through an application program.
40 -89
112 -159
• Check the user program
Volts Range Supply voltage out of range detected in Regen mode
The Volts Range trip is initiated, if the Regen Minimum Voltage (03.026) is set to a non-zero value and the supply voltage is
outside the range defined by Regen Maximum Voltage (03.027) and Regen Minimum Voltage (03.026) for more than 100
ms.
169 • Ensure the supply voltage is operating within the drive specification.
• Ensure Pr 03.026 and Pr 03.027 are set correctly
• Check the supply voltage waveform using an oscilloscope
• Reduce the level of supply disturbance
• Set Maximum Voltage (03.027) to zero to disable the trip.
Watchdog Control word watchdog has timed out
The Watchdog trip indicates that the control word has been enabled and has timed out
30

Issue Number: 3
Table 13-5 Serial communications look up table

No Trip No Trip No Trip
1 Reserved 001 92 OI Snubber 198 Encoder 10
2 Over Volts 93 Inductor Too Hot 199 Destination
3 OI ac 94 - 95 Reserved 93 -95 200 Slot1 HF
4 OI Brake 96 User Prog Trip 201 Slot1 Watchdog
5 PSU 97 Data Changing 202 Slot1 Error
6 External Trip 98 Out Phase Loss 203 Slot1 Not installed
7 Over Speed 99 CAM 204 Slot1 Different
8 Inductance 100 Reset 205 Slot2 HF
9 PSU24 101 OHt Brake 206 Slot2 Watchdog
10 Th Brake Res 102 OHt Rectifier 207 Slot2 Error
11 Autotune 1 103 - 108 Reserved 103 - 108 208 Slot2 Not installed
12 Autotune 2 109 OI dc 209 Slot2 Different
13 Autotune 3 110 Undefined 210 Slot3 HF
14 Autotune 4 111 Configuration 211 Slot3 Watchdog
15 Autotune 5 112 - 167 User Trip 112 - 167 212 Slot3 Error
16 Autotune 6 168 Frequency Range 213 Slot3 Not installed
17 Autotune 7 169 Voltage Range 214 Slot3 Different
18 Autotune Stopped 170 - 173 Reserved 170 - 173 215 Option Disable
19 Brake R Too Hot 174 Card Slot 216 Slot App Menu
20 Motor Too Hot 175 Card Product 217 App Menu Changed
21 OHt Inverter 176 Name Plate 218 Temp Feedback
22 OHt Power 177 Card Boot 219 An Output Calib
23 OHt Control 178 Card Busy 220 Power Data
24 Thermistor 179 Card Data Exists 221 Stored HF
25 Th Short Circuit 180 Card Option 222 Over Frequency
26 I/O Overload 181 Card Read Only 223 Rating Mismatch
27 OHt dc bus 182 Card Error 224 Drive Size
28 An Input Loss 1 183 Card No Data 225 Current Offset
29 An Input Loss 2 184 Card Full 226 Soft Start
30 Watchdog 185 Card Access 227 Sub-array RAM
31 EEPROM Fail 186 Card Rating 228 - 247 Reserved 228 - 247
32 Phase Loss 187 Card Drive Mode 248 Derivative Image
33 Resistance 188 Card Compare 249 User Program
34 Keypad Mode 189 Encoder 1 250 Slot4 HF
35 Control Word 190 Encoder 2 251 Slot4 Watchdog
36 User Save 191 Encoder 3 252 Slot4 Error
37 Power Down Save 192 Encoder 4 253 Slot4 Not installed
38 Low Load 193 Encoder 5 254 Slot4 Different
39 Line Sync 194 Encoder 6 255 Reset Logs
40 -89 User Trip 40 - 89 195 Encoder 7
90 Power Comms 196 Encoder 8
91 User 24V 197 Encoder 9

Issue Number: 3
The trips can be grouped into the following categories. It should be noted that a trip can only occur when the drive is not tripped or is already tripped
but with a trip with a lower priority number.
Table 13-6 Trip categories
Priority Category Trips Comments
HF01, HF02, HF03, HF04,

HF05, HF06, HF07, HF08, These indicate internal problems and cannot be reset. All drive features
1 Internal faults HF09, HF10, HF11, HF12, are inactive after any of these trips occur. If an KI-Keypad is installed it will
HF13, HF14, HF15, HF16, show the trip, but the keypad will not function.
HF17, HF18, HF19, HF20
This trip cannot be cleared unless 1299 is entered into Parameter

1 Stored HF trip {Stored HF}
(mm.000) and a reset is initiated.
Trip numbers 218 to 247,

2 Non-resettable trips {Slot1 HF}, {Slot2 HF}, These trips cannot be reset.
{Slot3 HF} or {Slot4 HF}
This can only be reset if Parameter mm.000 is set to 1233 or 1244, or if

3 Volatile memory failure {EEPROM Fail}
Load Defaults (11.043) is set to a non-zero value.
Trip numbers 174, 175

4 NV Media Card trips These trips are priority 5 during power-up.
and 177 to 188
Internal 24V and position

{PSU 24} and
4 feedback interface power These trips can override {Encoder 2} to {Encoder 6} trips.
{Encoder 1}
supply
Trips with extended reset {OI ac}, {OI Brake}, and

5 These trips cannot be reset until 10 s after the trip was initiated.
times OI dc}
The drive will attempt to stop the motor before tripping if a {Phase Loss}.
Phase loss and d.c. link {Phase Loss} and 000 trip occurs unless this feature has been disabled (see Action On Trip
5
power circuit protection {Oht dc bus} Detection (10.037). The drive will always attempt to stop the motor before
tripping if an {Oht dc bus} occurs.
5 Standard trips All other trips
13.5 Internal / Hardware trips

Trips {HF01} to {HF20} are internal faults that do not have trip numbers. If one of these trips occurs, the main drive processor has detected an
irrecoverable error. All drive functions are stopped and the trip message will be displayed on the drive keypad. If a non permanent trip occurs this may
be reset by power cycling the drive. On power up after it has been power cycled the drive will trip on Stored HF. Enter 1299 in mm.000 to clear the
Stored HF trip.

Issue Number: 3
13.6 Alarm indications Table 13-9 Option module and NV Media Card and other status
indications at power-up
In any mode, an alarm is an indication given on the display by alternating
the alarm string with the drive status string on the first row and showing First row
Second row string Status
the alarm symbol in the last character in the first row. If an action is not string
taken to eliminate any alarm except "Auto Tune and Limit Switch" the
drive may eventually trip. Alarms are not displayed when a parameter is Booting Parameters Parameters are being loaded
being edited, but the user will still see the alarm character on the upper
row. Drive parameters are being loaded from a NV Media Card
Table 13-7 Alarm indications Booting User Program User program being loaded
Alarm string Description
User program is being loaded from a NV Media Card to the drive
Brake resistor overload. Braking Resistor Thermal
Brake Resistor Accumulator (10.039) in the drive has reached 75 % Option
Booting User program being loaded
of the value at which the drive will trip. Program
Motor Protection Accumulator (04.019) in the drive User program is being loaded from a NV Media Card to the option
Motor Overload has reached 75 % of the value at which the drive module in slot X
will trip and the load on the drive is >100 %. Data being written to NV Media
Writing To NV Card
Regen inductor overload. Inductor Protection Card
Accumulator (04.019) in the drive has reached 75 % Data is being written to a NV Media Card to ensure that its copy of the
Ind Overload
of the value at which the drive will trip and the load drive parameters is correct because the drive is in Auto or Boot mode
on the drive is >100 %.
Drive over temperature. Percentage Of Drive Waiting For Power System Waiting for power stage
Drive Overload Thermal Trip Level (07.036) in the drive is greater The drive is waiting for the processor in the power stage to respond
than 90 %. after power-up
The autotune procedure has been initialized and an
Auto Tune Waiting For Options Waiting for an option module
autotune in progress.
Limit switch active. Indicates that a limit switch is
Limit Switch The drive is waiting for the Options Modules to respond after power-up
active and that is causing the motor to be stopped.
Uploading
Options Loading parameter database
From
13.7 Status indications At power-up it may be necessary to update the parameter database
Table 13-8 Status indications held by the drive because an option module has changed or because
an applications module has requested changes to the parameter
Drive
Upper row structure. This may involve data transfer between the drive an option
Description output
string modules. During this period ‘Uploading From Options’ is displayed
stage
The drive is inhibited and cannot be run.
Inhibit
The SAFE TORQUE OFF signal is not
Disabled 13.8 Displaying the trip history
applied to SAFE TORQUE OFF terminals
or Pr 06.015 is set to 0 The drive retains a log of the last ten trips that have occurred. Trip 0
(10.020) to Trip 9 (10.029) store the most recent 10 trips that have
The drive is ready to run. The drive enable
occurred where Trip 0 (10.020) is the most recent and Trip 9 (10.029) is
Ready is active, but the drive inverter is not active Disabled
the oldest. When a new trip occurs it is written to Trip 0 (10.020) and all
because the final drive run is not active
the other trips move down the log, with oldest being lost. The date and
Stop The drive is stopped / holding zero speed. Enabled time when each trip occurs are also stored in the date and time log, i.e.
Run The drive is active and running Enabled Trip 0 Date (10.041) to Trip 9 Time (10.060). The date and time are taken
The drive is enabled in Regen mode and is from Date (06.016) and Time (06.017). Some trips have sub-trip
Scan Enabled
trying to synchronize to the supply numbers which give more detail about the reason for the trip. If a trip has
Supply Loss Supply loss condition has been detected Enabled a sub-trip number its value is stored in the sub-trip log, i.e. Trip 0 Sub-trip
Number (10.070) to Trip 9 Sub-trip Number (10.079). If the trip does not
The motor is being decelerated to zero
have a sub-trip number then zero is stored in the sub-trip log.
Deceleration speed / frequency because the final drive Enabled
run has been deactivated. If any parameter between Pr 10.020 and Pr 10.029 inclusive is read by
dc injection The drive is applying dc injection braking Enabled serial communication, then the trip number in Table 13-4 is the value
transmitted.
Positioning / position control is active
Position Enabled
during an orientation stop NOTE
The drive has tripped and no longer The trip logs can be reset by writing a vale of 255 in Pr 10.038.
Trip controlling the motor. The trip code Disabled
appears in the lower display
The regen unit is enabled and
Active Enabled
synchronized to the supply
Under The drive is in the under voltage state
Disabled
Voltage either in low voltage or high voltage mode

Issue Number: 3
13.9 Behaviour of the drive when tripped

If the drive trips, the output of the drive is disabled so the load coasts to a
stop. If any trip occurs the following read only parameters are frozen until
the trip is cleared. This is to help in diagnose the cause of the trip.
Parameter Description
01.001 Frequency / speed reference
01.002 Pre-skip filter reference
01.003 Pre-ramp reference
02.001 Post-ramp reference
03.001 Frequency slaving demand / Final speed ref
03.002 Speed feedback
03.003 Speed error
03.004 Speed controller output
04.001 Current magnitude
04.002 Active current
04.017 Reactive current
05.001 Output frequency
05.002 Output voltage
05.003 Power
05.005 DC bus voltage
If the parameters are not required to be frozen then this can be disabled
by setting bit 4 of Pr 10.037.

Issue Number: 3
14 UL listing information 14.6 Motor overload protection

• The drives are installed with solid state motor overload protection.
14.1 General • The default overload protection level is less than 150 % of full load
rated current for open loop operation.
Drive sizes 3, 4 and 6 have been assessed to meet both UL and cUL
• The default overload protection level is less than 175 % of full load
requirements.
rated current for closed loop vector or servo mode operation.
UL listings can be viewed online at www.UL.com. The UL file number is • In order for the motor protection to work correctly, the motor rated
E171230. current must be entered into Pr 00.046 or Pr 05.007
• The protection level may be adjusted below 150 % if required. See
14.2 Mounting section 8.3 Current limits on page 127.
Drives can be installed in the following configurations:
• Standard or surface mounted. This is described in section
14.7 Motor overspeed protection
3.5.1 Surface mounting on page 30. The drive is installed with solid state motor overspeed protection.
• Through-hole mounted. This is described in section 3.5.2 Through- However, this feature does not provide the level of protection provided
panel mounting on page 33. by an independent, high-integrity overspeed protection device.
• Tile mounted. The drive is mounted sideways with the side panel
against the mounting surface. This configuration reduces the overall 14.8 Thermal memory retention
depth of the installation. A Tile mounting kit is available. See UL Drives incorporate thermal memory retention that complies fully with the
listed accessories. requirements of UL508C.
• Bookcase mounted. Drives are mounted side by side with no space
The drive is provided with motor load and speed sensitive overload
between them. This configuration minimises the overall width of the
installation. protection with thermal memory retention that complies with the US
National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) clause 430.126, and Underwriters
Laboratories Standard UL508C, clause 20.1.11 (a). The purpose of this
14.3 Environment protection is to protect both drive and motor from dangerous overheating
in the event of repeated overload or failure to start, even if the power to
Drives are able to meet the following UL/ NEMA environmental ratings: the drive is removed between overload events.
• Type 1. The drive must either be installed with a UL Type 1 kit or be For a full explanation of the thermal protection system, refer to section
installed in a Type 1 enclosure. 8.4 Motor thermal protection on page 127.
• Type 12. The drive must be installed in a Type 12 enclosure. In order to comply with UL requirements for thermal memory retention it
• If the drive is through-hole mounted inside a Type 12 enclosure, then is necessary to set the Thermal Protection Mode (Pr 04.016) to zero;
both the High-IP insert and the Type 12 sealing kit must be installed and the Low Speed Protection Mode (Pr 04.025) must be set to 1 if the
in order to provide protection against ingress of dirt and water. See drive is operated in Heavy Duty mode.
section 3.9 Enclosing standard drive for high environmental Alternatively, an external thermal sensor or switch may be used as a
protection on page 40. means of motor and drive overload protection that complies with the
• The remote keypad is rated to both UL Type 1 and UL Type 12 requirements of UL508C, clause 20.1.11 (b). This protection method is
• Drives must be installed in a pollution degree 2 environment or particularly recommended where independent forced cooling of the
better. motor is used, because of the risk of overheating if the cooling is lost.
14.4 Electrical installation External thermal sensor

The drive is provided with a means to accept and act upon a signal from
The following precautions must be observed when installing drives to UL
a thermal sensor or switch imbedded in the motor or from an external
requirements:
• Drives are rated for use at 40 °C, 50 °C and 55 °C ambient protective relay. Refer to section 4.14.2 Control terminal specification on
page 79.
temperature except where indicated otherwise in Table 12-1 to Table
12-3. Size 4, 400 V variant drives are rated to 35 °C, 40 °C and
45 °C.
14.9 Electrical Ratings
• For operation up to 50 °C, the temperature rating of the power • Drives are listed for connection to an AC supply capable of delivering
cables must be at least 60 °C. no more than 100 kA symmetrical amperes. See Table 4-3.
• For operation up to 55 °C, the temperature rating of the power • Drives are listed for Over Voltage CAT III.
cables must be at least 75 °C. • Power and current ratings are given in Table 12-1 to Table 12-3.
• If the drive control stage is powered from an external power supply • Fuse and circuit breaker ratings are given in Table 4-4 to Table 4-7
(+24 V), the power supply must be listed or recognized to UL class 2 • Unless indicated otherwise in Table 4-4 to Table 4-7, fuses may be
with appropriate fusing, see section 4.5 24 Vdc supply on page 57. any UL listed Class J or CC with a voltage rating of at least 600 VAC.
• Ground connections must use UL listed closed loop (ring) terminals. • Unless indicated otherwise in Table 4-4 to Table 4-7, circuit breakers
may be any UL listed type, category control number: DIVQ or
14.5 UL listed accessories DIVQ7, with a voltage rating of at least 600 Vac.
The following options are UL listed
• KI-Keypad • Tile mounting kit
• KI-Keypad RTC • Metal conduit entry plate
• KI-Keypad Advanced • Type 12 sealing kit
• SI-PROFIBUS • SD card kit
• SI-DeviceNet • UL Type 1 kit
• SI-CANopen
• SI-Applications Plus
• SI-Register

Issue Number: 3
Index
Symbols E
+24V external input .................................................... 57, 79, 80 Electrical safety .......................................................................20
+24V user output ....................................................................79 Electrical terminals ..................................................................46
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) .......................21, 68, 244
Numerics EMC - Compliance with generic emission standards ..............74
0V common .............................................................................79 EMC - Variations in the wiring .................................................76
EMC filter dimensions (external, overall) ..............................245
A EMC filter torque settings (external) ......................................246
AC supply contactor ................................................................63 EMC filters (optional external) ...............................................245
AC supply requirements ..........................................................55 Emission ................................................................................244
Acceleration .................................................107, 108, 109, 110 EN61800-3:2004 (standard for power drive systems) .............74
Access ....................................................................................20 Enclosure ................................................................................38
Accuracy ...............................................................................236 Enclosure Layout ....................................................................38
Acoustic noise .......................................................................236 Enclosure sizing ......................................................................39
Advanced menus ....................................................................91 Encoder connections ........................................................ 73, 80
Advanced parameters ...........................................................136 Encoder feedback limits ........................................................128
Air-flow in a ventilated enclosure ............................................39 Encoder types .........................................................................81
Alarm .....................................................................................277 Environmental protection ........................................................20
Alarm Indications ..................................................................277 External EMC filter ..................................................................43
Altitude ..................................................................................235
Autotune ................................................................................119 F
Feedback device cable shielding ............................................73
B Field weakening (constant power) operation ........................128
Basic requirements ...............................................................102 Fire protection .........................................................................20
Braking ....................................................................................65 Fixed V/F mode .......................................................................14
Braking resistor values ..........................................................243 Fuse ratings ..........................................................................237
Fuse types ...............................................................................63
C
Cable clearances ....................................................................73 G
Cable lengths (maximum) .....................................................241 Getting Started ........................................................................88
Cable size ratings .................................................................237 Ground connections ......................................................... 63, 72
Cable types and lengths .........................................................63 Ground leakage .......................................................................68
Cautions ....................................................................................8 Ground terminals .....................................................................47
Control connections ................................................................78 Grounding bracket ...................................................................70
Control terminal specification ..................................................79 Grounding clamp .....................................................................69
Cooling ....................................................................................20
Cooling method .....................................................................235 H
Current limits .........................................................................127 Hazardous areas .....................................................................21
Current loop gains .................................................................125 Heatsink mounted braking resistor ..........................................65
Current ratings ......................................................................227 High speed operation ............................................................128
Humidity ................................................................................235
D
DC bus paralleling ...................................................................56 I
DC bus voltage .......................................................................65 Input current ratings ..............................................................237
Deceleration .......................................... 65, 107, 108, 109, 110 Input inductor calculation ........................................................56
Defaults (restoring parameter) ................................................93 Internal EMC filter ...................................................................70
Derating ................................................................................227 IP Rating (Ingress protection) ...............................................235
Destination parameter .............................................................78 Isolator switch .........................................................................76
Diagnostics ...........................................................................247 Items supplied with the drive ...................................................19
Digital I/O 1 .............................................................................79
Digital I/O 2 .............................................................................79 K
Digital Input 1 ..........................................................................79 Keypad and display - Installing / removing ....................... 28, 29
Digital Input 2 ..........................................................................79 Keypad operation ....................................................................88
Dimensions (overall) .............................................................236
Display ....................................................................................88 L
Display messages ...................................................................92 Line reactors .................................................................. 56, 235
Drive enable ............................................................................80
Drive features ..........................................................................15

www.controltechniques.com Issue Number: 3
M P
Maximum speed / frequency .................................................129 Parameter access level .......................................................... 93
Mechanical Installation ............................................................20 Parameter ranges ................................................................. 138
Menu 0 ....................................................................................91 Parameter security ................................................................. 93
Menu 01 - Frequency / speed reference ...............................146 Planning the installation .......................................................... 20
Menu 02 - Ramps ..................................................................150 Position feedback ................................................................. 102
Menu 03 - Slave frequency, speed feedback Position feedback module category parameters .................. 210
and speed control ............................................................153 Power ratings ......................................................... 67, 227, 242
Menu 04 - Torque and current control ...................................164 Power terminals ...................................................................... 47
Menu 05 - Motor control ........................................................168 Product information ................................................................ 10
Menu 06 - Sequencer and clock ...........................................174
Menu 07 - Analog I/O ............................................................178 Q
Menu 08 - Digital I/O .............................................................180 Quadratic V/F mode ............................................................... 14
Menu 09 - Programmable logic, motorized pot Quick start commissioning .................................................... 111
and binary sum ................................................................184 Quick start commissioning / Start-up .................................... 107
Menu 10 - Status and trips ....................................................190 Quick start connections ........................................................ 102
Menu 11 - General drive set-up .............................................192
Menu 12 - Threshold detectors and variable selectors .........194 R
Menu 13 - Position control ....................................................202 Ratings ............................................................................. 10, 59
Menu 14 - User PID controller ...............................................206 Reactor current ratings ................................................... 56, 235
Menu 18 - Application menu 1 ..............................................211 Relay contacts ........................................................................ 80
Menu 19 - Application menu 2 ..............................................212 Residual current device (RCD) ............................................... 68
Menu 20 - Application menu 3 ..............................................213 Resistances (minimum) .......................................................... 67
Menu 21 - Second motor parameters ....................................214 Resolution ............................................................................. 236
Menu 22 - Additional Menu 0 set-up .....................................216 RFC-A mode ........................................................................... 14
Menu structure ........................................................................90 RFC-S mode ........................................................................... 14
Minimum connections to get the motor running Routine maintenance .............................................................. 48
in any operating mode .....................................................103
Mode parameter ......................................................................78 S
Motor (running the motor) ......................................................102 SAFE TORQUE OFF .............................................................. 86
Motor cable - interruptions .......................................................76 SAFE TORQUE OFF/drive enable ......................................... 80
Motor isolator / disconnector-switch ........................................76 Safety Information .............................................................. 8, 20
Motor number of poles ..........................................................118 Saving parameters ................................................................. 93
Motor operation .......................................................................65 Sealed enclosure - sizing ....................................................... 39
Motor rated current ................................................................118 Serial communications connections ....................................... 77
Motor rated current (maximum) .............................................127 Serial communications look-up table .................................... 249
Motor rated frequency ...........................................................118 Serial communications port isolation ...................................... 77
Motor rated power factor .......................................................118 Single line descriptions ........................................................... 96
Motor rated speed .................................................................118 SMARTCARD operation ....................................................... 134
Motor rated voltage ...............................................................118 Solutions Module - Installing / removing ................................. 27
Motor requirements ...............................................................235 Speed feedback .................................................................... 102
Motor thermal protection .......................................................127 Speed loop gains ................................................. 123, 125, 126
Motor winding voltage .............................................................64 Speed range ......................................................................... 236
Multiple motors ........................................................................64 Start up time ......................................................................... 236
Starts per hour ...................................................................... 236
N Status ................................................................................... 277
NEMA rating ................................................................... 40, 235 Status Indications ................................................................. 277
Notes .........................................................................................8 Storage ................................................................................. 235
NV media card operation ......................................................130 Supply requirements ............................................................. 234
Supply types ........................................................................... 55
O Surface mounting the drive ..................................................... 30
Onboard PLC ........................................................................134 Surge immunity of control circuits - long cables and
Open loop mode ......................................................................14 connections outside a building ......................................... 76
Open loop vector mode ...........................................................14 Surge suppression for analog and bipolar inputs and outputs 77
Operating mode (changing) ........................................... 93, 102 Surge suppression for digital and unipolar inputs and outputs 77
Operating modes .....................................................................14 Switching frequency ..................................................... 128, 129
Optimization ..........................................................................118
Option Module .......................................................................210
Options ....................................................................................17
Output contactor ......................................................................65
Output frequency ...................................................................236

Issue Number: 3
T
Technical data .......................................................................227
Temperature .........................................................................235
Terminal block in the enclosure ..............................................76
Terminal cover removal ..........................................................21
Terminal sizes .........................................................................47
Thermal protection circuit for the braking resistor ...................67
Through-panel mounting the drive ..........................................33
Torque settings .............................................................. 48, 243
Trip ........................................................................................247
Trip History ............................................................................277
Trip Indications ......................................................................247
U
UL Listing Information ...........................................................279
User Security ..........................................................................94
V
Ventilation ...............................................................................38
Vibration ................................................................................236
Voltage mode ............................................................... 119, 120
W
Warnings ...................................................................................8
Weights .................................................................................237

www.controltechniques.com Issue Number: 3
0478-0002-03

UnidriveM702 UG Iss3 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UnidriveM702 UG Iss3 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

UnidriveM702 UG Iss3 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Guide

Part Number: 0478-0002-03

Copyright © May 2013 Control Techniques Ltd

7 Running the motor

9 NV media card operation

8 Optimization ...................................... 118

4 Unidrive M702 User Guide

11 Advanced parameters .......................136

12 Technical data ...................................227

Unidrive M702 User Guide 5

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), Limits,

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), Limits,

EN 61000-3-2:2006 Applicable where input current <16 A. No limits

6 Unidrive M702 User Guide

Unidrive M702 User Guide 7

1 Safety information 1.5 Access

1.6 Fire protection

1.7 Compliance with regulations

1.4 Environmental limits

8 Unidrive M702 User Guide

1.11 Electrical installation

Unidrive M702 User Guide 9

Common features (Unidrive M700, 701 and 702)

2.2 Model number

Unidrive M700 Reserved:

Frame Size: IP / NEMA Rating:

Voltage Rating: Brake Transistor:

Current Rating: Customer Code:

Drive Format: Documentation:

10 Unidrive M702 User Guide

Normal Duty Heavy Duty (default)

Motor total Motor total

15% 50% 100% Motor speed as a 50% 100% Motor speed as a

Unidrive M702 User Guide 11

03200066 8 1.5 2 8.8 6.6 9.9 13.2 1.1 1.5

03200106 12.7 3 3 13.9 10.6 15.9 21.2 2.2 3

04200137 18 4 5 19.8 13.7 26.2 27.4 3 3

Frame size 5 05200250 30 7.5 10 33 25 37.5 50 5.5 7.5

06200330 50 11 15 55 33 49.5 66 7.5 10

07200610 75 18.5 25 82.5 61 91.5 122 15 20

Frame size 7 07200750 94 22 30 103.4 75 112.5 150 18.5 25

07200830 117 30 40 128.7 83 124.5 166 22 30

08201160 149 37 50 163.9 116 174 232 30 40

Table 2-2 400 V drive ratings (380 V to 480 V ±10 %)

07400660 79 37 50 86.9 66 99 132 30 50

Frame size 7 07400770 94 45 60 103.4 77 115.5 154 37 60

07401000 112 55 75 123.2 100 150 200 45 75

08401340 155 75 100 170.5 134 201 268 55 100

12 Unidrive M702 User Guide

Table 2-3 575 V drive ratings (500 V to 575 V ±10 %)

Table 2-4 690 V drive ratings (500 V to 690 V ±10 %)

Unidrive M702 User Guide 13

2.3.1 Typical short term overload limits

2.4 Operating modes

Open loop vector mode

14 Unidrive M702 User Guide

2.5 Compatible position feedback devices

Unidrive M702 User Guide 15